Mitsubishi Electric GX Works2 Version 1 Owner's Manual

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Common)
-SW1DND-GXW2-E
-SW1DNC-GXW2-E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using this product.)
Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the
programmable controller system, refer to the User's Manual for the CPU module.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "
WARNING" and "
CAUTION".
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
death or severe injury..
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that the
CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[Design Instructions]
WARNING
● When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running
programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole
system always operates safely.
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as
a system.
[Security Precautions]
WARNING
● To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and the system
against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external
devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus
solutions.
[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]
CAUTION
● The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program
change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status changes such as forced input/output
operation and RUN-STOP switching, and remote control operation) must be executed after the manual has been
carefully read and the safety has been ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in Section 15.9 before use.
● The positioning test functions of OPR, JOG, inching or positioning data for QD75/LD75 positioning module must be
executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has
been ensured. Specially when executing the function on the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly since the
machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated. The operation failure may cause the
injury or machine damage.
A-1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident;
and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the
case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO
ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT
LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the
PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY
INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION
AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the
public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality
assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator,
Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and
Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other
applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.
Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in
one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific
applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe,
redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details,
please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.
(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and
system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
A-2
REVISIONS
Print date
Manual number*1
Revision
Jul. 2008
SH(NA)-080779ENG-A
First edition
Jan. 2009
SH(NA)-080779ENG-B
Model Addition
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, FX series
Addition
MANUALS, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6,
Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.8, Section 5.2, Section 12.8,
Section 13.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.6, Section 14.7, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.3,
Section 15.4, Section 17.1.2, Section 17.4.3, Section 17.4.4, Appendix 6
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.1.4,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4,
Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3.1, Section 3.3.4, Section 4.1.6, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.2.1,
Section 4.3, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.4.1, Section 4.5.2,
Section 4.5.3, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.4, Section 8.1.2,
Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.1.1,
Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 12.2, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.5, Section 13.1.1, Section 14.1, Section 14.3, Section 15.5.4, Section 16.1,
Section 16.3, Section 16.5, Section 17.4.1, Section 17.4.2, Section 18.3.2, Chapter 19,
Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 7, Appendix 8,
Appendix 9.3
Jul. 2009
SH(NA)-080779ENG-C
Model Addition
Q00J, Q00, Q01
Addition
Section 4.1.4, Section 7.2.4, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5,
Section 11.1.2, Section 12.9.3, Section 12.10, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.2,
Section 15.2.3, Section 16.5, Section 18.6.1, Chapter 19
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.8,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.6, Section 4.8,
Section 5.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.3, Section 7.3,
Section 7.4.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.3.1,
Section 10.3.6, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.9, Section 12.1,
Section 12.1.5, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11,
Section 14.2.2, Section 14.7, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 16.2, Section 16.4,
Section 17.2, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 20.2, Section 20.3,
Section 21.2, Section 22.2.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6,
Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9, Appendix 10
Modification
Section 4.1.4 to 4.1.7  Section 4.1.5 to 4.1.8, Section 4.6.4  Section 4.7,
Section 4.7 to 4.8  Section 4.8 to 4.9, Section 7.2.4 to 7.2.5  Section 7.2.5 to 7.2.6,
Section 10.2 to 10.3  Section 10.1 to 10.2, Section 11.1.2  Section 11.2.3,
Section 11.9.3 to 11.9.5  Section 11.9.4 to 11.9.6, Section 12.10  Section 12.11,
Section 14.2.3 to 14.2.4  Section 14.2.2 to 14.2.3, Section 15.1.1  Section 15.2,
Section 15.1.2  Section 15.4, Section 15.2 to 15.5  Section 16.1 to 16.4,
Chapter 16 to 17  Chapter 17 to 18, Chapter 18 to 19  Chapter 20 to 21,
Appendix 7  Appendix 6, Appendix 10  Appendix 8
Deletion
Section 3.3.5, Section 4.4.1
Oct. 2009
SH(NA)-080779ENG-D
Addition
Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 4.1.7, Section 6.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.3,
Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.2, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5,
Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.14, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10.1,
Appendix 12
A-3
Print date
Jan. 2010
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-E
Revision
Model Addition
L02, L26-BT
Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 3.3.4, Section 13.2, Section 16.6,
Section 18.4.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.7, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 14
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.7, Section 4.1.1,
Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.3, Section 4.5.1, Section 4.5.5,
Section 4.6, Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.3, Section 6.4, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.6,
Section 7.3, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3,
Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.5, Section 11.7, Section 11.8.1,
Section 11.8.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.2, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.2, Section 12.3,
Section 12.5, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.8.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2,
Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3,
Section 12.10.4, Section 12.11, Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.3.1,
Section 13.3.2, Section 13.3.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.7, Section 15.1,
Section 15.2, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.3, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.1, Section 16.4.2,
Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.4,
Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.2, Section 18.1.3, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4.1,
Section 18.4.3, Section 18.5, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6, Section 19.3,
Section 19.4.1, Section 19.4.2, Section 19.5.3, Section 19.6, Section 19.8, Section 21.1,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5,
Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7.1, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6,
Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2,
Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Apr. 2010
SH(NA)-080779ENG-F
Model Addition
Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, LJ72GF15-T2
Addition
Section 4.1.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 12.12, Section 18.1.4,
Section 18.4, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 10.8
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1,
Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.8,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2, Section 3.4, Section 3.5, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.6,
Section 4.6.3, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.4,
Section 10.1.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5,
Section 11.6, Section 11.7, Section 12.4.1, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.6, Section 11.2.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 16.1,
Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.6,
Section 18.1, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.7, Section 18.7.2,
Section 20.1, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Chapter 22, Appendix 1.1,
Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9,
Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13
Modification
Section 18.4 to 18.6  Section 18.5 to 18.7,
Appendix 4.13 to 4.14  Appendix 4.14 to 4.15
A-4
Print date
Sept. 2010
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-G
Revision
Model Addition
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
Addition
Section 16.2.2, Section 17.7, Section 18.8, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 15
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.4, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2,
Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3,
Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3,
Section 3.3.4, Section 3.3.5, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7,
Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.5.5, Section 4.6,
Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 4.9, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.1,
Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3,
Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2, Section 11.2.1,
Section 11.2.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6,
Section 11.7.1, Section 11.7.2, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 11.9, Section 12.1,
Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.4,
Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.12, Section 13.1, Section 13.1.1,
Section 13.2, Section 13.2.1, Section 14.1.1, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.2.2,
Section 14.3, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3,
Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.2.5, Section 18.2.7,
Section 18.2.8, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.4.6,
Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.12, Appendix 4.14,
Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9,
Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5,
Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15
Modification
Appendix 4.6.3  Appendix 4.6.2, Appendix 2.3  Appendix 2.4
Jan. 2011
SH(NA)-080779ENG-H
Addition
TERMS, Section 3.3, Section 4.1, Section 12.5, Section 14.1, Section 14.3.4, Section 20.4,
Appendix 16
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6,
Section 4.1.2, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.2.5,
Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.8,
Section 6.1.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.4.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2,
Section 11.8, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Chapter 14, Section 16.3,
Section 18.1.1, Section 18.7, Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.3, Section 20.2, Section 20.3.1,
Section 20.3.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 4,
Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 15, Appendix 16
Modification
Section 4.1 to 4.9  Section 4.2 to 4.10, Section 12.5  Section 12.6,
Section 14.1 to 14.7  Section 14.2 to 14.8
Mar. 2011
SH(NA)-080779ENG-I
Addition
Section 4.9, Section 16.6, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5,
Section 20.6, Section 20.11,
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1,
Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7.1,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3,
Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.7.1, Section 12.9.1, Section 14.1.2,
Section 14.6.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.6.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6.3,
Section 20.5.7, Section 20.8.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4,
Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 16, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 20.1  Section 20.2, Section 20.2  Section 20.9, Section 20.3.1  Section 20.7,
Section 20.3.2  Section 20.10, Section 20.4  Section 20.8,
Appendix 15 and 16  Appendix 16 and 17
A-5
Print date
Jul. 2011
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-J
Revision
Model Addition
L02-P, L26-PBT
Addition
Section 2.1.9, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 10.1.2,
Section 12.10.4, Section 20.5.1, Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.8,
Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.5.15, Section 20.5.16,
Section 20.5.18, Appendix 1.2
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 2.2,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.1,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1,
Section 4.11, Section 4.11.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.4.2,
Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.3, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2,
Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 11.6, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6,
Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.1, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3,
Section 13.3, Section 16.6, Section 16.6.1, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4,
Section 16.6.5, Section 16.6.8, Section 17.1, Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.4,
Section 18.5.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5.2,
Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.18, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5,
Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10,
Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 4.18, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7,
Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 2.1.9  Section 2.1.10,
Section 3.4.6 and Section 3.4.7  Section 3.4.3 and Section 3.4.4,
Section 4.1.2  Section 4.1.3, Section 5.2  Section 5.4, Section 10.1.2  Section 10.1.3,
Section 12.10.4  Section 12.10.5,
Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.4  Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.7,
Section 20.5.5 to Section 20.5.7  Section 20.5.9 to Section 20.5.11,
Section 20.5.8  Section 20.5.17,
Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.8  Appendix 1.3 to Appendix 1.9
Deletion
Section 3.4.2, Section 3.4.3, Section 3.4.5, Section 3.4.6
Sept. 2011
SH(NA)-080779ENG-K
Addition
Section 2.1.10, Section 9.5, Section 11.9, Section 20.3.1
Correction
TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8,
Section 4.6.5, Section 6.2, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 11.1.1,
Section 12.1.3, Section 12.2, Section 18.1.1, Section 20.2, Section 20.3, Section 20.4,
Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11,
Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.11, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.6,
Appendix 4.16, Appendix 5.1, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10,
Appendix 12, Appendix 13.1, Appendix 13.2
Modification
Section 2.1.10  Section 2.1.11, Section 11.9  Section 11.10
Deletion
Section 6.2.2
A-6
Print date
Nov. 2011
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-L
Revision
Addition
Section 1.3.7, Section 4.3.5, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.3, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.5,
Section 6.6, Chapter 22, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 18
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1,
Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.7.1,
Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4.2,
Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1,
Section 11.9, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.11.1, Section 13.1,
Section 13.2, Section 14.1.1, Section 15.1.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2,
Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4, Section 18.5.5, Section 18.7, Section 20.1, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.11,
Appendix 4.17, Appendix 4.19, Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 12,
Appendix 15, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.9  Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.10,
Section 4.3.5  Section 4.3.6,
Appendix 2.1 to Appendix 2.2  Appendix 2.2 to Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.3  Appendix 2.1,
Appendix 4.16 to Appendix 4.18  Appendix 4.17 to Appendix 4.19
Jan. 2012
SH(NA)-080779ENG-M
Model Addition
FX3GC
Addition
Section 18.4.2
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.3, Section 3.4.1,
Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.2.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.9,
Section 12.1, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.9.6, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.6,
Section 18.4.7, Section 20.5.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1,
Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 18.4.2 to Section 18.4.6  Section 18.4.3 to Section 18.4.7
Deletion
Section 4.7.3
A-7
Print date
May 2012
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-N
Revision
Model Addition
Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, Q25PRH
Addition
Section 6.2, Section 9.4, Section 11.5, Section 12.11.2, Section 17.2, Section 20.5.1,
Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.6, Appendix 4.20, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6,
Appendix 11.2
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1,
Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6,
Section 3.2.7, Section 3.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.7,
Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.3.6, Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1,
Section 4.10.4, Section 4.11.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.5, Section 6.7,
Section 7.2.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.5.2, Section 10.1,
Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.4,
Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.3,
Section 14.1.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.4, Section 14.6.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.3,
Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7, Section 18.8,
Section 20.1, Section 20.5.7, Section 20.5.8, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.12,
Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3,
Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2,
Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 5, Appendix 6.1,
Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3,
Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 11, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13, Appendix 14, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 6.2 to Section 6.6  Section 6.3 to Section 6.7,
Section 9.4 to Section 9.5  Section 9.5 to Section 9.6,
Section 11.5 to Section 11.10  Section 11.6 to Section 11.11,
Section 17.2 to Section 17.7  Section 17.3 to Section 17.8,
Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.2  Section 20.5.2 to Section 20.5.3,
Section 20.5.3  Section 20.5.5,
Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.18  Section 20.5.7 to Section 20.5.21,
Appendix 10.5 to Appendix 10.9  Appendix 10.7 to Appendix 10.11
Sept. 2012
SH(NA)-080779ENG-O
Addition
Section 1.3.7, Section 6.3.2, Section 12.1.6
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8,
Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 6.5, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1,
Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4,
Section 10.3.5, Section 11.2.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.5, Section 15.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4,
Section 16.4.5, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.7,
Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.11, Appendix 11,
Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.10  Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.11,
Section 6.3.2 to Section 6.3.4  Section 6.3.3 to Section 6.3.5
A-8
Print date
Feb. 2013
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-P
Revision
Model Addition
Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV, L02S, L06, L26, LJ72MS15
Addition
Section 1.3.9, Section 1.3.10, Section 4.11, Section 13.1, Section 13.5, Section 18.3.2,
Section 18.7, Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2,
Section 1.3.7, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.1,
Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.2.2,
Section 4.2.8, Section 4.5, Section 4.8, Section 4.12.1, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.5, Section 6.4
Section 9.1.1, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2,
Section 11.2.2, Section 11.5.3, Section 11.7, Section 11.8, Section 11.9.1, Section 11.10,
Section 12.1, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.5, Section 12.8, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.5,
Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Section 13.3, Section 14.2,
Section 14.3, Section 14.6, Section 14.6.1, Section 14.6.2, Section 14.6.3, Section 15.1,
Section 15.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.2.1, Section 16.3.1, Section 16.3.2, Section 16.3.3,
Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.5, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4, Section 16.7,
Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.3, Section 18.4,
Section 18.4.2, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4,
Section 18.5.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 19.4.1,
Section 20.5.8, Section 20.10, Section 21.2, Section 22.1.1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3,
Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 10,
Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6,
Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.11,
Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.9 to Section 1.3.11  Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.13,
Section 4.11  Section 4.12,
Section 13.1 to Section 13.3  Section 13.2 to Section 13.4,
Section 18.3.2 to Section 18.3.3  Section 18.3.3 to Section 18.3.4,
Section 18.7 to Section 18.9  Section 18.8 to Section 18.10,
Appendix 13 to Appendix 18  Appendix 14 to Appendix 19
May 2013
SH(NA)-080779ENG-Q
Model Addition
L02S-P, L06-P, L26-P, FX3S
Addition
Section 1.3.10, Section 6.1.3
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.8, Section 1.3.9, Section 1.3.11, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.3,
Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.3, Section 2.4,
Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.7.2, Section 4.8, Section 4.11.3,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 7.1.2,
Section 9.2.1, Section 9.5, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.9.1, Section 11.10,
Section 12.1, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11.1,
Section 12.11.2, Section 13.4.1, Section 13.4.3, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.3,
Section 16.7, Section 17.1, Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.7, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.1, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5,
Appendix 4.2, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13,
Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Modification
Section 1.3.10 to Section 1.3.13  Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.14,
Section 6.3.4  Section 4.13, Section 6.3.5  Section 6.3.4
Sept. 2013
SH(NA)-080779ENG-R
Correction
MANUALS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.6, Section 1.3.10, Section 1.3.11, Section 3.2.8,
Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2,
Section 12.2, Section 14.6, Section 14.8, Section 15.1.4, Section 15.9.1, Section 15.9.2,
Section 15.10.3, Section 17.6.3, Section 19.1.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 18
A-9
Print date
Manual number*1
Revision
Dec. 2013
SH(NA)-080779ENG-S
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.7,
Section 2.3, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2,
Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.4, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.10,
Section 4.13, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4,
Section 9.5.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.5, Section 12.1, Section 12.2, Section 14.1.1,
Section 14.2.1, Section 14.9, Section 14.9.1, Section 14.9.2, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.9.5,
Section 17.1.2, Section 17.2, Section 17.7, Section 19.6, Section 21.7, Section 21.8,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10,
Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9,
Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Mar. 2014
SH(NA)-080779ENG-T
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1,
Section 3.2.1, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.2.2,
Section 14.3, Section 14.7, Section 14.8.1, Section 14.8.2, Section 14.10.2, Section 17.6.1,
Section 17.6.2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13,
Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Jun. 2014
SH(NA)-080779ENG-U
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.8,
Section 1.3.11, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.4,
Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 11.1, Section 11.5.6,
Section 12.1, Section 12.2, Section 15.10.3, Section 17.6.3, Section 21.4, Section 21.4.5,
Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Sept. 2014
SH(NA)-080779ENG-V
Addition
Section 9.3.3
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 9.2.2,
Section 9.4, Section 10.2, Section 12.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.11,
Section 15.1, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.1.3, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.10.5,
Section 17.1.1, Section 17.6.1, Section 19.7, Section 20.1, Section 21.4, Appendix 1.7,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 7,
Appendix 8, Appendix 12, Appendix 14
Dec. 2014
SH(NA)-080779ENG-W
Addition
Section 14.9.3, Section 17.9
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.14, Section 4.13, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 12.2, Section 14.3,
Section 14.9.1, Section 14.9.2, Section 15.1.3, Section 15.1.4, Section 15.10.4,
Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.2, Section 21.8, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Mar. 2015
SH(NA)-080779ENG-X
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.7,
Section 1.3.11, Section 3.2.5, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 12.2, Section 15.1.2,
Section 15.11.2, Section 21.4, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Jun. 2015
SH(NA)-080779ENG-Y
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.10, Section 3.3, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.4, Section 7.4.2,
Section 17.3, Section 21.2.7, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Dec. 2015
SH(NA)-080779ENG-Z
Addition
Section 4.13.2, Section 9.6.2
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3,
Section 3.1, Section 4.13, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2,
Section 9.6, Section 10.1.2, Section 12.2, Section 21.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13
A - 10
Print date
Manual number*1
Revision
Feb. 2016
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AA
Correction
Section 12.2, Section 15.1.5, Appendix 12
Jun. 2016
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AB
Addition
Section 14.9.4
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 3.1, Section 3.2.1,
Section 4.2.1, Section 11.4, Section 11.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.9, Section 14.9.1,
Section 14.9.2, Section 14.9.3, Section 14.9.4, Section 14.10.2, Section 19.5, Appendix 7,
Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Sept. 2016
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AC
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.5,
Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.3, Section 15.1.4,
Section 15.2, Section 21.5.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 12
Dec. 2016
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AD
Addition
Section 1.3.11, Section 4.12.4, Section 6.1.4, Section 21.5
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.12.2, Section 6.1.1,
Section 11.5.7, Section 11.5.8, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.9.6, Section 16.1, Section 17.4,
Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5,
Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10,
Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.14  Section 1.3.12 to Section 1.3.15,
Section 21.5 to Section 21.10  Section 21.6 to Section 21.11
Mar. 2017
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AE
Correction
Section 4.12, Section 4.12.2, Section 4.12.4, Section 16.1, Section 17.4, Appendix 7,
Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5,
Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Jul. 2017
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AF
Addition
Section 3.4.3
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.6, Section 1.3.11, Section 2.4, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.4,
Section 14.10.2, Section 14.11, Section 21.1.1, Section 21.5, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 7,
Appendix 12, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Modification
Section 3.4.3  Section 3.4.4
Jan. 2018
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AG
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.4,
Section 21.1.1, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 12
Jun. 2018
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AH
Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.7, Section 6.1, Appendix 1.7,
Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Dec. 2018
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AI
Addition
Section 9.1.3, Section 15.1.6
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.3.6,
Section 14.2.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 15.1.6 to Section 15.1.7  Section 15.1.7 to Section 15.1.8
Jun. 2019
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AJ
Correction
Section 1.3.7, Section 6.3.2, Section 11.5.18, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.6, Section 15.1,
Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12
A - 11
Print date
Dec. 2019
Manual number*1
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AK
Revision
Addition
Appendix 21
Correction
Section 14.8.2, Appendix 2.5
Jun. 2020
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AL
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2,
Section 2.1.8, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 11.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.10.2,
Section 14.13.1, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18, Appendix 21
Dec. 2020
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AM
Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 15.1.4
Jun. 2021
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AN
Correction
Section 4.11.1, Section 4.11.3, Section 6.1.3, Section 6.1.4, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3,
Section 10.2
Dec. 2021
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AO
Correction
Section 4.2.4, Section 12.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15
*1 :
The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover.
Japanese Manual Version SH-080730-BB
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur
as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A - 12
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the engineering software, MELSOFT series.
Before using the product, thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance
to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 2
REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 3
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 13
CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 13
MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 27
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 35
TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 38
1
2
OVERVIEW
1.1
Product Overview
1-2
1.2
Features
1-4
1.3
List of Functions
1-9
1.3.1
List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
1.3.2
List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
1.3.3
List of functions for editing SFC diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 26
1.3.4
List of functions for editing SFC block list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
1.3.5
List of functions for editing in Structured Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28
1.3.6
List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 29
1.3.7
List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32
1.3.8
List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 34
1.3.9
List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 35
1.3.10
List of Ethernet Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 36
1.3.11
List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37
1.3.12
List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37
1.3.13
List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 38
1.3.14
List of functions for I/O system setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39
1.3.15
List of functions for predefined protocol support function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1
Connection from USB/Serial Port
2-2
2.1.1
USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module) . . . . 2 - 4
2.1.2
USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.1.3
USB cables (compatible with FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.1.4
RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module) . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
A - 13
2.1.5
2.2
Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.1.6
Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
2.1.7
Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters)
(compatible with FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
2.1.8
Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
2.1.9
Connection via AJ65BT-R2N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
2.1.10
Function expansion board (special adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2.1.11
Connection via GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
Connection from I/F Boards
2.2.1
2 - 14
I/F boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
2.3
Interfaces and Connectable Modules
2 - 16
2.4
System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer
2 - 20
2.5
Supported Programming Languages
2 - 21
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.1
Starting and Exiting GX Works2
3-2
3.2
Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3-3
3.2.1
Main frame configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.2
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5
3.2.3
Work windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
3.2.4
Docking windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
3.2.5
Navigation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
3.2.6
Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
3.2.7
Changing colors and fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
3.2.8
Customizing shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
3.3
Selecting Language
3 - 30
3.4
Help Function
3 - 32
3.4.1
4
Displaying GX Works2 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
3.4.2
Displaying operating manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
3.4.3
Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
3.4.4
Checking version of GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1
4.2
A - 14
GX Works2 Project Management
4-2
4.1.1
Workspace format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.2
Single file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.1.3
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Project Operations
4-9
4.2.1
Creating projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
4.2.2
Opening existing projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
4.2.3
Saving projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
4.2.4
Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
4.2.5
Deleting projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
4.2.6
Closing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
4.3
Verifying project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
4.2.8
Changing programmable controller type of projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
4 - 34
4.3.1
Adding new data to project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
4.3.2
Copying/pasting data in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
4.3.3
Changing project data names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
4.3.4
Deleting project data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
4.3.5
Merging data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
4.3.6
Displaying/editing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
4.4
Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
4 - 45
4.5
Changing Project Types
4 - 46
4.6
Managing Project Revisions
4 - 47
4.7
4.6.1
Registering revision information (creating backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
4.6.2
Displaying revision list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 48
4.6.3
Restoring backup projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49
4.6.4
Deleting revision information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 51
4.6.5
Verifying revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 51
Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4 - 53
4.7.1
Opening projects in other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56
4.7.2
Reading ASC format data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
4.8
Saving Projects in Other Formats
4 - 60
4.9
Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
4 - 61
4.10
Setting Security for Projects
4 - 62
4.11
4.12
4.13
5
4.2.7
4.10.1
Setting/resetting security of projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 65
4.10.2
Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
4.10.3
Logging in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69
4.10.4
Changing access authority of access level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
4.10.5
Considerations for using the security function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 71
Setting Security Key
4 - 72
4.11.1
Managing security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73
4.11.2
Locking project with security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 79
4.11.3
Considerations of security keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 80
Protecting POUs in Projects
4 - 81
4.12.1
Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 82
4.12.2
Setting/changing block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 83
4.12.3
Unlocking block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 84
4.12.4
Considerations for a block password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 85
Managing Profiles
4 - 89
4.13.1
Registering profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 89
4.13.2
Deleting profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 91
EDITING PROGRAMS
5.1
Programming
5-2
A - 15
5.2
Label Programming
5-2
5.3
Considerations for Using Label Projects
5-4
5.4
6
5.3.1
Editing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.3.2
Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change). . . . 5 - 6
5.3.3
Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.3.4
Verifying programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5.3.5
Monitoring programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Converting/Compiling Projects
5-9
SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1
Setting PLC Parameters
6-2
6.1.1
PLC parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
6.1.2
Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18
6.1.3
Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20
6.1.4
Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
6.2
Setting Redundant Parameters
6 - 36
6.3
Setting Network Parameters
6 - 37
6.3.1
Network parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40
6.3.2
Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46
6.3.3
Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 59
6.3.4
Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
6.4
Setting Remote Password
6 - 73
6.5
Checking Parameters
6 - 75
6.6
Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
6 - 76
6.7
Setting default parameters
6 - 78
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.1
7.2
Device Memory
7-2
7.1.1
Features of device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
7.1.2
List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Setting Device Memory
7-5
7.2.1
Setting device values in units of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
7.2.2
Setting device values by specifying device range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
7.2.3
Setting character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
7.2.4
Setting same value simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
7.2.5
Changing display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
7.2.6
Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
7.3
Searching Devices
7 - 15
7.4
Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
7 - 16
A - 16
7.4.1
Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
7.4.2
Writing/reading data to/from Excel files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1
8.2
9
8-2
8.1.1
Feature of device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
8.1.2
List of applicable devices for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
8.1.3
Procedure for setting device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Setting Device Initial Values
8-5
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1
9.2
9.3
Device Comments
9-2
9.1.1
Global device comments/local device comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
9.1.2
List of device comment applicable devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8
9.1.3
Changing text size on the device comment editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Creating Device Comments
9 - 11
9.2.1
Creating comments on the device comment editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.2
Creating comments on the ladder editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Deleting Device Comments
9 - 15
9.3.1
Deleting comments of all devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15
9.3.2
Deleting comments of devices being displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15
9.3.3
Deleting unused device comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15
9.4
Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
9 - 16
9.5
Utilizing Sample Comments
9 - 17
9.6
10
Device Initial Values
9.5.1
Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
9.5.2
Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9 - 19
9.6.1
Writing/reading device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19
9.6.2
Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
9.6.3
CSV file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
SEARCH/REPLACE
10.1
10.2
Cross Reference
10.1.1
Creating/displaying cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
10.1.2
Setting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
10.1.3
Filtering display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Device List
10.2.1
10.3
10 - 2
10 - 13
Displaying device list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Search/Replacement
10 - 17
10.3.1
Searching/replacing devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
10.3.2
Searching/replacing instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
10.3.3
Searching/replacing character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
10.3.4
Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27
10.3.5
Batch replacing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
10.3.6
Displaying results and error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 31
A - 17
11
PRINTING
11.1
Print Function
11 - 2
11.2
Setting Printer
11 - 4
11.3
Batch Printing Project Data
11 - 5
11.3.1
Setting printer for batch print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 7
11.4
Page Set Up for Batch Print
11 - 8
11.5
Setting Details of Batch Print
11 - 10
11.5.1
Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 10
11.5.2
Setting batch print for cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12
11.5.3
Setting batch print for PLC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 13
11.5.4
Setting batch print for redundant parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 14
11.5.5
Setting batch print for network parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 15
11.5.6
Setting batch print for program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16
11.5.7
Setting batch print for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 17
11.5.8
Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 20
11.5.9
Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 22
11.5.10
Setting batch print for ST programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 24
11.5.11
Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 25
11.5.12
Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 26
11.5.13
Setting batch print for labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28
11.5.14
Setting batch print for device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 29
11.5.15
Setting batch print for device memory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 30
11.5.16
Setting batch print for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 31
11.5.17
Setting batch print for TC setting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 32
11.5.18
Setting batch print for device list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 33
11.5.19
Setting batch print for cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 35
11.5.20
Setting batch print for statements/notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36
11.5.21
Setting batch print for product information list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 37
11.6
Displaying Batch Print Preview
11 - 38
11.7
Printing Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 39
11.8
Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 40
11.9
11.8.1
Setting print details for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 40
11.8.2
Setting print details for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 42
Previewing Print Images
11 - 43
11.10 Printing Examples
11 - 44
11.11 Considerations for Printing
11 - 52
12
SETTING OPTIONS
12.1
Basic Operations
12 - 2
12.2
Option Setting List
12 - 4
A - 18
13
USING LIBRARIES
13.1
14
Libraries
13 - 2
13.1.1
FB libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 3
13.1.2
User libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 4
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1
14.2
Setting Connection Destinations
14.1.1
Transfer setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3
14.1.2
Creating connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6
14.1.3
Specifying connection destination for regular use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
14 - 8
14.2.1
Connecting with serial/USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8
14.2.2
Accessing by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
14.3
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
14 - 15
14.4
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
14 - 22
14.5
Accessing Redundant CPUs
14 - 25
14.5.1
Considerations for routing intelligent function module on extension base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
14.5.2
Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 28
14.5.3
Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 29
14.6
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board
14 - 33
14.7
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
14 - 35
14.8
Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
14 - 36
14.9
14.8.1
Connection on a 1:1 basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 36
14.8.2
Connection on a 1:n basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 37
Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
14 - 40
14.9.1
Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 41
14.9.2
Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
14.9.3
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 46
14.9.4
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 48
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
14 - 50
14.10.1
Setting TEL data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 58
14.10.2
Connecting/disconnecting line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 64
14.10.3
Setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 71
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
15
14 - 2
14 - 72
WRITING/READING DATA
15.1
Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15 - 2
15.1.1
Setting write/read range of program (program file). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7
15.1.2
Setting write/read range of device data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 8
15.1.3
Setting range of device comment to be written/read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 11
15.1.4
Writing/reading intelligent function module data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 14
A - 19
15.1.5
Symbolic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 19
15.1.6
Reading the remaining steps for Online program change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 22
15.1.7
Specifying target to write device comments to programmable controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 23
15.1.8
Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 24
15.2
Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
15 - 29
15.3
Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
15 - 34
15.4
Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
15 - 35
15.5
Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
15 - 36
15.6
Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
15 - 38
15.7
Latch Data Backup
15 - 40
15.8
15.9
15.7.1
Backing up latch data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 40
15.7.2
Deleting backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 41
Backing up/Restoring Data
15.8.1
Backing up data to memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 42
15.8.2
Restoring backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44
Online Program Change
15 - 45
15.9.1
Performing Online program change during conversion/compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 46
15.9.2
Performing Online program change in units of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 53
15.9.3
Online program change starting from pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 55
15.9.4
Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 56
15.9.5
Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 59
15.9.6
Considerations of each programmable controller series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 60
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
15 - 66
15.10.1
Offline calculation and Online calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 66
15.10.2
Setting target data for memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 66
15.10.3
Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 67
15.10.4
Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 70
15.10.5
Considerations of calculating memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 72
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15 - 73
15.11.1
Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 74
15.11.2
Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function) . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 77
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
16
15 - 42
15 - 79
PROTECTING DATA
16.1
Functions to Protect Data
16 - 2
16.2
Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16 - 3
16.2.1
16.3
A - 20
Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 4
16.2.2
Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 6
16.2.3
Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 7
Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
16 - 8
16.3.1
Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 9
16.3.2
Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 11
16.3.3
Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12
16.4
16.5
17
16.4.1
Registering/changing keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14
16.4.2
Canceling keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 16
16.4.3
Unlocking keyword temporarily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
Locking with Security Key
16 - 18
Monitoring Function
17 - 2
17.1.1
Starting/stopping monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2
17.1.2
Monitoring status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 4
17.2
Monitoring Programs
17 - 7
17.3
Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17 - 8
17.4
Monitoring Program List
17 - 12
17.5
Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17 - 15
17.6
Registering and Monitoring Devices
17 - 16
17.6.1
Registering and monitoring devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 16
17.6.2
Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 19
17.6.3
Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 23
17.6.4
Writing/reading data to/from CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 25
17.7
Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules
17 - 26
17.8
Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows
17 - 26
17.9
Using Realtime Monitor Function
17 - 27
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.1
18.2
18.3
19
16 - 14
MONITORING
17.1
18
Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
Simulation Function
18 - 2
18.1.1
Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2
18.1.2
Functions available for simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2
Starting/Stopping Simulation
18 - 4
18.2.1
Saving device memory/buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6
18.2.2
Reading device memory/buffer memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6
18.2.3
List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7
Checking unsupported instructions/devices
18 - 9
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.1
19.2
Changing Current Values
19 - 2
19.1.1
Changing current value of devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2
19.1.2
Changing current value of buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 5
Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
19 - 7
19.2.1
Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 7
19.2.2
Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 9
A - 21
19.3
19.4
Device Test with Execution Condition
19 - 10
19.3.1
Registering device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 10
19.3.2
Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 12
19.3.3
Batch disabling device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 13
Sampling Trace
19 - 14
19.4.1
Opening sampling trace screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14
19.4.2
Setting executing condition of sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15
19.4.3
Registering devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 19
19.4.4
Executing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 22
19.4.5
Saving trace data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 26
19.4.6
Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30
19.4.7
Considerations when performing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 32
19.4.8
Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 32
19.5
Measuring Scan Time
19 - 33
19.6
Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19 - 35
19.6.1
19.7
20
Debugging procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 38
19.6.2
Setting break points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 39
19.6.3
Setting break devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 43
19.6.4
Setting skip ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 45
19.6.5
Executing program one step at a time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 47
19.6.6
Executing program until condition is satisfied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 47
19.6.7
Canceling step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 48
19.6.8
Setting options for step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 49
19.6.9
Stopping step execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 50
Using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
19 - 51
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.1
Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU
20 - 2
20.2
Operating Redundant CPUs
20 - 6
20.3
Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory
20 - 8
20.4
Clearing Programmable Controller Memory
20 - 10
20.5
Arranging Programmable Controller Memory
20 - 13
20.6
Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU
20 - 14
20.7
Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu
20 - 16
20.8
Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool
20 - 18
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.1
A - 22
Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
21 - 2
21.1.1
Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2
21.1.2
Diagnosing FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 9
21.1.3
Error icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 10
21.1.4
21.2
21.3
Diagnosing MELSECNET
21 - 14
21.2.1
Network test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 16
21.2.2
Loop test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 18
21.2.3
Setting verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 19
21.2.4
Station order check test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 21
21.2.5
Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 22
21.2.6
Error history monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 24
21.2.7
Network monitor details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 25
21.2.8
Monitoring other station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 26
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
21.3.1
21.4
Online operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 11
21 - 28
Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 32
21.3.2
IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 33
21.3.3
Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 34
21.3.4
Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 36
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21.4.1
21 - 38
Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 43
21.4.2
IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 44
21.4.3
Cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 45
21.4.4
Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 46
21.4.5
Network event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 47
21.4.6
Reserved station function enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 49
21.4.7
Temporary error invalid station setting/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 50
21.5
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
21 - 51
21.6
Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21 - 53
21.6.1
21.7
Monitoring line (host station/other stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 53
21.6.2
Loop test/transmission speed test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 59
21.6.3
Displaying logs of station information (status logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 61
21.6.4
Creating check sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 63
21.6.5
Starting/stopping data link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 65
Diagnosing Ethernet
21 - 66
21.7.1
Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 66
21.7.2
Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 72
21.7.3
PING test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 79
21.7.4
Loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 84
21.8
Executing Sensor/Device Monitoring
21 - 88
21.9
System Monitor
21 - 89
21.9.1
Checking module's detailed information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 99
21.9.2
Checking details of error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 102
21.10 Changing Modules Online
21 - 104
21.11 Built-in I/O Module Tools
21 - 106
21.11.1
Positioning monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 106
21.11.2
High-speed counter monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 107
21.11.3
I/O monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 108
A - 23
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.1
I/O System Setting Function
22 - 2
22.1.1
Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting
function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2
22.1.2
Conditions and sequence actions for simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 4
22.1.3
Timing chart input and device value input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 6
22.2
Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function
22 - 7
22.3
Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function
22 - 8
22.4
Setting by Inputting Device Values
22 - 10
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
22.4.1
Setting conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 11
22.4.2
Setting sequence actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 13
Setting Using Timing Charts
22 - 15
22.5.1
Setting in timing chart format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 16
22.5.2
Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 17
22.5.3
Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 18
22.5.4
Setting timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 19
22.5.5
Setting number of scans of timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 22
22.5.6
Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23
22.5.7
Displaying list of registered devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 24
22.5.8
Exchanging display positions of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 25
22.5.9
Changing display format of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26
Performing I/O System Setting Function
22 - 27
22.6.1
Executing simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 27
22.6.2
Disabling simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 27
Monitoring I/O System Setting
22 - 28
22.7.1
Starting/stopping monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 28
22.7.2
Changing current value of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 29
Operating I/O System Setting Files
22 - 30
22.8.1
Creating I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30
22.8.2
Opening existing I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30
22.8.3
Saving I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30
APPENDIX
Appendix 1
App - 2
Appendix 1.1
Common toolbars and shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 2
Appendix 1.2
"Navigation Window" toolbar icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 6
Appendix 1.3
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 7
Appendix 1.4
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 8
Appendix 1.5
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 9
Appendix 1.6
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for executing sampling trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 9
Appendix 1.7
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 10
Appendix 1.8
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20
Appendix 1.9
Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 21
Appendix 2
A - 24
List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Simulation Function
App - 22
Appendix 2.1
Supported CPU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 22
Appendix 2.2
Supported devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 25
Appendix 2.3
Supported instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 41
Appendix 2.4
Enable/disable setting of parameter items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 49
Appendix 2.5
Restrictions and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 53
Appendix 3
ASCII Code Table
App - 61
Appendix 4
Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
App - 62
Appendix 4.1
Before using GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 62
Appendix 4.2
Supported CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 63
Appendix 4.3
Unsupported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 64
Appendix 4.4
Supported project types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 65
Appendix 4.5
Programming languages supported by each project type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 66
Appendix 4.6
Using device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70
Appendix 4.7
Using device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70
Appendix 4.8
Using device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70
Appendix 4.9
Using search/replace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 71
Appendix 4.10
Using online function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 72
Appendix 4.11
Using monitoring/debugging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 73
Appendix 4.12
Using printing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 73
Appendix 4.13
Copying saved project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74
Appendix 4.14
Using PLC type change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74
Appendix 4.15
Using program check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74
Appendix 4.16
Using IC memory card function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74
Appendix 4.17
Compatibility with GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 75
Appendix 4.18
Compatibility with GX IEC Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 76
Appendix 4.19
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 76
Appendix 4.20
Program titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 77
Appendix 5
Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications
Appendix 5.1
Appendix 6
App - 78
Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 78
Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
App - 81
Appendix 6.1
Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 81
Appendix 6.2
Data compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 85
Appendix 7
Compatibility with Existing Applications
App - 90
Appendix 8
Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format
App - 107
Appendix 8.1
ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 108
Appendix 9
Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names
App - 110
Appendix 10
Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
App - 113
Appendix 10.1
Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types . . . .App - 114
Appendix 10.2
Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 116
Appendix 10.3
Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 121
Appendix 10.4
Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 129
Appendix 10.5
Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . .App - 133
Appendix 10.6
Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 137
Appendix 10.7
Restrictions when changing to Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 139
Appendix 10.8
Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 141
Appendix 10.9
Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 145
Appendix 10.10
Restrictions when changing to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 151
A - 25
Appendix 10.11
Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and CC IE Field
head module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 160
Appendix 10.12
Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU  FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 161
Appendix 11
Instruction Conversion Lists
App - 162
Appendix 11.1
Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU  CPU other than Universal
model QCPU conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 162
Appendix 11.2
Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU  CPU other than Redundant CPU
conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 164
Appendix 12
Functions Added Since Previous Versions
App - 166
Appendix 13
Supported Versions of Modules
App - 193
Appendix 14
Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
App - 196
Appendix 14.1
Installing GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 196
Appendix 14.2
Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type in
GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 199
Appendix 15
Considerations of installation and uninstallation
App - 200
Appendix 15.1
Considerations of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 200
Appendix 15.2
Considerations of uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 202
Appendix 16
USB Driver Installation
App - 203
Appendix 17
Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
App - 204
Appendix 17.1
Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character
are applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 205
Appendix 17.2
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 208
Appendix 18
Considerations for Selecting Project Language
App - 210
Appendix 19
Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
App - 213
Appendix 19.1
Replacing instruction names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 214
Appendix 19.2
Adding devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 215
Appendix 19.3
Changing positions of devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 217
Appendix 19.4
Changing arguments to constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 218
Appendix 19.5
Changing label data types to double-precision real number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 219
Appendix 19.6
Changing label data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 221
Appendix 19.7
Changing number of array elements of array data type labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 222
Appendix 19.8
Changing label data type to array data type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 223
Appendix 20
Considerations When Using Projects Created in PX Developer
App - 225
Appendix 21
Troubleshooting
App - 227
INDEX
TRADEMARKS
A - 26
■
MANUALS
Related manuals are separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2.
● Related manuals
The manuals related to this product are shown below.
Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals.
1)
Operation of GX Works2
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
Explains the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and
Structured project such as parameter setting, operation method for the online function.
(Sold separately)
SH-080779ENG
(13JU63)
(this manual)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Simple project of GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080780ENG
(13JU64)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
Explains methods for such as creating function blocks, pasting function blocks to sequence programs,
and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080984ENG
(13JU72)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080781ENG
(13JU65)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Explains methods of intelligent function module for such as parameter setting, monitoring programs,
and predefined protocol support function in GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080921ENG
(13JU69)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Simple project
for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080787ENG
(13JZ22)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project)
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Structured
project for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-080788ENG
(13JZ23)
2)
Structured programming
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals)
Explains the programming methods, types of programming languages, and other information required
to create structured programs.
(Sold separately)
SH-080782ENG
(13JW06)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions, basic
instructions, and application instructions, that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately)
SH-080783ENG
(13JW07)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)
Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)
SH-080784ENG
(13JW08)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Special Instructions)
Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction,
PID control instruction, and built-in I/O function dedicated instruction, that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)
SH-080785ENG
(13JW09)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common]
Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)
JY997D26001
(09R925)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction]
Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)
JY997D34701
(09R926)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Application Functions]
Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)
JY997D34801
(09R927)
A - 27
3)
Operation of iQ Works
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
Let's start iQ Works Version 2
Explains fundamental methods for such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and using
system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
SH-081261ENG
(13JZ79)
4)
iQ Sensor Solution
Manual number
(Model code)
Manual name
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
Explains the operation methods for online functions in iQ Sensor Solution.
5)
(Sold separately)
SH-081133ENG
(13JV28)
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Manual name
Manual number
(Model code)
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
Explains the operation methods for online functions in CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
(Sold separately)
SH-081684ENG
(13JX62)
The Operating Manuals are included on the DVD-ROM and CD-ROM of the software package in a PDF file format.
Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase. Order a manual by quoting the manual number (model
code) listed in the table above.
A - 28
● Purpose of this manual
This manual explains the functions that are common to Simple project and Structured project,
including system configuration, parameter settings, and operation methods for online functions of GX
Works2. Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose.
For information such as the content and number of each manual, refer to the list of 'Related manuals'.
1)
Installation of GX Works2 and USB driver
Purpose
GX Works2 Installation Instructions
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
Common
Learning the operating
environment and installation
method
Details
Learning a USB driver installation
method
2)
Details
Operation of GX Works2
GX Works2 Beginner's
Manual
Purpose
Simple
Project
Structured
Project
Learning all functions of GX
Works2
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
creating a structured project for
the first time
Learning the operations of
available functions regardless of
project type.
Learning the functions and
operation methods for
programming
Learning the operations and
operating procedures when
creating function blocks (FB) in
Simple project.
Learning data setting methods for
intelligent function module
Simple Project
Common
Function
Block
Structured
Project
Intelligent
Function
Module
Outline
Learning the project types and
available languages in GX
Works2
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
creating a simple project for the
first time
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
Outline
Details
Details
Details
Outline
Details
Details
Details
Details
A - 29
3)
Operations in each programming language
For details of instructions used in each programming language, refer to the section 4 and the
section 5 on the following pages.
Purpose
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
Simple Project
Ladder Diagram
Simple
Project
Sequential
Function Chart
Structured
Project
Sequential
Function Chart
Structured Ladder/
FBD
Structured Text
*1 :
MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only
A - 30
Simple Project
Structured Project
Details
Outline
*1
Details
Outline
Structured Text
Ladder Diagram
Structured Project
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
Details
Outline
Details
Outline
*1
Details
Outline
Outline
Outline
Details
Details
4)
Details of instructions in each programming language (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Purpose
MELSEC-Q/L/F
Structured
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming
Programming
Manual
Manual
MELSEC-Q/L
Programming
Manual
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA
Programming
Manual
Common
Special
Application
Instructions Instructions Functions
Common
Instruction
PID Control
Instructions
Fundamentals
Learning details
of programmable
controller CPU
All
error codes,
languages
special relays,
and special
registers
Details
Learning the
types and details
of common
instructions
Details
Using
Ladder
Diagram
SFC
Manual
for
module to
be used
–
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
intelligent
function modules
Details
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
network modules
Details
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
the PID control
function
Details
Learning details
Using
of specifications,
Sequential
functions, and
Function
instructions of
Chart
SFC (MELSAP3)
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a
structured
program
Learning the
types and details
of common
instructions
Learning the
types and details
Using
of instructions for
Structured intelligent
Ladder/
function modules
FBD or
Structured Learning the
types and details
Text
of instructions for
network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
the PID control
function
Learning the
types and details
of application
functions
Details
Details
Details
Details
Outline
Details
Outline
Details
Outline
Details
A - 31
5)
Details of instructions in each programming language (for FXCPU)
Purpose
MELSEC-Q/L/F
Structured
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual
Programming
Manual
Fundamentals
Device &
Common
Basic &
Applied
Instruction
Application
Functions
FXCPU Programming Manual
FX0, FX0S,
FX0N, FX1,
FXU, FX2C
FX1S, FX1N,
FX3S, FX3G,
FX2N, FX1NC,
FX3U,
FX2NC
FX3GC, FX3UC
Using
Ladder
Diagram
Learning the types
and details of basic/
application
instructions,
descriptions of
devices and
parameters
Details
Details
Details
Using
Sequential
Function
Chart
Learning details of
specifications,
functions, and
instructions of SFC
Details
Details
Details
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a
structured program
Learning the
descriptions of
Using
devices,
Structured parameters, and
Ladder/
error codes
FBD or
Structured Learning the types
and details of
Text
sequence
instructions
Learning the types
and details of
application
instructions
A - 32
Details
Details
Details
Details
● How to read this manual
Supported CPU
Supported programmable
controller CPUs are shown in
icons under the section title.
Screen display
Describes the screen display
procedure.
Follow the
and select
[(menu)] to open the screen.
*Screen display may differ
depending on the CPU type.
In that case, typical example is
described.
Display contents
Describes the display contents
on the screen.
Reference location
leads to the reference
location and reference manual.
Section title
Clarifies the section of currently
open page.
6.1 Setting PLC Parameter
Chapter heading
Index on the right of the page
number clarifies the chapter of
currently open page.
Screen button
Describes the buttons in the
screen.
Operating procedure
Describes the operating
procedure of the function.
A - 33
The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability.
Icon
QCPU
(Q mode)
LCPU
Remote I/O
Communication
head module
FXCPU
Q CPU
L CPU
Remote
Head
FX
*1
*1
Q CPU
L CPU
–
Head
FX
Q CPU
L CPU
Remote
Head
FX
Normal icons indicate that the corresponding
function is available.
*1
*1
Description
Icons with * (asterisk) symbol indicate that the
corresponding function is available with
restrictions such as CPU types.
Icons with × symbol indicate that the
corresponding function is not available.
This manual also uses the following columns:
This indicates notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the
same page.
Restrictions
This indicates restrictions relating to the information given on the same page.
● Symbols used in this manual
The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Symbol

[
]
(Underline)


"
"
A - 34
[Project]
Screen name
Q Parameter Setting screen
Tab name in a screen
<<PLC System>>
Item name in a screen
"Timer Limit Setting"
Button on a screen

–
Example
Toolbar icon


Description
Menu name on a menu bar

Keyboard key
button

■
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL
The following are the generic terms/abbreviations of such as software packages and programmable
controller CPUs used in this manual.
Generic term and
abbreviation
Description
GX Works2
Generic product name for SWnDND-GXW2-E and SWnDNC-GXW2-E (n: version)
Existing application
–
GX Developer
Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and
SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA
(n: version)
GX IEC Developer
Product name for SWnD5C-MEDOC3
(n: version)
GX Simulator
Generic product name for SWnD5C-LLT-E, SWnD5C-LLT-EA, SWnD5C-LLT-EV, and
SWnD5C-LLT-EVA
(n: version)
GX Configurator
Generic product name for GX Configurator-AD/DA/SC/CT/TC/TI/FL/PT/AS/QP
MELSOFT Navigator
Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC-IQWK and
SWnDND-IQWK (MELSOFT iQ Works)
(n: version)
iQ Works
Abbreviation for MELSOFT iQ Works
iQ AppPortal
Generic product name for SWnDND-IQAPL-M
(n: version)
GX Simulator2
Abbreviation for GX Works2 simulation function
Personal computer
Generic term for personal computer on which Windows® operates
Q series
Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-Q series
L series
Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-L series
FX series
Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-F series
Basic model QCPU
Generic term for Q00J, Q00, and Q01
High Performance
model QCPU
Generic term for Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, and Q25H
Process CPU
Generic term for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, and Q25PH
Redundant CPU
Generic term for Q12PRH and Q25PRH
Universal model QCPU
Generic term for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH,
Q04UDV, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV,
Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
QnUD(H)CPU
Generic term for Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, and Q26UDH
QnUDE(H)CPU
Generic term for Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDEH,
Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
High-speed Universal
model QCPU
Generic term for Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, and Q26UDV
Built-in Ethernet port
QCPU
Generic term for QnUDE(H)CPUand High-speed Universal model QCPU
Built-in Ethernet port
LCPU
Generic term for L02,L02-P,L06,L06-P,L26,L26-P,L26-BT,L26-PBT
QCPU (Q mode)
Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant
CPU, and Universal model QCPU
LCPU
Generic term for L02S, L02S-P, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT
FXCPU
Generic term for FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S,
FX3G,FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC
RCPU
Generic term for R04, R08, R16, R32, and R120
CPU module
Generic term for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and FXCPU
Ethernet Built-in CPU
Generic term for Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
Display module
A module with LCD to be mounted to LCPU
A - 35
Generic term and
abbreviation
Description
Generic term for the following:
Base unit/Block
• base unit
FXGP(WIN)
Abbreviation for SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
C24
Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, LJ71C24,
and LJ71C24-R2
ACPU
Generic term for A2A, A2A-S1, A3A, A2AP21/R21, A2AP21/R21-S1, A3AP21/R21, A2U, A2U-S1,
A3U, A4U, A2US, A2US-S1, A2USH-S1, Q02(H)-A, and Q06H-A
QnACPU
Generic term for Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, Q2ASH-S1, Q2A, Q3A, and Q4A
Q series C24
Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and QJ71C24N-R4
CC-Link IE Controller
Network module
Generic term for QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX
CC-Link IE Field
Network master/local
module
Generic term for QJ71GF11-T2, LJ71GF11-T2
CC IE Field head
module
Generic term for LJ72GF15-T2
SSCNET III/H head
module
Generic term for LJ72MS15
Communication head
module
Generic term for CC IE Field head module and SSCNET III/H head module
CC-Link IE
Generic term for CC-Link IE Controller Network and CC-Link IE Field Network
• a composition of modules from the power supply module to the END cover in MELSEC-L series
MELSECNET/H network Generic term for QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11,
module
QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15, and QJ71NT11B
QJ72LP25
Generic term for QJ72LP25-25 and QJ72LP25G
Remote I/O module
Generic term for QJ72LP25 and QJ72BR15
Ethernet adapter module Generic term for NZ2GF-ETB
Ethernet adapter
Generic term for FX3U-ENET-ADP
Q series-compatible E71 Generic term for QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, and QJ71E71
QE71
Generic term for AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T,
A1SJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N3-T, and A1SJ71QE71N3-T
Generic term for AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2,
A series-compatible E71 AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N3-T, and A1SJ71E71N3-T
A - 36
L series-compatible E71
Generic term for LJ71E71-100
Ethernet module
Generic term for Q series-compatible E71, QE71, A series-compatible E71, and L series-compatible
E71
CC-Link master/local
module
Generic term for QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11
Q series CC-Link
Generic term for QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N
CC-Link bridge module
Abbreviation for AJ65SBT-CLB CC-Link - CC-Link/LT bridge module
CC-LinkAnyWireASLINK bridge
module
Generic term for NZ2AW1C2AL
CC-Link IE Field
Network-CC-Link bridge
module
Generic term for NZ2GF-CCB
CC-Link IE Field
Network high-speed
counter module
Generic term for NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
CC-Link IE Field
NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge
module
Generic term for NZ2AW1GFAL
Generic term and
abbreviation
Description
Simple motion module
Generic term for QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16, QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16, LD77MH4,
and LD77MH16
G4 module
Generic term for AJ65BT-G4(-S3) peripheral connection module and AJ65BT-R2N CC-Link system
RS-232 interface module
QA extension base unit
Generic term for QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65, and QA68B
LA1S extension base
unit
Generic term for LA1S51B, LA1S65B, and LA1S68B
CC-Link IE Field
Network communication
unit
Generic term for GT15-J71GF13-T2
MELSECNET/H board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21S-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, Q80BD-J71LP2125, Q80BD-J71BR11
CC-Link IE Controller
Network board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX, Q81BD-J71GP21-SX, Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX, Q80BDJ71GP21-SX
Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board
CC-Link IE Field
Network board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71GF11-T2, Q80BD-J71GF11-T2
Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Field Network interface board
Ethernet board
Generic term for Ethernet cards for personal computer and Ethernet interface boards
CC-Link board
Generic term for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link Ver.2 board
CC-Link Ver.1 board
Generic term for A80BD-J61BT11 and A80BD-J61BT13
CC-Link Ver.2 board
Generic term for Q81BD-J61BT11, Q80BD-J61BT11N
GOT
Generic term for Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 series, GOT-A900 series,
and GOT-F900 series
MELSAP3
Abbreviation for the SFC function in MELSAP3 display format
MELSAP-L
Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions
format)
SFC
Generic term for MELSAP3, MELSAP-L, and FX series SFC
MELSOFT Library
Generic term for components (FB library, sample programs, drawing data) which provide easy
operation of programmable controller related modules and GOTs, and various devices that are
connected to them
Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative to obtain components of
MELSOFT Library.
Windows® 8 or later
Generic term for Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10
A - 37
■
TERMS
The following are the terms used in this manual.
Term
A - 38
Description
Execution program
A compiled program created in a project with labels
A program that can be executed on a programmable controller CPU
Actual device
An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels, or a device that is not
described using a label
Common instruction
Generic term for sequence instructions, basic instructions, application instructions, data link
instructions, multiple CPU dedicated instructions, and multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instructions
Special instruction
Generic term for module dedicated instructions, PID control instructions, socket communication
function instructions, built-in I/O function instructions, and data logging function instructions
Simple project
Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text
Without labels
Generic term for projects created without selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects
With labels
Generic term for projects created with selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects
Structured project
Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured
Text/Structured Ladder/FBD
Project without labels
Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels
Project with labels
Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects
Project with security
Generic term for projects whose securities are set
New project creation with
data read from
programmable controller
CPU
A function to create a new project with data read from a programmable controller CPU without
opening a project
Direct connection
A connection method using a USB/serial/Ethernet port of a programmable controller CPU
Slave station
Stations other than the master station (local stations, remote I/O stations, remote device stations,
intelligent device stations, etc.)
Redundant system
A system configured using Redundant CPUs
Connective system
A Redundant CPU selected on the Transfer Setup screen
Target system
The other Redundant CPU connected to the connective system with a tracking cable
System A
A system to which system A connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system
System B
A system to which system B connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system
Control system
A system that performs program operation, system control, and network communication in the
redundant system
Standby system
A backup system to continue system control in case of a module failure or an error in the control
system in the redundant system
Backup mode
A mode for normal operation of the redundant system
Separate mode
A mode for maintaining a system (partial modification of a program, replacement of modules
mounted on the main base unit) without stopping the control during an operation of the redundant
system
Debug mode
A mode for performing a debug using a single system prior to a redundant system operation
iQSS-compatible device
A device that supports iQ Sensor Solution
Profile
A data in which iQSS-compatible device information (such as module models) is stored
1.2
Features
1-4
1.3
List of Functions
1-9
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
1-2
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Product Overview
SETTING
PARAMETERS
1.1
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
This chapter explains an overview of GX Works2.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-1
1 OVERVIEW
1.1
Product Overview
GX Works2 is a programming tool for designing, debugging, and maintaining programs on Windows®.
GX Works2 has improved functionality and operability, with easier-to-use features compared to
existing GX Developer.
■
Main functions of GX Works2
GX Works2 can manage programs and parameters in units of projects for each programmable
controller CPU.
The following explains the main functions.
● Programming
Programs can be created in a Simple project in a similar way with existing GX Developer. Structured
programming in a Structured project is also available with GX Works2.
● Setting parameters
Programmable controller parameter and network parameter can be set with GX Works2.
Intelligent function module parameter can be set as well.
● Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU
Created sequence programs can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU using the
Read from PLC/Write to PLC function. Also, using the Online program change function, the
sequence programs can be changed even when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
Reading data
Writing data
1-2
1.1 Product Overview
1
● Monitoring/debugging
OVERVIEW
Created sequence programs can be written to the programmable controller CPU and device value at
operation can be monitored online/offline.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Programs can be monitored and debugged.
The current error status and error history of the programmable controller CPU can be diagnosed.
Using the diagnostics function, the recovery work is completed in a short time.
Using the System monitor function (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU), detailed information on such as
intelligent function modules can be obtained. This helps to shorten the recovery work time at error
occurrence.
Diagnosing the programmable controller
CPU status (PLC diagnostics screen)
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● Diagnostics
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Diagnosing the
programmable controller
CPU status
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1-3
1 OVERVIEW
1.2
Features
This section explains the features of GX Works2.
■
Project types in GX Works2
In GX Works2, the project type can be selected from either of Simple project or Structured project.
● Simple project
The Simple project creates sequence programs using instructions for programmable controller CPU.
Programs in a Simple project can be created in a similar way to existing GX Developer.
Programming without labels and label programming are supported as in GX Developer.
Program file
Program MAIN
Program SUB1
Program SUB2
Programs are created using programmable controller
CPU instructions.
Created programs can be operated as sequence
programs.
Programming in a similar way with existing
GX Developer is possible.
● Structured project
In a Structured project, programs can be created by structured programming.
By segmenting a whole control process program into common program parts, highly manageable
and usable programming (structured programming) is possible.
Only label programming is supported.
POU
Function block 1
Function block 2
Program file
Program block A
Program MAIN
Program block B
Program block C
Function 1
Program block D
Function 2
Program block E
Program SUB1
Sequence programs are created
by combining POUs (Program
Organization Units).
1-4
1.2 Features
1
Programming using labels
Using the label programming, programs can be created without regard for the device numbers.
By compiling a program created with the label programming, devices are automatically assigned and
the program becomes available as an actual program.
Created global labels can be utilized for other programs.
OVERVIEW
■
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Created labels can be
utilized for other programs.
In addition, global labels can be registered as system labels and be shared within iQ Works compliant
products (GX Works2, MT Developer2, and GT Designer3).
For details of system labels, refer to the following manual.
(iQ Works Beginner's Manual)
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1-5
1 OVERVIEW
■
Enhanced use of program assets
Projects created with existing GX Developer can be utilized in a Simple project. Utilizing the past assets
improves the efficiency of program design.
<GX Developer>
<GX Works2>
Project created
with GX Developer
Can be used in
GX Works2.
■
Sharing Program Organization Unit (POU) registered as libraries
In a Structured project, programs, global labels, and structures frequently used can be registered as
user libraries. Utilizing these user libraries reduces time required for creating programs.
Project A
Project B
Project C
Library file
1-6
Project D
1.2 Features
1
Wide variety of programming languages
The wide variety of programming languages available with GX Works2 enables to select the optimum
programming language according to control.
<Sequential Function Chart>
Programming to clarify the procedure
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
<Ladder Diagram>
Programming similar to existing GX Developer
OVERVIEW
■
<Structured Text>
Programming in a text language similar to
C language
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
<Structured Ladder>
Programming a ladder diagram graphically
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
ST programs can be used on the ladder editor of GX Works2 using the Inline structured text function.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1-7
1 OVERVIEW
■
Other features
● Offline debugging
Offline debugging using the simulation function is possible with GX Works2. This enables debugging
to ensure the normal operation of created sequence programs without connecting GX Works2 to the
programmable controller CPU.
Simulation function
Connecting to the
programmable
controller is unnecessary.
Without connecting to the programmable controller CPU, programs can
be monitored and debugged in the same way with debugging by the
programmable controller CPU.
● The screen layout can be customized to the user's preference
Use dockable windows to change the screen layout of GX Works2.
Screen layout can be
changed.
1-8
1.3 List of Functions
This section shows the list of functions of GX Works2.
The functions are divided into common functions available (Project, Online, Debug, Diagnostics, Tool,
Window, and Help) and functions used for each editing or setting target (Edit, Find/Replace, Compile,
and View).
For (Simple), (FB), (Structured), (Intelligent), and (iQSS) indicated in the Reference column, refer to
the following manuals respectively:
(Simple)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(FB)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
(iQSS)
… iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
OVERVIEW
1
List of Functions
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1.3
List of functions common to Simple project and Structured
project
This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project.
Project (common function)
Reference
New
Create a new project.
Section 4.2.1
Open
Open an existing project.
Section 4.2.2
Close
Close the open project.
Section 4.2.6
Save
Save the project.
Save As
Name and save the project.
Compress/Unpack
Section 4.2.3
–
Compress
Compress and save a project.
Unpack
Decompress a compressed project.
Section 4.2.4
Delete
Delete an existing project.
Section 4.2.5
Verify
Verify between two project data.
Section 4.2.7
Project Revision
–
Revision Entry
Register the project change history.
Section 4.6.1
Revision List
Display the list of project change history.
Section 4.6.2
Change PLC Type
Change the programmable controller CPU type.
Section 4.2.8
Change Project Type
Change the project type from Simple project (without labels) to
Simple project (with labels), or from Simple project (with labels)
to Structured project.
Section 4.5
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
List of common functions
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
■
4
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
1.3.1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1-9
1 OVERVIEW
Project (common function)
Object
–
New
Add data to the project.
Section 4.3.1
Rename
Rename the selected data.
Section 4.3.3
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Section 4.3.4
Copy
Copy the selected data.
Paste
Paste the copied data.
Set as Default Connection
Specify data in selected connection destination as a connection
destination for regular use.
Section 14.1.3
Property
Display the selected data properties.
Section 4.3.6
Intelligent Function Module
Section 4.3.2
–
New Module
Add new intelligent function module data.
Delete Module
Delete intelligent function module data.
Property
Display properties of the intelligent function module data.
Save the Positioning Module Data
Save data of the positioning module selected on the Project
view to a file.
Read from the Positioning Module Data
Read data from the positioning module and apply it to the
positioning module selected on the Project view.
Save GX Configurator-QP Data
Save the positioning module data in GX Configurator-QP
format.
Import GX Configurator-QP Data
Read a project created with GX Configurator-QP.
Intelligent Function Module Parameter
List
Display a list of set/unset parameters of the intelligent function
module.
Save/Read FX Special Module Data
(Intelligent)
–
Read new FX Special Module Data
Read a data created with the setting tool for special module
(intelligent function module), and add new data.
Save FX Special Module Data
Save a data of the special module (intelligent function module)
selected on the Project view in the format of the setting tool.
Read from FX Special Module Data
Read a data created with the setting tool for a special module
(intelligent function module), and reflect it to the positioning
module selected on the Project view.
Open Other Data
(Intelligent)
–
Open Other Project
Open a project created with GX Developer.
Section 4.7.1
Read ASC Format File
Read an ASC format file.
Section 4.7.2
Save the open project in GX Developer format.
Section 4.8
Export to GX Developer Format File
Library
1 - 10
Reference
–
Create
Create a new library.
(Structured)
Install
For Simple projects (with labels), import an FB library to the
project.
For Structured projects, import a created library to the project.
(FB)
(Structured)
Export FB to Library (Project)
Export FBs to other project
Deinstall
Delete the library from the project.
Reload
Update the library imported to the project.
Rename
Rename the library.
Open
Enable editing of the library.
Close
Disable editing of the library.
Change Password
Set a password for the library.
Save As
Name and save the project.
Save
Save the library file.
Help
Display help information of the library.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
(FB)
(Structured)
1.3 List of Functions
Project (common function)
User Management
Section 4.10.1
Section 4.10.2
Data Security Setting
Set the access authorization of each user related to reading/
writing data.
Section 4.10.4
Soft Security Key Management
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock a
programmable controller CPU.
Section 4.11
Batch print multiple data in the project.
Section 11.3
Print Preview
Display the print preview of data to be batch printed.
Section 11.6
Print Window
Print the open screen.
Section 11.7
Print Window Preview
Display the print preview of the open screen.
Section 11.9
Printer Setup
Change the printer settings.
Section 11.2
(Recently used files 1 to 4)
Display the recently used GX Works2 project paths, and open
the selected project.
–
Start GX Developer
Start GX Developer from GX Works2.
Section 4.9
Exit
Exit GX Works2.
Section 3.1
Edit (common function)
Reference
Restore the processing deleted with [Undo].
Cut
Cut the selected data.
Copy
Copy the selected data.
Paste
Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.
Find/Replace (common function)
4
–
Reference
Cross Reference
Display the usage of selected device or label.
Section 10.1
Device List
Display the usage of devices.
Section 10.2
Find Device
Search a device/label in the program.
Section 10.3.1
Find Instruction
Search an instruction.
Find Contact or Coil
Search a contact or coil corresponding to the specified device.
Section 10.3.2
Find String
Search a string.
Section 10.3.3
Replace Device
Replace a device/label in the program.
Section 10.3.1
Replace Instruction
Replace an instruction.
Section 10.3.2
Replace String
Replace a string.
Section 10.3.3
Change Open/Close Contact
Change an open contact to a closed contact, or change a
closed contact to an open contact.
Section 10.3.4
Device Batch Replace
Batch-replace devices with the specified device.
Register to Device Batch Replace
Register selected devices on the Device Batch Replace screen.
Compile (common function)
Build
Convert/compile a program being edited.
Online Program Change
Write sequence programs to a programmable controller CPU
after the conversion/compilation.
Rebuild All
Convert/compile all programs in the project.
Section 10.3.5
Reference
Section 5.4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Redo
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Restore the previous processing status.
3
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Undo
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Section 4.10.2
Manage user information of the project.
Add/delete a user, or change the user information.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Change the password of the current login user.
OVERVIEW
–
Change Password
Print
1
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Security
Reference
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 11
1 OVERVIEW
View (common function)
Toolbar
–
Toolbar name
Display/hide each toolbar.
Display All
Display/hide all toolbars.
Section 3.2.2
Statusbar
Display/hide the status bar.
Section 3.2.6
Color and Font
Set the display color for characters such as labels and device
comments on the work window.
Section 3.2.7
Docking Window
–
Navigation
Display/hide the Navigation window.
Section 3.2.5
Element Selection
Display/hide the Element Selection window.
Select a part such as function block and function on the window
for utilizing it to a program.
(FB)
(Structured)
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
The conversion (compilation) result is displayed.
(Simple)
(Structured)
Cross Reference
Display/hide the Cross Reference window.
The devices/labels used in the project are displayed.
Section 10.1
Device List
Display/hide the Device List window.
The usage of selected device is displayed.
Section 10.2
Display/hide the Device Reference window. Assignments of
CC-Link refresh devices and link devices are displayed.
Section 6.3.4
Display/hide the Device Reference window. Assignments of
AnyWireASLINK refresh devices and I/O devices are displayed.
(Intelligent)
Display/hide the Watch window.
The monitoring result is displayed.
Section 17.6
Device Reference
Watch 1 to 4
Intelligent Function Module Monitor
Module 1 to 10
–
Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window.
Intelligent Function Module Guidance
Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Guidance window.
Find/Replace
Display/hide the Find/Replace window.
The search/replace result is displayed.
Debug
(Intelligent)
Section 10.3
–
Break Point
Display/hide the Break Point window.
Section 19.6.2
Break Device
Display/hide the Break Device window.
Section 19.6.3
Skip Range
Display/hide the Skip Range window.
Section 19.6.4
Return the display positions of the dockable windows to their
Reset the Window Position to its Default
default.
1 - 12
Reference
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
Section 3.2.4
1.3 List of Functions
Reference
Read from PLC
Read data from the programmable controller CPU.
Write to PLC
Write data to the programmable controller CPU.
Verify with PLC
Verify a project being edited against the data on the
programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.2
Remote Operation
Remotely control RUN/PAUSE/STOP of the programmable
controller CPU from GX Works2.
Section 20.1
Redundant Operation
Remotely control the system switch, operation mode change, or
memory copy on the Redundant CPU from GX Works2.
Section 20.2
Delete
Cancel the password/keyword set to the programmable
controller CPU.
Section 16.2.2
Section 16.3.2
Section 16.4.2
Disable
Temporarily unlock the password/keyword set to the
programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.2.3
Section 16.3.3
Section 16.4.3
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock the
programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.5
Soft Security Key Management
PLC Memory Operation
–
Format PLC Memory
Format the programmable controller CPU memory.
Section 20.3
Clear PLC Memory
Clear the programmable controller CPU memory.
Section 20.4
Arrange PLC Memory
Arrange the programmable controller CPU memory.
Section 20.5
Delete data on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.3
Delete PLC Data
PLC User Data
–
Read
Read the programmable controller CPU user data.
Write
Write the programmable controller CPU user data.
Delete
Delete the programmable controller CPU user data.
Section 15.5
Export to ROM Format
Copy the program memory data on the programmable
controller CPU to ROM.
Section 15.4
Program Memory Batch Download
Transfer the content of program cache memory to program
memory in batch.
Section 15.6
Latch Data Backup
–
Backup
Back up device memory/file register/error history data to the
standard ROM.
Section 15.7.1
Delete Backup Data
Delete the backup data on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.7.2
PLC Module Change
–
Create Backup Data
Back up data on the programmable controller CPU to the
memory card.
Section 15.8.1
Restore
Restore the backup data to another programmable controller
CPU.
Section 15.8.2
Set Clock
Set the clock on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 20.6
Register/Cancel Display Module Menu
Register/cancel menus to operate intelligent function module
using the LCPU display module menu.
Section 20.7
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Section 16.2.1
Section 16.3.1
Section 16.4.1
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Set a password/keyword to the programmable controller CPU.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
New
2
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
–
OVERVIEW
Section 15.1
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Password/Keyword
1
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Online (common function)
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 13
1 OVERVIEW
Online (common function)
Monitor
–
Monitor Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during
monitoring.
Monitor (Write Mode)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)"
during monitoring.
Start Monitoring (All Windows)
Start monitoring the programs of all open windows.
Stop Monitoring (All Windows)
Stop monitoring the programs of all open windows.
(Simple)
Section 17.8
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring the program of the open window.
Section 17.2
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring the program of the open window.
Section 17.1
Change Value Format (Decimal)
Display the current device value in decimal in program
monitoring.
Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)
Display the current device value in hexadecimal in program
monitoring.
Device/Buffer Memory Batch
Monitor device/buffer memory in batch.
Section 17.3
Program List
Monitor the processing time of programs being executed.
Section 17.4
Interrupt Program List
Monitor the number of executions of interrupt programs.
Section 17.5
Change Instance (Function Block)
Select an instance of the function block to be monitored.
(FB)
(Structured)
SFC All Block Batch Monitoring
Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program.
SFC Auto Scroll
Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when
they are out of the screen during monitoring.
Watch
(Simple)
(Structured)
(Simple)
–
Start Watching
Start monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels
and intelligent function module.
Stop Watching
Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels
and intelligent function module.
Insert Next Object
Insert the next device/label right after the selected row of
device/label.
Display Format of Bit Device
Number Display
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
the number display (1/0).
ON/OFF Display
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
the 'ON/OFF' display.
Symbol Display
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
the symbol display (/).
Register to Watch
Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV
1 - 14
Reference
Section 17.6
Register the selected devices/labels to the Watch window.
Read local device data from the programmable controller CPU
and saves them on a personal computer in CSV format.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
Section 15.12
1.3 List of Functions
Section 18.2
Instructions Unsupported by Simulation
Display a list of the instructions and devices used in the
program that is not supported by the simulation function.
Section 18.3
Modify Value
For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs, change the ON/OFF
status and values of devices and labels used in the program.
Section 19.1
Forced Input Output Registration/
Cancellation
Register/cancel the forced input/output of the device 'X'/'Y'.
Section 19.2
–
Register
Register the device test with execution condition.
Section 19.3.1
Registration Check/Disable
Check/disable the registration of device test with execution
condition.
Section 19.3.2
Batch Disable
Batch disable the device test with execution condition in batch.
Section 19.3.3
Display the Sampling Trace screen.
Section 19.4.1
Measure the scan time of a desired section.
Section 19.5
Stop the step execution.
Section 19.6.9
Step Execution
Stop
–
Cancel
Cancel the step execution.
Section 19.6.7
Break Execution
Execute the break execution.
Section 19.6.6
Step Execution
Execute the step execution.
Section 19.6.5
Execution Option
Display the "Execution Option" screen of the step execution.
Section 19.6.8
Break Setting
–
Set/Cancel Break Point
Set a break point at the cursor position, or cancel the set break
point.
Enable/Disable Break Point
Enable/disable the break point at the cursor position.
Cancel All Break Points
Cancel all break points.
Break Point Window
Display the Break Point window.
Cancel All Break Devices
Cancel all break devices.
Break Device Window
Display the Break Device window.
Skip Setting
Section 19.6.2
Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.
Enable/Disable Skip Range
Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position.
Cancel All Skip Ranges
Cancel all skip ranges.
Skip Range Window
Display the Skip Range window.
Diagnostics (common function)
4
5
Section 19.6.3
–
Set/Cancel Skip Range
3
Section 19.6.4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Open Sampling Trace
Scan Time Measurement
–
6
Reference
Diagnose the operating status of the programmable controller
CPU.
Section 21.1
Ethernet Diagnostics
Diagnose Ethernet.
Section 21.7
CC IE Control Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Section 21.3
CC IE Field Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link IE Field Network.
Section 21.4
CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Section 21.5
MELSECNET Diagnostics
Diagnose MELSECNET/10(H).
Section 21.2
CC-Link Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link and CC-Link/LT.
Section 21.6
Sensor/Device Monitor
Monitor the status of iQSS-compatible devices
Section 21.8
(iQSS)
System Monitor
Monitor the system status of the programmable controller CPU.
Section 21.9
Online Module Change
Change modules online.
Section 21.10
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
PLC Diagnostics
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Sampling Trace
2
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Device Test with Execution Condition
OVERVIEW
Start/stop simulation.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Start/Stop Simulation
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Reference
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Debug (common function)
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 15
1 OVERVIEW
Tool (common function)
IC Memory Card
–
Read IC Memory Card
Read data from the IC memory card.
Write IC Memory Card
Write data to the IC memory card.
Read from IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy)
Read data saved by the batch save function of programmable
controller CPU from the IC memory card.
Write to IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy)
Write data to the IC memory card in the format which can be
used for the batch load function of programmable controller
CPU.
Section 15.11.1
Section 15.11.2
Check Program
Check programs of the project without labels and display
errors.
(Simple)
Check Parameter
Check parameters and display errors.
Section 6.5
Clear All Parameters
Delete all selected parameters.
Section 6.7
Check Device Duplication of Global Label
Check duplications of devices assigned to global labels, and
display the result.
(Simple)
(Structured)
Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting
Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label.
(Simple)
(Structured)
Block Password
Set a block password to data.
Section 4.12
Confirm Memory Size
Calculate the size of files to be written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Section 15.10
Delete Unused Device Comment
Delete unused device comments in the project.
Section 9.3.3
Merge Data
Merge ladder programs or device comment data.
Section 4.3.5
Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem
–
Line Connection
Connect the line.
Line Disconnection
Disconnect the line.
AT Command Registration
Register a modem between a personal computer and a serial
communication module, or a personal computer and an
FXCPU.
Phone Book
Set phone numbers of targets such as remote access targets.
Options
Set options for TEL data.
Section 14.10.2
Section 14.10.1
Section 14.10.3
Logging Configuration Tool
Start CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool.
Realtime Monitor Function
Start the Realtime Monitor function of GX LogViewer.
Section 17.9
Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool Start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool.
Section 20.8
Built-in I/O Module Tool
Display the Positioning Monitor screen.
High-Speed Counter Monitor
Display the High-Speed Counter Monitor screen.
I/O Monitor
Display the I/O Monitor screen.
Check Auto Refresh Duplication
Section 19.7
–
Positioning Monitor
Check Intelligent Function Module Parameter
1 - 16
Reference
Section 21.11
–
Check duplications of devices set in the Auto refresh function
and display the result.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
(Intelligent)
1.3 List of Functions
Tool (common function)
–
Configure the offset/gain setting of the analog module.
Q61LD Two-Point Calibration
Setting
Configure the Q61LD two-point calibration setting.
Q61LD Default Setting
Configure the Q61LD default setting.
Create Wave Output Data
Create waveform output data.
Create Conversion Characteristics
Table
Create a conversion characteristics table.
Free Operation Function Setting
Temperature Input Module
OVERVIEW
–
Offset/Gain Setting
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Analog Module
Set the operation expression data.
–
Offset/Gain Setting
Configure the offset/gain setting of the temperature input
module.
Register 2-point Sensor
Compensation Value
Register the 2-point sensor compensation value of the
temperature input module.
Temperature Control Module
3
(Intelligent)
–
Auto Tuning
Execute the auto tuning function of the temperature control
module.
Sensor Correction Function
Execute the sensor correction function of the temperature
control module.
Counter Module
4
–
Execute the preset function of the counter module.
Execute the positioning test.
Wave Trace
Execute the wave trace.
Location Trace
Execute the location trace.
Serial Communication Module
–
Circuit Trace
Execute the circuit trace.
Predefined Protocol Support Function
–
Serial Communication Module
Start the predefined protocol support function of serial
communication module.
Ethernet Module
Start the predefined protocol support function of Ethernet
module.
Built-in/Adapter Serial
Start the predefined protocol support function of built-in/
adapter serial.
Built-in Ethernet
Start the predefined protocol support function of built-in
Ethernet.
Select a language used in the project.
Profile Management
5
–
(Intelligent)
–
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Execute the positioning monitor.
Positioning Test
(Intelligent)
6
Section 3.3
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Positioning Monitor
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
–
–
Register
Register the connected device profile to GX Works2.
Section 4.13.1
Delete
Delete the connected device profile from GX Works2.
Section 4.13.2
Key Customize
Change the settings of the shortcut keys.
Section 3.2.8
Options
Set various options.
Chapter 12
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Preset
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module
Language Selection
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Intelligent Function Module Tool
Reference
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 17
1 OVERVIEW
Window (common function)
Cascade
Reference
Cascade windows.
Tile Vertically
Tile windows vertically.
Tile Horizontally
Tile windows horizontally.
Arrange Icons
Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window.
Close All
Close all open windows.
(Switch to other window)
Display the open window.
Other Window
Display the list of open windows.
Also, open or arrange specified windows.
Help (common function)
GX Works2 Help
Display the GX Works2 Help screen.
Operating Manual
Section 3.2.3
Reference
Section 3.4.1
–
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
(Simple Project)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
(Structured Project)
Operating Manual Common
Display the operating manuals.
Section 3.4.2
Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA
Global Website
Open the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website.
Section 3.4.3
About
Display product information such as the version.
Section 3.4.4
Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Operating Manual (Intelligent Function
Module)
Operating Manual (Simple Project,
Function Block)
1 - 18
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
■
1
List of functions for setting labels
Select all items.
New Declaration (Before)
Add a row above the cursor position.
New Declaration (After)
Add a row below the cursor position.
Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Read from CSV File
Read label settings from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File
Write label settings to the CSV file.
System Label
–
2
(Simple)
(Structured)
–
Reservation to Register System Label
Reserve the selected global label for registration as a system
label.
Reservation to Release System Label
Reserve the selected global label for deregistration of system
label.
Import System Label
Import the system label information and apply it to global labels.
Reflect to System Label Database
Apply the registration-reserved/deregistration-reserved global
labels to the system label data base.
Check Update of System Label
Database
Apply system label information changed in another project to
global labels.
Execute Verification Synchronous with
System Label
Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains it.
Sort
3
(Simple)
(Structured)
–
–
Class
Label Name
Data Type
Constant
Device
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Delete the selected data.
Select All
Sort the labels in ascending/descending order with the selected
item.
(Simple)
(Structured)
Extract and display unused labels.
Extracted unused labels can be deleted in batch.
(Simple)
(Structured)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Delete
Reference
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Edit (function for label setting)
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels.
5
Comment
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Unused label list
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Remark
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Address
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 19
1 OVERVIEW
■
List of functions for editing device comments
The following table shows functions for editing device comments.
Edit (function for editing device comments)
Delete
Delete the selected data.
–
Select All
Select all data being displayed.
–
Import from Sample Comment
–
Special Relay/Special Register
Intelligent Function Module
Utilize sample comments of SM/SD.
Section 9.5.1
Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module device.
Section 9.5.2
Clear All (All Devices)
Delete all device comment data.
Section 9.3.1
Clear All (All Displayed Devices)
Delete all device comment data being displayed.
Section 9.3.2
Read from CSV File
Read device comments from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File
Write device comments to the CSV file.
Hide Bit Specification Information
Hide the bit-specified word device comment of the selected
row.
Show Bit Specification Information
Display the bit-specified word device comment of the selected
row.
Cut The Range including Hidden Bit
Specification Information
Cut data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Copy The Range including Hidden Bit
Specification Information
Copy data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Paste The Range including Hidden Bit
Specification Information
Paste data including hidden bit-specified comment.
View (function for editing device comments)
Text Size
1 - 20
Reference
Section 9.6
Section 9.2.1
Reference
–
Bigger
Enlarge the text display size on the device comment editor.
Smaller
Reduce the text display size on the device comment editor.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
Section 9.1.3
1.3 List of Functions
■
1
List of functions for setting device memory
Insert a row at the cursor position.
–
Section 7.2
Enter a device.
Section 7.2.2
Paste Text
Enter a character string.
Section 7.2.3
FILL
Set the same value to consecutive devices simultaneously.
Section 7.2.4
Find/Replace (function for setting device memory)
Find Device Cell
Search for a device.
View (function for setting device memory)
Display Mode
Display data in binary.
Octal
Display data in octal.
Decimal
Display data in decimal.
Hexadecimal
Display data in hexadecimal.
Float
Display data in real number.
String
Display data in character string.
String (ASCII only)
Display data in ASCII string.
Register
Reference
3
Section 7.2.5
4
–
Display data in units of words.
32-bit
Display data in units of double words.
64-bit
Display data in units of 64 bits.
Setup
Change the number of rows or columns in the editor.
Tool (function for setting device memory)
Read Device Memory from PLC
Read device memory data from the programmable controller
CPU.
Write Device Memory to PLC
Write device memory data to the programmable controller CPU.
Read from Excel File
Read data from an Excel file.
Write to Excel File
Write data to an Excel file.
Section 7.2.5
Section 7.2.6
Reference
Section 7.4.1
Section 7.4.2
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
List of functions for verification result
The following tables show the functions for verification result.
Write to CSV File
Write verification result to a CSV file.
Find/Replace (function for verification result)
Next Unmatch
Move to the next mismatched data.
Previous Unmatch
Move to the previous mismatched data.
View (function for verification result)
Return to Result List
Return to the <<Verify Result List>> tab from the <<Detail
Verify Result>> tab.
Close Detail Result
Close the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab being displayed.
Close All Detail Result
Close all <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs being displayed.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
Reference
Section 4.2.7
Reference
Section 4.2.7
7
Reference
8
Section 4.2.7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Edit (function for verification result)
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
16-bit
■
Section 7.3
Reference
–
Binary
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Input Device
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Delete the selected data.
Insert Row
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Delete
Reference
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Edit (function for setting device memory)
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for setting device memory.
1 - 21
1 OVERVIEW
■
List of functions for executing sampling trace
The following tables show the functions for executing sampling trace.
View (function for executing sampling trace)
Result Position
Reference
–
Move to Trigger Point
Display the trigger position.
Switching Display Items
–
–
Device
Address
Comment
Display/hide the display item titles.
Section 19.4.3
Data Types
Radix
Timing Chart Scale
–
Narrow Scale
Enlarge/reduce the timing chart scale.
Wide Scale
Trend Graph Scale
Section 19.4.4
–
Narrow Scale
Wide Scale
Enlarge/reduce the trend graph scale.
Section 19.4.4
Initial Display
Additional Information
–
Time
Display/hide the additional information.
Program Name
Debug (function for executing sampling trace)
Sampling Trace
Section 19.4.2
Section 19.4.4
Reference
–
Open Sampling Trace
Display the Sampling Trace screen.
Section 19.4.1
Trace Setting
Display the screen on which the sampling trace conditions are
set.
Section 19.4.2
Start Trace
Start sampling trace.
Section 19.4.4
Stop Trace
Suspend sampling trace.
–
Execute Manual Trigger
Generate a trigger at any given timing.
–
Register Trace
Write trace settings to a programmable controller CPU.
(Select this to start tracing by using a sequence program.
A trace starts when the trace start command (SM801) is
executed after selecting "Register Trace".)
Section 19.4.4
Forced Execution Registration Effective Enable to execute the sampling trace from the peripherals.
1 - 22
Display Trace Buffer Condition
Display trace data storage status.
Export CSV Data
Save the trace data (trace settings + results) on the personal
computer in CSV file format.
Read from PLC
Read the sampling trace data (trace settings + results) from the
programmable controller CPU.
Write to PLC
Write the trace data (trace settings + results) to the
programmable controller CPU.
Delete All Data
Delete all information including the device data registered and
the sampling trace result displayed on the Sampling Trace
screen.
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
Section 19.4.5
–
1.3 List of Functions
The following tables show the functions for the ladder editor.
Restore After Ladder Conversion
Return the ladder program being edited to the last converted
status.
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column
Insert a column at the cursor position.
Delete Column
Delete the column at the cursor position.
NOP Batch Insert
Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor position.
NOP Batch Delete
Batch-delete NOPs in the program being edited.
Edit Line
Enter a line at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting
Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
Ladder Edit Mode
2
(Simple)
3
–
Read Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
Write Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".
Read Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
Write Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
Ladder Symbol
(Simple)
–
Open Contact
Insert
at the cursor position.
Close Contact
Insert
at the cursor position.
Open Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Close Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Coil
Insert
at the cursor position.
Application Instruction
Insert
at the cursor position.
Vertical Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
Horizontal Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
Delete Vertical Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
Delete Horizontal Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
5
(Simple)
6
–
Rising Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close
Insert
at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Invert Operation Results
Insert
at the cursor position.
Operation Result Rising Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
Operation Result Falling Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
4
7
(Simple)
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Pulse Contact Symbol
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Delete the selected data.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Delete
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Increment the device number of device in the cut/copied ladder
block and paste it consecutively.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Continuous Paste
Reference
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
OVERVIEW
1
List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
1.3.2
1 - 23
1 OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Inline Structured Text
–
Insert Inline Structured Text Box
Insert an inline structured text box.
Display Template
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or
control syntax.
Mark Template (Left)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
left by selecting the menu each time.
Mark Template (Right)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
right by selecting the menu each time.
Edit FB Instance
Rename an FB instance name.
Documentation
(Simple)
(Structured)
(FB)
–
Device Comment
Edit device comments.
Statement
Edit statements.
Note
Edit notes.
Statement/Note Batch Edit
Batch-edit the statements/notes in the program.
Easy Edit
Chapter 9
(Simple)
–
Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the right
of the cursor position.
Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the left
of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Rightward
Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Leftward
Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete VLine Downward
Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete VLine Upward
Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position.
Switch Open/Close Contact
Switch between an open contact and a closed contact.
Switch Statement/Note Type
Change the type of the statement/note.
Instruction Partial Edit
Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is
in the selected status.
Edit List for Ladder Block
Display/edit the ladder block in list format.
Read from CSV File
Read a list format program from a CSV file and display it as a
ladder program.
Write to CSV File
Write a ladder program to a CSV file in list format.
Find/Replace (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
1 - 24
Reference
Change Module I/O No.
Replace the start module I/O number of the buffer memory
address instruction.
Switch Statement/Note Type
Change the type (PLC/Peripheral) of a statement/note.
Line Statement List
Display a list of line statements used in the program.
Jump
Move the cursor to the specified step position.
Jump to Next Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next
ladder block.
Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the
previous ladder block.
Next Device
Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor
position.
Next Contact
Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the
one at the cursor position is used.
Next Coil
Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one
at the cursor position is used.
Back
Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next
Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution.
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
(Simple)
Section 10.3.4
(Simple)
Reference
(Simple)
1.3 List of Functions
Reference
1
Display device comments or label comments.
Chapter 9
Statement
Display statements.
Note
Display notes.
Display Lines of Monitored Current Value
Open the Options screen and display/hide the lines of
monitored current value.
Display Format for Device Comment
Open the Options screen and set the display format for device
comment.
2
Display Ladder Block
Hide Ladder Block
Hide the ladder block at the cursor position.
Display Ladder Block
Display the hidden ladder block at the cursor position.
Hide All Ladder Block
Hide all ladder blocks.
Display All Ladder Block
Display all hidden ladder blocks.
(Simple)
3
Display the device assigned by compilation.
Batch Device Display
Batch-change the label display on the program editors to the
device display.
Cancel All Device Display
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display
data in the format at the time of data entry.
Display Compile Result
Display the compilation result of the program on the inline
structured text box in a list format.
Zoom
Change the display magnification of the ladder program.
4
Smaller
Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
–
Open Reference Window
Open the reference window of the ladder editor.
Update Reference Window
Apply the most recent ladder program to the reference window.
Open Reference Source Window
Display the source of the referenced ladder editor.
Tile FB Horizontally
Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor
horizontally.
Open Label Setting
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
edited.
Open Zoom SFC Block
Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window.
Move SFC Cursor
Up
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram upward.
Down
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward.
Left
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the left.
Right
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right.
Open Instruction Help
Display the Instruction Help screen.
ST Monochrome Display
Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in inline structured
text boxes.
Online (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Monitor
(Simple)
(FB)
(Simple)
–
6
(Simple)
7
Reference
–
Set a condition to start monitoring.
Monitor Stop Condition Setting
Set a condition to stop monitoring.
Entry Ladder Monitor
Register and monitor ladder blocks.
Delete All Entry Ladder
Delete all registered ladder blocks.
(Simple)
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Monitor Condition Setting
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Open Other Window
(Simple)
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
–
Bigger
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Text Size
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Device Display
Device Display
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Comment
OVERVIEW
View (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
1 - 25
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.3
List of functions for editing SFC diagrams
The following tables show the functions for editing SFC diagrams.
Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams)
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Arrange SFC
Redisplay the SFC diagram.
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column
Insert a column at the cursor position.
Delete Column
Delete the column at the cursor position.
Edit Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
Selection Divergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Divergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
Selection Convergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Convergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting
Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
Ladder Edit Mode
–
Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".
Read Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
Write Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
SFC Step Attribute
(Simple)
–
No Attribute
Set the step attribute to No Attribute.
Stored Coil
Set the step attribute to Stored Coil.
Stored Operation (without Transition
Check)
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE).
Stored Operation (with Transition
Check)
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST).
Reset
Reset the step attribute.
SFC Symbol
1 - 26
(Simple)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
Write Mode
(Simple)
–
[STEP] Step
Insert
at the cursor position.
[B] Block Start Step (with END Check)
Insert
at the cursor position.
[BS] Block Start Step (without END
Check)
Insert
at the cursor position.
[JUMP] Jump
Insert
at the cursor position.
[END] END Step
Insert
at the cursor position.
[DUMMY] Dummy Step
Insert
at the cursor position.
[TR] Transition
Insert
at the cursor position.
[--D] Selection Divergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
[==D] Simultaneous Divergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
[--C] Selection Convergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
[==C] Simultaneous Convergence
Insert
at the cursor position.
[ | ] Vertical Line
Insert
at the cursor position.
Sort SFC Step No.
(Simple)
–
Vertical Line Segment
Read Mode
Reference
Sort the SFC step/transition numbers in ascending/descending
order.
1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams
(Simple)
–
(Simple)
1.3 List of Functions
Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams)
–
Move to the jump source step.
Change SFC Step No.
Replace the SFC step number.
Compile (function for editing SFC diagrams)
Convert Block
Convert a single block.
View (function for editing SFC diagrams)
Program Display
Display MELSAP-L programs.
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Display the SFC step/transition comments.
Zoom
Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram.
OVERVIEW
Move the cursor to the specified position.
Find Jump Step
(Simple)
2
Reference
(Simple)
Reference
3
Text Size
Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
Smaller
Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
SFC Row Setting
Set the number of rows of SFC diagram.
Open SFC Blocklist
Display the SFC block list screen.
MELSAP3 Display
Display SFC in MELSAP3 format.
MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display
Display SFC in MELSAP-L (instruction format).
MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)
Display
Display SFC in MELSAP-L (start conditions format).
Open Zoom/Start Destination Block
Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block.
Back to Start SFC Block
Display the SFC block of the start source.
Open Header
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
edited.
Reset the Window Position to its Default
Return the display position of the SFC diagram editor window
and the Zoom editor window to the initial status.
Online (function for editing in SFC diagrams)
–
(Simple)
Reference
–
Monitor Condition Setting
Set a condition to start monitoring.
Monitor Stop Condition Setting
Set a condition to stop monitoring.
(Simple)
List of functions for editing SFC block list
Jump
Move the cursor to the specified block number.
Find Block No.
Search for a block number.
Block Information Find Device
Search for a device.
View (function for editing SFC block list)
SFC Block List Comment
Display comments of the SFC block list.
Device Display
Display devices.
Open SFC Body
Open the SFC diagram.
Open Header
Display the label setting editor.
1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list
5
6
7
The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list.
Find/Replace (function for editing SFC block list)
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Monitor
(Simple)
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Bigger
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Jump
Reference
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Find/Replace (function for editing SFC diagrams)
(Simple)
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Change to the SFC step/transition comment editing mode.
Reference
(Simple)
Reference
(Simple)
1 - 27
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
SFC Step/Transition Comment
1.3.4
1
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Documentation
Reference
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.5
List of functions for editing in Structured Text
The following tables show the functions for the ST editor.
Edit (function for editing in Structured Text)
Delete
Delete the selected data.
List Operands
Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing
label.
Display Template
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or
control syntax.
Mark Template (Left)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
left by selecting the menu each time.
Mark Template (Right)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
right by selecting the menu each time.
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Text)
Jump
Jump to the specified line.
Bookmark
Reference
–
(Structured)
Reference
(Structured)
–
Set a bookmark at the cursor line. The bookmark is deleted
when one is already set at the cursor line.
Toggle Bookmark
Bookmark List
Jump to the specified bookmark from the bookmark list.
Next Bookmark
Display the next bookmark position.
Previous Bookmark
Display the previous bookmark position.
Delete All Bookmarks
Cancel all bookmarks.
View (function for editing in Structured Text)
Display Compile Result
Display the compilation result in a list format.
Zoom
(Structured)
Reference
(Structured)
–
Set Zoom Factor
Increase Zoom
Change the display size of the program.
(Structured)
Decrease Zoom
Zoom Header/Body
–
Header
Open the label setting editor in the selected POU.
Body
Open the program editor in the selected POU.
Open Header
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
edited.
ST Monochrome Display
Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in an ST editor.
Online (function for editing in Structured Text)
Monitor
1 - 28
(Structured)
Reference
–
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring with the split window format that displays
monitor data of numeric value and character strings.
Start Monitor (bit type only)
Start monitoring only bit type devices/labels.
1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text
(Structured)
1.3 List of Functions
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Select Mode
Use this to place a contact and coil.
Interconnect Mode
Use this to draw a line.
Guided Mode
–
(Structured)
–
Guided Editing
Use this to edit using a keyboard.
Overwrite Mode
In the guided mode, overwrite an element entered at the cursor
position.
Insert Mode
In the guided mode, insert an element entered at the cursor
position.
Line Mode
In the guided mode, use this to draw a line.
Auto Comment
In the guided mode, add a comment entry field at the top of the
added ladder block.
Auto Connect
Specify and connect the start and end points to draw a line.
Recalculate Line
Arrange a line automatically to redraw it.
Insert Row
Insert a row into the ladder program being edited.
Insert Column
Insert a column into the ladder program being edited.
2
3
(Structured)
4
–
Top
Insert a new ladder block at the start of all ladder blocks.
Before
Insert a new ladder block in front of the ladder block being
edited.
After
Insert a new ladder block after the ladder block being edited.
Bottom
Insert a new ladder block at the end of all ladder blocks.
(Structured)
5
Open the Input Instruction screen.
Insert
at the cursor position.
Close Contact
Insert
at the cursor position.
Coil
Insert
at the cursor position.
Jump
Insert
at the cursor position.
Return
Insert
at the cursor position.
Open Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Close Branch
Insert
at the cursor position.
Input Label
Insert
at the cursor position.
Output Label
Insert
at the cursor position.
Horizontal Line Segment
Insert
at the cursor position.
Vertical Line Segment
Insert
at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert
at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close
Insert
at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close
Insert
at the cursor position.
Comment
Insert a comment entry field at the cursor position.
6
(Structured)
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Open Contact
EDITING
PROGRAMS
–
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Ladder Symbol
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
New Ladder Block List
Input Instruction
Reference
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The following tables show the functions for the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
OVERVIEW
1
List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
SETTING
PARAMETERS
1.3.6
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1 - 29
1 OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
Ladder Symbol
Reference
–
Ladder Block Label
Display the Ladder Block screen.
Left Power Rail
Display/hide the left power rail.
Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing
label.
List Operands
Number of Pins
(Structured)
(Structured)
–
Increment
Increase the number of arguments of functions and function
blocks.
Delete
Decrease the number of arguments of functions and function
blocks.
Ladder Block List
(Structured)
Display a list of ladder blocks in a program.
Signal Configuration
–
Configure
Set the type of a contact and a coil.
Change the contact and coil type per execution in the following
order.
Toggle
(Structured)
• Contact: Open Contact  Close Contact
• Coil: Normal  Negation  Set  Reset
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
Jump
Jump to the specified ladder block number.
View (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
View Mode
Reference
–
Label
Display variables by its entered format.
Device
Display devices/addresses in device format. Devices assigned
to labels are displayed in device format.
Address
Display devices/addresses in address format. Devices
assigned to labels are displayed in address format.
Comment
Display devices/addresses in device comment. Labels are
displayed in label comment.
Change Label-Device-Address Mode
Switch the display item in the order of labels, devices, and
addresses.
Change Label-Comment Mode
Switch the display item in the order of labels and comments.
Change I/O Label-Comment Mode
Switch the display item in the order of input/output labels and
comments.
Add Label Display Items
Device
Reference
(Structured)
(Structured)
Display devices assigned to labels.
Address
Display addresses assigned to labels.
Label Comment
Display label comments assigned to labels.
Device Comment
Display device comments correspond to devices or addresses.
All Device Display
Batch-change all labels on the program editors to the device
display.
Cancel All Device Display
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display
data in the format at the time of data entry.
Grid
Show a grid on the screen being edited to display the start/end
positions of a line.
Print Wrap Position
Display the wrapping position for printing.
Display Compile Result
Display the compilation result in a list format.
Zoom
–
Set Zoom Factor
Increase Zoom
Change the display size of the program.
Decrease Zoom
1 - 30
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
(Structured)
1.3 List of Functions
View (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
–
Header
Open the label setting editor in the selected POU.
Body
Open the program editor in the selected POU.
(Structured)
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
edited.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Open Header
1
OVERVIEW
Zoom Header/Body
Reference
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1 - 31
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.7
List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the CC IE Field Configuration window.
CC IE Field Configuration (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window)
Change Module
–
Replace General CC IE Field Module
Replace the general-purpose CC IE Field module to a specific
module.
Change to General CC IE Field Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC IE Field
module.
Change Transmission Path Method
Line/Star
Change the transmission path method to line or star.
Ring
Change the transmission path method to ring.
Supplementary Setting
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block
data assurance per station, and operation setting for returning.
Equal Assignment
Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Identical Point Assignment
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the
total number of set stations.
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
Section 6.3.2
–
Open System Configuration
Section 6.3.2
–
Set the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK
sensor devices connected to a CC-Link IE Field NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge module.
Check
(iQSS)
–
System Configuration
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link IE
Field Network is correct.
Online
Section 6.3.2
–
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC IE Field
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Detect Now
Verification of the Configuration with the Verify a CC IE Field configuration currently displayed in GX
Connected Module
Works2 with the actual system configuration.
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup parameters of a selected slave station to a memory
card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore backed up parameters of a slave station.
Section 6.3.2
(iQSS)
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC IE Field Configuration
window.
–
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC IE Field Configuration
window.
Section 6.3.2
Edit (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window)
1 - 32
Reference
Copy
Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row.
Paste
Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of
stations.
Select All
Select all cells on the list of stations.
Delete
Delete the slave station of the selected row.
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
Reference
Section 6.3.2
1.3 List of Functions
View (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window)
–
Module List
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link IE Field
Network.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
Supplementary Information
Display/hide the Supplementary Information window.
Section 6.3.2
Display/hide the object name in the list of stations.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Object Name Display
1
OVERVIEW
Docking Window
Reference
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
1 - 33
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.8
List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the CC-Link Configuration window.
CC-Link Configuration (function on the CC-Link Configuration window)
Change Module
–
Replace General CC-Link Module
Replace the general-purpose CC-Link module to a specific
module.
Change to General CC-Link Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC-Link
module.
Open System Configuration
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
Section 6.3.3
–
Display the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK
sensor devices connected to a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge
module.
Check
(iQSS)
–
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link is
correct.
System Configuration
Online
Section 6.3.3
–
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC-Link
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Detect Now
Verify the CC-Link Configuration window being displayed
Verification of the Configuration with the
against an actual system configuration. (Automatic detection of
Connected Module
system configuration)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup the parameter of the selected slave station to the
memory card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore the backup parameter of the slave station.
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC-Link Configuration
window.
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC-Link Configuration window.
Edit (function on the CC-Link Configuration window)
Copy
Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row.
Paste
Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of
stations.
Select All
Select all cells on the list of stations.
Delete
Delete the slave station of the selected row.
View (function on the CC-Link Configuration window)
Docking Window
Module List
1 - 34
Reference
Section 6.3.3
(iQSS)
–
Section 6.3.3
Reference
Section 6.3.3
–
Section 6.3.3
Reference
–
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
Verify Result
Display/hide the Verify Result window displayed when the
Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module
function is executed.
1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window
Section 6.3.3
1.3 List of Functions
–
Replace General AnyWireASLINK
Module
Replace the general-purpose AnyWireASLINK module to a
specific module.
Change to General AnyWireASLINK
Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose
AnyWireASLINK module.
Address Auto-Input
(Intelligent)
Enter the address of the slave module automatically.
Check
–
Check whether the set equipment configuration of
AnyWireASLINK is correct.
System Configuration
Online
(Intelligent)
–
Apply the actual system configuration to the AnyWireASLINK
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Detect Now
Verify the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window being displayed
Verification of the Configuration with the
against an actual system configuration. (Automatic detection of
Connected Module
system configuration)
Parameter Processing of Slave Module
Perform the parameter processing on a slave module.
Backup Slave Module
Backup the parameter of the selected slave module to the
memory card.
Restore Slave Module
Restore the backup parameter of the slave module.
(Intelligent)
–
Close with Saving the Setting
Apply the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK Configuration
window.
(Intelligent)
Copy the information of the slave module of the selected row.
Paste
Paste the copied slave module to the last row of list of modules.
Select All
Select all cells on the list of modules.
Delete
Delete the slave module of the selected row.
View (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
3
(iQSS)
Discard the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK Configuration
window.
Edit (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
2
4
Close with Discarding the Setting
Copy
OVERVIEW
Change Module
Reference
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
AnyWireASLINK Configuration (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The following tables show the functions for the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window.
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window
5
Reference
–
Reference
EDITING
PROGRAMS
1.3.9
6
Display/hide the Module List window of AnyWireASLINK.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
Verify Result
Display/hide the Verify Result window displayed when the
Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module
function is executed.
–
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Module List
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Docking Window
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.9 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window
1 - 35
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.10
List of Ethernet Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the Ethernet Configuration window.
Ethernet Configuration (function on the Ethernet Configuration window)
Change Module
Reference
–
Replace General SLMP Module
Replace a general SLMP module to a specific Ethernet device.
Change to General SLMP Module
Change a specific Ethernet device to a general SLMP module.
Check
Section 6.1.3
–
Check whether the set equipment configuration of Ethernet is
correct.
System Configuration
Online
Section 6.1.3
–
Detect Now
Apply the actual system configuration to the Ethernet
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Communication Setting Reflection of
Ethernet Device
Apply the communication setting set on the Ethernet
Configuration window to the Ethernet device.
Parameter Processing of Ethernet
Device
Perform the parameter processing on an Ethernet device.
Backup Ethernet Device
Backup parameters of the selected Ethernet devices to the
memory card.
Restore Ethernet Device
Restore the backup parameters of Ethernet devices.
Section 6.1.3
(iQSS)
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the Ethernet Configuration
window.
–
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the Ethernet Configuration
window.
Section 6.1.3
Edit (function on the Ethernet Configuration window)
Copy
Copy the information of the Ethernet device of the selected row.
Paste
Paste the copied Ethernet device to the last row of list of
device.
Select All
Select all cells on the list of modules.
Delete
Delete the Ethernet device of the selected row.
View (function on the Ethernet Configuration window)
Reference
Section 6.1.3
Reference
Docking Window
1 - 36
Module List
Display/hide the Module List window of Ethernet.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
1.3.10 List of Ethernet Configuration window
Section 6.1.3
1.3 List of Functions
1
List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
Reference
Change Module
–
Replace CC-Link IEF Basic Connected
Module
Replace a CC-Link IEF Basic module with a specific module.
Change to CC-Link IEF Basic
Connected Module
Change a specific module to a CC-Link IEF Basic module.
Set the time out time and the number of times to detect the
disconnection of a slave station.
Link Scan Setting
–
Section 6.1.4
3
Section 6.1.4
Check
Check whether the equipment configuration in a set CC-Link IE
Field Network Basic is correct.
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC-Link IEF Basic
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Section 6.1.4
Communication Setting Reflection of
Slave Station
Apply the communication setting set in the CC-Link IEF Basic
Configuration window to slave stations.
(Basic)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
(Basic)
4
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC-Link IEF Basic
Configuration window.
–
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC-Link IEF Basic
Configuration window.
Section 6.1.4
Online
–
Paste
Paste the copied CC-Link IEF Basic module to the last row in
the station list.
Select All
Select all cells on the list of stations.
Delete
Delete the CC-Link IEF Basic device of the selected row.
View (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
Reference
5
Section 6.1.4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Copy
Copy the information of the CC-Link IEF Basic device of the
selected row.
Reference
Docking Window
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link IEF Basic.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
1.3.12
Section 6.1.4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Module List
List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen
7
The following tables show the functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen.
Sensor/Device Monitor (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen)
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
Close
Reference
–
Set the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK sensor
devices connected to a CC-Link IE Field NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge module or a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK
bridge module.
Close the Sensor/Device Monitor screen.
1.3.11 List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window
(iQSS)
8
–
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Open System Configuration
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Edit (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Detect Now
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
System Configuration
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Section 6.1.4
OVERVIEW
1.3.11
1 - 37
1 OVERVIEW
View (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen)
Docking Window
Monitoring Information
Display/hide the Monitor Information window.
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of CC-Link IE Field Network)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of CC-Link)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
–
Reference
(iQSS)
Reference
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup the parameter of the selected slave station to a memory
card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore the backup parameter of the slave station.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of AnyWireASLINK)
Parameter Processing of Slave Module
Perform the parameter processing on a slave module.
Backup Slave Module
Backup the parameter of the selected slave module to a memory
card.
Restore Slave Module
Restore the backup parameter of the slave module.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of Ethernet)
Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device
Perform the parameter processing on an Ethernet device.
Backup Ethernet Device
Backup parameters of the selected Ethernet devices to the
memory card.
Restore Ethernet Device
Restore the backup parameters of Ethernet devices.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment
1.3.13
Reference
(iQSS)
Reference
(iQSS)
Reference
(iQSS)
List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen
The following tables show the functions for the GX Simulator2 screen.
Tool (function on the GX Simulator2 screen)
Backup Device Memory in Simulation
–
Save
Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation temporarily.
Section 18.2.1
Read
Read device memory/buffer memory saved temporarily.
Section 18.2.2
Execute simulation with the I/O system setting.
Section 22.1
I/O System Setting
Options (function on the GX Simulator2 screen)
1 - 38
Reference
Reference
Start in minimized status
Start the GX Simulator2 screen in the minimized status at
starting simulation.
Section 18.2
Save device memory at stop
Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation automatically
at stopping simulation.
Section 18.2.1
1.3.13 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen
1.3 List of Functions
Create a new I/O system setting.
Section 22.8.1
Open
Open an existing I/O system setting.
Section 22.8.2
Save
Save an I/O system setting.
Save As
Name and save an I/O system setting.
(Recently used I/O system setting files 1 to
4)
Display the recently used I/O system setting file names and
open the selected I/O system setting file.
–
Section 22.8.3
–
Execute I/O System Setting
Execute the I/O system setting and start simulation.
Section 22.6.1
Disable I/O System Setting
Disable execution of the I/O system setting.
Section 22.6.2
Exit I/O System Settings
Exit the I/O system setting.
Edit (function for the I/O system setting)
Cut
Cut the selected data.
Copy
Copy the selected data.
Paste
Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Enable/Disable Setting
–
Reference
Section 22.4.2
–
–
Enable All
Enable all I/O system settings.
Disable All
Disable all I/O system settings.
View (function for the I/O system setting)
Toolbar
Display/hide the toolbar.
Statusbar
Display/hide the status bar.
Online (function for the I/O system setting)
Target Simulator Setting
Set the target simulation with which the I/O system setting is
executed.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Window (function for the I/O system setting)
Cascade
Cascade windows.
Tile Vertically
Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen vertically.
Tile Horizontally
Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen horizontally.
Arrange Icons
Arrange the icons at the bottom of the I/O System Setting
screen.
Section 22.4
Reference
–
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
New
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Reference
4
5
Reference
Section 22.3
Section 22.7.1
Reference
–
EDITING
PROGRAMS
File (function for the I/O system setting)
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The following tables show the functions for the I/O System Setting screen.
OVERVIEW
1
List of functions for I/O system setting screen
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
1.3.14
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.14 List of functions for I/O system setting screen
1 - 39
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.15
List of functions for predefined protocol support function
The following tables show the functions for the predefined protocol support function.
File (function of the predefined protocol support function)
New
Create a new protocol setting file.
Open
Open an existing protocol setting file.
Close
Close the open protocol setting file.
Save
Save the protocol setting file.
Save As
Name and save a protocol setting file.
Reference
Open Other Data
Serial Communication Module Format
Open a protocol setting file of serial communication module
format.
Ethernet Module Format
Open a protocol setting file of Ethernet module format.
Built-in/Adapter Serial Format
Open a protocol setting file of built-in/adapter serial format.
Built-in Ethernet Format
Open a protocol setting file of built-in Ethernet format.
Print
Print such as protocol setting.
Exit
Exit the predefined protocol support function.
Edit (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Add Protocol
Add a protocol.
Change to Editable Protocol
Change the protocol selected from the predefined protocol
library to an editable one.
Protocol Detailed Setting
Set the protocol detailed setting such as the number of retries
of protocol transmission and whether to clear operating system
area (receive data area).
Add Receive Packet
Add a receive packet.
Delete
Delete the protocol.
Copy
Copy the protocol.
Paste
Paste the protocol.
Delete Multiple Protocols
Batch-delete multiple protocols.
Copy Multiple Protocols
Batch-copy multiple protocols.
Paste Multiple Protocols
Batch-paste multiple protocols.
Device Batch Setting
Batch-set devices used in the protocol.
Save User Protocol Library
Save the set protocol as a user protocol library.
Module Read/Write (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Read from Module
Read protocol settings from the module.
Write to Module
Write registered protocol settings to the module.
Module Verification
Compare protocol settings being opened with those written in
the module.
Tool (function of the predefined protocol support function)
1 - 40
(Intelligent)
Setting Device List
Display the list of devices used in protocols.
Register Predefined Protocol Library
Import predefined protocol library provided by Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation.
1.3.15 List of functions for predefined protocol support function
Reference
(Intelligent)
Reference
(Intelligent)
Reference
(Intelligent)
1.3 List of Functions
Select a module to be debugged.
Protocol Execution Log
Display the protocol execution logs and the protocol execution
results.
State Monitor
Monitor signals, communication error information, operation
setting switches, and protocol execution status of the Q series
C24N/L series C24 module.
Window (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Cascade
Cascade windows.
Tile Horizontally
Tile windows horizontally.
(Switch to other window)
Display the open window.
(Intelligent)
1
OVERVIEW
Module Selection
Reference
2
Reference
(Intelligent)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Debugging Support Function (function of the predefined protocol support function)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
1.3.15 List of functions for predefined protocol support function
1 - 41
1 OVERVIEW
MEMO
1 - 42
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
This chapter explains the system configuration, configuration devices, and supported languages of
GX Works2.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
OVERVIEW
1
Connection from I/F Boards
2 - 14
2.3
Interfaces and Connectable Modules
2 - 16
2.4
System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal
Computer
2 - 20
Supported Programming Languages
2 - 21
2.5
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
2.2
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
2-2
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Connection from USB/Serial Port
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
2.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
2-1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1
Connection from USB/Serial Port
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The following shows the possible system configuration for connecting to the programmable
controller CPU using the USB/serial port of a personal computer.
For ACPU, use GX Developer. For details of the use of ACPU, refer to Appendix 14.
Programmable controller
direct connection
(USB communication)
*1
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
USB Cable
GX Works2
(SW1DND-GXW2-E/
SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
*2
*2
FXCPU
(FX3U/FX3UC)
USB Cable
*3
Programmable controller
direct connection
(Serial port communication)
FXCPU
(FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC)
USB Cable
*4
QC30R2
*4
*4
RS-232 adapter
FXCPU
Converter/Cable
*6
*5
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3S/
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC)
Converter/Cable
*7
*7
Cable
*8
Converter/Cable
*8
Converter/Cable
*1 :
Section 2.1.1
*2 :
Section 2.1.2
*3 :
Section 2.1.3
*4 :
Section 2.1.4
*5 :
Section 2.1.5
*6 :
Section 2.1.6
*7 :
Section 2.1.7
*8 :
Section 2.1.8
2-2
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
LCPU
QC30R2
*5
LCPU/
Communication
head module
*6
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/
FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC)
FXCPU
(FX0/FX0S/FX1S/FX0N/
FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC/
FX3U/FX3UC)
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3U/
FX3UC)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
1
Via Serial communication
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
RS-232
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module
OVERVIEW
C24
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
2
GX Works2
(SW1DND-GXW2-E/
SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
*1
Converter/Cable
CC-Link
G4 module
Converter/Cable
Remote station
Via modem
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Via MELSECNET/H
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module
Control station
Remote module
3
Modem
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Via CC-Link(G4)
Cable included in modem package
Modem
Cable included in modem package
QCPU (Q mode)
4
C24
LCPU
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/
FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC)
*3
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
Cable
GOT
5
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Via GOT
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
*2
FXCPU
Section 2.1.11
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Section 2.1.10
*3 :
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Section 2.1.9
*2 :
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
2-3
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.1
USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and
communication head module)
The following table shows USB cables available for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head
module.
Product name
USB cable
*1 :
*2 :
Type
USB cable (A - B type plug)*1
USB cable (A - miniB type plug)*2
For QCPU (Q mode) only, except for Universal model QCPU.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU/communication head module only
● Using a USB cable for the first time
Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16)
● Considerations and restrictions
For the considerations and restrictions when accessing a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 14.11.
● Using a USB/RS-232 conversion cable
For checking the COM port number as connecting a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU using such
as USB/RS-232 conversion cable, refer to the user's manual of each cable.
■
Configurations for USB connection
Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
Connection to a programmable controller CPU is not applicable to the configuration examples below.
<Inapplicable configurations>
Connection to several programmable controller CPUs from the personal
computer with several USB ports
Programmable controller CPU
USB cable
USB
cab
le
Programmable controller CPU
Connection to several programmable controller CPUs via USB hub
Programmable controller CPU
USB cable
2-4
USB hub
USB cable
USB
cab
le
Programmable controller CPU
2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with
FX3U/FX3UC)
FX3U-USB-BD
1
OVERVIEW
2.1.2
USB cable (included)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Considerations and restrictions
• For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX3U-USB-BD, refer to the user's manual included.
• When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo box is
displayed. Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● Using a USB cable for the first time
• Install the USB driver.
 FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD USER'S MANUAL - USB Driver Installation Edition
• GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM
port number.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
USB cables (compatible with FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC)
For details of cables, refer to the following manuals.
FX3S Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
FX3G Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
FX3GC Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
(Section 2.1.1 "■ Configurations for USB connection")
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2.1.3
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
● Using a USB cable for the first time
Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16)
GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and configures a USB.
2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC)
2-5
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.4
RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and
remote I/O module)
The following table shows RS-232 cables whose operations have been confirmed at Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
LCPU can be connected with an RS-232 adapters (L6ADP-R2).
Model
Product name
QC30R2
(Personal computer connector: 9-pin D-sub connector)
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation RS-232 cable
● High-speed communication
For high-speed communication (transmission speed: 115.2/57.6kbps), use a personal computer compatible with highspeed communication.
When a communication error occurs, retry the communication after reducing the transmission speed setting.
2.1.5
Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with
FXCPU)
Personal computer side (RS-232 cable)
RS-232/RS-422
converter
Programmable controller CPU side
(RS-422 cable)
For FX1/FXU/FX2C
F2-232CAB
(25-pin D-sub25-pin D-sub)
FX-422CAB (0.3 m)
FX-422CAB-150 (1.5 m)
FX-232AW
For FX0S/FX0/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
F2-232CAB-1
(9-pin D-sub25-pin D-sub)
F2-232CAB-2
(Half pitch25-pin D-sub)
FX-232AWC
FX-422CAB0 (1.5 m)
–
AC30N2A(25-pin25-pin)
FX-232AWC-H
● Transmission speed
When connecting to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC using FX-232AWC-H, select any of 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps,
57.6kbps, or 115.2kbps for the transmission speed.
When connecting using FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, select either 9.6kbps or 19.2kbps for the transmission speed.
● Connecting to FXCPU
Be sure to use equipment shown in the table when connecting to FXCPU.
2-6
2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
● Connecting/disconnecting the conversion cable/converter
When connecting/disconnecting a peripheral device, conversion cable or converter to/from the RS422 interface, be sure to touch a grounding strap or grounded metal to discharge static electricity
stored in the cable or in your body before the operation, regardless of whether electricity is being
supplied or not. After doing this, follow the procedure below.
Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF before connecting/disconnecting a conversion cable/
converter that receives 5VDC power supply from the RS-422 interface.
1. Turn OFF the personal computer.
2. Turn OFF the conversion cable/converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.
3. Connect/disconnect the conversion cable/converter to/from the personal computer and
the programmable controller CPU.
4. Turn ON the conversion cable/converter.
5. Turn ON the personal computer.
6. Start up the software package.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Operation
2.1.6
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
For the specifications of an RS-422 interface conversion cable/converter and the considerations for
using them, please read the following instructions as well as the manuals of each product for correct
handling.
OVERVIEW
1
Considerations for using RS-422 interface cables/converters
4
Connection using function expansion boards (compatible
with FXCPU)
5
FX3U,
FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 only)
FX3U-422-BD
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The following table shows the compatibility of FXCPU with function expansion boards.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
■
FX3S, FX3G
FX3G-422-BD
6
FX2N
FX2N-422-BD
FX1S, FX1N
FX1N-422-BD
Function expansion board
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Series
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)
2-7
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
● PLC parameter
When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2)
combo box is displayed.
Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.
2-8
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
1
OVERVIEW
Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion
boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
The following table shows the compatibility of RS-232 cables with function expansion boards and
special adapters according to the shape and pin configuration of the serial port of the personal
computer.
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3S
9-pin D-sub
FX3U-232-BD*1
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2N
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX1S, FX1N
FX3S
Half pitch 14-pin
FX1S, FX1N
F2-232CAB-1
FX-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1
FX-232CAB-1
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-1
FX1N-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD*1
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-1
FX-232CAB-2
FX-232CAB-2
FX-232CAB-2
3
4
5
FX-232CAB-2
FX0N-232ADP
F2-232CAB-2
6
FX2NC-232ADP
FX-232CAB-2
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-2
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX-232CAB-1
FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2N
FX-232CAB-1
EDITING
PROGRAMS
FX3G, FX3GC
FX-232CAB-1
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX3U, FX3UC
RS-232 cable
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
FX3U, FX3UC
Function expansion board and special adapter
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Series
2
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Serial port shape of
personal computer
FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-2
FX-232CAB-2
SETTING
PARAMETERS
2.1.7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2-9
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Serial port shape of
personal computer
Series
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3S
25-pin D-sub
Function expansion board and special adapter
FX3U-232-BD*1
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2N
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX1S, FX1N
*3 :
*4 :
2 - 10
F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB
F2-232CAB-1
FX0N-232ADP
F2-232CAB
FX2NC-232ADP
F2-232CAB-1
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB
FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
*1 :
*2 :
RS-232 cable
F2-232CAB-1
For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.
'***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series.
FX3GC series are not connectable.
ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● PLC parameter
When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2)
combo box is displayed.
• FX3U/FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH1'
and check the setting.
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, or when using the second
adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
• FX3UC (D, DS, DSS)/FX3GC series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) or FX3GC series, specify
'CH1' and check the setting.
When using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
• FX3G series (14-/24-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting.
• FX3G series (40-/60-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting. In this case, when using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is
connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH1' and check the
setting of FX3U-232ADP, and specify 'CH2' and check the setting of FX3G-232-BD.
OVERVIEW
1
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2 - 11
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.8
Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with
FXCPU)
FX-USB-AW
USB cable (included)
● Using a USB cable for the first time
• Install the USB driver.
 FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD USER'S MANUAL - USB Driver Installation Edition
• GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM
port number.
● Considerations and restrictions
• For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX-USB-AW, refer to the user's manual included.
2.1.9
Connection via AJ65BT-R2N
Use an RS-232 cable complies with the RS-232 standard within 15m.
For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)
2 - 12
2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3G, FX3GC
9-pin D-sub
FX3S
FX2N
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX1S, FX1N
25-pin D-sub
*3 :
*4 :
OVERVIEW
Function expansion board and special adapter
FX3U-232-BD*1
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX2N-232-BD
3
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2N
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX0N-232ADP
FX1S, FX1N
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Series
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Programmable controller side
connector shape of cable
included in modem package
*1 :
*2 :
1
Function expansion board (special adapter)
4
For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.
'***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series.
FX3GC series are not connectable.
ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Set "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab of PLC parameter according to the modem.
For details, refer to Section 14.10.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
2.1.10
Connection via GOT
7
The use of the transparent function of GOT enables the access to a programmable controller CPU via
GOT. (Section 14.9)
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2.1.11
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter)
2 - 13
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.2
Connection from I/F Boards
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following shows the system configuration for connecting to a programmable controller CPU
using an I/F board installed on the personal computer.
For the methods how to install an I/F board, how to install the driver, and the supported
programmable controller CPUs, refer to the manuals of each I/F board.
*1
MELSECNET/H board
Driver
QCPU
SW0DNC-MNETH-B
Programmable controller
on another station
CC-Link IE Controller Network board
Driver
QCPU
SW1DNC-MNETG-B
GX Works2
(SW1DND-GXW2-E/
SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
Programmable controller
on another station
CC-Link IE Field Network board
Driver
QCPU
SW1DNC-CCIEF-B
Programmable controller
on another station
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module
Programmable controller
on another station
*1
CC-Link Ver.1 board
Driver
QCPU
SW4DNF-CCLINK-B
Programmable controller
on another station
CC-Link Ver.2 board
Driver
QCPU
SW1DNC-CCBD2-B
Programmable controller
on another station
LCPU
Programmable controller
on another station
Ethernet board
Ethernet board built-in a personal
computer/commercially available
Driver
Driver supplied
with commercially
available
Ethernet board
QCPU
Programmable controller
on host/another station
LCPU
Programmable controller
on host/another station
FXCPU
Programmable controller
on host/another station
*1 :
2 - 14
Section 2.2.1
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards
1
I/F boards
This section explains applications of I/F boards.
For details, refer to the manual of each I/F board.
OVERVIEW
2.2.1
■
2
MELSECNET/H board
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
• For accessing Process CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version E or later.
• For accessing Redundant CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version K or later.
■
CC-Link Ver.1 board
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
• For accessing Process CPU, use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version C or later.
• For accessing Redundant CPU, use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version G or later.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
2.2.1 I/F boards
2 - 15
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.3
Interfaces and Connectable Modules
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains details of the modules that can be connected from the USB port, serial port, and
each I/F board.
■
Modules connectable from USB port
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the USB port.
● Q series, L series
Programmable controller series
Module model
Q series
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02H, Q02PH, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV,
Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH,
Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q12H, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH,
Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH,
Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
L series
L02S, L02S-P, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT,
LJ72GF15-T2, LJ72MS15
● FX series
Module name
Programmable controller
main unit
USB expansion board
*1 :
2 - 16
Connection
route
Module model
FX-USB-AW*1
FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U, FX3UC
USB direct
connection
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC
USB direct
connection*1
FX3U-USB-BD
As FXCPU uses the serial  USB conversion driver software, specify the COM port number of the RS-232 in the
connection destination setting.
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
■
1
Modules connectable from serial port
Serial communication module*1
QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4
G4 module
*1 :
AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
Programmable controller CPU
module
L02S, L02S-P, L02*2, L02-P*2, L06*2, L06-P*2, L26*2, L26-P*2, L26BT*2, L26-PBT*2
Serial communication module*1
LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
G4 module
FX series*3
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
Programmable controller main
unit
AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
When accessing the programmable controller CPU from a personal computer via serial communication modules, note that
modules that can be connected to the personal computer are limited.
Even if a module cannot be directly connected to the personal computer, it may be usable as the nth module in multi-drop
connection.
For details of the multi-drop connection, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)
<Q series>
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
CH1
Multi-drop connection
Interface
1:1 system configuration
1st module
nth module
RS-232


×
CH2
RS-422/485
×
×

CH1
RS-232

×
×
CH2
RS-232

(Function version B or later)
×
×
CH1
RS-422/485
×
×
×
CH2
RS-422/485
×
×
×
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
LJ71C24-R2
CH1
RS-232
CH2
RS-422/485
Multi-drop connection
1st module
nth module


×
×
×

CH1
RS-232

×
×
CH2
RS-232

×
×
7
Connectable only with an RS-232 adapter (L6ADP-R2).
Connectable only with an RS-232  RS-422 conversion board/adapter.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*2 :
*3 :
1:1 system configuration
5
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
LJ71C24
Interface
4
6
<L series>
Model
3
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Model
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Q00J, Q00UJ, Q00, Q00U, Q01, Q01U, Q02(H), Q02PH, Q02U,
Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q12H,
Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH,
Q26UDH
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Programmable controller CPU
module
MELSECNET/H network
remote I/O module
L series
Module model
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Q series
Module name
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Programmable
controller series
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the serial port.
2 - 17
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
■
Modules connectable from MELSECNET/H board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the MELSECNET/H board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71LP21-25
Q80BD-J71LP21S-25
Q80BD-J71LP21-25
Q80BD-J71LP21G
Q80BD-J71BR11
■
Programmable
controller series
Q series
Module model
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11, QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21S-25
Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Controller Network board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Controller Network
board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX
Q81BD-J71GP21-SX
Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX
■
Programmable
controller series
Q series
Module model
QJ71GP21-SX, QJ71GP21S-SX
Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Field Network board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Field Network
board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2
Q80BD-J71GF11-T2
■
Programmable
controller series
Module model
Q series
QJ71GF11-T2
L series
LJ72GF15-T2, LJ71GF11-T2
Modules connectable from CC-Link Ver.1 board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.1 board.
I/F board model
A80BD-J61BT11
A80BD-J61BT13
■
Programmable
controller series
Q series
Module model
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
Modules connectable from the CC-Link Ver.2 board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.2 board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J61BT11
Q80BD-J61BT11N
2 - 18
Programmable
controller series
Module model
Q series
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
L series
L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ61BT11
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
■
1
Modules connectable from Ethernet board
Module model
Q series
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5,
Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDEH,
Q06UDV, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDEH,
Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
L series
LJ71E71, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT,
L26-PBT
FX series
FX-ENET series
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Ethernet board built-in a personal
computer or commercially available
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Programmable
controller series
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
I/F board model
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the Ethernet board.
2 - 19
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.4
System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains the system configuration when accessing from the personal computer with the
memory card on the personal computer.
● Installing memory card into PC card slot
When installing a Q series memory card into the PC card slot, the following adapter is required.
Product name
PC card adapter
Model
manufacturer
Q2MEM-ADP
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
● Writing/reading data to/from memory card
Using the following functions, even if a memory card cannot be installed into the programmable
controller CPU, data can be written or read by installing the memory card to personal computer.
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Function
PLC series
×
×
ATA card


Flash card
×
×
Q series*3
L series*4
SD memory
card


L series*4
SD memory
card


IC memory card data write/read
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
2 - 20
Windows Vista®
SRAM card*2
Q series*1
IC memory card data write/read (edit
and data copy)
Memory card
Windows®XP
Reference
Section 15.11.1
Section 15.11.2
Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and High-speed Universal model QCPU.
When using a SRAM card, set the driver to CONFIG.NT.
(For details, refer to HELP of Windows®)
When using an ATA card, Windows® recognizes it automatically.
If the ATA card cannot be recognized, set the personal computer in "System" in Windows® Control Panel.
If the driver for SRAM card is set to CONFIG.NT, cancel the setting.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU only
Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
2.5 Supported Programming Languages
Head
FX
FX
This section explains details of the programming languages supported by GX Works2.
: Supported ×: Not supported
Simple project
without
labels
with labels
Structured
project
Description
Ladder
Diagram (LD)
A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and
coils. Ladder diagrams are created in a similar way to existing GX
Developer.
In projects with labels, the Inline structured text function can be used to
edit ST programs on the ladder editor.


*1
Structured
Text (ST)
A text language with grammatical structure similar to C language.
×
*1

Sequential
A graphic language which defines the executing order or condition of a
Function Chart
program.
*2
(SFC)

*1
*1
Structured
Ladder
×
×

Function
Block
Diagram
(FBD)
A graphic language using ladder programs by connecting functions and/
or function blocks with lines.
3
4
×
×

Not supported by FXCPU.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the display format of SFC can be selected from "MELSAP3", "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)", and
"MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)".
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and
coils.
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Programming
language
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
OVERVIEW
1
Supported Programming Languages
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
2.5
2 - 21
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MEMO
2 - 22
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
3
OVERVIEW
1
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works2.
Starting and Exiting GX Works2
3-2
3.2
Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3-3
3.3
Selecting Language
3 - 30
3.4
Help Function
3 - 32
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
3.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3-1
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.1
Starting and Exiting GX Works2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting GX Works2.
■
Starting GX Works2
Start GX Works2.
Operating procedure
• Select [MELSOFT]  [GX Works2]*1  [GX Works2] from Windows® Start*2.
*1 :
*2 :
■
Does not appear in Windows® 8 or later.
Select [All apps] on the Start screen or [Start]  [All Programs].
Exiting GX Works2
Exit GX Works2.
Operating procedure
• Select [Project]  [Exit].
3-2
FX
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started
up.
3.2.1
Main frame configuration
2
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
The following screen shows a main frame configuration on which a work window and docked windows
are displayed.
OVERVIEW
1
Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
3.2
Screen display
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Element
Selection window
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation
window
4
Work
window
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Docked window
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
Status bar
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.1 Main frame configuration
3-3
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Display contents
Name
Description
Display a project name.
Menu bar
Display menu options for executing each function.
–
Toolbar
Display tool buttons for executing each function.
Section 3.2.2
Work window
A main screen used for operations such as
programming, parameter setting, and monitoring
Section 3.2.3
Docking window
A sub screen to support operations performed on a
work window
Section 3.2.4
Navigation
Display contents of a project in tree format.
–
Section 3.2.5
Element Selection
Display a list of functions (such as function blocks)
used for programming.
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured Project)
Output
Display compilation and check results (errors and
warnings).
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Simple Project)
(Structured Project)
Cross Reference
Display cross reference results.
Section 10.1
Device List
Device Reference
Display the device list.
Section 10.2
Display assignments of refresh devices and link
devices specified for the CC-Link parameter.
Section 6.3.4
Display assignments of refresh devices and I/O
devices specified for the AnyWireASLINK
parameter.
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Intelligent Function Module)
Watch 1 to 4
A screen used for monitoring and changing current
device values.
Intelligent Function Module
Monitor 1 to 10
Screens used for monitoring intelligent function
modules.
Find/Replace
A screen used for searching and replacing character
strings in the project.
Section 10.3
Debug
A screen used for setting the debug which uses the
simulation function.
Section 19.6.2
Section 19.6.3
Section 19.6.4
Status bar
Display information about a project being edited.
Section 3.2.6
● When the focus point is not indicated on the screen
To display the focus point, set the Windows Control Panel settings.
(Example)
1)
3-4
Reference
Title bar
Open "Ease of Access Center" from Windows® Control Panel.
2)
Select "Make the keyboard easier to use".
3)
Select "Underline keyboard shortcuts and access keys".
3.2.1 Main frame configuration
Section 17.6
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Intelligent Function Module)
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Toolbars
A toolbar is a block of on-screen buttons for executing frequently-used functions included in a menu.
(Appendix 1)
The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user.
2
Displaying/hiding toolbars
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
■
OVERVIEW
3.2.2
Select a toolbar to be displayed.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Toolbar]  [(toolbar name)].
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.2 Toolbars
3-5
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Docking/floating toolbars
Switch the display format (docked/floating) of a toolbar.
● Floating a toolbar
Display a toolbar floating from the main frame.
Operation
• Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display.
Drag and drop
3-6
3.2.2 Toolbars
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
● Docking a toolbar
Display a toolbar docked to the main frame.
OVERVIEW
Operation
• Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Drag and drop
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
● Method for docking a toolbar at the original position
To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position, double-click on the title bar of the toolbar.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.2 Toolbars
3-7
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Displaying/hiding all toolbars
Display/hide all toolbars that are set to be displayed.
The display setting of toolbar can be saved by performing the following operation.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Toolbar]  [Display All].
The standard toolbars and all other toolbars are displayed.*1
The changes of toolbar positions and the display setting of displaying/hiding toolbars are
maintained.
*1 :
Inactive toolbars are included. Toolbars of inapplicable functions are grayed out.
<When the [Display All] function is enabled>
When the [Display All] function is disabled while all toolbars are displayed, only the active toolbars
are displayed.
<When the [Display All] function is disabled>
3-8
3.2.2 Toolbars
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
■
1
Customizing toolbars
OVERVIEW
Set the types of tool buttons to be displayed on each toolbar.
Operating procedure
1. Select the Toolbar options button ( )  [Add or Remove Buttons].
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
A list of tool buttons is displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Select the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen.
The selected tool buttons are displayed on the screen.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
The toolbar configuration returns to the default when [Reset Toolbar] is selected.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Restrictions
● Restrictions when customizing toolbars
The type of tool buttons for the following toolbars cannot be set.
• Monitor status
• Debug function
• Sampling trace
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.2 Toolbars
3-9
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Displaying editing screens with the toolbar
For Simple projects only, editing screens can be displayed with the toolbar.
Screen display
Select [View]  [Toolbar]  [Docking Window/Switch Project Data].
Data type
Data name
Operating procedure
1. Select a data type to be displayed.
2. Select a data name to be displayed.
The editing screen of the selected data name is displayed.
● Display icon (
)
The editing screen of the selected data type and data name can be displayed by clicking
3 - 10
3.2.2 Toolbars
.
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Work windows
A work window is a main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and
monitoring in GX Works2.
Screen display
2
Tooltip
Scroll button
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Tab
OVERVIEW
3.2.3
Switching button
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Display contents
Item
Description
Become active when selected.
The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs.
The window(s) can be closed from the menu displayed by right-clicking the tab. In the other way, the
5
on the tab.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
active window can be closed by clicking
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Tab
Right-click
Display a brief explanation when the cursor is placed on the selected tab.
Scroll button
Scroll the tab display to the left and right.
Display hidden tabs.
Switching button
Display the list of windows being displayed.
Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top.
Display windows
Display screens such as the program editor, label setting editor, and monitoring screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Tooltip
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 11
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Maximizing/minimizing screens
Maximize/minimize the screen size on the work window.
● Maximizing the screen
Operation
• Click the Maximize button (
).
Click
3 - 12
3.2.3 Work windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
● Minimizing the screen
• Click the Minimize button (
OVERVIEW
Operation
).
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Click
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
● Restoring the screen size
to return the maximized/minimized screen to its previous size.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Click
Click
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 13
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Arranging screens
Arrange screens to display on the work window.
● Cascading screens
Operation
• Select [Window]  [Cascade].
● Tiling screens vertically
Operation
• Select [Window]  [Tile Vertically].
3 - 14
3.2.3 Work windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
● Tiling screens horizontally
OVERVIEW
Operation
• Select [Window]  [Tile Horizontally].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
● Arranging icons (minimized windows) at the bottom of the work window
5
Operation
EDITING
PROGRAMS
• Select [Window]  [Arrange Icons].
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 15
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Arranging/displaying windows
Display a list of open windows, and also open and arrange specified windows.
This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open.
Screen display
Select [Window]  [Other Window].
3 - 16
3.2.3 Work windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Docking windows
■
OVERVIEW
This section explains the operations common to dock windows.
Displaying/Hiding dockable windows
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Display/hide a dockable window.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [(target item)].
3
Docking/floating dockable windows
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Switch the display format of a dockable window.
● Docked display
Display a dockable window docked to the main frame.
● Floating display
Display a dockable window floating from the main frame.
4
Operation
• Drag the title bar of a floating dockable window and drop it to the guidance in the main
frame.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
3.2.4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
Drag and drop
6
Drag a dockable window to the guidance.
A new tab appears after the window is docked.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The docked window is floated by dragging the title bar to the desired position.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.4 Docking windows
3 - 17
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
● Operation of dockable windows
Docked windows can be switched from docked to floating or vice versa by double-clicking the title bar.
Dockable display
Double-click
Double-click
Floating display
● Changing the tab order
The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping the desired tab to the left or right when multiple dockable
windows are docked.
Drag and drop
3 - 18
3.2.4 Docking windows
The tab order is changed.
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Window minimized mode
OVERVIEW
Minimize a docked window as a tab.
The window minimized mode can be set and disabled by the following procedure.
Operating procedure
Window minimized switching icon
Docked window display in
window minimized mode
Window minimized mode
Only the tab is
displayed in
window
minimized
mode.
Placing the cursor
on the tab displays
the window.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Normal display
2
/ ).
The window is displayed normally
after disabling window minimized
mode.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
■
Resetting positions of dockable windows
Return the display positions of the dockable windows to their default.
The status of display/hide and window minimize mode, and the display size can also be returned.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Reset the Window Position to its Default].
button to perform the function.
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
The following message is displayed. Click the
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
• Click the window minimized mode switching icon (
EDITING
PROGRAMS
■
3.2.4 Docking windows
3 - 19
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.2.5
Navigation window
This section explains the Navigation window that displays the contents of a project in tree format.
Operations such as creating new data and displaying editing screens can be performed on the
Navigation window.
(Chapter 4)
Screen display
Select [View]  [Docking Window] [Navigation].
Title bar
Toolbar
View
selection
area
Display contents
Name
Description
Reference
Title bar
Display a title of a view being displayed.
Toolbar
Display tool buttons of functions to be executed on
each view.
View selection area
Area for selecting a view to display.
Project
Display the Project view.
User Library
Display the User Library view.
Connection Destination
Display the Connection Destination view.
–
–
Section 4.2.1
GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Structured Project)
Section 14.1.1
● Color of characters on title bar when uncompiled data exist
The compilation is not completed if the color of the characters on the title bar are red.
Uncompiled
3 - 20
3.2.5 Navigation window
Appendix 1
Compiled
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
■
1
Sorting data
OVERVIEW
Sort data displayed in tree format.
Operating procedure
1. Open a folder on the Navigation window and select the data for sorting.
2. Right-click and select [Sort]  [(sort type)] from the shortcut menu.
The data displayed in tree format are sorted in the ascending order.
When the same operation is performed after sort execution, the sort order is switched between
ascending and descending.
The following table shows the sort types.
3
Description
Name
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the name.
Date
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the date modified.
Language*2
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the programming language type.
POU Type*3
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the POU type.
SFC programs of Simple project, and program files and tasks of Structured project only
Tasks, programs, and FB/FUN of Structured project only
FB/FUN of Structured project only
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Execution Order*1
Sort data in the selected folder according to the execution order.
When a program file is selected, tasks in the program file are sorted according to
the execution order.
When a task is selected, programs in the task are sorted according to the
execution order.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Type
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3.2.5 Navigation window
3 - 21
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
■
Expanding all uncompiled data
Expand all uncompiled data exist on the Project view and User Library view.
Operating procedure
1. Click
on the toolbar.
2. Select [Expand All Uncompiled Data].
All uncompiled data are expanded and become selectable status.
■
Collapsing tree
Collapse tree on the Project view and User Library view.
Operating procedure
1. Click
on the toolbar.
2. Select [Collapse All].
The tree is collapsed.
3 - 22
3.2.5 Navigation window
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Status bar
The status bar displays information about the current project at the bottom of the screen.
Connection
time
Project
language
Project
type
Security information
Programmable Connection
controller type destination
Cursor position
Insert/ Caps Num
Overwrite Lock Lock
Item
Description
Connection time
Display the connection duration of the phone line.
Project language
Display the language set for the language selection.
Display the project type.
Programmable controller type
Connection destination
Display the login user name when security is set for the project.
Display the programmable controller type of the project.
Display the set content of the Transfer Setup screen.
For Redundant CPU, the set content is displayed as shown below.
4
Cursor position
Display the cursor position in the editing screen.
Insert/Overwrite
Display the current mode (insert or overwrite).
Caps Lock
Display the effective status of the Caps Lock.
Num Lock
Display the effective status of the Num Lock.
■
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Security information
3
• Unlabeled : Simple project (without labels)
• Simple
: Simple project (with labels)
• Structured : Structured project
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Project type
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The following shows the information to be displayed.
OVERVIEW
3.2.6
5
Displaying/hiding status bar
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Display/hide the status bar.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Statusbar].
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
A check mark is appended in front of the menu option and the status bar is displayed on the
screen.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.6 Status bar
3 - 23
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.2.7
Changing colors and fonts
Change the color and font settings on program editors and label editors.
Screen display
Select [View]  [Color and Font].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Target
Select the change target work window.
Font Setting
Change font settings.
Auto (Based on system settings)
Select this to customize the font settings.
User settings
Click the
Color Setting
3 - 24
button to select the desired font.
–
Color Setting Items
2. Click the
Select this to use the font settings in Windows®.
button.
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
Select the change target item and color.
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
Screen button
●
OVERVIEW
Displays the Font screen.
The font type, style, and size can be customized.
Some font styles and sizes, however, cannot be set depending on target work windows.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Displays the Color screen.
The color can be customized. The created color is added as "Custom" in the color selection field of
the Color and Font screen. Only one color can be added as "Custom".
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
●
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
●
Displays the Import Color and Font setting file screen.
button to read the file.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Select "Color and Font setting file (*.gcs)" and click the
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
3 - 25
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
●
Displays the Export Color and Font setting file screen.
Set a save destination and a file name for the color and font setting file (*.gcs).
The content displayed on the Color and Font screen is saved on the file by clicking the
button.
●
Resets the color and font settings to default.
●
Applies the changed color and font settings.
● Font setting
Some fonts may be displayed as garbled characters.
Change the setting to another font if this happens.
3 - 26
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2.8
1
Customizing shortcut keys
OVERVIEW
Customize a shortcut key of each function.
Customized shortcut keys can be registered as a template and utilized.
Screen display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Select [Tool]  [Key Customize].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Setting shortcut keys
This function creates/changes/deletes a shortcut key.
Operating procedure
6
1. Set the items on the screen.
Shortcut Key
Category
Description
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
–
Select a category from the group list categorized by window.
Command
Select a function name whose shortcut key to be changed.
Current Key
Display the shortcut key assigned to the selected command.
Press the keys to assign
Specify a new shortcut key to be assigned. Input it by pressing a key(s) on
the keyboard.
Example) +
Display the menu name to which the entered shortcut key is assigned.
When the key is already assigned to another function, the function name is
displayed.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Current
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
■
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3 - 27
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Click the
button.
The shortcut key is assigned.
The assigned shortcut key is displayed in "Current Key".
3. Click the
button.
The shortcut key is created/changed.
Screen button
●
Deletes the shortcut key selected in "Current Key".
●
Displays the Enter Template Name screen.
Register the assigned shortcut keys as a template with a desired name.
The registered template is displayed in "Template".
● Assigning shortcut keys
Up to three shortcut keys can be assigned to one function. The shortcut key displayed on the top in "Current Key" is
displayed on the menu.
● Templates
The maximum file name length for a template is 24 characters.
● Shortcut key (+) for changing current value
To prevent from pressing the + keys by mistake, changing the current value using the shortcut key can be
invalid on the Option screen.
Select "Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter" in [Tool]  [Option]  "Monitor"  "Common".
3 - 28
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
■
1
Registering templates
OVERVIEW
This function registers/deletes a template of shortcut keys.
Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
Select a template of shortcut keys from
.
• Default Setting
Change to the default setting.
• GPPA Format Setting
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the
same setting of GPPA.
• GPPW Format Setting
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming and
SFC programming to the same setting of GX Developer.
• Setting of MEDOC Format
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the
same setting of MELSEC MEDOC.
2. Click the
button.
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The selected template of shortcut keys is applied.
Screen button
●
Deletes a template selected in "Template".
5
●
Imports a pre-saved template file (*.gks) and adds it to "Template".
EDITING
PROGRAMS
●
Saves a template selected in "Template" as a template file (*.gks).
Restrictions
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
● Templates with "MEDOC Format Setting"
Any of the following symptoms occurs when the template with "MEDOC Format Setting" is imported to GX Works2
Version 1.95Z or earlier.
• Shortcut keys of the tool buttons on the "Ladder" toolbar are hidden.
• When the numeric key is pressed on the Find screen displayed by the simple search function, the display on the
element selection field is changed.
• An operation according to the set shortcut keys is performed when a number is entered on the ladder editor, the
Enter VLine screen, the Enter HLine screen, the Delete VLine screen, or the Delete HLine screen.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Template
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Description
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3 - 29
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.3
Selecting Language
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to select a language used for project data (such as device comments,
statements, and notes).
By selecting a language of the project, data can be created in a language other than English.
Data created in another language can be displayed without character corruption.
For restrictions when selecting a project language, refer to Appendix 18.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Language Selection].
< Before creating a new project >
< When editing a project >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Project Language
Select the language of the project.
Save the project (Overwrite save)
Select this to save the project before changing the project language.
2. Click the
button.
The project data are displayed in the selected project language.
3 - 30
3.3 Selecting Language
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Considerations when project language change is canceled
If characters other than alphanumeric characters are used for data names and label names, the project language
change may be canceled. In such case, change data names or label names according to the error message displayed
on the Output window. In some cases, even after the project language is changed, characters other than the characters
of the selected language may be used. Change the characters other than those of the selected language.
For data names which causes the cancellation of project language change when characters other than alphanumeric
characters are used, refer to Appendix 17.1.
● Considerations when changing project language
The project language change function does not change the characters on setting menus and screens.
To display characters on setting menus and screens in another language, use the specific version of GX Works2 that
supports the language.
OVERVIEW
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3 - 31
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.4
Help Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the help function of GX Works2.
3.4.1
Displaying GX Works2 help
Use the GX Works2 help function to learn GX Works2 operations, understand functions, and check
error codes of programmable controller CPU.
The following items can be checked with the GX Works2 help function.
• Help for operations
• Help for instructions
• Help for special relays/special registers
• Help for CPU errors
• Error codes for CPU module communication
• Changes from GX Developer
• List of shortcut keys
• Registered Trademarks and Trademarks
• FX manuals*1
*1 :
For FXCPU, GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU) and Adobe® Reader® version 8 or later are required to view the help. For
installing GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU), refer to the following section.
■ Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU
Screen display
Select [Help]  [GX Works2 Help] (
Tab
3 - 32
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
).
3.4 Help Function
● Displaying GX Works2 help
Enter a keyword in the keyword entry field on the standard toolbar of GX Works2, and press the  key to display
the help items searched by the keyword.
OVERVIEW
1
The help items can also be displayed by the screen title by pressing the  key with the selected screen such as
Navigation window, program editor, and Element Selection window of GX Works2. (Some screens do not support the
 key function.)
For FXCPU, when a special relay (M) or a special register (D) is searched, the head of the section which describes the
special relay (M) or the special register (D) in the programming manual (PDF file) is displayed.
● Instruction help
• Instructions which are supported by the instruction help function are: common instructions and application functions
for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and sequence instructions and application functions for FXCPU.
• The SFC editor is not supported by the instruction help function.
• Operators and ST control syntax are not supported by the instruction help function.
• When the selected instruction is corresponded by multiple items, the Result screen (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) or
the Help Reference screen (for FXCPU) is displayed. Double-click the item to display the help.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Keyword entry field
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
• When the selected instruction contains a special relay or special register, the Help References screen is displayed.
button.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Select a keyword displayed and click the
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
● Error codes when communicating with CPU module
When an error whose error code is in the range between 4000H and 4C09H occurs while communicating with the CPU
module, the following pop-up screen is displayed on the right-bottom corner of the screen.
The pop-up help function is not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
3 - 33
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
● Operation of the help function for FXCPU
• The "Add to Favorites" function on the Navigation window of GX Works2 help, and the "Keyword", "Search",
"Favorites", and "History" functions under [View]  [Navigation] are not supported by the help function for FXCPU.
For the search function, display the programming manual (PDF) and use the search function of Adobe® Reader®.
• If another PDF reader other than Adobe® Reader® is installed, the content of the help function may not be displayed.
In this case, reinstall Adobe® Reader®.
• Use the Adobe® Reader® version supported by operating system and Internet Explorer®.
• When an Adobe® Reader® error occurs while using the help function, the error may be solved by restarting a
personal computer.
■
Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU
To install GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU), double-click "setup.exe" in the "Disk2\DocFX" folder on the
DVD-ROM. *1
*1 :
3 - 34
For GX Works2 Version 1.86Q or later and Version 1.568S or earlier, double-click "setup.exe" in the "DocFX" folder on
the CD-ROM (Disc 2).
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
3.4 Help Function
■
1
Setting options for GX Works2 help function
OVERVIEW
Set options for "Startup", "Window", and "Tab" items of the GX Works2 help function.
Screen display
Select the GX Works2 help menu [Operation]  [Options].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Operating procedure
Restore the previous status at the start Select this to activate the GX Works2 help function with the state of
of Help
previous operation.
Window
Add help icon to the System Tray
when window is minimized
Select this to set the GX Works2 help function in the task tray when the
GX Works2 help window is minimized.
When this item is selected and the GX Works2 help window is
minimized, the GX Works2 help function can be activated from the task
tray.
Set maximum number of window
Select this to set a maximum number of windows to be displayed with
the GX Works2 help function.
Enter a maximum number of windows.
Tab
*1 :
–
–
Switch tab by rolling mouse wheel on
tab
Select this to switch tabs with the mouse wheel when the cursor is on
the tab.*1
Specify tab size
Select this to specify the tab size.
Enter a width and a height of the tab.
When the tab of FX manual is displayed in front, the tabs cannot be switched with the mouse wheel. Select a tab
other than that of FX manual to switch tabs.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Description
–
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
Startup
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
• Set the items on the screen.
3.4.2
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
Displaying operating manuals
Display the operating manuals of GX Works2 Version 1.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Screen display
Select [Help]  [Operating Manual]  [(manual name)].
3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals
3 - 35
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.4.3
Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website
Open the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website in a web browser.
Make sure your personal computer connect to the Internet in advance.
Operating procedure
• Select [Help]  [Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website].
3.4.4
Checking version of GX Works2
Display information such as the software version of GX Works2.
Operating procedure
• Select [Help]  [About].
3 - 36
3.4.3 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4
OVERVIEW
1
This chapter explains basic operations and management of projects.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
GX Works2 Project Management
4-2
4.2
Project Operations
4-9
4.3
Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
4 - 34
4.4
Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
4 - 45
5
4.5
Changing Project Types
4 - 46
4.6
Managing Project Revisions
4 - 47
4.7
Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4 - 53
4.8
Saving Projects in Other Formats
4 - 60
4.9
Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
4 - 61
4.10
Setting Security for Projects
4 - 62
4.11
Setting Security Key
4 - 72
4.12
Protecting POUs in Projects
4 - 81
4.13
Managing Profiles
4 - 89
EDITING
PROGRAMS
4.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4-1
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1
GX Works2 Project Management
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the management of GX Works2 projects.
In GX Works2, created projects are saved in the workspace format or the single file format.
4.1.1
Workspace format
A workspace manages multiple projects at once.
When configuring a system containing multiple programmable controller CPUs, a project needs to be
created for each programmable controller CPU. However, projects in the same system can be
managed by saving projects created in a single workspace in the workspace format.
When using MELSOFT Navigator, save projects in the workspace format.
< System configuration example >
First stage construction for company A
< ABC alarm processing >
Ethernet
< XYZ control >
MELSECNET/10(H)
< Conveyor control >
< Additional processing >
Batch-manage projects in the workspace format
< GX Works2 project management >
First stage construction for company A
Workspace
ABC alarm processing
XYZ control
Conveyor control
Additional processing
4-2
4.1.1 Workspace format
Project
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
■
1
Configuration of workspace and project
OVERVIEW
The following explains the configuration of GX Works2 workspace and project.
<Data in the GX Works2 data folder>
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
<Data in the Workspace 1 folder>
A folder corresponds to the workspace name specified when the project is saved.
Project name folder
A folder corresponds to the project name specified when the project is saved.
workspacelist.xml
A file created automatically when the project is saved.
projectlist.xml
A file created automatically when the project is saved.
4
Do not change or delete workspace configuration or project using an application such as Windows®
Explorer.
If a data name is changed or deleted using an application such as Windows® Explorer and projects
without containing actual data may remain in a project list of the function such as opening a project.
Those faulty projects can be deleted from the project list by selecting [Project]  [Delete].
For copying GX Works2 project on Windows® Explorer, select either following operation to copy the
project without breaking the configuration of workspace and project.
• Copy the entire save destination folder ( above).
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
A folder specified for the save folder path when the project is saved.
Workspace name folder
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Save destination folder
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Restrictions
● Opening a project forcibly by selecting "All Folders"
The following operations cannot be performed.
• Register, Restore, and Verify functions of project revision history
• Security user management
• Automatic project save
However, the above restrictions are invalidated by selecting [Project]  [Save As], and saving the project.
4.1.1 Workspace format
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
When "workspacelist.xml" ( above) or "projectlist.xml" ( above) does not exist in the folder by
performing the copy operation other than above, the copied workspaces/projects are not displayed in
"Workspace/Project List" on the Open screen.
However, note that the project can be opened forcibly by selecting "All Folders" for "Display" on the
Open screen and displaying all folders.
When a file other than "workspacelist.xml" or "projectlist.xml" is missing, the project may not be
opened.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
• Copy the workspace name folder and "workspacelist.xml".
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4-3
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1.2
Single file format
The single file format is a format to handle project files as a single file.
Projects are managed without being aware of the folder configuration and the file configuration by
saving projects in the single file format. Operations such as changing project names, copying and
pasting projects, and sending and receiving data, can easily be performed on Explorer.
<Single file format project (*.gxw)>
● When using MELSOFT Navigator
Projects saved in the single file format cannot be used in MELSOFT Navigator.
Save projects in the workspace format.
4-4
4.1.2 Single file format
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
Project contents displayed on the Project view in tree format are as shown below.
Contents displayed on the view differs according to the types of programmable controller and project.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the reference destinations, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
The following are examples for QCPU (Q mode).
<Simple project (without labels)>
Set various parameters.
*1
3
*4
Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
(Intelligent)
*5
Set global device comments.
*2
4
(Simple)
*5
Make settings for device memory.
*9
Set device initial values.
*8
*1 :
For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed.
*2 :
For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
*3 :
For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*4 :
Chapter 6
*5 :
Chapter 9
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Set local device comments.
*3
*6
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Set an execution type of each program.
Create programs.*7
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(Simple)
OVERVIEW
1
Project
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
4.1.3
6
Section 6.1.1
*7 :
For FXCPU, either of one ladder or one SFC can be created because FXCPU has only one execution program.
*8 :
Chapter 7
*9 :
Chapter 8
SETTING
PARAMETERS
*6 :
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.1.3 Project
4-5
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
<Simple project (with labels)>
*1
Set various parameters.
*5
Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
*2 *3
Set global labels.
(Simple)
Set an execution type of each program.
Create programs.*8
*6
Make settings for device memory.
*10
Set device initial values.
*9
*1 :
For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed.
*2 :
For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
*3 :
For FXCPU, Simple project (with labels), the 'Execution Program' can be divided into multiple programs.
*4 :
For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*5 :
Chapter 6
*6 :
Chapter 9
*7 :
Section 6.1.1
*8 :
For FXCPU, program can be created only by Ladder Diagram.
*9 :
Chapter 7
*10 : Chapter 8
4-6
*7
(Simple)
Set local device comments.
*4
(Intelligent)
*6
Set global device comments.
4.1.3 Project
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
1
<Structured project>
Set various parameters.
*1
*4
Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
(Intelligent)
OVERVIEW
*5
Set global device comments.
Set global labels.
(Structured)
*2
2
*6
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Set an execution type of each program.
Set local device comments.
*3
3
(Structured)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Create programs.
*5
Make settings for device memory.
*8
Set device initial values.
*7
4
For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed.
*2 :
For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
*3 :
For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*4 :
Chapter 6
*5 :
Chapter 9
*6 :
Section 6.1.1
*7 :
Chapter 7
*8 :
Chapter 8
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
*1 :
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.1.3 Project
4-7
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Program Setting
On the Project view, an execution type of a program can be set by right-clicking the name of the program whose
execution type is to be changed and selecting [Register Program]  [Initial]/[Scan]/[Standby]/[Fixed Scan]/[Low Speed]
from the shortcut menu, or dragging and dropping it. The execution type set on the Project view is applied to the
program setting of the PLC parameter.
(Program setting in PLC parameter Section 6.1.1)
Example) Set the execution type of MAIN to 'Scan Program' with the drag-and-drop operation.
<Project view>
<Setting screen for PLC parameter>
Drag & drop
The setting made in the Project view is applied.
4-8
4.1.3 Project
4.2 Project Operations
This section explains basic operations of GX Works2 such as creating, opening, and saving projects.
4.2.1
Creating projects
2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Configure the settings to create a new project.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [New] (
OVERVIEW
1
Project Operations
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.2
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
).
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Operating procedure
Item
Description
Select the programmable controller series for the project.
Type
Select the programmable controller type (programmable controller CPU model) used for the
project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported
by GX Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure
to use unsupported programmable controller type, refer to Appendix 14.
Project Type
Select the type of the project to be created.
Select "Simple Project" or "Structured Project".
Select the language for the program data to be created when creating a new project.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Language
Select this to create a project using labels when "Simple Project" is selected.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Use Label
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Series
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
• Set the items on the screen.
4.2.1 Creating projects
4-9
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Settings for when a new project cannot be created
Set the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set.
• The folder to which GX Works2 is installed.
Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT
• C:\Users\(login user name)\AppData\Local\MITSUBISHI\SWnDN-GPPW2
• The TEMP folder set by environment variable.
Example) C:\Users\(login user name)\AppData\Local\Temp
C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Temp
If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator]. To
activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this program as
an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab.
● Changing data such as workspace name after creating a new project
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such
as Windows® Explorer.
For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
● Common pointer number setting for projects with labels
When a project with labels is created, the last half of the device range of pointer (P) is set for "Common Pointer No." on
the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter. This range is set as a pointer range for the "Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting" function.
For details of the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
● Connection destination
When creating a new project, the connection destination is set to the route set for "Current Connection" in the
previously-edited project. Review the connection destination setting to change the previously-edited project and the
connection destination.
When creating a new project after installing GX Works2 for the first time, the setting is set to access the programmable
controller CPU directly.
● Creating a new SFC project with FXCPU
When 'SFC' is selected in "Language" with FXCPU, the Block Information Setting screen is displayed.
When an SFC project is created with FXCPU, a ladder program needs to be created using ladder blocks to start up an
initial step of the SFC program. Select "Ladder Block" in "Block Type", and create a startup ladder program using ladder
blocks.
4 - 10
4.2.1 Creating projects
4.2 Project Operations
A new project can be created with data read from a programmable controller CPU or an intelligent
function module when the Read from PLC function is executed without creating a new project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported by GX
Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure to use
unsupported programmable controller types, refer to Appendix 14.
Operating procedure
1. Start GX Works2 and select [Online]  [Read from PLC].
The PLC Series Selection screen is displayed.
1
OVERVIEW
Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or
intelligent function module (New project creation with data read from
programmable controller CPU)
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
■
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4
2. Set the item on the screen.
PLC Series
3. Click the
Description
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Item
Select the programmable controller series from which data are read.
button.
The Transfer Setup screen is displayed.
5
For the method for setting a connection destination, refer to Chapter 14.
The Online Data Operation screen is displayed when the setting of connection destination is
completed.
4 - 11
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
● Considerations when creating a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU
When parameters are not read from the programmable controller CPU with data to create a new project, default
parameters are set.
Check the parameter setting.
● Creating a new project with data read from intelligent function module
For the function to create a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU, when an intelligent function
module is mounted on the same base unit as the connected programmable controller CPU, the project data are created
according to the mounted module configuration. Thus, the data of intelligent function modules whose parameters are
not written to the programmable controller CPU are also created.
This function is not supported by FXCPU.
● Creating a new project with data read from Redundant CPU
Data cannot be read from a Redundant CPU by specifying a system, such as "Control System", "Standby System",
"System A", or "System B" for "Target System" of redundant operation.
When reading data from the Redundant CPU by specifying the system, read data after creating a project.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
For the method for executing the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen,
refer to Section 15.1.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
5. Execute the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen.
4.2.1 Creating projects
EDITING
PROGRAMS
4. Set a communication route to access to the programmable controller CPU.
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.2
Opening existing projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Read a project saved on a hard disk of personal computer.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Open] (
).
< Opening a project in the workspace format >
< Opening a project in the single file format >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
The folder can be selected on the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
Workspace Location
button.
Workspace/Project List
Select the workspace or project.
The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Display
Select this to display folders for GX Works2 projects only, folders for GX
Developer projects only, or all folders.
By selecting "All Folders" also displays workspace folders and project folders
copied/moved by the application such as Windows® Explorer.
Workspace Name
Display the selected workspace name.
Project Name
Display the selected project name.
Title
Display the title of the selected project.
2. Click the
button.
The specified project is displayed.
When the GX Developer project is specified, GX Developer starts automatically and the project is
displayed.
4 - 12
4.2.2 Opening existing projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
Screen button
●
OVERVIEW
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.
●
Switches to the Open screen in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to open the existing project in the workspace
format.
• A programmable controller type and a title are not displayed on the Open screen in the single file format.
• If the file save destination path is long, the "Look in" field may be left blank when opening a project in the single file
format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be opened normally.
● Projects saved on the network drive or the removal storage device
Do not open the project directly. Open it after saving it to the hard disk of the personal computer.
4.2.2 Opening existing projects
4 - 13
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
All programs need to be compiled when instructions or application
functions are updated.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels.
Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the
device-assigned labels.
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the
programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including
latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable
controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
● Opening projects being edited by other users
The project being edited can be opened by other users as a read-only project. Note that the following functions cannot
be used.
• Saving projects
• Project revision history
• Succeeding project revision when saving projects with a specific name
• Change PLC type function
• Security function
● Opening projects created in other languages
Characters in a project created in other languages may get garbled when it is opened.
● Open screen
• The Open screen with the initial setting opens a project in the single file format.
3
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
● Changing data such as workspace name
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such
as Windows® Explorer.
For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
● Opening Structured projects
When a Structured project is opened in later version of GX Works2
than the one used for saving the project, the Library Update
Confirmation screen may be displayed.
To modify the project and update the new instructions and/or
application functions, select the corresponding check box(es).
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Switches to the Open screen in the workspace format.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
●
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.3
Saving projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Save a project on a personal computer or another data storage device.
When saving a project, an iQ AppPortal information file can be output by setting the Project Property.
(Section 4.3.6)
■
Saving projects under the specified name
Save the open project under the specified name.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Save As].
< Saving a project in the workspace format >
< Saving a project in the single file format >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Save Location
Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Workspace/Project List
Select the workspace or project.
The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Workspace Name
Enter the workspace name.
Project Name
Enter the project name.
Title
Enter the title of the project.
Include revisions*1
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information.
(Section 4.6)
Include security*1
Select this to succeed and save the security information of the project.
(Section 4.10)
*1 :
This setting can be set only when saving the already existing project with another name.
2. Click the
button.
The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name, project name, and
title.
4 - 14
4.2.3 Saving projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
Screen button
●
OVERVIEW
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.
●
Switches to the Save As screen in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to save the project in the workspace format.
• If the file save destination path is long, the "Save in" field may be left blank when saving a project in the single file
format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be saved normally.
■
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● When saved workspace exists
When the saved workspace or project exists, a folder to which the workspace is saved can be specified from
"Workspace/Project List".
● Number of characters used for workspace name, project name, and title
The total number of characters used for the path name of the folder to which the project is saved, workspace name, and
project name should not exceed 200 characters.
A title can be entered within 128 characters.
● Saving a project contains Structured Ladder programs
If multiple Structured Ladder editors are opened, the project may not be able to be saved.
In this case, start another GX Works2 and save the project by copying all data to the newly-created project.
(Section 4.3.2 "Copying/pasting data in projects")
● Save As screen
• The Save As screen with the initial setting saves a project in the single file format.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Switches to the Save As screen in the workspace format.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
●
5
Saving projects
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Overwrite and save the project being edited.
Operating procedure
)
● Registering project revision when overwriting
By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for registering the project revision is displayed when overwriting the
project.
To display the Revision Entry screen when overwriting the project, select [Tool]  [Options]  "Project" and then
select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History". In addition, the revision title can be
automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
(For details of project revision history Section 4.6)
● Compilation status is not saved by overwriting data
Performing compilation only and overwriting the project, and then opening the project again may cause the project to be
in an uncompiled status.
In this case, overwrite the uncompiled project without performing compilation to save the compilation status normally.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
The data to be saved is overwritten on the existing project data.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
• Select [Project]  [Save] (
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.3 Saving projects
4 - 15
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.4
Saving projects with compression and decompressing
projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Save projects with compression, and decompress projects saved with compression.
Files can be saved with their sizes reduced by compressing the project. Files can also be saved by
separating them in specific sizes. These functions produce easier project data passing.
These functions are not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression
tools.
■
Saving projects with compression
Save a desired project with compression.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Compress/Unpack]  [Compress].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Choose a Workspace to Compress
Workspace Location
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
Workspace/Project List
Select the workspace and project.
Workspace Name
Display the selected workspace name.
Project Name
Display the selected project name.
button.
Choose a Destination Folder
Compressed File Name
Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved, and the compressed file
name.
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen
by clicking the
4 - 16
button.
Include revisions
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information.
(Section 4.6)
Split into volumes of the
following size
Select this to save data in multiple compressed files. Specify the split size in the
range from 1 to 999MB.
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4.2 Project Operations
2. Click the
1
button.
■
OVERVIEW
The compressed project file (*.gwz) is saved in the specified folder.
Decompressing projects saved with compression
Decompress a project saved with compression.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Compress/Unpack]  [Unpack].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Choose a File to Unpack
clicking the
button.
Choose a Destination Folder
Enter the folder (drive/path) to which the project to be decompressed is saved.
The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Workspace/Project List
Select the workspace and project.
Workspace Name
Enter the name of the workspace to which the decompressed project is saved.
Project Name
Enter the name of the project to which the decompressed project is saved.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Workspace Location
2. Click the
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Compressed File Name
Enter the folder (drive/path) in which the compressed file to be decompressed is saved,
and the compressed file name.
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
Operating procedure
button.
The compressed project file is decompressed and saved in the specified folder.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Screen button
●
Decompresses a compressed project file and opens the project.
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4 - 17
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Decompressing compressed files
A compressed file can also be decompressed on the Unpack screen which is displayed by double-clicking the
compressed file (*.gwz) on Windows® Explorer.
● Names of divided compressed files
When a project is saved in divided compressed files, a number is automatically added after the extension in each name
of the second or later compressed files as shown below.
Name of the first file
Name of the second file
Name of the third file
Name of the fourth file
● Decompressing divided compressed files
Select the first file (*.gwz) when decompressing a series of divided compressed files. To be decompressed, all of a
series of divided files must be in the same folder.
● Projects saved with the security check enabled
A project, in which the option of "Enable the security check for the project" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Project"
"Common Setting" is enabled, cannot be compressed.
4 - 18
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
Deleting projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Delete a project saved on a personal computer or another data storage device.
Operating procedure
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1. Select [Project]  [Delete].
The Delete Project screen is displayed.
2. Select the project to be deleted.
3
button.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3. Click the
OVERVIEW
4.2.5
The selected project is deleted.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
● Deleting projects
• Once a project is deleted, it cannot be restored again.
• The open project cannot be deleted. Delete the project after closing it.
• Projects that can be deleted using this function are the projects saved in the workspace format only.
Delete projects saved in the single file format using Windows® Explorer.
● iQ AppPortal information file
The iQ AppPortal information file (*.iqap) is not deleted even when deleting a project. Delete it by using Windows®
Explorer.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.5 Deleting projects
4 - 19
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.6
Closing projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Close an open project.
Operating procedure
• Select [Project]  [Close].
4.2.7
Verifying project data
Verify data of an open project against data of another project.
Verification can be performed only when the programmable controller types and project types are the
same. *1
This function is used to compare the contents of two projects or to locate program changes made in
projects.
To verify data against data on the programmable controller CPU, use the Verify with PLC function.
(Section 15.2)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the project verification.
• Programs
• Parameters
• Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*2
• Device comments
• Device memory data
• QD75/LD75 positioning module*2
*1 :
*2 :
For Q series, data can be verified when the type of two projects are the same.
For L series, data can be verified when the type of two projects are the same.
Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Verify].
4 - 20
4.2.6 Closing projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
Operating procedure
1. Click the
Item
Workspace Location
Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination.
Workspace Name
Display the workspace name of the verify destination.
This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is
specified for the verify destination project.
Project Name
Display the project name of the verify destination.
Title
Display the project title of the verify destination.
2. Set the items on the screen.
<<File Selection>>
Description
Verify Source
Display project data of verify source (data being edited).
Selects the data in the project data list.
Verify
Destination
Display project data of verify destination (saved project data).
Selects the data in the project data list.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
Select SFC blocks in the SFC Block list.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
<<SFC Block Selection>>*1,*2
Select the parameter verification level.
■ Verifying parameters
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
<<Parameter>>*2
*1 :
*2 :
Simple projects only
Not supported by FXCPU.
3. Click the
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Verify Destination
Project
Description
OVERVIEW
button to set the verify destination project.
button.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.
■ Checking verification result details
Screen button
●
Selects all the data displayed in the project data list.
7
●
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Cancels the selection status of all the data selected in the project data list.
●
Updates the data displayed in the project data list.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 21
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Verifying programs
The verification function verifies the data created by the compilation. If the program is edited after the compilation,
compile the program again before performing the verification.
● Data names of verification target data
When multiple data are selected for verification, verification is performed between the source and destination data with
the same name. However, device comments are verified only when their data names are same.
When only one source program is verified against one destination program, verification can be performed even with
different names.
● Security status of project
Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.
● Verifying projects between different programmable controller types
When the number of steps are different between the projects that have the same instructions, the verification results do
not match.
For counting the number of steps required for instructions, refer to the programming manual of each programmable
controller CPU.
● Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Among modules without initial setting such as QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem interface
modules, and AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
● Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.
The following data can be selected as verification targets.
• Parameter
• Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)
• Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
• Block start data
4 - 22
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4.2 Project Operations
■
1
Verifying parameters
OVERVIEW
The verification level can be selected when verifying parameters.
2
Verify only the parameter area set by the user.
All Area
Verify all the area including the parameter area set by the system.
● Mismatch in the system setting area
When a mismatch is detected in the parameter area set by the system in the verification set to "All
Area", either of the following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action according to the message.
Message
The header information of the
parameter blocks is inconsistent.
Corrective action
A mismatch is detected in other than user setting area.
Write the parameters, having been written to the programmable controller CPU, to
the programmable controller again.
When a mismatch is detected on the block number AFFF, perform the following
operation to reset the area which is set by the system.
• Select Project view  Parameter  Network Parameter  Ethernet/CC IE/
MELSECNET. Click the
button on the displayed MELSECNET/CC IE/
Ethernet Module Configuration screen and write the parameters to the
programmable controller CPU.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the
projects differ between the verify source and the verify destination.
The programmable controller CPU operation is not affected.
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
This parameter block can't analyze.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Description
User Setting Area Only
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Item
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The following table shows the verification details for each setting item.
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 23
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Checking verification result details
Details of mismatched data can be checked on the <<Verify Result List>> tab on the Verify Result
screen.
Details of program verification result can be checked for ladder programs only.
Operating procedure
1. Double-click the row of the data to display the details of the Verify Result screen.
The following are screens of project with labels.
4 - 24
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4.2 Project Operations
1
Item
Description
Do not move cursor at [Next
Unmatch]/[Previous Unmatch]
after changing background
color when devices are within
the automatic-assign range for
the row shows devices
unmatched*1, *2
Select this to exclude a verification result which is unnecessary to find and in which
devices are only reassigned to other devices when a program is compiled.
When only devices automatically assigned to labels mismatch, the background color of
the verification result is changed to a different color from other rows.
OVERVIEW
2. Set the item on the screen.
The cursor is not placed when searching for the result using the [Next Unmatch] (
2
)/
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
) function.
For projects with labels only
For program files
)/[Previous Unmatch] ( ).
The cursor can only be placed on the rows with mismatches.
● Detail Verify Result tabs
• The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs.
• The screen returns from the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab to the <<Verify Result List>> tab by selecting [View] 
[Return to Result List] (
).
• The selected <<Detail Verify Result>> tab can be closed by selecting [View]  [Close Detail Result] (
)/[Close All
Detail Result] ( ).
● Verifying device memory data
Device memory data are verified with the actual values.
Even when the display formats of data are different on the device memory editor, the verification result on the same
value will be a match.
For FXCPU, the verification result is as follows:
• a result of internal relay (M) verification includes special device M.
• a result of data register (D) verification includes file register and special device D.
● Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor
Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor are verified as a value 0.
Therefore, if 'device memory data to which devices are not set' and 'device memory data to which devices are entered
without setting device values' are verified, the verification result will be a match.
< Device memory data to which devices are not set >
< Device memory data without setting device values >
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
3. Select [Find/Replace]  [Next Unmatch] (
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
*1 :
*2 :
[Previous Unmatch] (
6
Verify
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 25
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
● Direct input (DX) and direct output (DY)
When verifying device comments or device memory data, check the verification result with input (X)/output (Y) for direct
input (DX)/direct output (DY).
● Number of verification results displayed
If the number of mismatches exceeds 1,000, up to 1,000 mismatch results are displayed and verification is suspended
after that.
For a ladder program of program (program file) and POU, since the function determines the difference of the number of
lines between the verify source and the verify target in the list format as a mismatch, the verification is canceled in the
middle of the process even before reaching 1,000 mismatches and the rest of the program is determined as a
mismatch. The remaining part needs to be verified again after modifying the mismatched data.
● Copying verification results
Verification results can be copied and pasted to a text file. Select rows of verification result to be copied, and select
[Edit]  [Copy].
The copied data are pasted on a text file as data separated by tabs.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
< Verification result >
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Jumping from verification result
When "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" is selected under [Tool]  [Options]  "Compile"  "Basic
Setting", function block program items with no difference may be indicated as a mismatch on the Verify Result screen.
In this case, check the mismatch part by any of the following methods.
• Checking labels/devices set to input/output variables of function block
Open the source program from which function blocks are called, and check labels/devices.
• Checking mismatch parts with the program verification result
Select items as shown below to verify programs.
● Jumping from verification result of intelligent function module parameter (initial setting/auto refresh)
When different modes are set to the verify destination and the verify source for auto refresh of temperature control
module, jumping to verification result is not performed.
For setting the auto refresh of temperature control module, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
● Block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled
In a verification result, whether program files are matched or mismatched cannot be checked on the <<Detail Verify
Result>> tab but on the <<Verify Result List>> tab.
To check the verification result of program files on the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab, refer to the following section.
(Section 4.12.4)
■
Checking method when verify source data are modified
Updated verify source data are displayed in the verification result.
Therefore, the verification result of updated verify source data can be checked without executing the
verification function again when mismatched data is modified.
Even when a data name of verify source is changed, the changed data name is displayed in the
verification result.
Operating procedure
1. Modify the verify source data.
2. Open the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab on the Verify
Result screen.
3. Double-click the modified data on the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail
Verify Result>> tab.
The updated data is displayed in the verification result.
4 - 26
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4.2 Project Operations
■
1
Writing verification results to CSV files
OVERVIEW
Output data displayed on the Verify Result screen to a CSV file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit]  [Write to CSV File] (
).
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click the
5
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The verification results are saved on a personal computer.
● Formatting CSV file
The saved CSV file is displayed as shown below when it is opened by Excel.
<Display of the Verify Result screen>
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
<CSV file>
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 27
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.8
Changing programmable controller type of projects
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Change the programmable controller type of a project being edited.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Change PLC Type].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
PLC Series
Select the programmable controller series after change.
PLC Type
Select the programmable controller type after change.
2. Click the
button.
The confirmation message is displayed. Click the
4 - 28
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
button to execute the function.
4.2 Project Operations
To change the model of an intelligent function module, select a module name in "Module Name After Change" on the
following screen displayed at changing the programmable controller type.
To delete all intelligent function modules, select "Delete all after changing intelligent function module".
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For QCPU (Q
mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after the programmable controller series is changed, but certain
intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable controller series after change.
For details of the shift of models of intelligent function modules associated with change of programmable controller
series, refer to the following section.
■ Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller series
OVERVIEW
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
● Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For FXCPU)
After changing the programmable controller series, intelligent function module data is deleted.
● List of modifications (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)
After the Change PLC Type function is completed, the following List of Modifications screen is displayed, and the
changes of the program and parameters can be checked.
The items in the following screen can be copied and pasted to the text file using the + and + keys.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 29
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution
For the restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution for each programmable controller series, refer to
Appendix 10.
● Programs which use devices/labels for indexes in structure array labels
After changing the programmable controller type from/to Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the program operation may be
changed.
Review the program where over 65,536 array elements are accessed.
● Interruption of processing
If the project of change source includes the data which is neither supported nor able to be modified by any editing
operations with the project of the programmable controller type after change, the processing is interrupted. If this
happens, modify the data first to correspond with the programmable controller type after change, and then execute the
Change PLC Type function.
● Execution failure of the Change PLC Type function
The Change PLC Type function cannot be executed in the following cases:
• During the execution of the monitoring function such as program monitoring and device/buffer memory batch
monitoring.
• Security is set for the open project and the user does not belong to the 'Administrators' group.
• During the execution of the simulation function.
● Data before changing the programmable controller type
Restoring the data, after executing the Change PLC Type function, to the data before change is not possible. Execute
the function after saving the project data. In addition, note that the project is in the unsaved status after the function
execution.
● Unsupported instructions, devices outside the range, and unsupported index settings created with project
with labels
The unsupported instructions, devices outside the range, and unsupported index settings created with the project with
labels are not converted when performing PLC type change function regardless of its program language. After
performing PLC type change, perform compilation and review the corresponding error location in the program.
4 - 30
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4.2 Project Operations
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after changing the programmable controller series,
but a part of intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable
controller series after change.
The following table shows modules which can be changed.
Q64AD
Q68ADV
Q68ADI
Q64ADH
L60AD4
Q68ADV
L60ADVL8
Q68ADI
L60ADIL8
Q64ADH
L60AD4-2GH
Q62DAN
Q64DAN
Q68DAVN
Q68DAIN
Q64DAH
L60DA4
Q64TCTTN
L60TCTT4
Q64TCTTBWN
L60TCTT4BW
Q64TCRTN
L60TCRT4
Q64TCRTBWN
L60TCRT4BW
Counter
QD62
QD62D
LD62
LD62D
QD75/LD75 positioning
QD75P1
QD75P2
QD75P4
QD75P1N
QD75P2N
QD75P4N
QD75D1
QD75D2
QD75D4
QD75D1N
QD75D2N
QD75D4N
LD75P1
LD75P2
LD75P4
LD75D1
LD75D2
LD75D4
QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2
LJ71C24
LJ71C24-R2
QD77MS2
LD77MS2
QD77MS4
LD77MS4
AnyWireASLINK interface
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
5
6
QD77MS16
LD77MS16
QJ51AW12AL
LJ51AW12AL
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Simple motion
4
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Serial communication/
Modem interface
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature control
LCPU/CC IE Field head module
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Analog
QCPU (Q mode)
2
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Module type
Module name
1
OVERVIEW
Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller
series
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
■
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 31
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Detailed replacement method screen for changing CPU to Universal model
QCPU
In GX Works2 with the installed QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool, the methods for replacing
instructions and parameters can be displayed from the List of Modifications screen when the
programmable controller type is changed from Basic model QCPU or High Performance model QCPU
to Universal model QCPU.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
2. Specify the project before changing the
programmable controller type, and click
the
button.
The overview of the replacement method regarding
instructions and parameters which are changed by the
PLC type change function can be checked on the
displayed Detailed replacement method screen.
The Web browser is activated by clicking the link to
check details of settings. Adobe® Reader® is required
to view the detailed information.
3. Click the
button to
search the instruction/device to be replaced.
4 - 32
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
4. Replace the instruction/device by following the
OVERVIEW
instruction on the <<Replacing Procedure>>
tab.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 33
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3
Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
This section explains how to operate each data in a project.
4.3.1
Adding new data to project
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Add new data to a project.
The data that can be added differs according to the type of programmable controller or project.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Object]  [New].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Data Type
Select the type of the data to be added.
Data Name
Enter the name of the data to be created.
Program Language
Select the programming language for creating programs.
Selection is allowed only when the data type is any of the following:
• Program (program block), Function*1 or Function block*2.
Result Type*1
Set the data type of return value of the function.
Inherent Property*1
This item can be set when a function or function block is selected.
For details of check box items, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
*1 :
*2 :
4 - 34
For Structured projects only
For Simple projects (with labels) and Structured projects only
4.3.1 Adding new data to project
FX
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
2. Click the
1
button.
Number of characters
Program (program file), local device comment, device
memory, and device initial value
8 characters
Other data types
32 characters
3
● Maximum numbers of data types that can be created
The table below indicates the maximum numbers of data types that can be created.
Data type name
Maximum number
Connection destination
128
SFC block in Simple project*1
320 (128 for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U, 25 for FXCPU)
Program in FXCPU Simple project (with labels)
64
Other data (structures, global labels, etc.)
800
4
SFC of Simple projects (with labels) is not supported by FXCPU.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
*1 :
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Data type name
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Number of characters for a data name
The numbers of characters shown in the following table can be used for data names according to the selectable data
type.
However, some operators such as "-" and "*", and some instruction names such as "MOV", cannot be used. For details
of the characters which cannot be use for data names, refer to Appendix 9.
OVERVIEW
The editing screen for the created data is displayed.
● FXCPU
For FXCPU, the data of device initial values cannot be created.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.3.1 Adding new data to project
4 - 35
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.2
Copying/pasting data in projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Utilize data of a project being edited or other projects.
Operating procedure
1. Select a data name to be copied on the Project view.
2. Select [Project]  [Object]  [Copy].
The selected data name is copied.
3. Select a folder to paste the data name on the Project view.
4. Select [Project]  [Object]  [Paste].
If the same data name exists in the folder where the data is to
be pasted or when the data name cannot be used for the
project of the folder where the data is to be pasted because of
the different project languages, the Data Paste screen is
displayed.
Select a folder
5. Enter a new name in the "Data Name After Paste" field, and click the
button.
The data name is pasted.
4 - 36
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects
Head
FX
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
For Q series, data can be copied/pasted when the type of two projects are the same.
For L series, data can be copied/pasted when the type of two projects are the same.
• Multiple data can be copied by holding down the  or  key and selecting the data.
• Data can be copied/pasted by right-clicking data to be copied/folder to be pasted and selecting [Copy]/[Paste] from
the shortcut menu, or by dragging and dropping the data from the data to be copied to the folder to be pasted.
• The program is in an uncompiled status after data are pasted. Compile the program again.
• For projects with security, only users whose access level is 'Administrators' can copy/paste data.
• Copying and pasting PLC parameter or network parameter only are not possible. If they are copied individually, the
whole parameter files are copied and the files in the folder where the data is to be pasted are overwritten.
• Pasting of global label data is canceled when the maximum number of labels described below is exceeded. Adjust
the number of global labels in the copy destination and the copy source, and retry pasting data.
• Global label (within a project): 20480
• Global label (within a user library): 20480
• Data locked with a block password cannot be copied. To copy the data, unlock the block password first.
● Copying/pasting tasks in Structured project
When tasks are pasted, the number of programs that can be set on the Task Setting screen may be exceeded. Compile
the program and delete the unnecessary programs.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
*1 :
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Copying/pasting data
• Data between different projects can be copied and pasted only when their programmable controller types and project
types are the same.*1
OVERVIEW
1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects
4 - 37
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.3
Changing project data names
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Head
FX
FX
Change the data name of an open project.
Operating procedure
1. Select the data name to be changed on the Project view.
2. Select [Project]  [Object]  [Rename].
3. Change the data name.
4. Press the  key.
The selected data name is changed.
4.3.4
Deleting project data
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Delete data in an open project.
Operating procedure
1. Select the data name to be deleted on the Project view.
2. Select [Project]  [Object]  [Delete].
The selected data is deleted.
● Deleting data
• Multiple data can be selected and deleted.
• When data under the POU are deleted, data under the Program Setting are deleted simultaneously.
4 - 38
4.3.3 Changing project data names
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
1
Merging data
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Merge ladder programs or device comment data of multiple projects, and add them to a project.
When the programmable controller series of the projects are the same, data can be merged even if
data's programmable controller types or project types are different.
Remove the END instructions,
and merge ladder programs by
the order of selection.
END instruction
MAIN
MAIN 1
MAIN 1
END instruction
MAIN 2
MAIN 2
END instruction
MAIN 3
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Order of selection
on the Merge Data
screen.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
< Image of merging programs >
OVERVIEW
4.3.5
END instruction
appended
MAIN 3
Screen display
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Select [Tool]  [Merge Data].
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
Operating procedure
7
Item
Description
Specify the data type to be merged.
Ladder Program
Select this to merge ladder programs.
Device Comment
Select this to merge device comments.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Data Type
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
1. Select the data type to be merged.
4.3.5 Merging data
4 - 39
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Source Data
–
Source Project
Click the
button, and specify the source project.
Workspace Location
Display the path to the workspace of the source project.
Workspace Name
Display the workspace name of the source project.
This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is specified for the source
project.
Project Name
Display the project name of the source project.
Title
Display the project title of the source project.
Source Data List
Display programs or device comments of the source project.
Select data to be merged.
Programs which contain function blocks or inline structured text programs are not
displayed.
Target Data List
Display data to be merged. Up to 128 data can be displayed.
Data are merged in the displayed order.
Data Name after Merging
Data Name
3. Click the
–
Specify a data name after merging.
button.
Data of "Target Data List" are merged and added to the project.
Screen button
●
Adds data selected in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
●
Adds all data displayed in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
●
Deletes data selected in "Target Data List".
●
Deletes all data displayed in "Target Data List".
●
Displays the Set Range screen.
Set the range of programs selected in "Target Data List".
The range cannot be set when the source project or the target project is a project with labels.
4 - 40
4.3.5 Merging data
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
1
●
< Program of project with labels >
OVERVIEW
Displays the Options screen.
Select the processing for label/device comment duplication when merging programs or device
comments of projects with labels.
< Device comment >
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● Data to be merged
• Data saved on a personal computer are merged. Save the project data being edited in order to merge them.
• If the merged data exceeds the program capacity, the data are merged within the program capacity.
Example) When merging three programs: MAIN1, MAIN2, and SUB3
In the setting of the following screen, the programs are merged from MAIN1. After merging MAIN1 and
MAIN2, if the result of merging SUB3 exceeds the program capacity, only MAIN1 and MAIN2 are
merged.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
● Merging program data when the target project is a project without labels
When the target project is a project without labels, data of program with labels are merged as a program of actual
devices. Furthermore, uncompiled programs in a project with labels of source project are not displayed in "Source Data
List".
● Merging data during monitoring
Data cannot be merged during monitoring. Stop monitoring to merge data.
● Merging programs
When the programmable controller types of the source project and the target project are different, instructions and
devices which cannot be used for the programmable controller type of the target project are merged as the way they
are.
Check the merged program for errors with the program check function or the compilation.
For projects with labels, the local label settings are also merged when programs with labels are merged. However,
since the global label settings are not merged, set labels after programs are merged, or copy the global label data from
the source project.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.3.5 Merging data
4 - 41
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.6
Displaying/editing properties
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Display data properties of folders, parameters, and programs. A title and/or comment can be set to
each data.
Screen display
● For property of project
Click
on the Project view.
● For property of each data
Select [Project]  [Object]  [Property] (
).
<<Detail>>
<<Comment>>
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Display the data name.
Title*1, *2
Set a title for the data.
(The number of applicable characters is 128 for a project and 32 for other data.)
Last Change*1
Display the date when the data was updated.
Comment*1
Set a comment for the data.
Press the  and  keys for a line feed.
(The number of applicable characters is 5,120.)
MELSOFT iQ AppPortal
information file output
when saving project*3
Set the output type of an iQ AppPortal information file.
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
4 - 42
Description
Data Name
For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), "Title", "Last Change", and <<Comment>> tab are not supported by the
property of "MAIN" under Project view  "Program Setting"  'execution program'.
For titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data,
refer to Point in this section.
This item appears for the Project Property screen and the Property screen of User Library.
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
Titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data are titles of
data created for each execution type in the program setting. Those titles are displayed on the Online Data Operation
screen when reading/writing data from/to a programmable controller CPU.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Titles
Set titles are displayed on each view with a corresponding data name.
For SFC project without labels, a device comment of BL device corresponds to the SFC block becomes a title. When
the device comment of the reference target is read-protected by the security setting, the title is not displayed on the
view.
OVERVIEW
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
For ladder programs and ST programs created in a Simple project, program titles of the program setting and POU are
linked. When the program title is set either in the program setting or POU, the title is reflected to the other title.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4 - 43
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Properties of Structured projects
Properties of the following data can be set for Structured projects in addition to those indicated above.
Data
Setting
Task
Priority and executing condition of a task
Function/Function block
Whether to use EN/ENO, or MC/MCR for EN control
Library
Path to a help file
For details, refer to the explanations of each function.
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
● Destinations for saving properties
The 'titles' and 'comments' set to the data properties can be saved as symbolic information.
(Section 15.1.5)
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, the symbolic information must be written to/read from the
programmable controller CPU in order to restore the settings of the properties.
When data are read without the symbolic information from the programmable controller CPU, the settings of the
properties are not restored.
4 - 44
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
1
Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
For the method for setting the intelligent function module data, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
OVERVIEW
4.4
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4 - 45
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.5
Changing Project Types
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to change the type of an open project.
Using the method explained below, the type of a Simple project is changed from 'without labels' to
'with labels'. In addition, a Simple project 'with labels' can be changed to a Structured project.
Changing from a Simple project 'with labels' to a Simple project 'without labels' or changing a
Structured project to a Simple project is not supported.
*1
*1 :
Simple project
Simple project
'without labels'
'with labels'
Structured project
Not supported by FXCPU.
Operating procedure
• Select [Project]  [Change Project Type].
● Changing project types
When a Simple project (with labels) is changed to a Structured project, project data are stored in the following folder.
• SFC: Created under the Program folder.
• Function block: Created under the FB/FUN folder.
<Simple project (with labels)>
<Structured project>
Change the type of the project
Created under
the Program folder
Created under
the FB/FUN folder
● Operation after changing project type
When the project type is changed, programs are in the uncompiled status.
Compile all programs again after changing the project type. (Section 5.4)
4 - 46
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to register a backup of the project with added revision information, and
restoring the registered backup data (content of the past project).
4.6.1
Registering revision information (creating backup)
Create a backup of the project at the point of registration, and register it with the revision information.
OVERVIEW
1
Managing Project Revisions
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.6
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Project Revision]  [Revision Entry].
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Display the revision number to be registered.
Date
Display "--/--/---- --:--:--" (month/date/year hour:minute:second).
User
Display the user name when using the project with security.
Title
Enter a title of the revision.
Comment
Enter comments for the revision.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Revision No.
6
Description
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup)
4 - 47
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Revision number and the allowable number of revisions that can be registered
A revision number for the registered revision is automatically assigned from 1 to 9999.
The maximum number of revisions that can be registered is 100. If the number of the registered revisions is to be
exceeded 100, delete unnecessary revisions. The deleted revision numbers are unused.
If the revision number is to be exceeded 9999, delete all the revision data, or save the project with a different name
without succeeding the revision information. (Section 4.2.3)
● The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a title
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a title is 32.
● The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a comment
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a comment is 256.
A line feed is handled as 2 characters.
● Registration of project revisions when overwriting and saving projects
By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for the project revision is displayed when overwriting and saving the
project.
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Project", and then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History".
In addition, the revision title can be automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
● Registration of project revisions for projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be registered only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
● Information for iQ AppPortal
Information for iQ AppPortal is not registered for revision information.
4.6.2
Displaying revision list
Display registered revision information in the order of the revision number.
The revision list is used for registering, restoring, deleting, and verifying backups.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Project Revision]  [Revision List].
Display contents
Item
4 - 48
Description
No.
Display the revision numbers.
Date
Display the dates of revision registration.
User
For the projects with security, display the user names who have registered the revisions.
Title
Display the titles of the revisions.
4.6.2 Displaying revision list
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
1
Screen button
Displays the detailed information of the revision which is selected in the list. "Title" and "Comment"
can be edited.
OVERVIEW
●
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
●
Registers the project being edited as a revision. (Section 4.6.1)
●
Restores the backup data. (Section 4.6.3)
4
●
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Deletes the revision information. (Section 4.6.4)
●
Verifies the revision with other revisions or the projects being edited. (Section 4.6.5)
5
4.6.3
EDITING
PROGRAMS
● Revision List screen
Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
Restoring backup projects
Restore the backup revision information.
After restoring the backup, the project is in the status at the time of registering the revision information.
Operating procedure
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
1. Select the revision to be restored on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
4 - 49
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Click the
button.
The revision information to be restored is displayed.
3. Confirm the revision information to be restored. Click the
button.
The backup of the selected revision information is restored.
The revision number and title of the restored project are displayed on the title bar.
Revision number and title
of the restored project.
● The Revision List screen after restoring a project
After project restoration,
is displayed on the row of the restored project on the Revision List screen.
● Access level to be able to use the restoring function when using the projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be restored only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
● Revisions for the project with security
If the project being edited is the project with security, the registered security in the revision is deactivated when the
security is deactivated. When the revision is restored in such situation, since the project is restored without security, all
users can access the project including the revision data.
To protect the revision data after deactivating the security, delete the revision data in advance.
● Considerations for restoring projects
Register the revision of the project being edited before restoring a project.
When the other revision is restored and overwritten without registering the revision of the project being edited, the
project before restoration is overwritten.
4 - 50
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
4.6.4
1
Deleting revision information
OVERVIEW
Delete the registered revision information.
Operating procedure
2
1. Select the revision information to be deleted on the Revision List screen
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(Section 4.6.2).
2. Click the
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
button.
The message on the right is displayed.
3. Click the
4
button.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The selected revision information is deleted.
● Revision number
The deleted revision numbers are unused.
● Revisions being restored
The revision of the project which has been restored from the revision cannot be deleted. To delete the revision,
overwrite and save the project after restoring it.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
4.6.5
5
Verifying revisions
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Verify the revision information with other revision information or the project being edited.
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the revision verification.
• Programs
• Parameters
• Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
• Device comments
• Device memory data
• QD75/LD75 positioning module*1
Not supported by FXCPU.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
4.6.4 Deleting revision information
4 - 51
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Select the revision to be verified on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
When the verification function is performed selecting only one revision, the selected revision
information is verified with the project being edited.
To verify two revisions, select two revisions by holding down the  key or  key.
2. Click the
button.
The message as shown on the right is displayed.
This message is displayed when verifying the selected
revision information with the project being edited.
3. Click the
button.
The Revision Verification screen is displayed.
4. Select the data to be verified.
For details of setting items, refer to the project
verification. (Section 4.2.7)
5. Click the
button.
The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.
For details of the Verify Result screen, refer to the project verification.
(Section 4.2.7)
The following is a screen of project with labels.
4 - 52
4.6.5 Verifying revisions
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
This section explains how to utilize projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer, and files
(ASCII files) created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer in GX Works2. Projects edited with
GX Works2 can also be utilized in GX Developer.
■
Utilizing projects and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer
in GX Works2
Projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer can be utilized in GX Works2 by using the
'Open Other Project' function. (Section 4.7.1)
OVERVIEW
1
Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.7
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Open Other Project function.
Project created with
GX Developer
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Opened as a GX Works2 project.
Open Other Project function.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Project created with GX
IEC Developer
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
4 - 53
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Utilizing files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer
ASCII files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer can be added as projects in GX
Works2 by using the 'Read ASC Format File' function. (Section 4.7.2)
Read ASC
Format File
■
Utilizing projects and data created with GX Works2 in GX Developer
Files created/edited in Simple project with GX Works2 can be utilized in GX Developer by using the
'Export to GX Developer Format File' function. (Section 4.8)
[Export to GX Developer
Format File]
4 - 54
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
1
Storage of utilized data in GX Works2
Each project and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer are stored in the areas shown
in the table below with GX Works2.
GX Developer projects are opened as Simple projects and GX IEC Developer projects, as Structured
projects.
Parameter
GX Works2
(Structured project)
Parameter
Parameter
Device Comment
Global Device Comment
Global Device Comment
Global variables
Global Label
Global Label
Program
Program
POU
FB
FB_Pool
FB/FUN
Structure
Structured Data Types
Structured Data Types
Device memory
Device Memory
Device Memory
Device initial value
Device Initial Value
Device Initial Value
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
GX Works2
(Simple project)
GX Developer
● Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX IEC Developer and GX
Works2
Parameter (Programmable controller parameter)
Parameter
DUT_Pool (Structure)
Structured Data Types
Global_Vars (Global variable)
Global Label
Task_Pool
POU
POU_Pool
POU
■
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
User Library
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
User Library
4
GX Works2
(Structured project)
GX IEC Developer
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX Developer and GX Works2
OVERVIEW
■
Security level of GX IEC Developer
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The security level in the GX IEC Developer project is cleared after reading the project.
When the GX IEC Developer project is read using GX Works2, the following Enter Password screen is
displayed.
■
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
Compatible applications
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
For 'Open Other Project' and 'Export to GX Developer Format File', the supported versions differ
according to the CPU type.
For the application compatibility, refer to Appendix 5.
4 - 55
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.7.1
Opening projects in other formats
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Open a project created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX Works2.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Open Other Data]  [Open Other Project].
Operating procedure
• Specify the project, and click the
button.
Select '*.gpj' for a GX Developer project and '*.pro' for a GX IEC Developer project.
The selected project is opened.
■
Considerations for opening projects in other formats
● Status after opening a different format project with labels
When a different format project with labels is opened, the project is in the uncompiled status. Compile
all programs in the project before executing online operations such as writing data and monitoring.
When a compilation error occurs, correct the corresponding program according to the programming
manual.
● When a programmable controller type of project which is created in GX Developer is not
supported by GX Works2
Open the project by starting GX Developer.
● Projects which contain FBD, SFC, IL, or MELSEC-IL programs created with GX IEC Developer
FBD programs created with GX IEC Developer can be read with GX Works2 Version 1.56J or later as
Structured Ladder/FBD programs.
Projects which contain SFC, IL, or MELSEC-IL programs created with GX IEC Developer cannot be
read with GX Works2.
4 - 56
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
1
● Opening different format projects that contain SFC programs
• When a GX Developer format project, including a ladder block with an unconverted SFC program,
is opened by selecting [Open Other Project] in a version 1.555D or later of GX Works2, the
program name is added in the block name.
2
When the common pointer number is not set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Developer, a
compilation error may occur at the compilation after opening the project in other format. In such case,
change "Common Pointer No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter or change the pointer
device range in the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function.
● Utilizing detailed settings for Write to PLC function
Values set in GX Developer are utilized to the secured steps for Online program change
(Section 15.1.1) and the writing range of device comment (Section 15.1.3) which are set
when writing data to programmable controller CPU.
Note that "PLC comment write format (CPU Format)" which is set along with the writing range of
device comment in GX Developer is not utilized.
For a project in which the comment capacity is restricted by setting "PLC comment write format (CPU
Format)" in GX Developer, the comment capacity may be exceeded when data are written to a
programmable controller CPU using GX Works2.
In such a case, set "Comment Format (PLC Format)" (Section 15.1.3) or reduce the writing
range of device comment.
● Utilizing option settings
GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of reference during comment edit" is
utilized to GX Works2 option setting "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment" 
"Reference of Device Comment".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Setting common pointer number
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
• Select "Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer" under [Tool]  [Options]
 "Project"  "Common Setting".
3
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Since the argument type or the number of arguments in some ST instruction is different between GX
Developer and GX Works2, an error may occur at compilation. When a compilation error occurs,
correct the instruction according to the structured programming manuals.
Note that, however, programs can be compiled in GX Works2 by setting the following option.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
● Opening different format projects that contain ST programs
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
• When a GX Developer format project, including a ladder block with an unconverted SFC program,
is opened by selecting [Open Other Project] in a version between 1.87R and 1.551Z of GX
Works2, the number added to the end of the block name may not be in sequence.
OVERVIEW
• Block information data such as: block information devices, block titles and block statements, are
set in the block data property.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4 - 57
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Opening a GX IEC Developer project
When a GX IEC Developer project that contains a user library is opened, the following message may
be displayed and the user library may not be read. If the following message is displayed, select
[Project]  [Library]  [Install] in GX Works2 to obtain the user library.
When a GX IEC Developer project is read by selecting [Project]  [Open Other Data]  [Open Other
Project], intelligent function module parameters are not reflected.
● When a GX Developer data name contains a character that cannot be used in GX Works2
A GX Developer project with a GX Works2 invalid character can be opened.
Note that, however, the invalid character in the data is replaced by an underscore (_).*1 Change the
data name after opening the project.
*1 :
For FXCPU, data which contains invalid characters in its data name is not read.
● Changing the number of columns of device memory editor
The number of columns of device memory editor can be changed when opening GX Developer
format project by selecting the following option.
• [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Memory Editor"  "Initial Value of Column Number"
When selecting "Always Confirm", the number of columns of device memory editor can be changed
at opening the Device Memory screen at the first time on the following screen.
When setting "Auto" as a default, or always specify the same number of columns by selecting
"Specify the number of column", set with option or select "Set the selected content in option" in
advance.
4 - 58
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
1
Reading ASC format data
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Add ASC format data created in GX IEC Developer to a GX Works2 project being edited.
Data can be added only when a new project is created or a project is opened in Structured project.
OVERVIEW
4.7.2
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Open Other Data]  [Read ASC Format File].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Operating procedure
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Select '*.asc' for the file.
The specified data is added to the project.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
● Importing project data of different programmable controller type
Project data having a different programmable controller type can be imported to a project being edited.
The programmable controller type of the project being edited is not changed even when data with the different
programmable controller type are imported.
In this case, since instructions and devices not supported by the open project are also imported, compile the programs
to check and correct errors after importing data.
● Importing data whose name already exists in the project
A number is appended in serial order (starting from one) to the end of the data name to be imported, and then the data
is added to the project.
● Importing global labels
When the global labels are imported, the "Device" column of the global label may be blank. If the "Device" column is
blank, check the items on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
● Importing FBD programs of GX IEC Developer
Imported FBD programs are converted to Structured Ladder programs.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
• Specify the file, and click the
5
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.7.2 Reading ASC format data
4 - 59
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.8
Saving Projects in Other Formats
*1
*2
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
*3
Head
FX
FX
*1 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU
*2 : Not supported by L02S, L02S-P, L06, L06-P, L26 and L26-P.
*3 : Not supported by FX3S.
This section explains how to save a Simple project of GX Works2 in the GX Developer format.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Export to GX Developer Format File].
Operating procedure
1. Select the save destination of the GX Developer format project.
2. Enter the project name, and click the
button.
● Considerations for saving projects
For the restrictions other than the ones described below, refer to Appendix 8.
• Programs are saved in the uncompiled status.
• Data cannot be saved when the security access level is set to other than 'Administrators'. Change the access level
before saving the data. (Section 4.10.4)
• The data with a block password cannot be saved. Unlock the block password before saving the data.
(Section 4.12.3)
• Projects in which labels are used for FXCPU cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
• When a GX Developer format project is saved to the folder in which a GX Developer format project with the same
name exists, the previously saved project is overwritten.
If the saving of the project failed, all data except for the data created by user will be deleted.
● Considerations for handling projects in GX Developer
• Since the program is saved uncompiled, the program needs to be compiled when it is opened in GX Developer. For
projects with labels, the compilation results and device assignment may be different from those of GX Works2.
• For a maintenance work on the same programmable controller CPU using both GX Developer and GX Works2,
programming with actual devices is recommended.
4 - 60
4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
1
Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Start a new GX Developer project from GX Works2.
OVERVIEW
4.9
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
GX Developer needs to be installed in advance to perform this function.
For details of GX Developer installation, refer to Appendix 14.
For details of GX Developer operation, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
Operating procedure
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
• Select [Project]  [Start GX Developer].
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4 - 61
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.10
Setting Security for Projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to set security for projects to protect the projects themselves and the data
in projects.
Setting security not only restricts an access to projects but also prevents the data, such as POUs,
device comments, and parameters, that are created by the user from erroneous modification and/or
disclosure to unauthorized users.
This function cannot restrict writing/reading of data to/from a programmable controller CPU. Use the
online password function to protect the data on a programmable controller CPU. (Chapter 16)
■
Access levels and access authority
An access to data can be restricted by setting an access level to the individual user.
An access level is an operating authority given to a login user of the project.
There are five access levels as shown below. The data that can be edited by a user having lower
access level can also be edited by a user who has higher access level.
Access level
Higher
Administrators
Operating authority
<Administrator level>
All operations are possible.
Developers (Level 3)
Developers (Level 2)
<Developer level>
Security setting, data access, and a part of operations are restricted.
Developers (Level 1)
Users
Lower
<Operator level>
Only access to project data is possible.
Data cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.
Example) The data with access authority of Developers (Level 2) can be edited by a login user
whose access level is Developers (Level 2) or higher (Administrators, Developers (Level
3) or Developers (Level 2)).
4 - 62
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
■
1
Access authority applicable data
● Simple project
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Read
Write
Parameter


Intelligent Function Module
×
×


Global Device Comment


Global Label
×
×
×

×
×
×
×
×
×
POU
Ladder program data
×
×
Program


Local Label
×

×
×
ST program data*1
Program


Local Label
×

SFC program data
SFC block
Program
Local label*1
×
×


×

×
×
Program


Local label
×

Structured Data Types
×
×
×

FB_Pool
Structure data
Local Device Comment
Comment data
Device Memory
Device memory data
Device Initial Value*1
Device initial value data
×
×


×
×


×
×
×
×
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4
5
6
Not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
×
×
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Program file data
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Global label data
Program Setting
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Intelligent function module data
2
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Items on Project view
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the data to which access authority can be applied.
4 - 63
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Structured project
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Items on Project view
Read
Write
Parameter


Intelligent Function Module
×
×
Intelligent function module data


Global Device Comment


Global Label
×
×
×

Global label data
Program Setting
Program file data
POU
Program
Ladder program data*1
×
×
×
×
×
×
Program


×

×
×
Program


Local Label
×

SFC program data*1
×
×
Program


Local Label
×

Structured Ladder/FBD program data
×
×
Program


Local Label
×

×
×
FB/FUN
Program


Local label
×

Structured Data Types
×
×
×

Structure data
Local Device Comment
Comment data
Device Memory
Device memory data
Device Initial Value*1
Device initial value data
4 - 64
×

Local Label
ST program data
*1 :
×

Not supported by FXCPU.
×
×


×
×


×
×
×
×
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
1
Setting/resetting security of projects
■
OVERVIEW
Set security for an open project and reset the security.
Setting security for projects
Set security for a project.
Once security is set for a project, user authentication is required when the project is opened once
again. (Section 4.10.3)
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Security]  [User Management].
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.10.1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
5
Description
User Name
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets
are case-sensitive.)
Access Level
Display 'Administrators'. (Fixed)
Password
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
Re-enter Password
Set the same password again for confirmation.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
2. Click the
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Item
button.
Security is set for the project.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
● Setting security
When security is set for a project, the project is in the status logged in by the set user (Administrators). The current login
user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)
● Loss of login password
If a user forgets the login password, logging in to the project is disabled. Remember the password securely. If the user
whose access level is Developers (Level 3) or lower forgets the password, log in the project using the access level
'Administrators' and set the password again.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects
4 - 65
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Resetting security of projects
Reset the set security of a project by deleting all users, and returns the project to the status without
security. (Section 4.10.2)
4.10.2
Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
Manage the registered status of users for a project with security. This function also adds/deletes/
changes users.
This function is available only when a project is logged in by the user whose access level is
'Administrators' or 'Developers'.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Security]  [User Management].
Display contents
Item
Number of User Registrations
4 - 66
Description
Display the number of registered users and the maximum number of registrations.
User Name
Display the registered user names.
Access Level
Display the access level of each registered user.
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
1
Screen button
Deletes a user selected in the list.
The current login user cannot be deleted. If registered users are only 'Administrators' and there are
no other users to be deleted, deletion of the current login user is possible.
If 'Administrators' level users are deleted, security is reset.
●
Changes the information of the user selected in the list. ('■ Changing user information')
●
Changes the password of the user selected in the list. ('■ Changing passwords')
The password of the current login user cannot be changed using this function. To change it, select
[Project]  [Security]  [Change Password].
■
Adding users
Add a user to a project with security.
A user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be added.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
●
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Adds a user. ('■ Adding users')
OVERVIEW
●
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The User Addition screen is displayed.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are
case-sensitive.)
Access Level
Select the access level.
Password
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
Re-enter Password
Set the same password again for confirmation.
3. Click the
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
User Name
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
8
button.
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
The user is added.
The added user is displayed in the User Management screen.
4 - 67
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Changing user information
Change the user information (user name and access level) of registered users.
The information of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of login user
cannot be changed.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The Change User Data screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Setting items Section 4.10.1
3. Click the
button.
The user information is changed.
■
Changing passwords
Change the password of the user selected in the list on the User Management screen.
The password of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of the login user
cannot be changed. To change the password of the login user, use the Change password function by
selecting [Project]  [Security]  [Change Password].
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The Change Password screen is displayed.
2. Set "New Password" and "Re-enter Password".
3. Click the
button.
The password is changed.
4 - 68
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4.10.3
1
Logging in projects
OVERVIEW
A user authentication procedure is required when opening a project with security.
Screen display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display when a project with security is opened.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Operating procedure
4
Item
Description
User Name
Enter the user name registered to the project to be logged in.
Password
Enter the password.
2. Click the
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
1. Set the items on the screen.
5
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Login authentication is performed with the entered user name and password. The project is
opened when the entry is confirmed to be correct.
● Checking login status
The current login user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.10.3 Logging in projects
4 - 69
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.10.4
Changing access authority of access level
Set an authorization of displaying/saving data for each access level.
The access authority of access levels higher than that of the login user cannot be changed.
If the access level of the current login user is 'Users', changing the access authority is not allowed.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Security]  [Data Security Setting].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Access Object
Select one or more data for which access authority is changed.
Access Authority
Set 'enable/disable' of reading/writing data for each access level by moving the slider.*1
*1 :
When multiple data are selected, the default access authority setting is displayed. Click the slider to set the
displayed access authority as it is. The access authority will not be set by only selecting multiple data.
2. Click the
button.
● Setting access authority
The access authority can also be set by right-clicking on a single data of which access authority is to be changed on the
Project view and selecting [Data Security Setting] from the shortcut menu. When multiple data are selected, the
shortcut menu is invalid.
4 - 70
4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
Read protected data
A name of read protected data is displayed in gray and cannot be opened.
On the screens of project verification and programmable controller verification, a lock mark icon is
appended.
The following figures are an example for the case that "Parameter", programs and local labels of
"MAIN1", and programs of "MAIN2" are read protected.
<Project view>
<Project verification>
OVERVIEW
1)
1
Considerations for using the security function
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.10.5
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
<Programmable controller verification>
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
3)
Properties of data
The properties of the read/write protected data can be displayed, but cannot be edited.
4)
Device comment display on ladder editor and the Sampling Trace screen
If the data of the device comment is set as read protected, the device comment is not displayed on
ladder editor or the Sampling Trace screen.
5)
Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU using project with
security
When symbolic information*1 is read from a programmable controller CPU, the security settings
(settings on the Data Security Setting screen) of the data, which are not included in the symbolic
information, are set to their default.
If the settings on the Data Security Setting screen are changed, make settings again after reading
data from the programmable controller CPU.
Note that the block password*2 is not set to default even when the symbolic information is read.
Therefore, setting a block password to each POU is recommended.
Symbolic information (Section 15.1.5)
Block password (Section 4.12)
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Write protected data
The write protected data can be opened as the read only data.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
2)
4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function
4 - 71
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.11
Setting Security Key
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to control the access with a security key.
■
Security key
The security key locks/unlocks projects and a programmable controller CPU.
The lock can only be unlocked with a security key, and therefore project data and data in a
programmable controller CPU can be protected.
● For projects
Locked project can be accessed or edited only by the users who registered the security key on the
personal computer.
● For programmable controller CPU
The following files can be written to/read from the locked programmable controller only by the users
who registered the security key on the personal computer.
• Symbolic information
• Program
• Parameter
• Intelligent function module parameter
• Device comment
File writing/reading enabled
Data access/
editing enabled
Project data
Key A
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Key A
Unable to access/
edit data
Key A
Unable to write/read files
Another user can unlock the locked project data or programmable controller CPU by importing/
exporting the security key.
Export
File writing/reading enabled
Data access/
editing enabled
Unlock
Key A
Key A
Project data
Unlock Key A
Data access/
editing enabled
Import
4 - 72
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Key A
Unlock
File writing/reading enabled
4.11 Setting Security Key
4.11.1
1
Managing security key
OVERVIEW
Create a security key, and import/export/delete the security key.
Screen display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Select [Project]  [Security]  [Soft Security Key Management].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
Display contents
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Description
–
Name
Display the name of the security key.
Creation Date
Display the date of creation of the security key.
Lock Project
Display the lock applicability for the project.
6
Lock CPU
Display the lock applicability of the programmable controller CPU.
Expiration Date
Display the expiration date when an expiration date is set on the security key.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
Key Information Registered in the
Personal Computer
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 73
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Screen button
●
Imports the security key. ("■ Importing security key")
●
Exports the security key. ("■ Exporting security key")
●
Creates a security key. ("■ Creating a security key")
●
Deletes the security key. ("■ Deleting security key")
■
Creating a security key
Create a security key.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
The New screen is displayed.
2. Enter a name and click the
button.
The security key is created.
● Considerations of created security key
Created security keys can be registered only for the user who logged in the personal computer.
The maximum number of security key registrations is 128 including created security keys and imported security keys
for each login user of personal computer.
4 - 74
4.11.1 Managing security key
4.11 Setting Security Key
■
1
Importing security key
OVERVIEW
Import the security key which is exported previously to the personal computer.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The Import screen is displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Select the security file to be imported, and click the
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
button.
The Password screen is displayed.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
3. Enter the password set for the file when it was exported, and click the
6
button.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The security key is imported to the personal computer.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 75
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Exporting security key
Export the security key.
Operating procedure
1. Select the security key to be exported, and click the
button.
The Export screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Security Key Information
Name
Password
–
Display the name of the security key.
–
Password
Enter a password for the security file to be exported.
Set a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH.
Password for Confirmation
Set the same password again for confirmation.
Detailed Setting
4 - 76
Description
–
Expiration Date
Set the expiration date of the security key.
Operation Restriction
–
Lock Project
Select whether to apply the security key setting to the project.
Lock CPU
Select whether to apply the security key setting to the programmable controller
CPU.
4.11.1 Managing security key
4.11 Setting Security Key
3. Click the
1
button.
OVERVIEW
The Save as screen is displayed.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4. Enter a name of the file to be saved.
button.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
5. Click the
4
The security key file is saved.
● Considerations of exported security files
The exported security files should be tightly controlled.
Deleting security key
EDITING
PROGRAMS
■
5
Delete the security key registered on the personal computer.
6
Operating procedure
button.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
• Select the security key to be deleted, and click the
The following confirmation message is displayed.
button to delete the security key.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Click the
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 77
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Considerations when deleting security key
Unlocking the security key is recommended before deleting it. (Section 4.11.2)
Take extra caution when deleting security keys.
The project cannot be opened if the security key which is used to lock the project is deleted.
PLC read/write cannot be executed if the security key which is used to lock the programmable controller CPU. In this
case, click the
button on the Soft Security Key Management screen to unlock the security key forcibly.
However, the programmable controller CPU is formatted at the same time as the security key is unlocked.
Even when the security key with the same name is recreated after deleting the security key, it will not be the same
security key.
4 - 78
4.11.1 Managing security key
4.11 Setting Security Key
4.11.2
1
Locking project with security key
OVERVIEW
Lock the project with a security key.
Screen display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Select [Project]  [Security]  [Soft Security Key Management].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Display contents
5
Description
Key Information Registered in the
Personal Computer
Display the information of selected security key. (Section 4.11.1)
<<Project>>
Display the screen to lock/unlock the project.
Project Information
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Item
–
Project Name
Display the name of the project.
Title Name
Display the project title.
Display the name of the security key which is used to lock the project.
Creation Date
Display the date of creation of the security key which is used to lock the project.
Explanation
Display the information when the cursor is placed on the button on the screen.
Operating procedure
7
1. Select the security key to lock the project from "Key Information Registered in the
Personal Computer".
2. Click the
SETTING
PARAMETERS
–
Name
button.
The project is locked with the selected security key.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Security Key Information
6
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Screen button
●
Unlocks the locked project.
4.11.2 Locking project with security key
4 - 79
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.11.3
Considerations of security keys
1)
When GX Works2 is uninstalled
Security keys are not deleted even when GX Works2 is uninstalled.
2)
Security status
When the security key is "Execution Possible" at the point of opening the project, the security key
is handled under the authority of "Execution Possible" while the project is being opened.
For example, even when the security key of the opened project is deleted and the "Execution
Impossible" security key is imported, the security key is handled under the authority of "Execution
Possible" while the project is being opened.
3)
Locking a project with security key
The security key set to the project becomes effective after saving the project.
4)
Project locked with security key
The following operations cannot be performed.
• Write to PLC/Read from PLC/Verify with PLC function with symbolic information, programs,
parameters, intelligent function module parameters, or device comments when "Memory Card
(SD)" is specified for the target memory
• Online program change function when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the write target.
• Write to PLC function with parameters when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the target
memory of "Comment File Used in a Command" on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
• Write IC Memory Card function
5)
CPU module locked with security key
The following operations cannot be performed.
• Backup data creation function of PLC Module Change
• Data restoration function of PLC Module Change
• Write PLC User Data/Read PLC User Data function with latch data backup file created with the
Latch Data Backup function
6)
Write to PLC/Read from PLC function
Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU may take time depending on a
connection route when the security key is set.
7)
Expiration date
• If the expiration date of the security key registered in a personal computer is expired, a project
locked with the corresponding security key cannot be opened.
• To use the same security key after the expiration date, export the security key from the exported
personal computer again, and import it to the personal computer.
4 - 80
4.11.3 Considerations of security keys
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
FX
This section explains how to set a block password to a POU in a project with labels.
Setting a block password to a POU disables the access to program content. To access program
content, the block password must be unlocked.
2
The following table shows the POUs to which a block password can be set.
Project type
POU to which a block password can be set
Simple project (without labels)
None
Simple project (with labels)
Function block
Structured project
Program block
Function block
Function
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Head
FX
3
4
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
● Effective range of block passwords
A block password is the function that protects POUs, not execution programs.
To protect execution programs, use the security function or online password function.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU and FXCPU, however, whether to protect execution programs with a
block password can be selected.
● Considerations of project with security
To set/unlock/delete a block password in a project with security, a user who has a security access authority to read/
write the program needs to log in. (Security Section 4.10)
● Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU
Even when the symbolic information is read from a programmable controller CPU, the set status of block password
does not change.
● Considerations when using FXCPU
A memory cassette to which the execution program with a block password is written can be used on FX3U/FX3UC
version 3.00 or later only.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
OVERVIEW
1
Protecting POUs in Projects
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4.12
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4 - 81
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.12.1
Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords
Manage the block password setting status of a POU.
In addition, this function sets/unlocks/deletes a block password.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Block Password].
Display contents
Item
Description
POU Name
Display POUs.
Registration Status
Display the status of block password for each POU.
Screen button
●
Sets a block password to a POU. (Section 4.12.2)
●
Unlocks the block password set to the POU. (Section 4.12.3)
●
Deletes the registered block password. The block password of the POU must be unlocked before
deleting it.
● Selecting multiple POUs
Multiple POUs of "Function Block List" can be selected and the password can be set/disabled in batch.
The following is the consideration when the block password settings of selected POUs are different.
• POUs whose block password is different from the entered password are not unlocked.
4 - 82
4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
4.12.2
1
Setting/changing block passwords
OVERVIEW
Set a block password to a POU.
Operating procedure
2
1. Select a POU to set a block password
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
on the Block Password screen and
click the
button.
The Change Block Password screen is
displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Item
Description
Password
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
Re-enter Password
Set the same password again for confirmation.
Execution Program
Protection Setting*1
Select this to disable reading execution programs.
Programs need to be compiled when selecting or unselecting it in FXCPU.
High-speed Universal model QCPU (first 5 digits of the serial number are "19012" or higher), LCPU (first 5 digits of
the serial number are "18112" or higher) and FXCPU (version 3.00 or later of FX3U and FX3UC) support it.
3. Click the
5
button.
The block password is set to the selected POU.
Lock of the POU by the block password becomes effective when the project is opened once again.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
*1 :
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords
4 - 83
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Display on the Project view
A POU with a block password is displayed on the Project view as shown below.
A lock mark is appended to the icon of
POU to which a block password is set.
● Changing block passwords
To change a block password, simply set a new password for the POU to which a block password has already been set.
However, the block password must be unlocked before changing it.
4.12.3
Unlocking block passwords
Unlock the block password set to a POU.
The access to the of POUs is enabled by unlocking block passwords.
Operating procedure
1. Select a POU to unlock the block
password on the Block Password
screen and click the
button.
The Unlock Block Password screen is
displayed.
2. Set the item on the screen.
Item
Password
3. Click the
Description
Enter the block password to be unlocked.
button.
The block password of the selected POU is unlocked.
The unlock of the POU by the block password is valid while the project is being opened. To lock the
POU again, reopen the project.
4 - 84
4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
However, the functions can be used by the methods mentioned in "Avoidance of restrictions".
For (Simple) and (Structured) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals
respectively:
(Simple)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Unable to display the detailed result of
program files.
Section 4.2.7
Change PLC Type
Unable to change to the programmable
controller type for which the execution
program protection setting of a block
password is not supported.
Section 4.2.8
■ Canceling the execution
program protection status of a
project
Print/Print preview
Unable to print and display the print
preview in the device display.
Section 11.5.7
Section 11.5.8
Unlock*1
(Section 4.12.3)
Write to PLC
Unable to write programs to an SD
memory card by using the using the Write
to PLC function.
Section 15.1
■ Canceling the execution
program protection status of a
project
Section 15.2
Verify Source : Unlock*1
(Section 4.12.3)
Verify Destination:■
Canceling the execution program
protection status of a
programmable controller CPU
Verify
Verify with PLC
Online program change
Unable to display the detailed result of
program files.
Unable to perform Online program change
(during conversion/compilationwith Build)
when the protection status (enable or
disable) for the execution program
protection setting of a block password is
set as follows;
Section 15.9.2
Write IC Memory Card*2 Unable to write data to an IC memory card. Section 15.11.1 ■ Canceling the execution
program protection status of a
Write to IC Memory
project
Unable to write (edit and copy) data to an
Section 15.11.2
Card (Edit and Data
IC memory card.
*2
Copy)
Unable to change TC setting values when
the protection status (enable or disable) for
the execution program protection setting of
Change TC Setting*2
a block password is set as follows;
(Simple)
• Programmable controller CPU: disabled,
GX Works2: enabled
Display Compile Result
Unable to display the compilation result.
5
(Structured)
Unlock*1
(Section 4.12.3)
Unlock all block passwords to which the execution program protection setting was enabled.
These functions are not supported by FXCPUs.
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
Unable to display in the device display and
the batch device display.
4
6
• Programmable controller CPU: disabled,
GX Works2: enabled
Device Display/Batch
Device Display
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Avoidance of restrictions
Verify Source: Unlock*1
(Section 4.12.3)
Verify Destination :■
Canceling the execution program
protection status of a project
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Reference
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Limitations
2
3
● GX Works2 functions
Function name
OVERVIEW
A project will be in the execution program protection status by enabling the execution program protection setting
when setting a block password.
By writing a project in the execution program protection status, a programmable controller CPU will also be in the
same status.
The following shows the functions restricted by High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU, and FXCPU in the
execution program protection status.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Functions restricted in the execution program protection status
SETTING
PARAMETERS
■
1
Considerations for a block password
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
4.12.4
4 - 85
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Programmable controller CPU functions
Function name
Limitations
Reference
Unable to back up data to an SD memory card.
For details on this function, refer to the following
CPU Module Change
manual.
Function with SD Memory QnUCPU User's Manual (Function
Card
Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
-
CPU module data
backup/restoration
function
Unable to use the data backup function of a
CPU module.
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function
Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
-
Project data batch save/
load function
Unable to save projects in a batch.
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
-
Avoidance of restrictions
Unable to execute the following commands to a
program file.
• get
• mget
File transfer function
(FTP Server)
File transfer function
(FTP Client)
• rename
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication
via Built-in Ethernet Port)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Built-In Ethernet Function)
Unable to execute The SP.FTPPUT instruction
to a program file.
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Built-In Ethernet Function)
-
■ Canceling the execution
program protection status of a
programmable controller CPU
-
Unable to execute the following commands from
a target device to a program file.
• 1824(File Copy)
• 1827(File Open)
File read
(Access from a module by • 1828(File Read)
using MC protocol)
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
MELSEC Communication Protocol
Reference Manual
-
Unable to perform the following functions from a
GOT to a program file.
• Backup
• Circuit monitor
File access from a GOT
• SFC Monitor
• Ladder editing
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
Manual for the GOT used
4 - 86
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
-
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
1
Canceling the execution program protection status of a project
To cancel the execution program protection status of a project, all of the execution program protection
settings need to be disabled.
Operating procedure
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1. Unlock the block password. (Section 4.12.3)
2. Select a POU to disable the execution
program protection setting on the Block
Password screen, and click the
button.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
The Change Block Password screen is
displayed.
3. Unselect the checkbox of "Execution
Program Protection Setting".
4. Click the
button.
4
Canceling the execution program protection status of a programmable
controller CPU
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
■
OVERVIEW
■
To cancel the execution program protection status of a programmable controller CPU, all of the
execution program protection settings in it need to be disabled.
5
Operating procedure
EDITING
PROGRAMS
1. Read all programs from a programmable controller. (Section 15.1)
2. Unlock the block password. (Section 4.12.3)
6
3. Select a POU to disable the execution
SETTING
PARAMETERS
program protection setting on the Block
Password screen, and click the
button.
The Change Block Password screen is
displayed.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
4. Unselect the checkbox for "Execution
Program Protection Setting".
5. Click the
button.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
6. Write all programs to a programmable controller. (Section 15.1)
7. Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF to ON, or reset it.
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4 - 87
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
■
Considerations for writing a program to a programmable controller
A project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled
needs to be written to a programmable controller after completing the following functions.
If the project is written before completing the following functions, an error occurs in GX Works2 or the
programmable controller CPU.
● GX Works2 functions
• Program memory batch transfer
• Online program change
• TC Settings change
● Programmable controller CPU functions
• File access control by security key
• Backing up latch data to standard ROM
• Writing/Reading device data to standard ROM
• PLC module change by the SD memory card (restore)
• CPU module data restoration function
• Project data batch load
• IP address change function
• E-mail address registration/deletion of the E-mail send/receive function (SP.MLOPEADR
instruction) (Only when back-up specification is enabled)
4 - 88
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4.13 Managing Profiles
Head
FX
FX
Manage the registration status of GX Works2 profile (such as CSP+*1).
Profiles are data in which the connected equipment information (such as module models) is stored.
The connected modules are added to the module list on each configuration window by registering
profiles. The previously registered connected equipment information is also updated.
To register profiles, log on the personal computer as the user having the administrator authority, and
close the project in advance.
For CSP+, refer to the homepage of CC-Link Partner Association (www.cc-link.org).
3
Registering profiles
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
4.13.1
Operating procedure
1. Select [Tool]  [Profile Management]  [Register].
4
The Register Profile screen is displayed.
2. Select the profile, and click the
button.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The profile is registered.
The added module can be found in the module list on the configuration window when the project is
opened next time.
The following is the display of the CC-Link Configuration window.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
A CC-Link module
is added.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
OVERVIEW
1
Managing Profiles
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4.13
4.13.1 Registering profiles
4 - 89
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
● Managing profiles
A profile is managed by each personal computer, and shared within GX Works2 and other MELSOFT products.
Therefore, a profile registered in GX Works2 is applied to other MELSOFT products.
● Considerations for registering profiles
The profiles are the compressed files (such as *.zip, *.ipar, and *.cspp)
Register profiles without decompressing files.
● Considerations when using Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 8.1
A profile may not be able to be registered to GX Works2 when using Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 8.1. Set
the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set.
• The folder to which GX Works2 is installed.
Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT
If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator]. To
activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this program as
an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab.
4 - 90
4.13.1 Registering profiles
4.13 Managing Profiles
1
Deleting profiles
OVERVIEW
4.13.2
Operating procedure
1. Select [Tool]  [Profile Management]  [Delete].
The Profile Delete screen is displayed.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
2. Select the profile to be deleted, and click the
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
4.13.2 Deleting profiles
4 - 91
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
MEMO
4 - 92
EDITING PROGRAMS
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
5
OVERVIEW
1
This chapter explains the functions of the program editors used to edit sequence programs.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Programming
5-2
5.2
Label Programming
5-2
5.3
Considerations for Using Label Projects
5-4
5.4
Converting/Compiling Projects
5-9
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
5-1
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.1
Programming
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
For programming in each project, refer to the following manuals:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
5.2
Label Programming
Programs can be standardized by using the label programming.
This function is available when a new program is created with the selection of "Use Label".
For projects without labels, the programming can be changed to the label programming by changing
the project type. (Section 4.5)
■
Features of label programming
● Since device assignment can be changed according to the equipment configuration by
creating general-purpose programs with the label programming, the programs with labels can
simply be utilized for other programs.
● Programs can be created using labels without knowing the equipment configuration.
● Labels and actual devices are associated as the equipment configuration is determined. This
function allows easier creation of execution programs.
● By simply specifying a label assignment method, devices are assigned automatically with the
program compilation function without being aware of device names/device numbers.
● Debugging can be performed effectively by monitoring/debugging programs without
changing label names.
5-2
5.2 Label Programming
■
1
Terms used in label programming
Label project
New projects created with the selection of "Use Label" on the New
Project screen. (Section 4.2.1)
Symbolic information
Data of information such as programs, global labels, and local labels,
required for label programming. (Section 15.1.5)
These data are restored by writing/reading symbolic information to/
from a programmable controller CPU.
Program
Program data written with applicable programming languages.
For label projects, these are data included in symbolic information even
when a program is created using devices only.
Execution program
Programs executed on programmable controller CPUs.
Devices are assigned to labels with compilation, and execution
programs are created.
Actual device
Devices assigned to labels after compilation, or devices not written with
labels.
Global label
Labels available for all program data when multiple program data are
created in a project.
Local label
Labels available for each program data only.
Labels and each program data are set one to one.
Device/label automaticassign setting
A setting of types and ranges of devices assigned to labels.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Compilation
An operation in which programs are converted to execution programs.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Description
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Term
4
The following is an image of writing/reading label project data to/from a programmable controller CPU
in GX Works2.
< Writing data to programmable controller CPU >
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Project view
OVERVIEW
The following are the terms used in the label programming.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
GX Works2 (Label project)
Symbolic information
Program
Program
Local label
Local label
Global label
6
Write to PLC
Write to PLC
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Write to PLC
Programmable
controller CPU
Execution program
Execution program
< Reading data from programmable controller CPU >
Symbolic information
7
Read from PLC
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
GX Works2 (Label project)
Symbolic information
Program
Local label
Global label
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Program
Local label
5-3
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.3
Considerations for Using Label Projects
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains the considerations for using label projects.
5.3.1
Editing programs
1)
Label comments set on the label setting editor are displayed as comments to labels.
Comments created on the device comment editor are not displayed.
Up to 1024 characters can be set for label comments, however, the number of characters that can
be displayed is 32.
2)
When the same label is set for global label/local label, the label comment set for local label
setting is displayed.
3)
The index setting cannot be set when labels are used. Use actual devices to set the index
setting.
■
Considerations when editing programs
1)
When an instruction in which data are stored to multiple word devices is used as shown
below, specify an array for the label in the storage destination of operation result.
• Division (Storing values such as quotient and remainder of division)
• Instructions such as the block data transfer instruction (BMOV)
[ Storage example when division is specified with array ]
a Setting
Label name
Device type
Number of elements
Program
: Value_A
: Array (word)
:2
: [/ D0 D1 Value_A]
2 words required
b Operation result
Operation result of [/ D0 D1 Value_A]
5-4
5.3.1 Editing programs
Value_A[0]
Value_A[1]
(Quotient)
(Remainder)
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
1
OVERVIEW
When setting arrays, be aware of device types and the number of elements in the data
storage destination.
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
[ Example of incorrect device type setting ]
a Setting
: Value_A
: Double word
: [D* D0 D2 Value_A]
b Operation result
Device range assigned
to Value_A
d [1]
Device range for storing operation result
d [2]
Device range used
by other labels
2
4 words required
Data register
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Label name
Device type
Program
Overwritten device range
d [3]
d [4]
d [5]
3
For the above example, assign 4 words to the label (Value_A) in the storage destination of
operation result.
To assign 4 words, set the following setting on the label setting editor.
Device type: Array (double word) Number of elements: 2
After compilation, the consecutive device ranges for 4 words are secured.
Do not overlap the device ranges which are stored as execution result of instruction when
assigning devices with global labels.
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
Label name
Device type
Number of elements
Device
Program
: Value_A
: Array (Double word)
:2
: D100
: [D* D0 D2 Value_A]
Label name
Device type
Device
Program
: Value_B
: Double word
: D102
: [* D10 D11 Value_B]
Device set for
Value_A
Device set for
Value_B
5
4 words required
2 words required
EDITING
PROGRAMS
b Operation result
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
[ Example of incorrect device setting ]
a Setting
Data register
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
4
Device range for storing operation result
Overwritten device range
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
For the above example, assign the device of label (Value_B) to D104.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
3)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
2)
5.3.1 Editing programs
5-5
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.3.2
Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to
PLC/Online program change)
■
Writing symbolic information
1)
In order to restore programs by reading symbolic information from the programmable
controller CPU, write symbolic information.
Symbolic information can be written by selecting the following item on the execution screen of
Write to PLC/Online program change.
• Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
• Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
Note that symbolic information and execution programs can be written to separate memories.
Specify the write destination memory for "Target Memory". The default setting of write destination
memory for symbolic information can be changed in the option setting. Set "Setting for Save
Destination of Symbolic Information to PLC" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Symbolic Information".
< Write to PLC >
Symbolic information and all execution programs
are selected when "Symbolic Information" is selected.
The program which is consistent with the symbolic
information can be written to the programmable
controller CPU.
GX Works2
Symbolic information
Program 1
Program 2
Local label
Local label
Perform the Write to
PLC/Online program
change operation on
label program
< Online program change >
Programmable
controller CPU
Execution program 1
Execution program 2
Symbolic information
When the Write to PLC/Online program change operation is performed on execution programs
only, program inconsistency occurs. This operation must be performed on both symbolic
information and execution programs.
2)
When writing data to a programmable controller CPU, the confirmation message asking "Do
you want to overwrite?" may be displayed as corresponding to the execution programs.
The symbolic information will not be written normally if "No" was selected. Perform the data
write operation again, and complete the operation normally.
■
Writing execution programs only
1)
When an area to store symbolic information cannot be secured on the programmable
controller CPU, write execution programs only.
Projects contain symbolic information must be kept securely on a personal computer.
2)
Write execution programs without selecting the following item.
• Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
• Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
5-6
5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change)
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
1
OVERVIEW
Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read
from PLC)
■
Reading symbolic information
1)
Execute the Read from PLC operation with a label project.
2)
When reading data from a programmable controller CPU, specify the memory to which the
symbolic information is stored for "Target Memory" of symbolic information.
3)
Do not perform the Read from PLC operation on the symbolic information when the
symbolic information and the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU are
not consistent.
When the symbolic information is read with program inconsistency, the execution programs which
are running on the programmable controller CPU cannot be restored. Check the date of the Write
to PLC operation which was performed on the symbolic information and the execution programs,
and prevent from performing the Read from PLC operation with program inconsistency. Date of the
data write operation can be checked with the column of "Last Change" on the Online Data
Operation screen for "Delete PLC Data".
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
The following are the considerations when symbolic information needs to be read with program
inconsistency.
• Create backup data of symbolic information on a personal computer before performing the Read
from PLC operation.
Symbolic information on a personal computer will be overwritten with symbolic information on a
programmable controller CPU. To prevent from erasing the latest symbolic information, save the
project and create backup data of symbolic information.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5.3.3
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
• The following message is displayed when the Read from PLC operation is performed with
program inconsistency.
Follow the instruction described in the message.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC)
5-7
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
■
Reading execution programs only
1)
Do not read execution programs only.
When only the execution programs needs to be read, read them with a project without labels.
The following warning message is displayed when the execution programs created from the
symbolic information are read with a project without labels.
5.3.4
Verifying programs
Symbolic information cannot be verified. The program verification operation can be performed on
execution programs only.
5.3.5
Monitoring programs
Programs created with labels can be monitored.
Programs with labels registered to the Watch window can be monitored.
5-8
5.3.4 Verifying programs
5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to convert/compile an edited project to convert it into the code executable
on the programmable controller CPU.
The type of conversion/compilation differs according to the project type as shown in the table below.
Project type
Simple project
(without labels)
Simple project
(with labels)/
Structured project
Conversion/compilation type
Description
Build
Fix changes.
Online Program Change
Fix changes, and simultaneously, write the difference between the fixed
programs and the programs stored on the programmable controller CPU
to the programmable controller CPU.
Rebuild All
Convert all programs.
Build
Convert and compile uncompiled data (programs, structures, labels and
functions/function blocks).
Online Program Change
Convert and compile data, and simultaneously, write the difference
between the fixed programs and the programs stored on the
programmable controller CPU to the programmable controller CPU.
Rebuild All
Convert and compile all data (programs, structures, labels and functions/
function blocks).
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
For details, refer to the following manuals:
Section 15.9 "Online Program Change"
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
OVERVIEW
1
Converting/Compiling Projects
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
5.4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
5-9
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
MEMO
5 - 10
SETTING PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the setting items, operations on the setting screens, and common notes on
parameter settings.
For necessary information and details of settings, refer to the manuals of each module to be used.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
6
OVERVIEW
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Setting PLC Parameters
6-2
6.2
Setting Redundant Parameters
6 - 36
6.3
Setting Network Parameters
6 - 37
6.4
Setting Remote Password
6 - 73
5
6.5
Checking Parameters
6 - 75
6.6
Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
6 - 76
6.7
Setting default parameters
6 - 78
EDITING
PROGRAMS
6.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6-1
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1
Setting PLC Parameters
This section explains how to set PLC parameters.
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC Parameter".
Display contents
Item
Description
The setting items are categorized under tabs according to their purpose.
• The parameter setting status is displayed by different font colors of the tab names.
Font color
Tab
Setting status
Red
Status that data is not set under the tab
(Data must be set under the tab for operation.)
Blue
Status that data is set under the tab
(A red tab name changes to blue after data is set.)
Magenta
Default values
(The user settings are not set under the tab.)
Dark blue
Values other than default values
(A magenta tab name changes to dark blue after data is set.)
• Details of the setting items Section 6.1.1
6-2
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
Screen button
●
OVERVIEW
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Checks the X/Y setting made on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter or in the network
parameter.
●
Resets all setting items on the screen being open to their defaults.
●
2
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
● Considerations when changing PLC parameters
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, all programs need to be compiled when the following PLC parameters are changed.
• "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
• "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
• Settings on the <<Device>> tab
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels.
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device
memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
● Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator
• When GX Works2 is started up from MELSOFT Navigator, parameters that can be set by MELSOFT Navigator are
displayed with green background.
• A parameter set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited.
To edit it, select [Tool]  [Options]  "iQ Works Interaction" and select "Enable an editing of parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Checks whether the user-set parameters on the screen being open are correct.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
●
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
●
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6-3
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.1
PLC parameter item list
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The following table shows the applicable PLC parameter items for each programmable controller type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(User's manuals and programming manuals of each CPU)
: Applicable –: Not applicable
Q series
Setting tab name
Basic model
QCPU
High Performance model QCPU/
Redund
Process CPU/
ant CPU
Universal model QCPU
L series
FX series
Remote
I/O
module
LCPU
Communication
head module
FXCPU*1
Communication Head
Setting
–
–
–
–
–

–
PLC Name



–



PLC System*2







PLC File



–

–
–
PLC RAS






–
Boot File

*3

–
*4
–
–
Program
–


–

–
–
SFC



–

–
–
Device



–

–

I/O Assignment






–
Multiple CPU Setting
*5
*5
–
–
–
–
–
Built-in Ethernet Port
Setting
–
*6
–
–
*4
–
–
Ethernet Port Setting
–
–
–
–
–
–

Built-in I/O Function
Setting
–
–
–
–

–
–
Serial Communication
*7
*8
–
–
–
–
–
Built-in Serial Setting
–
–
–
–
*9
–
–
Adapter Serial Setting
–
–
–
–
*4
–
–
Memory Capacity
–
–
–
–
–
–

Special Function Block
–
–
–
–
–
–

Positioning
–
–
–
–
–
–

Operation Setting
–
–
–

–

–
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
*6 :
*7 :
*8 :
*9 :
For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items differ according to the programmable controller type. (■ PLC parameter setting items for
FXCPU)
For FXCPU, PLC System is separated into PLC System (1) and PLC System (2).
Not supported by Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U.
Not supported by L02S/L02S-P.
Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.
For Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only
For Q00/Q01 only
For Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only
For L02S/L02S-P only
6-4
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Remarks
Label
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller
CPU.
–
Comment
Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.
–
2
Item
Description
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
PLC System
Remarks
Timer Limit Setting
Set the time limit of the low-speed/high-speed timer.
–
RUN-PAUSE Contacts
Set the contacts for controlling RUN/PAUSE of the programmable
controller CPU.
PAUSE contact only setting is not available. (RUN contact only or
RUN contact + PAUSE contact setting is available.)
–
Set the contact device for executing a latch data backup operation.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
Set whether to back up all files on the standard RAM when executing
a latch data backup operation.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only
Latch Data Backup
Operation Valid Contact
Remote Reset
Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.
–
Output Mode at STOP to Set the status of output (Y) when the programmable controller is
RUN
switched from STOP to RUN.
–
Floating Point Arithmetic
Set whether to perform floating-point processing in double precision.
Processing
3
4
High Performance
model QCPU only
Set the interrupt pointer assignment of the module.
Set the start I/O number and start SI number of the module.
–
Module Synchronization
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable
controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
–
Built-in CC-Link Setting
Set whether to set the built-in CC-Link.
L26-BT/L26-PBT only
Common Pointer No.
Set the start number of the common pointers used in the program.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
Points Occupied by
Empty Slot
Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base
unit/extension base unit/block.
–
Set the start number of the interrupt counters.
Set the execution interval for the interrupt pointers.
–
System Interrupt
Settings
Set the fixed scan interval for high-speed interrupt pointers, highspeed I/O refresh, and high-speed buffer transfer.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Intelligent Function
Module Setting
High Performance
model QCPU/
Highspeed Universal
model QCPU only
Interrupt Program/Fixed
Scan Program Setting
Set whether to perform high-speed execution of an interrupt program.
A-PLC Compatibility
Setting
Set whether to use the MELSEC-A series special relays/special
registers (SM1000/SD1000 to SM1299/SD1299).
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU/
Redundant CPU
Service Processing
Setting
Set the processing time and the number of times of service
processing.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
PLC Module Change
Setting
Set this to replace the CPU module using a memory card.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU (except for L02S/
L02S-P) only
–
6
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
2)
Description
OVERVIEW
Item
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
PLC Name
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
1)
1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
PLC parameter setting items for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
■
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6-5
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
3)
PLC File
Item
Description
Set the file register file to be used in the program.
Set whether to transfer data to the standard ROM when executing a
latch data backup operation.
Comment File Used in a
Command
Set the device comment file to be used in the program.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
Initial Device Value
Set the device initial value file to be used on the programmable
controller CPU.
File for Local Device
Set the local device file to be used in the program.
File used for SP.DEVST/ Set the device data ROM write/read instruction file to be used in the
S.DEVLD Instruction
program.
–
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
PLC RAS
Item
Description
Set the WDT of the programmable controller CPU.
WDT (Watchdog Timer)
Setting
Set the WDT for an initial execution type program.
Set the WDT for a low-speed execution type program.
Remarks
–
–
High Performance
model QCPU only
Error Check
Set whether to detect specified errors.
–
Operating Mode When
There is an Error
Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error
is detected.
–
Operation History
Set whether to save the operation history of a CPU module.
Constant Scanning
Set the constant scan time.
Error History
Set the storage destination for error histories of the programmable
controller CPU.
High Performance
model QCPU only
Low Speed Program
Execution Time
Set the execution time of a low-speed program in every scan.
High Performance
model QCPU only
Module Error History
Collection (Intelligent
Function Module)
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function
module.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
Memory Check
Set whether to check the memory of the program.
Process CPU/
Redundant CPU only
*1 :
6-6
–
Universal model
QCPU(except for Highspeed Universal model
QCPU)/LCPU only
File Register
4)
Remarks
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only*1
–
A CPU module whose function version is B and first five digits of the serial number are "19062" or higher.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
Boot File
Boot File Setting
Remarks
Set whether to clear the program memory when booting up.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
Set whether to write data in the memory card automatically to the
standard ROM when booting up.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
OVERVIEW
Boot Option
Description
Set the type, data name, transfer source drive, and transfer
destination drive of the boot file.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
2
Basic model QCPU
only
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
Set whether to boot up with the standard ROM.
Program
Item
Remarks
Program
Set the file name and execution type (executing condition) for
programs when several programs are written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Set the fixed scan interval (the execution interval of a fixed scan
execution type program).
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
File Usability Setting
button
Display the File Usability Setting screen.
Not applicable to Basic
model QCPU
I/O Refresh Setting
button
Display the I/O Refresh Setting screen.
High Performance
model QCPU only
3
4
SFC Program Start
Mode
Set the start-up mode of an SFC program.
–
Start Conditions
Set the start-up condition of an SFC program.
–
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
SFC
Output Mode When the
Block is Stopped
Set the SFC program output mode at block stop.
–
5
Remarks
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Description
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7)
Description
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
6)
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
5)
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6-7
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
8)
Device
Item
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only*1
Set whether to prohibit device writing from an external device.
Device Points
Set the number of points used for each device of the programmable
controller CPU.
–
Latch (1) Start/End
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number)
clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear
operation.
–
Latch (2) Start/End
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number) not
clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear
operation.
–
Local Device Start/End
Set the range (start device number/end device number) of devices
used as a local device.
–
Write Protection Start/
End
Set a device range to prohibit device writing from an external device
(start device No./end device No.).
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only*1
File Register Extended
Setting
Set the extended data register and extended link register.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
Indexing Setting for
Device*2
Set the start number of Z to be 32-bit indexed, or use the index
register ZZ for 32-bit index setting.
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
Latch Interval Setting
Set the device latch interval to be performed by the set interval or by
each scan.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only
Pointer Extended
Setting for AutomaticAssign Device
Set whether to use the pointer extended setting.
When using the pointer extended setting, set the extended points.
LCPU (L06/L06-P/L26/
L26-P/L26-BT/
L26-PBT) only
A CPU module whose function version is B and first five digits of the serial number are "19062" or higher.
"Indexing Setting for ZR Device" is displayed for programmable controller CPUs other than high-speed universal
model QCPUs.
I/O Assignment
Item
Description
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit/block.
I/O Assignment
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
Base Setting
6-8
Remarks
Disable device write
from external
*1 :
*2 :
9)
Description
Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
Remarks
–
Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only
–
Not applicable to LCPU
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
10) Multiple CPU Setting
Remarks
No. of PLC
Set the number of programmable controller CPUs used in the
multiple CPU system.
Operation Mode
Set the operation mode of the multiple CPU system when a stop
error occurs in any of the programmable controller CPU No. 2 to No.
4.
The multiple CPU system stops when a stop error occurs in the CPU
No. 1.
Host Station
Set the CPU number for the host CPU.
Multiple CPU
Synchronous Startup
Setting
Select the CPU modules to be started up synchronously.
Online Module Change
Set whether to allow Online module change in the multiple CPU
system.
I/O Sharing When Using
Multiple CPUs
Set whether to retrieve the I/O status of the I/O module or intelligent
function module controlled by other programmable controller CPUs.
–
Set the CPU shared memory to enable data sharing among multiple
Communication Area
CPUs.
Setting (Refresh Setting)
(Usable devices: B, M, Y, D, W, R, and ZR)
–
Universal model QCPU
(excluding Q00UJ/
Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)
only
Not applicable to Q00U/
Q01U/Q02U
Universal model QCPU
(excluding Q00U/Q01U/
Q02U) only
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Set the user setting area, auto refresh, assignment confirmation, and
system area.
–
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Multiple CPU High
Speed Transmission
Area Setting
OVERVIEW
Description
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6-9
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
11) Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Item
Description
IP Address Setting
Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Communication Data
Code
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
Remarks
Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
Open Setting button/
Ethernet Conf. button
Ethernet Built-in CPU
only
FTP Setting button
Select whether to use the FTP function.
FTP Client Setting
button
Set a login name, password, and FTP server connection target
settings (FTP server name, FTP server address).
E-mail Setting button
Set a password, e-mail address, and mail server name.
DNS Setting button
Set the address of DNS server.
Time Setting button
Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting
the time.
Ethernet Built-in CPU
only
MELSOFT Connection
Extended Setting button
Set whether to use the MELSOFT Connection Extended function,
and set a network number and a station number when using it.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only
CC-Link IEF Basic
Setting button
Set whether to use CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and set the
network configuration setting and the refresh setting.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU/Ethernet
Builtin LCPU only
Set the communication pattern and the communication settings.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU*1/
Ethernet Builtin LCPU*2
only
Set whether to use the IP Packet Transfer function.
Universal model QCPU
(except for Q00UJ/
Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)/
LCPU (except for L02S/
L02S-P) only
Simple PLC
Communication Setting
IP Packet Transfer
Setting
*1 :
*2 :
6 - 10
• For High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU (except for L02S/
L02S-P)
When selecting "Set Open Setting in Ethernet Configuration
window", the Open Setting button is switched to the Ethernet Conf.
button. Set the communication settings to the Ethernet device on
the Ethernet Configuration window. The equipment configuration is
displayed graphically.
LCPU (except for L02S/
L02S-P) only
Modules with function version B and the first five digits of the serial number are '20042' or higher are supported.
Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '13042' or higher are supported.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
12) Built-in I/O Function Setting
Remarks
Positioning
Set the parameters of the positioning axis 1 setting and positioning
axis 2 setting.
High-speed Counter
Set the operation mode of high-speed counter CH1 setting and highspeed counter CH2 setting.
Input Signal
Set the input signal function, input response time, and interrupt
processing condition.
Output Signal
Select the output signal function and error time output mode.
LCPU only
2
13) Serial Communication
Description
Set the transmission speed.
Sum Check
Set the sum check.
Remarks
Online Change
3
–
Transmission Wait Time Set the transmission wait time.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
Transmission Speed
Set whether to allow Online program change.
14) Built-in Serial Setting
Description
Remarks
Select the function to be used.
Transmission Setting
Set the transmission setting of the communication protocol.
Communication Speed
Setting
Set the communication speed.
Serial Communication
Function
Set the transmission wait time and online change.
Predefined Protocol
Support Function
Set the start device which stores the operation status of the
communication protocol.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Item
Select Function
–
5
15) Adapter Serial Setting
Remarks
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Description
Select the adapter type to be used.
Select Function
Select the function to be used.
Transmission Setting
Set the transmission setting of the communication protocol.
Communication Speed
Setting
Set the communication speed.
Station No. Setting
(0 -- 31)
Set the station number for multi-drop connection.
Serial Communication
Function
Set the transmission wait time and online change.
Predefined Protocol
Support Function
Set the start device which stores the operation status of the
communication protocol.
6
–
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
Adapter Type
OVERVIEW
Description
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 11
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
PLC parameter setting items for communication head module
1)
Communication Head Setting
Item
Description
Remarks
Set the operation mode of the network.
CC-Link IE Field
Network Setting
Set the network number of the module.
Set the station number of the module.
CC IE Field head
module only
Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history
on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.
SSCNET III/H Network
Setting
2)
Set the operation mode of the network.
Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history
on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.
PLC Name
Item
3)
Description
Remarks
Label
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller
CPU.
–
Comment
Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.
PLC System
Item
Remote Reset
4)
Description
Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.
Module Error History
Collection (Intelligent
Function Module)
Description
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function
module.
–
Remarks
–
Operation Setting
Item
6)
Remarks
PLC RAS
Item
5)
SSCNET III/H head
module only
Description
Assignment Method
Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Forwarding Parameter
between Devices
Set transmission source devices and transmission destination
devices.
Remarks
–
I/O Assignment
Item
Description
Remarks
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
6 - 12
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
–
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
PLC parameter setting items for remote I/O module
1)
PLC system
Module Synchronization
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable
controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
–
Points Occupied by
Empty Slot
Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base
unit/extension base unit.
–
2
Description
Remarks
Set whether to detect specified errors.
–
Operating Mode When
There is an Error
Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error
is detected.
–
Description
Remarks
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Error Check
Operation Setting
Item
Assignment Method
Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Forwarding Parameter
between Devices
Set transmission source devices and transmission destination
devices.
–
4
Item
Description
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
I/O Assignment
Remarks
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
–
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
5
–
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Base Setting
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
4)
Remarks
PLC RAS
Item
3)
Description
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
2)
1
OVERVIEW
■
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 13
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
● Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple CPU
Parameters for multiple CPU can be set by utilizing existing data by clicking the
<<I/O Assignment>>/<<Multiple CPU Setting>> tab.
Specify the project to be utilized, read the message, and then execute the function.
button on the
● Reading mounting status of programmable controller CPU
The mounting status of the programmable controller CPU can be read and overwritten to the current parameters by
clicking the
function.
button on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab. Read the message and execute the
● "Indexing Setting for ZR Device" on the <<Device>> tab.
When "Use ZZ" is set for the 32-bit index setting, the ZZ device cannot be used or monitored independently in the
program.
X0
[DMOV K0
ZR10ZZ0 ]
Usable
X1
[DMOV K0
ZZ0
]
Not usable
To confirm the current value of the ZZ device, specify Z and set the display format to 32-bit integer, on the Device/
Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
● Program settings
Executing conditions set in the program setting of the PLC parameter are applied to "Program Setting" on the Project
view. Program settings can also be set on the Project view.
For details of program setting on the Project view, refer to Section 4.2.1
<Setting screen for PLC parameter>
Execution types set in the Program
can be confirmed.
6 - 14
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
<Project view>
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
■
1
PLC parameter setting items for FXCPU
Description
Remarks
PLC System (1)
Item
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU without the
memory backup battery.
FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC,
and FX3UC only
Battery Mode
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU with the memory
backup battery.
FX3G and FX3GC only
MODEM Initialized
Select the modem initialization command for the remote access to the
programmable controller CPU.
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
RUN Terminal Input
Select the input number to use the input (X) of the programmable
controller CPU as the external RUN/STOP terminal.
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
PLC System (2)
Item
Description
Remarks
Channel selection
Select a channel to be the connection target.
Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Operate
Communication
Setting
Set whether to enable the communication setting.
Protocol*1
Select the communication protocol.
Data Length*1
Select the data length.
Parity*1
Select the parity.
Stop Bit*1
Select the stop bit.
Transmission
Speed*1
Select the transmission speed.
Header*1
Set the header.
Terminator*1
Set this to enable the terminator.
Control Line*1
Set this to enable the control line.
H/W Type*1
Select the cable type used in the communication.
Control Mode
Display the control mode.
Sum Check*1
Set this to add the sum check.
Transmission
Control Procedure*1
Select the transmission control procedure.
Station Number
Setting*1
Set the station number.
Time Out Judge
Time*1
Set the timeout period.
*1 :
3
4
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
3)
Battery Less Mode
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Set a program title to be stored on the programmable controller CPU.
6
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC, and
FX3UC only
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2)
Remarks
FX1, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N,
FXU, FX2N, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C,
FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Title
Description
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
PLC Name
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
1)
OVERVIEW
For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items differ according to the programmable controller type.
Not applicable when "Operate Communication Setting" is OFF.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 15
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4)
Device
Item
Device
5)
Description
FX1, FXU, FX2N, FX3U,
FX2C, FX2NC, and FX3UC
only
Set the latch range.
Memory Capacity
Item
Memory Capacity*1
Symbolic
Information
Capacity*2
Description
Select the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU.
Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, and FX1S.
• Display the symbolic information capacity of a memory cassette by
clicking the
File Register
Capacity
Set the file register capacity.
Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, and FX1.
Program Capacity
Display the capacity for sequence programs.
Special Function
Memory Capacity
Set whether to use the Special Function Block Settings, Positioning
Instruction Settings, and Built-in CC-Link/LT.
Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and
FX3UC only
When the symbolic information is saved in a built-in memory or a memory cassette, the symbolic information is
deleted by changing the memory capacity and writing the parameters. In this case, write the symbolic information
again.
This item is not printed with the batch print function or the print window function.
Special Function Memory Capacity
Item
Special Function
Block
Positioning
Description
Set the initial value of special extension modules/blocks.
Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting.
Special Function Block Settings
• Set the bias speed, max. speed, creep speed, zero return speed,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and interruption input of DVIT
instruction for each axis.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC only
Set the initial value of BFM.
• Set the details of the positioning table for each axis.
6 - 16
FX3U and FX3UC only
button.
Set the comment capacity.
Not applicable to FX0 and FX0S.
*2 :
Remarks
FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and
FX3UC only
• Display the symbolic information capacity of a built-in memory based
on the setting value of the memory capacity.
Comments Capacity
*1 :
6)
Remarks
FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, and
FX3UC only
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
Ethernet Port Setting
Description
Remarks
Select whether to connect the Ethernet port, and if the port is
connected, select a channel.
Only FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC can be set.
Communication
Data Code
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
2
Disable direct
connection to
MELSOFT
Set whether to disable the direct connection with MELSOFT.
Do not respond to
search for CPU on
network
Disable to respond to the Find CPU function of MELSOFT Connection.
Open Setting button
Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
Time Setting button
Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting the
time.
Log Record Setting
button
Set the storage location for error logs on the Log Record Setting
screen.
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The IP address can be set not only on PLC parameter settings but also with the IP address change function. In this
case, the settings of IP address change function will be given priority.
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
*1 :
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC, and FX3UC only
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Channel
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
IP Address Setting*1 Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
OVERVIEW
Item
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
7)
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 17
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.2
Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Check duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters.
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC Parameter" 
.
Display contents
Item
XY No.
Description
Display the I/O number.
Display the content set in the network parameter.
n: Slot number of the module (excluding Ethernet)
Display on Network column
Network
PLC network/CC IE (Slot n)
Remote I/O Net (Slot n)
Type
Description
MELSECNET, CC-Link IE
MELSECNET/H (Remote Master)
CC-Link (Slot n)
CC-Link
Blank
Not set.
Display whether the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
I/O
Assignment
Display on I/O Assignment column
I/O Assignment
Blank
Slot
Module Type
Points
I/O assignment is set.
I/O assignment is not set.
Display the slot, module type, number of occupied I/O points, and model name when the I/O
assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
Display the I/O assignment status as shown in the table below when the I/O assignment setting in
the PLC parameter is not set and X/Y devices are assigned in the network parameter.
Item
Model Name
Description
Description
"Slot" to "Points"
Assignment of X devices
"Model Name"
Assignment of Y devices
Display the module in which the first duplication is detected by parameter check.
Display on Duplication column
Duplication
MNET/CC IE (Slot 1)
to
MNET/CC IE (Slot 16)
CC-Link
6 - 18
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
Description
Network parameter of MELSECNET or CCLink IE (slot 1 to slot 16)
CC-Link remote I/O
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
Screen button
●
OVERVIEW
Writes data on the Acknowledge XY Assignment screen to a CSV file. (Section 6.6)
Display
I/O assignment
2
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 16) network refresh parameter
3
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 15) network refresh parameter
·
·
·
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
1
·
·
·
17
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 1) network refresh parameter
18
CC-Link remote I/O
● Refresh devices which are not displayed
Due to network specifications, the number of refresh devices which are set to the following stations in the CC-Link
parameter cannot be recognized in GX Works2. Therefore, they are not displayed on the Acknowledge XY Assignment
screen.
• Local station
• Sub-master station
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Priority
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● When a setting screen other than PLC parameter setting screen is being opened
When the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen or the CC-Link Module Configuration screen is
displayed, since the setting is not completed, set data of the previous setting are checked for duplications.
● Priority in the parameter check
The following table shows the priority in when GX Works2 checks the parameter settings.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
6 - 19
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.3
Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
*2 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Set the equipment configuration of Ethernet by dragging and dropping from the module list.
Select "Set Open Setting in Ethernet Configuration window" on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>>
tab of PLC parameter in advance.
For the online operations on the Ethernet Configuration window, refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
Screen display
Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC parameter"  <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>>  Click the
button.
List of devices
Device map area
6 - 20
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
Operating procedure
1. Select an Ethernet device from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of
OVERVIEW
devices' or 'device map area'.
An Ethernet device is added to the 'list of devices'.
The added Ethernet device is displayed on the 'device map area'.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Drag & Drop
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Set the items on the screen.
Display the connection number.
Model Name
Display the model name of Ethernet device.
Communication Method
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O
modules, and FXCPUs.
Protocol
Set the protocol for the open setting.
Fixed Buffer Send/Receive Setting
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O
modules, and FXCPUs.
PLC
–
IP Address
The IP address of the host station specified on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>>
tab of PLC parameter is displayed.
Port No.
Set the port number of the host station set to open setting.
Sensor/Device
–
A blank is displayed.
The MAC address is displayed when the configuration is detected by executing the
automatic detection of connected devices.
Host Name
Set the host name of Ethernet device.
IP Address
Set the IP address of Ethernet device.
Port No.
Set the port number of Ethernet device.
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask of Ethernet device.
Default Gateway
Set the default gateway of Ethernet device.
Existence Confirmation
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
MAC Address
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
No.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Description
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O
modules, and FXCPUs.
3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the Ethernet Configuration window.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Item
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 21
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Screen button
●
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the Ethernet Configuration
window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
For operations and considerations for setting "device map area" by executing the automatic detection
of connected devices, refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
●
/
Moves the position of the Ethernet device selected in the 'list of devices' up/down.
● Corrective actions when profiles do not match
When displaying a configuration window, an error massage may appear if the following two profiles do not match:
• Profile of a device used in a project
• Profile of a device registered in GX Works2
In this case, contact the manufacturer of the device for the profile that corresponds to "File Version" and "Device
Version" displayed on the Output window.
An error can be cleared by restarting GX Works2 after registering an obtained profile to GX Works2.
6 - 22
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
• The open system unset connection numbers are not applied to the Ethernet Configuration window,
and the remaining connection numbers are moved forward to the location of the unset number.
Therefore, when the connection number is specified in the program, add the number of generalpurpose Ethernet modules which are moved forward so as to not shift the already set existing
connection number.
• When the parameter is set on the Ethernet Configuration window, the file size of parameter to be
written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
● Clearing the item
The open setting set on the Ethernet Configuration window is applied on the Built-in Ethernet Port
Open Setting screen automatically.
• For iQSS-compatible devices, the open system is changed to MC protocol, and only the protocol
and port number of the programmable controller are set to Built-in Ethernet Port Open Setting
screen.
■
Considerations for setting of the "IP Address" column of "PLC" on 'list of
devices'
The following are the considerations when setting the "IP Address" column of "PLC" of 'list of devices'
on the Ethernet Configuration window.
● When the IP address on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab is changed
When the IP address of the host station is changed on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of
PLC parameter after setting the parameter on the Ethernet Configuration window, the IP address
does not match between the host station and the programmable controller CPU.
In this case, open the Ethernet Configuration window.
The "IP Address" column of "PLC" is changed to the IP address that has been set on the <<Built-in
Ethernet Port Setting>> tab.
● When the automatic detection of connected devices is executed
When setting the configuration of the iQSS-compatible device by executing the automatic detection
of connected devices, the detected IP address is set to the "IP Address" column of "PLC". If the
iQSS-compatible device has been communicated with other programmable controller CPU, the
different IP address as the host station is set.
In this case, set the same IP address on the "IP Address" column of "PLC" as the one set on the
<<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
• The connections to which the open system is set are displayed as general-purpose Ethernet
modules on the Ethernet Configuration window.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
The open setting set on the Built-in Ethernet Port Open Setting screen is applied on the Ethernet
Configuration window automatically.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● Selecting the item
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The following are the considerations when editing open setting by changing selected/cleared status.
1
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Considerations when the selected status of "Set Open Setting in Ethernet
Configuration window" is changed
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
■
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 23
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Replacing general SLMP module
Replace a general SLMP module with a specific Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select the general SLMP module to be replaced in the 'list of devices' on the
Ethernet Configuration window.
2. Select [Ethernet Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Replace General SLMP
Module].
The Replace General SLMP Module screen is displayed.
List of modules
to be replaced
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Replacement Target
List of modules to be
replaced
Replacement Candidate
6 - 24
Description
–
The general SLMP modules placed on the 'list of devices' are displayed.
Select the check box(es) on the "No." column of the general SLMP module to be
replaced. Two or more devices can be selected.
Select the Ethernet device to be replaced with.
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
1
button.
The general SLMP module in the 'list of devices' is replaced with the Ethernet device selected for
"Replacement Candidate". Also, the general SLMP module displayed on the 'device map area' is
replaced with the Ethernet device selected for "Replacement Candidate".
OVERVIEW
4. Click the
The general SLMP module
is replaced to the selected
Ethernet device.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Screen button
●
Selects all devices displayed on "Replacement Target".
●
4
Cancels the selected status of all devices selected for "Replacement Target".
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Changing to general SLMP module
Operating procedure
1. Select an Ethernet device to be changed in the 'list of devices' on the Ethernet
Configuration window.
2. Select [Ethernet Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General SLMP
Module].
6
The Ethernet device is changed to the general SLMP module.
■
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Change an Ethernet device to a general SLMP module.
Checking system configuration of Ethernet
Check whether the equipment configuration of Ethernet is correct after setting the open setting on the
Ethernet Configuration window.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
■
7
Operating procedure
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
• Select [Ethernet Configuration]  [Check]  [System Configuration].
The system configuration of Ethernet is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 25
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Copying/pasting Ethernet devices
Copy/paste a selected Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the Ethernet device to be copied from the 'list of
devices'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or
"Model Name"
2. Select [Edit]  [Copy].
The selected Ethernet device is copied.
3. Select [Edit]  [Paste].
The copied Ethernet device is added to the last row of the 'list of devices'.
■
Deleting Ethernet devices
Delete a selected Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the Ethernet device to be deleted from the 'list of
devices'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or
"Model Name"
2. Select [Edit]  [Delete].
The selected Ethernet device is deleted.
6 - 26
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
■
1
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
OVERVIEW
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Module List]/[Output].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
● Displaying Module List/Output window
The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 27
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.4
Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic
configuration window
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
*2 : Built-in Ethernet port LCPU only
Set the station information and the equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC parameter"  <<Built-in Ethernet Port
Setting>>
2. Set the IP address, the subnet mask pattern, and the default router IP address in
"IP Address Setting".
3. Click the
button and select "Use the CC-Link IEF Basic" on
the "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" screen.
4. Click the
button.
The CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window is displayed.
List of
stations
Device
map area
6 - 28
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
5. Select the module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations'
1
or 'device map area'.
OVERVIEW
The slave station (CC-Link IEF Basic module) is added to the 'list of stations'.
The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Drag and drop
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
6. Set the items on the screen.
Connected Count
Display the number of slave stations controlled by the master station (programmable controller
CPU).
List of stations
Display a station on CC-Link IE Field Network Basic in a list format.
"0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number' is displayed for slave station.
Model Name
Display the model name of the master station/slave station. When the module information
does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
STA#1
"0" is displayed for master station, and a number between 1 to 16 is displayed for a slave
station.
Station Type
Display the station type of the master station/slave station.
RX/RY Setting
Display the points of RX/RY, the start device number, and the end device number.
Click the cell and select the number of occupied stations*1 displayed by clicking
.
RWw/RWr Setting
Display the points of RWw/RWr, the start device number, and the end device number.
Group No.
Set the group number.
6
Display the setting status of a reserved station for a slave station.
RSVD STA
Click the cell and change the setting displayed by clicking
.
IP Address
Set the IP address of a slave station.
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask of a slave station.
MAC Address
The MAC address is displayed when the configuration is detected by executing the automatic
detection of connected devices.
Device map area
7
Display the information set to comment 1 on the Property screen.
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic graphically.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Comment
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
No.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Description
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
*1 : The number of points used differs depending on the number of occupied stations.
1 station: RX/RY 64 points, RWw/RWr 32 points
2 stations: RX/RY 128 points, RWw/RWr 64 points
3 stations: RX/RY 192 points, RWw/RWr 96 points
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
4 stations: RX/RY 256 points, RWw/RWr 128 points
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 29
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
7. Click [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
Screen button
●
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC-Link IEF Basic
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
For operations and considerations for setting "device map area" by executing the automatic detection
of connected devices, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
●
Sets some items on the Link Scan Setting screen. (■ Setting the link scan setting)
●
/
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down.
● Setting for a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module
When a non-Mitsubishi device or a device which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a CC-Link
IEF Basic connected module.
A CC-Link IEF Basic connected module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile.
(Section 4.13.1) (■ Replacing a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module)
● Display of a module name on the 'device map area'
"Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
● Corrective actions when profiles do not match
For details, refer to Point in Section 6.1.3.
6 - 30
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
■
1
Replacing a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module
1. Select a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module to be replaced in the 'list of stations'
on the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Replace CC-Link
IEF Basic Connected Module].
The Replace CC-Link IEF Basic Connected Module screen is displayed.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
OVERVIEW
Replace a CC-Link IEF Basic module with another one.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
List of modules
to be replaced
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
3. Set the items on the screen.
Replacement Target
List of modules to be
replaced
Display the station type and the points for the RX/RY setting of the module selected
on the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window.
Display modules with the same condition as the one selected for "Replacement
Target".
Select the checkbox(es) on the "Station No." column of the module to be replaced.
Two or more modules can be selected.
7
Select a module to be replaced with.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Replacement Candidate
6
Description
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 31
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The CC-Link IEF Basic connected module in the list of stations is replaced with the module
selected for "Replacement Candidate". The CC-Link IEF Basic connected module displayed on the
'device map area' is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate".
The CC-Link IEF Basic
connected module is
replaced to the selected device.
Screen button
●
Selects all devices displayed on "Replacement Target".
●
Cancels the selected status of all devices selected for "Replacement Target".
■
Changing to a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module
Change a module of a slave station to a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be changed in the 'list of stations' on the CC-Link IEF Basic
configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to CCLink IEF Basic Connected Module].
The module is changed to the CC-Link IEF Basic connected module.
6 - 32
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
■
1
Setting the link scan setting
OVERVIEW
Set the time out time and the number of retries to detect the disconnection of a slave station.
Screen display
button on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Click the
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Description
Set the number of retries for slave station disconnection detection.
Counts
Click the cell and change the setting by clicking
Slave Station Disconnect
Detected Image Diagram
Display
.
The operation image regarding the slave station disconnection detection period is
displayed.
Refer to this at the setting of "Time-out Period".
button.
The settings are applied to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
■
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
2. Click the
Set the timeout time for slave station disconnection detection.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Time-out period (10 to 65535)
4
–
Checking system configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic
6
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic is correct after setting the station
information on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
Operating procedure
• Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration]  [Check]  [System Configuration].
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
The system configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
Slave Station Disconnect Detected
Setting
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 33
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Copying/pasting modules
Copy/paste a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the module to be copied on the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or
"Model Name"
2. Select [Edit]  [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
3. Select [Edit]  [Paste].
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
■
Deleting module
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted on the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or
"Model Name"
2. Select [Edit]  [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
6 - 34
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
■
1
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
OVERVIEW
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Module List]/[Output].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
● Displaying Module List/Output window
The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 35
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.2
Setting Redundant Parameters
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Redundant CPU only
This section explains how to set redundant parameters.
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "Redundant Parameters".
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 6.1.
■
Redundant parameter setting items
1)
Operation mode setting
Item
2)
Description
Start Mode Setting
Set the device status when the system is powered ON or reset.
Standby System Watch Setting
Set whether to check errors on the standby system.
If an error occurs, the error can be checked with the PLC diagnostics function.
Debug Mode Setting
Set whether to start an operation in the debug mode.
Backup Mode Setting
Set whether to check the operating status consistency.
Tracking setting
Item
6 - 36
Description
Tracking Device Setting
Select a setting method for the tracking device.
Tracking Characteristics Setting
Set the tracking transfer mode.
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
Setting Network Parameters
2
Ethernet/CC-Link IE/MELSECNET parameter setting
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "Network Parameter"  "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET"/
"CC IE Field" .
The screen below is a screen for MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet module configuration.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
■
OVERVIEW
This section explains how to set the network parameters.
Only the parameter settings of the following network are supported for LCPU and FXCPU.
LCPU : CC-Link IE Field Network, Ethernet, and CC-Link
FXCPU: CC-Link
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
6.3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
●
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Screen button
(Not supported by LCPU)
Displays the Interlink Transmission Parameters screen.
●
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Checks the I/O assignment setting set in the PLC parameter and the status of X/Y devices assigned
in the network parameter. (Section 6.1.2)
●
Displays the Routing Information screen.
●
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Displays the Assignment Image screen of the refresh parameters.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6 - 37
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
●
(Redundant CPU only)
Displays the Group Setting screen.
●
Displays the Help - Network Setting screen for network range assignment.
●
Deletes the set parameters.
●
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.
●
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
6 - 38
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
CC-Link parameter setting
OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "Network Parameter"  "CC-Link".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Screen button
●
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
(Not supported by FXCPU)
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Displays the details of the I/O assignment settings. (Section 6.1)
●
Deletes the set parameters.
●
● Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator
• Parameter items which can be set from MELSOFT Navigator are displayed in green when GX Works2 is started from
MELSOFT Navigator.
• Parameters which are set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited. To edit,
select "Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator" under [Tool]  [Options]  "iQ Works
Interaction".
● Number of columns displayed on the CC-Link Module Configuration screen (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
A number of columns can be changed by selecting 4 or 2 columns for "Display number of columns for CC-Link list
setting" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Parameter".
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
●
5
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6 - 39
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.3.1
Network parameter item list
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following table shows the applicable network parameter types for each programmable controller
type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(User's manuals and reference manuals of each module)
: Applicable : Not applicable
Q series
Network type
CC-Link IE Controller
Network*1
L series
FX series
Basic model
QCPU
High Performance
model QCPU/
Process CPU/
Redundant CPU
Universal
model
QCPU
Remote I/O
module
LCPU
CC IE Field head
module
FXCPU



–
–
–
–
CC-Link IE Field Network
–
–

–

–
–
MELSECNET/10



–
–
–
–
MELSECNET/H



–
–
–
–
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O
–


–
–
–
–
Ethernet





–
–
CC-Link






*2
*1 :
*2 :
CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with the function version D and a serial number whose first 5 digits are '10041' or higher are
supported.
For Process CPU and Redundant CPU, CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '10042' or
higher is required.
Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
6 - 40
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
CC-Link IE setting
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
Group No.*1
Set the group number.
Station No.
Set the station number of a module.
2
Set the mode.
Set the I/O master station.
Specify Reserved
Station*1
Specify the reserved station.
3
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Identical Point
Assignment
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Shared Group
Setting*2
Set the shared group of the group cyclic function.
Supplementary
Setting
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per
station, and operation setting for returning.
Network Operation Settings*3
Set the parameter name, data link faulty station setting, output setting during CPU
STOP, IP address setting, and other settings.
Refresh Parameters
Set refresh parameters.
Interrupt Settings
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
Specification method for station
number
Set whether to set a station number by program or by parameter.
The station number can be specified by program only when the normal station or the
local station is selected in a project for Universal model QCPU/LCPU.
Operate with parameter of host/
master station*4
Set whether to operate link device points and assignments of the slave station with the
parameter set on the host station or the parameter set on the master station.
This item can be set for sub-master station only.
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
*4 :
For CC-Link IE Controller Network only
For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU only
For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), IP address setting
only
For CC-Link IE Field Network only
4
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Network Range
Assignment/
Network
Configuration
Settings
(Common
parameters)
Specify I/O
Master Station*1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Mode
OVERVIEW
Description
Specify the network type (CC-Link IE) whose parameters are to be set.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
Network Type
EDITING
PROGRAMS
■
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 41
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H setting
Item
Network Type
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
Group No.
Set the group number.
Mode
Set the mode.
Network Range
Assignment
(Common
parameters)
Specify I/O
Master Station
Set the I/O master station.
Specify Reserved
Station
Specify the reserved station.
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Identical Point
Assignment
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Supplementary
Setting
Set the transient setting, low-speed cyclic setting, and other settings.
Station Inherent
Parameters
Set station inherent parameters.
Refresh Parameters
Set refresh parameters.
Interrupt Settings
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
Operation at reconnection*1
Set whether to operate the station as a control station or a normal station when the line
is reconnected.
Baud Rate Setting*1
Set the baud rate on modules that support the twist bus.
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
*1 :
6 - 42
Description
Specify the network type (MELSECNET/10 mode or MELSECNET/H mode) whose
parameters are to be set.
For MELSECNET/H (control station) and MELSECNET/H extended mode (control station) only
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
MELSECNET/H Remote I/O setting
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
Mode
Set the mode.
Specify Reserved
Station
Network Range
Assignment
(Common
parameters)
2
Specify the reserved station.
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Supplementary
Setting
Set the constant scan time and the maximum number of return stations in one link scan.
Refresh Parameters
Set refresh parameters.
Interrupt Settings
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
Ethernet setting
4
Description
Network Type
Specify "Ethernet".
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Item
Group No.
Set the group number.
Station No.
Set the station number.
Mode
Set the mode.
Operation Setting
Set the common items for the module.
5
• Set IP addresses for DNS servers.
Open Setting
Set parameters required for the open processing.
Router Relay Parameter
Set parameters for the router relay function of Ethernet.
Station No.
Set information to link network number and station number with IP address for
communication target station or relay station when communicating with another station
programmable controller CPU via Ethernet.
IP Information
Set FTP parameters such as the login name, password, command input monitoring
timer, and PLC monitoring timer.
FTP Parameters*1
General Setting
Set the password, e-mail address, and inquiry interval for receiving mails.
Mail Server Name Set the SMTP server, POP server, and IP addresses for both servers.
E-mail Setting*1
Send Mail
Address Setting
Set addresses of send mail.
News Setting
Set the notifying condition.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
• Set data communication timer values.
Initial Setting
6
7
Interrupt Settings*1
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
Redundant Setting*2
Set the system B, system switching settings when communication error occurs, and
other settings.
Not supported by remote I/O module.
The redundant setting cannot be set when "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is selected. (Different IP addresses cannot be
assigned to each system.)
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
3
SETTING
PARAMETERS
■
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Start I/O No.
OVERVIEW
Description
Set "MELSECNET/H (remote master)".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
Network Type
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
■
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 43
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU CC-Link setting
Item
Description
Number of Modules
Set the number of CC-Link master/local modules.
Set the station information in the CCSelect this to set station information on the CC-Link Configuration window.
Link configuration window
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Operation Setting
Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Faulty Station Setting, Case of CPU Stop Setting,
Number of Occupied Stations, Expanded Cyclic Setting, Block Data Assurance per
Station, and Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device.
Type
Set the station type such as a master/local/standby master station.
Station No.*1
Set the station number.
Master Station Data Link Type
The setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" for the master station.
Mode
Set the mode.
Transmission Speed*1
Set the transmission speed.
Total Module Connected
Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or
standby master stations connected to the master station.
Remote Input (RX)
Remote Output (RY)
Remote Register (RWr)
Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw.
Remote Register (RWw)
Ver.2 Remote Input (RX)
Ver.2 Remote Output (RY)
Ver.2 Remote Register (RWr)
Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw for the remote network
additional mode.
Ver.2 Remote Register (RWw)
Special Relay (SB)
Special Register (SW)
Set the devices to refresh the data of SB and SW.
Retry Count
Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.
Automatic Reconnection Station
Count
Set the number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or
standby master stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.
Standby Master Station No.
Specify the station number of the standby master station.
PLC Down Select
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU
on the master station.
Scan Mode Setting
Specify whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan.
Delay Time Setting
Set the link scan interval delay time.
The setting screen and the setting items differ according to the selected/cleared status
of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window".
Station Information Setting/
CC-Link Configuration Setting*2
• Cleared
Set station information on the CC-Link Station Information screen. Set the settings
such as the station type and the number of occupied stations.
A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of
rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Parameter".
• Selected
Set station information on the CC-Link Configuration window. In addition to the
setting items on the CC-Link Station Information screen, settings such as the module
type are set. The equipment configuration is displayed graphically.
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition
and executing condition).
Interrupt Settings*3
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
6 - 44
For LCPU and CC IE Field head module only.
With the station information set on the CC-Link Configuration window, only the corresponding setting items on the CCLink Station Information screen are printed when executing the batch print or print window function. The equipment
configuration on the CC-Link Configuration window is not printed.
Not supported by CC IE Field head module and remote I/O module.
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
FXCPU CC-Link setting
Connection Block
Select "Set" to set a CC-Link master block.
Special Function Block No.
Specify the special function block number (0 to 7).
Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Disorder Station, and Case of CPU Stop Setting.
This setting is fixed to "Master Station" when "Set" is selected for "Connection Block".
Master Station Data Link Type
This setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" when "Set" is selected for
"Connection Block".
Mode
Set the mode.
Total Module Connected
Set the total number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent
device stations (including reserve stations) connected to the master station.
Retry Count
Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.
Automatic Reconnection Station
Count
Set the number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent device
stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.
PLC Down Select
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU
on the master station.
Station Information Setting
Set the station type, exclusive counts, and other settings.
A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of
rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Parameter".
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition
and executing condition).
2
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Operation Setting
Type
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Description
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
OVERVIEW
This parameter setting is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 45
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.3.2
Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration
window
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Network configuration and equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network can be set when "CC
IE Field (Master Station)", "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)", or "CC IE Field (Motion Master Station)"
is set in the CC-Link IE Field Network parameter.
Select "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field Configuration window" on the
MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen in advance.
Screen display
Click the
Configuration screen.
button on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module
List of
stations
Device
map area
Operating procedure
1. Select the module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations'
or 'device map area'.
The slave station is added to the 'list of stations'.
The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
Drag and drop
6 - 46
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
2. Set the items on the screen.
Select the mode by clicking
Assignment Method
Specify the assignment method by clicking
Link Scan Time (Approx.)
Display the approximate value of link scan time.
List of stations
.
.
2
Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link IE Field Network.
Module No.
"0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number' is displayed for slave station.
Model Name
Display the module type of master station/slave station.
When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
Set this item after registering the profile.
Station No.
"0" is displayed for master station, and a number between 1 to 120 is displayed for a slave
station.
Display the station type of master station/slave station.
Station Type
Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking
3
.
RX/RY Setting
Set the RX/RY assignment for each slave station.
Set RX/RY in 16-point unit.
RWw/RWr Setting
Set the RWw/RWr assignment for each slave station.
Set RWw/RWr in 4-point unit.
Refresh Device
Display devices of the CPU module to which link devices of master/local module are linkrefreshed.
This item is displayed only when the refresh parameter is set.
Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station.
Click the cell and change the setting by clicking
.
Alias
Display the device name.
Comment
Display the information set to comment 1 on the Property screen.
Station-specific mode
setting
Display the station-specific mode of the module.
Device map area
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Reserved/Error Invalid
Station
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Mode Setting
OVERVIEW
Description
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Item
5
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network graphically.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
3. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
/
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down. The station number does
not change even when the position of the module is moved.
*1
●
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC IE Field Configuration
window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
For operations and considerations of setting station information and equipment configuration with the
automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
*1 :
Supported by the following CPU modules.
• High-speed Universal model QCPUs (function version is B and the first five digits of the serial number are '17052'
or higher)
• LCPUs
6
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
●
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Screen button
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Exit the settings of the CC IE Field Configuration window.
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 47
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
*1
●
Read the station information and equipment configuration from the actual system configuration, and
verify with the CC IE Field configuration currently displayed in GX Works2.
For the procedure for verifying system configuration with a connected device and its considerations,
refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
*1 :
Supported by the following CPU modules.
• High-speed Universal model QCPUs (function version is B and the first five digits of the serial number are '17052'
or higher)
● Considerations when the selected status of "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field
configuration window" is changed
The following are the considerations when editing the network configuration by changing selected/cleared status.
• Selecting the item
The network configuration of "CC IE Field (Master Station)" or "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)" set on the
MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen is set on the CC IE Field Configuration window
automatically.
Note that, all modules of the network configuration are changed to general-purpose CC IE Field modules. The file
size of parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
• Clearing the item
The network configuration set on the CC IE Field Configuration window is set on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/
Ethernet Module Configuration screen automatically.
● Setting general-purpose CC IE Field modules
When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a generalpurpose CC IE Field module.
A general-purpose CC IE Field module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile.
(Section 4.13.1), (■ Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module)
● Display of module name on the 'device map area'
"Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
● Corrective actions when profiles do not match
For details, refer to Point in Section 6.1.3.
6 - 48
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module
1. Select the general-purpose CC IE Field module to be replaced in the 'list of stations'
on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Replace General CC IE
Field Module].
The Replace General CC IE Field Module screen is displayed.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
OVERVIEW
Replace a general-purpose CC IE Field module of slave station with a specific module.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
List of modules
to be replaced
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
3. Set the items on the screen.
Replacement Target
Description
–
6
Station Type
Display the station type selected on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
List of modules to be
replaced
Display modules with the same condition as the one selected for "Replacement Target".
Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced.
Two or more modules can be selected.
Select the module to be replaced with.
Replace the object name of
replacement target module to
the model name selected in
replacement candidate
Click the checkbox when replacing the object name of a replacement target module to
the model name selected from "Replacement Candidate".
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Replacement Candidate
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Item
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 49
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The general-purpose CC IE Field module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected
for "Replacement Candidate".
The general-purpose CC IE Field module displayed on the 'device map area' is replaced with the
module selected for "Replacement Candidate".
The general-purpose
module is replaced with
the selected module.
Screen button
●
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".
●
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".
■
Replacing to general-purpose CC IE Field module
Replace a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC IE Field module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on the CC IE Field
Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC IE
Field Module].
The module is changed to the corresponding general-purpose CC IE Field module.
■
Changing transmission path method
Change the transmission path method to line/star or ring.
Operating procedure
• Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Change Transmission Path Method]  [Line/
Star]/[Ring].
The transmission path method is changed to the selected transmission path method.
● Transmission path method and loopback function setting
The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting
screen are linked.
When line/star is selected, the loopback function setting is disabled.
When ring is selected, the loopback function setting is enabled.
6 - 50
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
Setting supplementary functions
OVERVIEW
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per station, and
operation setting for returning.
Operating procedure
2
1. Select [CC-IE Field Configuration]  [Supplementary Setting].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The CC IE Field Supplementary Setting screen is displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
2. Set the items on the screen.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Description
Loopback Function Setting
Set whether to use the loopback function.
Select this item when the transmission path method is ring.
Block Data Assurance per
Station
Set whether to assure block data per station for link refreshes between the CPU module
and the master/local module.
Select this when including a remote device station in the network configuration.
Operation Setting for Returning
Set whether to operate the station as a master station or a sub-master station when the
station is reconnected.
3. Click the
button.
The settings are applied to the CC IE Field Configuration window.
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Set the link scan mode.
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
● Transmission path method and loopback function setting
The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting
screen are linked.
When "Use" is cleared for the loopback function setting, line/start is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
Configuration]  [Change Transmission Path Method].
When "Use" is selected for the loopback function setting, ring is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
Configuration]  [Change Transmission Path Method].
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Item
Link Scan Mode Setting
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 51
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Assigning link devices equally
Assign link device points of all stations equally.
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Equal Assignment].
The Equal Assignment screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
RX/RY Equal Assignment
Start Station
Set the start station number to be assigned equally.
End Station
Set the last station number to be assigned equally.
Start No.
Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally.
Total Points Assigned
Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally.
RWw/RWr Equal Assignment
Start Station
Set the start station number to be assigned equally.
End Station
Set the last station number to be assigned equally.
Start No.
Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally.
Total Points Assigned
Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally.
3. Click the
button.
Link devices are assigned equally to the slave stations within the set range.
6 - 52
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
Assign the equal number of link device points
OVERVIEW
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Identical Point Assignment].
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The Identical Point Assignment screen is displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
4
3. Click the
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
2. Enter the number of points to be assigned.
button.
The equal number of points is assigned per stations.
■
Checking system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC IE Field is correct after setting the network
configuration on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
Operating procedure
• Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Check]  [System Configuration].
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 53
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Performing parameter processing of slave station
Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations.
The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station.
The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be
saved in the CSV file format.
● Considerations when performing parameter processing
Check the following before performing the parameter processing.
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC IE Field configuration.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the
CC IE Field Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Online]  [Parameter Processing of Slave
Station].
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.
6 - 54
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
3. Set the items on the screen.
Target Module Information
Display the slave stations on which the parameter processing is performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking
Parameter Information
Display the parameters of the slave station.
The selected parameters are the targets of the selected process to be executed.
Process Option
Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".
4. Click the
OVERVIEW
Description
.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
button.
The parameter processing is performed.
Screen button
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
●
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
●
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
●
Deletes all values displayed in the "Read Value" column of "Parameter Information".
Deletes all values displayed in the "Write Value" column of "Parameter Information".
●
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file
format in advance.
●
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
●
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 55
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Performing commands for slave stations
Perform commands for slave stations.
Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the
CC IE Field Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Online]  [Command Execution of Slave
Station].
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Target Module Information
Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking
Command Setting
Set the writing values set for the processing selected for "Method selection".
For details, refer to the manual of the slave station being used.
4. Select the
button.
The command processing is performed.
The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".
6 - 56
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
.
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
Copying/pasting modules
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the CC-Link module to be copied from the
'list of stations'.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The corresponding row is selected.
OVERVIEW
Copy/paste a selected module.
Select "Module No."
or "Model Name".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Select [Edit]  [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
3. Select [Edit]  [Paste].
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
● Selected status of modules
All cells on the 'list of stations' can be selected by selecting [Edit]  [Select All].
5
Deleting modules
EDITING
PROGRAMS
■
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from the 'list of
6
stations'.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
The corresponding row is selected.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Select "Module No."
or "Model Name".
2. Select [Edit]  [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 57
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window
Display/hide the Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Module List]/[Output]/[Supplementary
Information].
● Displaying Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window
The Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
■
Displaying/hiding the object name in the list of stations
Display/hide the object name in the list of stations.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Object Name Display].
6 - 58
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Station information and equipment configuration of CC-Link can be set when master station or master
station (duplex function) is set in the CC-Link network parameter.
Select "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window" on the CC-Link network
parameter screen in advance.
Screen display
2
3
button on the network parameter screen of CC-Link.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Click the
OVERVIEW
1
Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration
window
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
6.3.3
List of stations
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Device map area
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
Operating procedure
1. Select a module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations' or
SETTING
PARAMETERS
'device map area'.
6
A slave station is added to the 'list of stations'.
The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Drag and drop
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 59
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Mode Setting
Description
Select the mode by clicking
.
TX Speed
Select the transmission speed by clicking
Link Scan Time (Approx.)
Display the approximate value of link scan time.
List of stations
.
Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link network.
Module No./Station No.
Display the number of slave stations and station numbers set to the master station.
"0/0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number/station number' is
displayed for slave station.
Example: For a module set as the 3rd module of the slave station and its station
number is 6: 3/6
Model Name
Display the module type of master station/slave station.
When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
Station Type
Version
# of STA Occupied
Display the station type of master station/slave station.
Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking
Display the module version of slave station.
Click the cell and select the version displayed by clicking
.
Display the number of occupied stations of slave station.
Click the cell and select the number of occupied stations displayed by clicking
Expanded Cyclic Setting
Display the expanded cyclic setting of slave station.
Remote Station Points
Display the number of remote station points of slave station.
Reserved/Err Invalid STA
Intelligent Buffer Selection
(decimal-word unit)
Station-specific mode
setting
Device map area
.
.
Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station.
Click the cell and change the setting displayed by clicking
.
Display buffer memory for Send/Receive/Auto when the salve station is an intelligent
device station.
Click the cell and enter the value.
Display the setting when the station-specific mode setting is supported by the slave
station.
Click the cell and select the station-specific mode displayed by clicking
.
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link network graphically.
3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the CC-Link Configuration window.
Screen button
●
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC-Link Configuration
window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
For operations and considerations of setting station information and equipment configuration with the
automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual.
 iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
●
Reads the station information and the equipment configuration from the actual system configuration,
and verify them against the CC-Link Configuration window being displayed.
For the operating procedure and the considerations when verifying the connected equipment and the
actual system configuration, refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
●
/
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down.
6 - 60
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
3
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
● Corrective actions when profiles do not match
For details, refer to Point in Section 6.1.3.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
● Setting general-purpose CC-Link modules
When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a generalpurpose CC-Link module.
A general-purpose CC IE Field module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile.
(Section 4.13.1)
(■ Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module)
● Display of module name on the 'device map area'
"Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
● Transmission speed of Q series CC-Link master/local module
Change the transmission speed with the transmission speed/mode setting switch on the module.
The transmission speed selected on the CC-Link Configuration window is not applied to the module if the Write to PLC
operation is performed.
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Considerations when the selected status of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window"
is changed
The following are the considerations when editing the station information by changing selected/cleared status.
• Selecting the item
The station information set on the CC-Link Station Information screen is set on the CC-Link Configuration window
automatically.
Note that, all modules of the station information are changed to general-purpose CC-Link modules. The file size of
parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
• Clearing the item
The station information set on the CC-Link Configuration window is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen
automatically.
OVERVIEW
1
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 61
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module
Replace a general-purpose CC-Link module of slave station with a specific module.
A description of link device is displayed on the CC-Link Device Reference window by replacing a
general-purpose CC-Link module with a specific module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a general-purpose CC-Link module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on
the CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Replace General CC-Link
Module].
The Replace General CC-Link Module screen is displayed.
List of modules
to be replaced
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Replacement Target
List of modules to be
replaced
Replacement Candidate
6 - 62
Description
Display the version, the number of occupied stations, station type, and expanded cyclic
setting of the module selected on the CC-Link Configuration window.
Display modules with the same condition as the module selected for "Replacement
Target".
Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced.
Two or more modules can be selected.
Select a module to be replaced with.
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
button.
The general-purpose CC-Link module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected for
"Replacement Candidate". The general-purpose CC-Link module displayed on the 'device map
area' is replaced with the selected module.
OVERVIEW
4. Click the
The general-purpose
module is replaced with
the selected module.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Screen button
●
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".
●
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".
4
Changing to general-purpose CC-Link module
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
■
Change a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC-Link module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be changed in the 'list of stations' on the CC-Link Configuration
5
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC-Link
Module].
Checking system configuration of CC-Link
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC-Link is correct after setting the station information on
the CC-Link Configuration window.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
The module is changed to the corresponding general-purpose CC-Link module.
■
EDITING
PROGRAMS
window.
7
Operating procedure
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
• Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Check]  [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 63
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Performing parameter processing of slave station
Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations.
The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station.
The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be
saved in the CSV file format.
● Considerations when performing parameter processing
Check the following before performing the parameter processing.
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration.
• A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the
CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Online]  [Parameter Processing of Slave
Station].
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.
6 - 64
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
3. Set the items on the screen.
Display the information of target equipment on which the parameter processing is
performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking
Parameter Information
Select the parameter(s) to perform the processing and enter settings such as a
writing value.
Display only selectable
parameters
Process Option
4. Click the
.
Select this to display only parameters to which the processing selected for
"Method selection" can be performed.
Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".
button.
The parameter processing is performed.
OVERVIEW
Target Module Information
Description
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Screen button
●
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
●
4
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
●
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Deletes all values displayed in the "Read Value" column of "Parameter Information".
Deletes all values displayed in the "Write Value" column of "Parameter Information".
●
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file
format in advance.
●
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
●
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 65
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Performing commands for slave stations
Perform commands for slave stations.
Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.
● Considerations when performing commands
Check the following before performing commands.
• The programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in STOP status.
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration.
• A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the
CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Online]  [Command Execution of Slave
Station].
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Target Module Information
Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking
Command Setting
Set the writing values for the processing selected for "Method selection".
4. Click the
button.
The command processing is performed.
The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".
6 - 66
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
.
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
■
1
Copying/pasting modules
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be copied from
the 'list of stations'.
Select "Module No.
/Station No." or
"Model Name".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Select [Edit]  [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
3. Select [Edit]  [Paste].
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
4
Deleting modules
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
■
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The corresponding row is selected.
OVERVIEW
Copy/paste a selected module.
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from
5
the 'list of stations'.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "Module No.
/Station No." or
"Model Name".
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
2. Select [Edit]  [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 67
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
■
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Module List]/[Output].
● Displaying Module List/Output window
The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
6 - 68
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
6.3.4
1
Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Display refresh devices assigned to CC-Link modules.
Set the CC-Link parameters in advance.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Screen display
Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Device Reference] (
OVERVIEW
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
).
● List of slave stations
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
List of
slave stations
5
● List of link devices
EDITING
PROGRAMS
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
List of
link devices
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6 - 69
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Master/Local Start I/O No.
Slave Station List
Setting status
Select the start I/O number of master station or local station from the list displayed by
clicking
to display the list of slave stations or link devices.
Link Device List
Select this to switch the display between the list of slave stations and the list of link device
stations.
Display Detailed Configuration
Information
Select this to display the detailed information of the list of slave stations or list of link
devices.
Display contents
Item
Slave Station List
List of slave stations
Link Device List
List of link device stations
Description
Displayed when "Slave Station List" is selected.
Display the information of the slave stations and the range of the refresh devices
assigned to the host station.
When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, the range of the buffer
memory is also displayed.
When refresh devices are not assigned, the cells of the refresh device range will be
blank.
Displayed when "Link Device List" is selected.
Display the assignment status of refresh devices on the host station and link devices on
the target station.
When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, link devices and buffer
memory are also displayed on the host station side.
The "Explanation" column will be blank when profile is not registered.
Screen button
●
Opens the screen to set the display options.
Select the item for "Module Name/Object Name" and "Buffer Memory Display Format" by clicking
and click the
6 - 70
button.
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
,
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
●
Set "Application", "Output Data Range", and "Label Output Format", and click the
button.
OVERVIEW
Opens the screen to set the purpose and the output format of CSV file output.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
When "Output CSV file for global label" is selected for "Use", the output CSV file can be imported on
the Global Label Setting screen.
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project))
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6 - 71
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
● Display content of Device Reference window
All items are displayed on the Device Reference window when the station information is set on the CC-Link
Configuration window.
When the station information is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen, the model name or object name of the
target module is not displayed. When a local station, master station (duplex function), or standby master station is set
for the type, the assignment status of refresh devices is not displayed.
● Checking refresh devices supported by master station and local station
With a CC-Link configuration containing a local station, when checking refresh devices supported by refresh devices
which are set on the master station, open the project of the local station and check them on the Device Reference
window.
Example: When checking refresh devices of local station which supports refresh device D2008 of the master station
< Project of master station >
< Project of local station >
The value of RWw3 is refreshed by the value of D2008.
The value of D3008 is refreshed by the value of RWr3.
When a value is stored to D2008
on the master station, a value is
stored to D3008 on the local station.
● Displaying list of link devices
• The selected slave station can be displayed on top of the cell by right-clicking 'list of link devices' and selecting
[Select Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
Select the station number 7
of the slave station.
The station number 7
is displayed at the top.
• The Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen is displayed by right-clicking a refresh device or buffer memory
selected from the 'list of link devices' and selecting [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] from the shortcut menu. For details
of the device/buffer memory batch monitoring, refer to Section 17.3.
6 - 72
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6.4 Setting Remote Password
1
Setting Remote Password
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
This section explains how to set a password to prevent illegal access from remote users to the QCPU
(Q mode)/LCPU via a Q series-compatible E71 module, C24 module, or Ethernet Built-in CPU.
OVERVIEW
6.4
Screen display
Select Project view  "Parameter"  "Remote Password".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
Operating procedure
Item
EDITING
PROGRAMS
1. Set the items on the screen.
Description
Password
Set the password.
Model Name
Set the model of the routing programmable controller CPU or module.
For the programmable controller CPU, select "Ethernet Built-in CPU".
Start XY
Set the start I/O number.
6
Condition
● User connection No. valid setting
Set whether to enable the remote password for the user connection No. 1 to No.
16.
● System connection valid setting
Set whether to enable the remote password for the system connections.
7
button.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2. Click the
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Set the details when selecting "Ethernet Built-in CPU" or "QJ71E71".
Password Active
Module Setting
The Password Confirmation screen is displayed.
3. Enter the set password again.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6 - 73
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The remote password setting ends.
To set the password on the programmable controller CPU, write the parameter to the
programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC function.
(Section 15.1)
● Modules that support remote password setting
For the modules that support the remote password setting and the details of the remote password setting, refer to the
user's manual of the programmable controller CPU, Q series-compatible E71 module or C24 module to be used.
● Characters for password
Enter the password in 4 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and symbols corresponding to ASCII codes 20H to 7EH
(Appendix 3).
6 - 74
6.5 Checking Parameters
1
Checking Parameters
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Check Parameter].
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
This section explains how to check errors in the PLC parameter and the network parameter which are
set in the project.
The result of the parameter check is displayed on the Output window.
OVERVIEW
6.5
<FXCPU>
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Check Target
Select the items for the check parameter.
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
2. Click the
5
Description
The check parameter is performed, and the result is displayed on the Output window.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
6 - 75
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.6
Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
Q CPU L CPU Remote
The following parameters can be written to CSV files.
● I/O assignment setting
Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC Parameter"  <<I/O Assignment>>
● Acknowledge XY assignment
Project view  "Parameter"  "PLC Parameter" 
Project view  "Parameter"  "Network Parameter"  "(network parameter)" 
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.
< I/O assignment setting >
2. Click the
button.
The Write to CSV file screen is displayed.
3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved.
4. Click the
button.
Parameters are saved to a CSV file.
6 - 76
Head
FX
6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
■
1
CSV file format
OVERVIEW
The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel.
• Example of CSV file for I/O assignment setting
< I/O Assignment setting >
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
< CSV file >
I/O assignment
Detailed setting
Switch setting
Basic setting
• Example of CSV file for acknowledge XY assignment
< Acknowledge XY Assignment screen >
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
< CSV file >
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
● Details of CSV file
The following explains the details of CSV file format.
• The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM).
• The delimiter of items is a tab (\t).
• Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks (").
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
• If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are
expressed as two double quotation marks ("").
• A line feed is set at the end of the line.
The line feed code is LF.
6 - 77
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.7
Setting default parameters
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to set default parameters to the PLC parameter or the network parameter in
batch.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Clear All Parameters].
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
Item
Description
Select Data
2. Click the
Select the parameter to which default parameters are set.
button.
Default parameters are set to the selected parameter.
6 - 78
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
7
OVERVIEW
1
This chapter explains the settings of the device memory.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Device Memory
7-2
7.2
Setting Device Memory
7-5
7.3
Searching Devices
7 - 15
7.4
Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
7 - 16
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
7.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7-1
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.1
Device Memory
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains the features of the device memory.
7.1.1
Features of device memory
Device memory is the function that reads/writes data from/to the device memory on a programmable
controller CPU.
● Read
The function batch-reads device memory data from a programmable controller CPU to GX Works2.
The read data can be used to check the status of the device memory on a programmable controller
CPU as well as for offline debugging.
● Write
The function batch-writes device memory data from GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU.
The current values of the device memory on a programmable controller CPU can be batch changed.
7-2
7.1.1 Features of device memory
7.1 Device Memory
: Can be edited : Display only –: Not supported

Latch relay
L

Annunciator
F

Edge relay
V

Step relay
S

Link relay
B

Link special relay
SB

Current value
T

Contact
TS
–
Coil
TC
–
Current value
C

Contact
CS
–
Coil
CC
–
Current value
ST

Contact
STS
–
Coil
Counter
Retentive timer
STC
–
Data register
D

Link register
W

Link special register
SW

Direct input
DX
–
Direct output
DY
–
Special relay
SM

Special register
SD

Link input
J\X

Link output
J\Y

Link register
J\W

Link special register
J\SW

Link relay
J\B

Link special relay
J\SB

R*1
–
ZR*1,*2

File register
File register
Index register
Index register
Z

Intelligent function module
device
Intelligent function module device
U\G

*1 :
*2 :
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

M
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Y
Internal relay
2
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Output
Internal user device
Link direct device
Display/edit

Timer
Internal system device
Symbol
X
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
Device type
Input
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Category
OVERVIEW
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
7
Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the device cannot be used when '0k' is set for "Device points" of file register
(ZR(R)) under "File Register Extended Setting" on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
■
1
List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7.1.2
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
7-3
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
■
FXCPU
: Can be edited : Display only –: Not supported
Display/edit
Category
Device type
Symbol
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
X


Output
Y

Internal relay
M

State
S
Timer
T
Counter*1
FX1S
FX1N
FX1NC
FXU
FX2C
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC














































C










Data register
D










File register
D
–

–







Special relay
M










Special data register
D










Extended register
R
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–


Extended file register
ER
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–


Input
Internal
user
device
Internal
system
device
*1 :
7-4
32-bit counter (C200 and later) is not supported.
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
7.2 Setting Device Memory
1
Setting Device Memory
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to set a device and device value.
OVERVIEW
7.2
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select Project view  "Device Memory"  "(data name)".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Device value
display area
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
Device number
display area
7-5
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
● Inserting rows
Select [Edit]  [Insert Row] to insert a blank row at the cursor position.
[Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row]
● Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of rows
To paste a character string in units of rows, select the desired cell(s) and paste the character string. If a row is selected,
pasting is not possible.
● Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of cells
To paste a character string in units of cells, if the selected cell(s) is in the row where a device is not entered, pasting is
not possible.
● Copying device memory
Device memory data of the selected range can be copied and pasted to Excel. Data can also be copied and pasted to
device memory from Excel.
When a value other than 0 is pasted as a bit device, it is replaced to 1.
When copying data and moving cursor on Excel before pasting the copied data on GX Works2, the value different from
the copied data may be pasted.
In this case, copy and paste the data without moving the cursor on Excel.
● Deleting devices
If a deletion is executed after selecting a cell, the device value clears to '0'.
If a deletion is executed after selecting a row, the selected row (device) is deleted.
<Deletion in units of cells>
[Edit] ⇒ [Delete]
The device values are set to “0”.
<Deletion in units of rows>
[Edit] ⇒ [Delete]
The selected rows are deleted.
7-6
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2.1
1
Setting device values in units of points
OVERVIEW
Set a device and device value in units of points.
Create a new device memory in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D0, Device value: 12'
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.
3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Enter 'D0' for a device.
3. Press the  key.
4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
The entered device is set in the device number display area.
In this example, 'D0' is set in the device number display area and
the value is displayed in the device value display area.
4. Enter '12' for a device value.
'12' is set as the device value of device 'D0'.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points
7-7
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.2
■
Setting device values by specifying device range
Setting device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device
screen
Set device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device screen.
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D, range: 0 to 50, display format: decimal number'
Operating procedure
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.
2. Select [Edit]  [Input Device] (
).
The Input Device screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select the device name.
For devices that can be edited, refer to Section 7.1.2.
Device
Module Start*1
Network No.*1
Display when U\G or J\ is selected in the "Device" field.
Enter the start XY address or network number.
Range
Select the range of devices to be set.
All
Select this to target all of the selected devices.
Address
Select this to target the devices in the specified range.
Display Mode
7-8
Description
Select the display format of device values.
BIN
Select this to display device values in binary numbers.
OCT
Select this to display device values in octal numbers.
DEC
Select this to display device values in decimal numbers.
HEX
Select this to display device values in hexadecimal numbers.
FLOAT
Select this to display device values in real numbers.
String
Select this to display device values in character strings.
String (ASCII only)
Select this to display device values in ASCII strings.
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7.2 Setting Device Memory
Item
Select the display size of device values.
16-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in words.
32-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in double words.
Specify the device range in multiples of two.
64-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in double-precision real
numbers.
Specify the device range in multiples of four.
Enter a value to set device values simultaneously.
Not supported by FXCPU.
4. Click the
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Device Value
OVERVIEW
Register
*1 :
1
Description
button.
Devices in the range from D0 to D50 are registered to cells and the values are displayed.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5. Enter a device value to each cell.
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
The entered values are set.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7-9
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
■
Setting device values by specifying a device range on the cell
Set device values by specifying a device range on the cell.
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D, range: 20 to 40, display format: decimal number'
Operating procedure
1. Select a cell to which the device value is set.
2. Enter the device range.
3. Click the  button.
Devices from D20 to D140 are registered to the cells and the values are displayed.
● Display format of bit device and word device
The following table shows the display format of bit device and word device when the device range is specified on the
cell.
Device
Value
Display format
Display size
Bit device
0
Binary
–
Word device
0
Decimal
16 bits
● Device registration when only the start address or the end address is specified
A device range can be specified by specifying the start address or the end address only.
• When only the start address is specified (Example: Specify 'D0-' for the device range)
Devices from 'D0' to the last valid address are registered to the cells.
• When only the end address is specified (Example: Specify '-D100' for the device range)
Devices from 'D0 to D100' are registered to the cells.
● Abbreviating device name
When specifying a device range on the cell, only the end address can be abbreviated.
For example, when a device range is specified with 'D0-100', the devices in the range of 'D0-D100' are registered.
● Specifying R devices (This function is not supported by FXCPU.)
When R device is specified, it is changed to ZR device and registered.
7 - 10
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2.3
1
Setting character strings
OVERVIEW
Set a character string to a device.
Set "Display Mode" to 'String' in advance. (Section 7.2.5)
Operating procedure
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1. Select a range of cells to which a character string is set.
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Select [Edit]  [Paste Text].
The Paste Text screen is displayed.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
button.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
3. Enter a character string, and click the
The entered character string is set to the selected cells or row.
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
● Entering character strings
When "Register" is '16-bit', '32-bit', or '64-bit', the maximum number of characters that can be entered to one cell is 2, 4,
or 8 respectively.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7.2.3 Setting character strings
7 - 11
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.4
Setting same value simultaneously
Set the same value to consecutive devices.
Operating procedure
1. Select devices to which a value is to be set.
2. Select [Edit]  [Fill] (
).
The FILL screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Data Format
BIN
Description
Select the data format of device values.
Select this to set device values in binary numbers.
OCT
Select this to set device values in octal numbers.
DEC
Select this to set device values in decimal numbers.
HEX
Device Value
4. Click the
Select this to set device values in hexadecimal numbers.
Enter a value set to devices simultaneously.
button.
The specified device value is set to devices simultaneously.
● Setting the same value simultaneously
Device values can also be set simultaneously by selecting a range, right-clicking it on the device memory editor, and
selecting [FILL] from the shortcut menu.
7 - 12
7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously
7.2 Setting Device Memory
Switching display format
OVERVIEW
■
1
Changing display format
Switch the device value display format for each cell on the device memory editor.
2
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Display Mode]  [Binary/Octal/Decimal/Hexadecimal/Float/String/
String (ASCII)].
Device values are displayed in the selected display format.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
7.2.5
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
■
Switching display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit
Switch the device value display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit for each cell on the device memory editor.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
Operating procedure
EDITING
PROGRAMS
• Select [View]  [Register]  [16-bit/32-bit/64-bit].
Device values are displayed in the selected display size (16 bits, 32 bits, or 64 bits).
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7.2.5 Changing display format
7 - 13
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.6
Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory
editor
Change the number of rows/columns on the device memory editor.
Screen display
Select [View]  [Setup].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Number of Columns
Set the number of columns on the editor.
Auto
Select this to set the number of columns to 16.
Specify the number of
columns (1 - 255)
Select this to set the desired number of columns on the editor.
Setting range: 1 to 255
Row
Set the number of rows on the editor.
4096 Rows
Select this to set the number of rows to 4096.
Specify the number of
rows (16 - 655360)
Select this to set the desired number of rows on the editor.
Setting range: 16 to 655360
Additional Safety Inquiry
2. Click the
Select this to display the confirmation message when device deletion is executed.
button.
The set number of rows/columns are displayed.
● Number of columns
When "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto", the device values are displayed in 10 columns or 16 columns according to
the specified devices.
For FXCPU, the device values of X and Y are displayed in 8 columns.
● Considerations for changing rows and columns
When a value smaller than the current value is set for "Number of Columns" or "Row", a confirmation message is
displayed and the data on the device memory editor is discarded.
When a value larger than the current value is set for "Number of Columns", the sequence of devices registered to the
device memory editor do not change by the setting of "Number of Columns".
7 - 14
7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor
7.3 Searching Devices
1
Searching Devices
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to search for a device set in the device memory.
OVERVIEW
7.3
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace]  [Find Device Cell].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Find what
Direction
2. Click the
Description
4
Enter the device to be searched for.
Up
Select this to perform searching in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Down
Select this to perform searching in the downward direction from the cursor position.
button.
The cursor moves to the found device.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Item
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7 - 15
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.4
Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to write/read device memory data being edited to/from a programmable
controller CPU or Excel file.
7.4.1
Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs
Write/read device memory data to/from a programmable controller CPU.
To write/read device memory data in units of files, refer to the online Write to PLC/Read from PLC
function. (Section 15.1)
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Write Device Memory to PLC]/[Read Device Memory from PLC].
<Writing device memory>
<Reading device memory>
Operating procedure
• Set the item on the screen.
Item
Range
7 - 16
Description
Select the write/read range.
Selected Devices
Select this to write/read data in the specified range to/from a programmable controller
CPU.
All Devices
Select this to write/read all data in the device memory being edited to/from a programmable
controller CPU.
7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs
7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
7.4.2
1
Writing/reading data to/from Excel files
OVERVIEW
Write/read device memory data to/from an Excel file.
Screen display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Select [Tool]  [Write to Excel File]/[Read from Excel File].
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
Operating procedure
1. Enter a file name or select the file to be opened.
5
The Save As screen or Open screen is displayed.
EDITING
PROGRAMS
button.
Data are saved to the specified destination, or the file is opened from the specified location.
● Compatible Excel version
Microsoft Office Excel 97 or later version is compatible with the data write/read operations.
● Reading data
When data are read from an Excel file, they are read with the saved setting of "Number of Columns".
The following are regarded as errors and processed as explained.
• Unsupported devices  Deleted
• Invalid value  Set to '0'.
• Invalid display format  Displayed in decimal numbers.
● Reading/writing data of which display size is 32-bit/64-bit
Cells set the display size to 32-bit/64-bit are merged and written to an Excel file.
If the number of merged cells exceeds '32767', cells from '32768' onwards are not merged. Instead, they are written to
the file and the character strings "<<32-bit>>"/" <<64-bit>>" are added to them.
When reading the Excel file back to the device memory again, do not unmerge the cells or edit the character strings
"<<32-bit>>"/" <<64-bit>>".
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
or
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
2. Click the
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8
7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files
7 - 17
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
MEMO
7 - 18
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL
VALUES
This chapter explains how to set, edit, and delete device initial values.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
8
OVERVIEW
1
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Setting Device Initial Values
8-5
5
EDITING
PROGRAMS
8.2
6
SETTING
PARAMETERS
8-2
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Device Initial Values
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
8.1
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
8-1
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1
Device Initial Values
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the device initial values.
8.1.1
Feature of device initial values
The device initial values are device values used for the sequence program operation when the
programmable controller turns RUN.
When the device initial values are set, the initial setting program is unnecessary.
● When device initial values are not set
The initial setting program is necessary.
Example)
● When device initial values are set
Example)
The initial setting program is unnecessary.
8-2
8.1.1 Feature of device initial values
FX
8.1 Device Initial Values
8.1.2
1
List of applicable devices for device initial values
Internal system device
Device
Timer
T
Retentive timer
ST
Counter
C
Data register
D
Link register
W
Link special register
SW
Special register
SD
File register
File register
R*1,*2, ZR*2
Intelligent function module
device
Intelligent function module device
U\G
Link register
J\W
Link special register
J\SW
Link direct device
3
When the R device is specified to utilize the device memory data, the ZR device value is utilized for the R device.
Not applicable to Q00UJ.
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
SETTING
PARAMETERS
6
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
7
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
*1 :
*2 :
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Internal user device
Device name
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Category
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the list of devices which can be used as device initial values.
8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values
8-3
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1.3
Procedure for setting device initial values
The following flow chart shows the procedure for setting the device initial values.
Start
Select [Project] [Object] [New] to add
the device initial value data.
Set the device range to be
used for device initial values.
Select [Project] [Object] [New] to
create the device memory data.
Set the device values within the
range of the device initial value.
Click the
button
to set the device values
of the device memory as
device initial values.
Operations on the Device Initial Value screen
Operations on the Device Memory screen
Perform settings on the <<PLC File>>
tab of PLC parameter to use the
device initial values.
Select [Online] [Write to PLC]
to write the device initial values and the
parameter to the programmable controller CPU.
Completed
8-4
8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values
1
Setting Device Initial Values
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to set device values set in the device memory as device initial values.
Create a new device initial value data in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
OVERVIEW
8.2
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select Project view  "Device Initial Value"  "(data name)".
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Range setting
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
4
EDITING
PROGRAMS
5
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Setting
Method
Set the range for device initial values.
Points
Set the number of points of each device. Up to 8,000 points of devices can be set
within a range.
Start
Specify the start device of the range to be set.
End
Specify the end device of the range to be set.
Comment
Enter a comment in the set device range. (Up to 32 characters)
Start/End
Select this to set the range for device initial values by start or end device.
Points/Start
Select this to set the range for device initial values by device points or start device.
2. Select the data name to be utilized from
the
SETTING
PARAMETERS
Range setting
6
Description
7
in "Device Memory Diversion", and click
button.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES
The device value in the set range is set as a device initial value.
3. Click the
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY
Item
button.
8-5
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
Screen button
●
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
●
Displays the Print Setting (Device Initial Value) screen. (Section 11.8.2)
● Using device initial values
If the device values with set ranges are used as the initial values when activating the programmable controller CPU,
specify the file name to be used for the initial values on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
● Device range
The device range that can be set for device initial values is the range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
8-6
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
This chapter explains the operation methods for setting, editing, and deleting device comments.
PRINTING
11
Device Comments
9-2
9.2
Creating Device Comments
9 - 11
9.3
Deleting Device Comments
9 - 15
9.4
Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
9 - 16
13
9.5
Utilizing Sample Comments
9 - 17
9.6
Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9 - 19
USING LIBRARIES
9.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
9-1
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1
Device Comments
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains the general concept of device comments and the setting availability.
9.1.1
Global device comments/local device comments
Device comment is categorized into global device comment and local device comment.
■
Global device comments
A global device comment is a device comment created automatically when a new project is created.
Global device comments are set to use common device comment data among multiple programs.
Global device comments can be set even when there is only one program.
A global device comment name
is fixed to COMMENT.
Global device comments can
be changed to local device
comments.
<Image that is created with only global device comments>
Sequence program MAIN
COMMENT Global device comment
Sequence program SUB1
Sequence program SUB2
9-2
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
9
Local device comments
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
A local device comment is a device comment created by the user.
No local device comment exists when a new project is created.
Create a local device comment if necessary. (Section 4.3.1)
Local device comments are used in association with each program.
Device comments are set under the same name as sequence programs.
For Structured projects, device comments are set under the same data name as the program file name.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
11
PRINTING
Display example when local device comments are set.
<Image of a project created with only local device comments>
MAIN Local device comment
Sequence program MAIN
SUB1 Local device comment
Sequence program SUB1
SUB2 Local device comment
Sequence program SUB2
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9-3
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
● Writing device comments to a programmable controller CPU
Up to the following number of device comments can be written to the programmable controller CPU.
Per device: 32k points
Total number of device comments: 64k points
When the number of set device comments exceeds the number of points that can be written to the programmable
controller CPU, set the range when writing device comments to the programmable controller CPU. (Section 15.1.3)
● Data name of global device comments
A global device comment is displayed as "COMMENT" in the screen for Write to PLC/Read from PLC.
● Setting local device comments with data names different from the sequence program name
Multiple local device comments can be created with data names different from the sequence program name. In this
case, however, the comments are not related to the sequence program.
To make the comments relate to the sequence program, the comments should have the same data names as the
program name.
This is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in the same program.
MAIN Local device comment
Sequence program MAIN
MAIN-J Local device comment
MAIN-E Local device comment
Not related to the sequence program.
If data names are changed to 'MAIN',
comments are applied.
● Global device comments/local device comments
Global device comments/local device comments correspond respectively to common comments/comments by program
in GX Developer.
● Device comments for Basic model QCPU
Global device comments are not supported by Basic model QCPU.
A local device comment for Basic model QCPU is fixed to "MAIN".
When an SFC program is created, the SFC program "MAIN-SFC" also refers to a local device comment "MAIN".
<Image of an SFC program for Basic model QCPU>
MAIN Local device comment
MAIN-SFC program
MAIN program
● Character limit when writing global device comments to FXCPU
For FXCPU, up to 32 characters of global device comments can be written as a project data, however, only up to 16
characters can be written to the programmable controller CPU.
● Local device comments for FXCPU
For FXCPU, local device comments cannot be written to a programmable controller CPU. If local device comments
needs to be written, create comments as global device comments, or change local device comments to global device
comments. When changing a local device comment to a global device comment, change its data name to
"COMMENT". (Section 4.3.3)
● Difference between device comment and label comment
A device comment is a comment appended to a device, and it is 'data' to be read from/write to a programmable
controller CPU.
A label comment is a comment appended to a defined label. A label comment is not applied to a device comment even
when a program is compiled.
9-4
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
● Displaying device comments on the ladder editor or Zoom editor
Select [View]  [Comment].
Device comments are displayed on the device on the ladder editor or the Zoom editor.
For labels, label comments are displayed. The device comments that are assigned to the labels are
not displayed.
For details of ladder editor and Zoom editor, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
For details of Structured Ladder/FBD editor, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
● Displaying device comments on tooltips
Select "Device Comment" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured
Ladder/FBD/ST"*1  "Tool hint display items".
Device comments are displayed on tooltips.
For Simple project (with labels), select "ST" instead of "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured Ladder/FBD/ST".
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
11
PRINTING
● Displaying device comments on Structured Ladder/FBD editor
When [Label] is selected in [View Mode], select [View]  [Add Label Display Items]  [Device
Comment].
The device comment is displayed on the device or address on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
The device comments of the devices which are assigned to the labels are not be displayed.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Device comments can be displayed on program editors.
The following are the settings to display device comments.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Displaying device comments on program editors
SETTING OPTIONS
■
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9-5
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
■
Specifying device comments to be displayed in program
When both global and local device comments are set, specify the comment to be displayed by the
following method.
Operation
• Set the device comment to be referenced by selecting [Tool]  [Options]  "Program
Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment".
Example) When different device comments are set for the same device (M)
Global device comment (COMMENT)
Local device comment (MAIN)
The display differs as shown below according to
the option setting.
When the reference of the device M in the sequence
program MAIN is set to the global device comment
When the reference of the device M in the sequence
program MAIN is set to the global device comment
<Option>
<Option>
<Sequence program MAIN>
<Sequence program MAIN>
The global device comment, 'Initial Start 1', is
displayed as a device comment for M1.
The local device comment, 'Stop Device 1', is
displayed as a device comment for M1.
When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the PLC parameter setting
<Device>
<Option>
<Sequence program MAIN>
The local device comment, 'Stop Device 1', is displayed
for local device M1, and the global device comment,
'Initial Start 2', is displayed for global device M2.
9-6
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
By clicking the
/
/
button, the "Reference/Reflection Target for Device
Comment" settings of all device comments of program selected for "Program/Program File Name" are set to "Global"/
"Local"/"PLC Parameter Setting".*1
By clicking the
applied to all programs.
*1 :
button, the setting of "Specify the Reference/Reflection" of the selected program is
Only devices with which the range of local devices can be specified on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter can be set.
● Device comment to be referenced is not set
If a comment does not exist in the device comment set for "Specify the Reference/Reflection", the other device
comment can be displayed by setting the option.*1
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment", and select "Reference/Reflect the
other, when device comment is not set.".
11
PRINTING
Except for when 'PLC Parameter Setting' is set for "Specify the Reference/Reflection".
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
● Specifying device comments for "Specify the Reference/Reflection" in batch
The following operations can be performed to set "Specify the Reference/Reflection".
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9-7
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1.2
List of device comment applicable devices
The following table shows device types and comment setting availability.
: Applicable / ×: Not applicable
Category
Device name
Input
Internal user device
9-8


×




Latch relay
L
×

–
Annunciator
F
×

–
Edge relay
V
×

–
Step relay
S
×
×
–
Link relay
B
×

–
Link special relay
SB
×

–
State
S
×
–

Timer
T
×


Retentive timer
ST
×

–
Counter
C
×


Data register
D



Link register
W


–
Link special register
SW


–
Direct input
DX
×

–
DY
×

–
SM
×

–
M
×
–

SD


–
D
×
–

J\X
×

–
Link output
J\Y
×

–
Link register
J\W


–
Link special register
J\SW


–
Link relay
J\B
×

–
Link special relay
J\SB
×

–
R

*2
*3
ZR

*2
–
File register
(RAM) File register
Pointer
×
×
Link input
Nesting
X
Y
Special register
Intelligent function
module device
FXCPU
M
Internal system device
Index register
QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU
Internal relay
Special relay
File register
Bit
specification*1
Output
Direct output
Link direct device
Symbol
D
×
–

Index register
Z, ZZ
×
×
–
Intelligent function
module device
U\G


*4
Nesting
N
×
×
×
Pointer
P
×


Interrupt pointer
I
×


9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices
9.1 Device Comments
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU
FXCPU
Network number
specified device
J
×

–
SFC block device
BL*5
×

–
Step relay
(Step relay with a
block specification)
BL\S
×

–
SFC transition device
BL\TR
×

–
I/O number specified
device
U
×

*4
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Bit
specification*1
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Other
9
Symbol
Device name
Bit-specified word device comment is applicable to Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
Not applicable to Q00J/Q00UJ.
R (extended register) is applicable to FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC only
Applicable to FX3U/FX3UC only
For projects with labels, comments of the BL device are not applied to the block titles.
11
● Device comment creation supported range in the multiple CPU system configuration for QCPU (Q mode)
Device comments can be created in the following ranges, corresponding to the buffer memory of the programmable
controller CPU (3E00H to 3E30H) in a multiple CPU system.
U0(\G0) to U1FF(\G65535)
U3E0(\G0) to U3FF(\G65535)
12
Unsupported range
SETTING OPTIONS
Supported range
PRINTING
Category
U200(\G0) to U3DF(\G65535)
● Screen to display bit-specified comments
Bit-specified word device comments can be displayed only on device comment editors, ladder editors, the Cross
Reference window, the Watch window, and the Sampling Trace screen.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices
9-9
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1.3
Changing text size on the device comment editor
Text display size can be changed on the device comment editor.
Operating procedure
• Select [View]  [Text Size]  [Bigger]/[Smaller].
The changed text size is applied to all open device comment editors.
The text display size can be changed by selecting the [Bigger]/[Smaller] button each time.
● Considerations when enlarging the text size
Comment text may be truncated when the text size is enlarged.
In this case, adjust the column width or text size to display correctly.
9 - 10
9.1.3 Changing text size on the device comment editor
9.2 Creating Device Comments
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to create device comments, which make it easy to understand content of
program processing.
9.2.1
Creating comments on the device comment editor
Create device comments for each device on the same screen.
When creating local device comments, create a new device comment in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Creating Device Comments
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
9.2
11
Screen display
PRINTING
● Creating global device comments
Select Project view  "Global Device Comment".
● Creating local device comments
Select Project view  "Local Device Comment"  "(data name)".
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Description
Device Name
Specify the device to be edited.
Comment*1,*2
Enter a device comment for each device.
Include the bit specification
information in editing
Display the setting status of the option "Execute the operation including
the hidden bit specification information"*3.
*2 :
*3 :
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the entry field for bit-specified word device comment can be expanded/
collapsed by clicking a column of "Device Name".
The line wrapping of the device comment for display on the ladder editor and Zoom editor can be checked
on "Preview".
The option "Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information" is set as follows:
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Comment Editor", and select "Execute the operation including the
hidden bit specification information".
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor
9 - 11
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Screen button
●
(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)
Displays all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.
●
(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)
Hides all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.
● Limit for the number of characters to be entered
Enter each device comment within 32 characters.
The limit for the number of characters to be entered can be switched between 16 characters and 32 characters.
(Section 12.2)
● Cutting/copying/pasting device comments for word devices which support bit-specified word device
comments
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, device comments including bit-specified word device comments can be cut/copied/
pasted by the following option.
• Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Comment Editor", and select "Execute the operation including the hidden bit
specification information".
Also, device comments including bit-specified word device comments can be cut/copied/pasted by the following menus.
• [Edit]  [Cut The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
• [Edit]  [Copy The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
• [Edit]  [Paste The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
Restrictions
● Range selection of entry fields for bit-specified word device comment
When a range is selected with entry fields for bit-specified word device comment are collapsed, the last entry field for
bit-specified word device comment becomes out of the range selection.
To select the last entry field for bit-specified word device comment, expand the entry fields and select the range.
9 - 12
9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor
9.2 Creating Device Comments
9
Creating comments on the ladder editor
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9.2.2
Modify and add device comments.
■
Creating device comments in device comment editing mode
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Example: Set 'Result of module A' to D1 and 'Initial setting is completed' to D2.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit]  [Documentation]  [Device Comment] (
).
The mode changes to the device comment editing mode.
11
2. Move the cursor to the device comment
PRINTING
entry position.
3. Press the  key.
The Input Device Comment screen is displayed.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
4. Enter a device comment.
The line wrapping of the device comment for display
can be checked when the comment is entered.
The entered device comment is displayed as shown
at the right.
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Limit for the number of characters to be entered
Enter each device comment within 32 characters.
The limit for the number of characters to be entered can be switched between 16 characters and 32 characters.
(Section 12.2)
● Disabling the device comment editing mode
Select the same menu option again and clear the check box from the item displayed on the screen.
● Target of applying device comment change
Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are applied to global device comments.
To apply changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for Device
Comment" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment".
● Editing status of Input Device Comment screen
The cursor is in the "Device/Label Comment" field (editing status) when the Input Device Comment screen is displayed.
The comment can be edited directly.
For copying comments repeatedly, it is useful to set the "Device/Label Comment" field to be displayed in selecting
status using the following option.
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "Ladder/SFC"  "Enter ladder", and select "Do not leave the Device/
Label Comment field editing status".
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
button.
WRITING/READING
DATA
5. Click the
USING LIBRARIES
13
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor
9 - 13
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
■
Creating device comments in the ladder editing mode
Device comments can be added/modified on the created ladder program on the ladder editing screen.
Example: Set the comment 'Indication of initial start.' for X1.
Operating procedure
• Enter ';;X1=Indication of initial start' on the
ladder editor.
The entered comment is added as a device
comment.
● Entering comments following element entry
Using the method explained below, a comment can be entered following an element entry in ladder editing mode.
Click
in the Enter Symbol screen, or select [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "Ladder/SFC"  "Enter
ladder" and select "Enter label comment and device comment".
● Target of applying device comment change
Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are applied to global device comments.
To apply changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for Device
Comment" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment".
● Considerations when entering device comments in the ladder editing mode
When entering device comments in the ladder editing mode, do not enter device comments to devices which are out of
the range of device points set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter because they cannot be deleted.
9 - 14
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor
9.3 Deleting Device Comments
9
Deleting Device Comments
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to delete device comments.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9.3
9.3.1
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Deleting comments of all devices
Delete comments of all devices on the device comment editor being displayed.
Operating procedure
11
• Select the device comment editor  [Edit]  [Clear All (All Devices)].
Deleting comments of devices being displayed
12
Delete comments of devices being displayed on the device comment editor.
Operating procedure
• Select the device comment editor  [Edit]  [Clear All (All Displayed Devices)].
13
USING LIBRARIES
All comments of devices being displayed on the device comment editor are deleted.
9.3.3
SETTING OPTIONS
9.3.2
PRINTING
All device comments set on the device comment editor are deleted.
Deleting unused device comments
Delete device comments which are not used in the project.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
• Select [Tool]  [Delete Unused Device Comment].
The device comments are deleted and the result is displayed.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Device comments that cannot be deleted using the Delete Unused Device Comment function
The device comments which are set to the following devices cannot be deleted.
• SM
• SD
• Jn\SB
• Jn\SW
• BL
• BLn\S
• BLn\TR
PROTECTING
DATA
16
9.3.1 Deleting comments of all devices
9 - 15
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.4
Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The number of points of device comment can be extended by changing the mode from the standard
mode to the extended mode.
Device comment can be set within the extended number of points in the project.
The following table shows the number of points of device comment that can be set in the standard
mode and the extended mode.
Standard mode
Extended mode
Number of points of device comment per device
Item
32k points
192k points
Number of points of device comment per file
1024k points
2048k points
Operating procedure
• Select "Extended mode" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Comment Editor".
● Writing/reading device comments to/from a programmable controller CPU
• Regardless of the standard mode or the extended mode, up to the following number of device comments can be
written to the programmable controller CPU.
Per device: 32k points
Total number of device comments: 64k points
When the number of set device comments exceeds the number of points that can be written to the programmable
controller CPU, set the range when writing device comments to the programmable controller CPU.
(Section 15.1.3)
• When merging device comments which are read from the programmable controller CPU and device comments in the
project, 32k or more points of device comments which are set in the extended mode are not deleted.
However, when do not merge them, 32k or more points of device comments which are set in the extended mode are
deleted because the device comments are replaced with that in the programmable controller CPU.
When merging device comments, select "Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read" under
[Tool]  [Option]  "PLC Read/Write".
● When changing the mode from the extended mode to the standard mode
Select "Standard mode" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Comment Editor" to change the mode from the extended
mode to the standard mode.
Note that, however, when the number of points which exceeds the number of points that can be set in the standard
mode is set, the mode cannot be changed. Delete the exceeded device comments and change the mode.
● Considerations for saving GX Developer format project
[Export to GX Developer Format File] under [Project] cannot be performed when the extended mode is set.
Save the GX Developer format project after changing the mode to the standard mode.
9 - 16
9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments
9
Utilizing Sample Comments
This section explains how to set a sample comment of special relays/special registers and intelligent
function modules automatically.
Open the device comment editor in advance.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9.5
9.5.1
Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special
registers
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
Utilize sample comments of special relays/special registers.
• Select [Edit]  [Import from Sample Comment]  [Special Relay/Special Register].
12
SETTING OPTIONS
The sample comments of special relays/special registers are set on the device comment editor
being edited.
PRINTING
Operating procedure
USING LIBRARIES
13
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Project language and sample comments to be utilized
When the project language is changed, sample comments with the language selected for the project language are
utilized.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
PROTECTING
DATA
16
9.5.1 Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers
9 - 17
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.5.2
Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module devices and input/output signals.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit]  [Import from Sample
Comment]  [Intelligent Function
Module].
2. Select modules whose sample comments are utilized.
3. Click the
button.
The sample comments of intelligent function module devices are set on the device comment editor
being edited.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, bit-specified word device comments can also be utilized.
● Utilizing sample comments
• Sample comments can also be utilized by right-clicking any position on the device comment editor, and selecting
[Import from Sample Comment] from the shortcut menu.
• For data protected by security, device comments cannot be utilized.
• When the project language is changed, sample comments of the selected project language are utilized.
● Number of characters displayed on device comment editor
The sample comments are displayed with the number of characters set in "Device Comment Editor" under [Tool] 
[Options].
● Considerations when utilizing sample comments
When utilizing sample comments of intelligent function module, the data size may exceed the memory capacity of the
programmable controller CPU and data may not be written to a programmable controller CPU. In this case, delete
unnecessary sample comments.
9 - 18
9.5.2 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9
Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to write/read device comment data to a CSV file.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9.6
9.6.1
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Writing/reading device comments
This section explains the writing/reading device comments to/from the CSV file.
The local device comments can be written/read in a batch. (Section 9.6.2)
■
11
Writing device comment data
PRINTING
Write device comment data to a CSV file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit]  [Write to CSV File].
12
SETTING OPTIONS
The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.
2. Click the
USING LIBRARIES
13
button.
The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved.
button.
PROTECTING
DATA
4. Click the
16
Device comment data is saved in the CSV file.
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
9 - 19
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
■
Reading device comment data
Read device comment data from a CSV file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit]  [Read from CSV File].
The Read from CSV File screen is displayed.
2. Select a file to be read.
3. Click the
button.
The confirmation message for reading data is displayed.
4. Click the
button.
Device comment data is read from the CSV file.
● Device comment data for which an error message is displayed when reading data
An error message is displayed on the Output window if the following data is included when reading device comment
data.
• Device comment data of devices which are not supported by the programmable controller type of the project.
• Bit-specified device comments (For programmable controller type whose project does not support bit-specified
comments.)
Reading of device comment data is suspended when the number of error messages exceeds 100.
● Reading device comment data whose number of characters exceeds the applicable amount
When a device comment whose number of characters exceeds applicable amount is set on the device comment editor,
a warning message is displayed on the Output window and characters exceeded the applicable amount are deleted.
9 - 20
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9
Setting extended settings
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Set settings such as selecting target devices for writing/reading device comment data.
Screen display
Select the
button on the confirmation message for writing/reading data.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
< When reading device comment data >
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Display all devices to which device comments can be set in a program.
Non-target
Display devices which are not to be written/read.
Target
Display devices which are to be written/read.
Read after deleting comment data
of target device type*1
*1 :
13
USING LIBRARIES
Target Device Selection
Select this to read devices after deleting set device comments.
This item can be selected only when reading data.
2. Click the
button.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Return to the confirmation message for writing/reading data.
Screen button
●
Moves devices selected for "Non-target" to "Target".
●
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Moves all devices displayed on "Non-target" to "Target".
●
Moves devices selected for "Target" to "Non-target".
●
Moves all devices displayed on "Target" to "Non-target".
●
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Sets the setting items to the default.
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
9 - 21
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.6.2
Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
This section explains the writing/reading the local device comments in a batch by specifying the folder.
This function is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in
the same program.
■
Writing data of the local device comments in a batch
Save the data of the local device comments in a batch to the specified folder.
Even if there are the data of multiple local device comments, all the local device comments can be
written in a batch to the CSV file just by specifying the folder.
However, extended settings cannot be set.
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view  "Local Device Comment".
2. Right-click and select [Batch Write to Folder] from the shortcut menu.
The Browse For Folder screen is displayed.
3. Select a folder in which the local device comments are to be stored.
4. Click the
button.
The CSV file for each local device comment is created in the folder.
9 - 22
9.6.2 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9
Reading data of the local device comments in a batch
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Read the data of the local device comments in a batch from the specified folder.
Even if there are the data of multiple local device comments, all the CSV files can be read in a batch
just by specifying the folder.
However, extended settings cannot be set.
Save only the CSV file of local device comment data to the folder specified for reading. The CSV files
not containing the local device comments data will be read as an empty local device comment.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view  "Local Device Comment".
2. Right-click and select [Batch Read from Folder] from the shortcut menu.
11
PRINTING
The Browse For Folder screen is displayed.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
button.
Multiple local device comments are read from the folder.
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Device comment data for which an error message is displayed when reading data
An error message is displayed on the Output window if the following data is included when reading device comment
data.
• Device comment data of devices which are not supported by the programmable controller type of the project.
• Bit-specified device comments (For programmable controller type whose project does not support bit-specified
comments.)
Reading of device comment data is suspended when the number of error messages exceeds 100.
● Reading device comment data whose number of characters exceeds the applicable amount
When a device comment whose number of characters exceeds applicable amount is set on the device comment editor,
a warning message is displayed on the Output window and characters exceeded the applicable amount are deleted.
WRITING/READING
DATA
4. Click the
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
3. Select a file to be read.
9.6.2 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
9 - 23
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.6.3
CSV file format
A title name of device comment editor and a title name of CSV file are linked.
• Data of the column whose title matches with the title of the device comment editor are read to the
device comment editor.
• Data of the column whose title does not match with the title of the device comment editor are not
read.
• Data can be read even when the sorted order of CSV file does not match with the sorted order of the
device comment editor.
The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel.
< Device comment editor >
< CSV file >
● Details of CSV file
The following indicates the details of CSV file format.
• The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM).
• The delimiter of items is a tab (\t).
• Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks (").
• If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are
expressed as two double quotation marks ("").
• A line feed is set at the end of the line.
The line feed code is CR+LF.
• A blank space is handled as a regular character.
< Image of device comments in CSV file >
9 - 24
9.6.3 CSV file format
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
This chapter explains the operation methods for searching for/replacing the character strings used in
programs.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
PRINTING
11
Device List
10 - 13
10.3
Search/Replacement
10 - 17
13
USING LIBRARIES
10.2
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
10 - 2
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Cross Reference
16
PROTECTING
DATA
10.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
10 - 1
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.1
Cross Reference
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to create and display the cross reference information, which shows a list of
locations where devices/labels selected on the program editor/label setting editor are used.
The Cross Reference window is displayed horizontally when it is docked on top or bottom of the main
frame, and displayed vertically when it is docked on left or right of the main frame.
■
Target data for creating cross reference information
Cross reference information is created based on devices used in the following editors/parameters.
• Ladder
• SFC
• ST
• Structured Ladder/FBD
• Global label
• Local label
• Structure
• Multiple CPU refresh setting of PLC parameter
• Simple PLC communication setting of PLC parameter
• Refresh parameters of network parameter
• Auto refresh setting of intelligent function module parameter
• Block information of SFC program
10.1.1
Creating/displaying cross reference information
Create and display cross reference information of the label/device selected on the program editor/label
setting editor.
Screen display
Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Cross Reference] (
<<Cross Reference Information>>
10 - 2
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
).
10.1 Cross Reference
1. Specify the conditions to create cross reference information as necessary.
By setting the conditions, the operation such as: searching for a label definition on the label setting
editor, displaying hierarchy of structure/array/FB, and displaying a start device and end device of
the instruction such as the DMOV instruction which uses two or more points of device, can be
performed. (Section 10.1.2)
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
2. Select a device/label on the program editor/label setting editor.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
3. To specify the range to be searched, select a search location by clicking the
button of "Find in".
Two or more search locations can be selected.
11
PRINTING
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be
entered directly.
This function is not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
The cross reference information is created and the result is displayed.
When the range to be searched is specified and "Find Label Definition" on the <<Condition
Setting>> tab is selected, the cross reference information of global labels, FBs, and structures is
also created other than the information of specified search location.
By pressing the  key after selecting a row in the result list, or by double-clicking or rightclicking the selected row and selecting [Jump] from the shortcut menu, the editor in which the
device/label is used opens and the corresponding device/label becomes in the selected status.
The following screen is a result of a Structured project in which "Display all items" and "Display
hierarchically" are selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
button.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
4. Click the
USING LIBRARIES
13
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Attributes
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 3
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Display contents
Item
Description
Attributes
Display icons which indicate attributes of devices/labels.
('■ Icons to indicate attribute' in this section)
Device/Label
Display the device/label name.
Class*1,*2
Display the class of the device/label.
Label Data Type*1,*2
Display the data type of the device/label.
Constant*1,*2
Display the constant value set for VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT or VAR_CONSTANT.
Device*1
Display the device assigned to the label (automatically assigned device).
Address*2,*3
Display the address of the device/label.
Read/Write
Display whether Read or Write the device/label is.
Instruction*2,*4
Display the name of the instruction in which the device/label is used.
Ladder Symbol
For ladder programs, display elements of instruction in which devices are used.
Position
Display the position which identifies the location of the device/label.
('■ Position information' on the next page)
Project*3
Display the project name or the library name in which the device/label is used.
Program File Name*3
Display the program file name in which the device/label is used.
Task*3
Display the task name of the program registration destination in which the device/label is
used.
Data Type
Display the type of data in which the device/label is used.
Data Name
Display the program or the data name registered in the program in which the device/label is
used.
Display the block name for SFC program.
Comment*2
Display the comments of the device/label.
System Label Name*1,*2
Display the system label name which corresponds to the global label.
For devices/labels set for SFC block information, this column will be blank.
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
These items are not displayed in Simple project (without labels).
Only when "Display all items" is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
For Structured projects only
For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
Screen button
●
Prints the selected row. (Section 11.7)
Prints all lists when a row is not selected.
●
Displays a print preview of the selected row. (Section 11.9)
Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.
10 - 4
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
Example of label name
Timer device
TS, TC, TN
TS10
Counter device
CS, CC, CN
CC50
Retentive timer device
STS, STC, STN, SS, SC, SN
sn100
SEARCH/REPLACE
13
14
Restrictions
● When "Create cross reference information after completion compile" is selected in the option setting
• When timer device (T) is specified as a search condition, devices of contact (TS), coil (TC), and current value (TN)
also become search targets. When any of the timer devices: contact (TS), coil (TC), or current value (TN), is
specified, timer device (T) is also searched along with the specified device.
The same operation as above applies when specifying retentive timer device or counter device.
• When device/label which is not indexed is specified as a search condition, only devices/labels which are not indexed
are searched.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Symbol
12
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Device
11
PRINTING
● Displaying comments
In a ladder/SFC project, comments specified in [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device
Comment"  "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" are displayed as device comments.
(Section 9.1.1)
● Searching cross reference information with label definitions
The time to display the creation results of the cross reference information becomes longer when the number of results
exceeds 80,000 substantially.
When labels contain array elements exist, this symptom can be avoided by clearing the check box of "Display
hierarchically" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
● Searching label names which are combined with symbols of the timer device or counter device and device
number
When a label name, which is combined with the following characters (device symbol + number), is entered to "Device/
Label" on the Cross Reference window, it will be searched as a device.
To display the cross reference information of the label, select "All Device/Label" in "Device/Label", enter the label name
to "Device/Label", and filter the cross reference information.
10
SETTING OPTIONS
Cross reference information can also be created based on all devices/labels by clicking the
button
without specifying devices/labels after the Cross Reference window is displayed.
• The maximum number of creation results of the cross reference information is 80,000. However, since the internal
data that are not displayed are included to the results, the number of results to be displayed in the cross reference
information may not reach 80,000.
When "Auto-tracking" is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab, the maximum number of creation results of the
cross reference information is 500.
● When a search location is selected from the list
When a program file name or an execution type is changed, the target program file may not be listed in "Find in". In this
case, cross reference information of the program files whose name matches is created.
● Jump function
The jump function cannot be used for the cross reference information of parameters, block information, and block start
steps.
● Moving the focus
•  (+) moves the focus between the editor and the Cross Reference window.
•  (+)/+ (++) moves the cursor to the previous/next row.
USING LIBRARIES
● Creating cross reference information
• Cross reference information can also be created by right-clicking a device/label on the program editor, and selecting
[Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 5
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Icons to indicate attribute
The following table shows icons displayed according to the attribute of device/label.
When the attribute is label, an icon is displayed with a combination of class and data type as shown in
the display example.
Attribute
Icon
Device
Display
example
Description
Displayed when the attribute is device.
Label
–
–
–
Displayed when the label class is VAR_GLOBAL.
Displayed when the label class is VAR_INPUT.
Class
Displayed when the label class is VAR_OUTPUT.
Displayed when the label class is VAR_IN_OUT.
Displayed when the label data type is simple data type.
Data type
Displayed when the label data type is function block.
Displayed when the label data type is structure.
Label usage
■
Displayed when labels are used in a program.
Position information
The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type
Example
Step number
Step No. 5
ST editor
Number of lines
Row No. 2
SFC editor*1
SFC symbol and step number
SFC Step No. 3, Step No. 4
Structured Ladder/FBD editor
Ladder block number and grid position
2. (10. 2)
Label Setting screen, Structure
Setting screen
Row number
1
Parameter
Name of parameter item to which devices are
set
Auto Refresh
Block information of SFC program
Name of block information to which devices/
labels are set
Block START/END Bit
Inline structured text
STB step (number of lines)
STB 3 (Row No.2)
*1 :
10 - 6
Description
Ladder editor
For the SFC block number, check the property of block (program) displayed in "Data Name". (For details of properties
Section 4.3.6)
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
• Select "Fast Find" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
This item can be set for Simple projects (with labels) only.
For details of "Fast Find", refer to Section 10.1.2.
• Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Compile"  "Basic Setting", select "Create cross reference
information after completion compile", and execute the compilation.
By setting this item, the cross reference information can be displayed quicker while the compilation
time gets longer.
Status of cross reference information
Indicate the cross reference information is updated.
• The data protected by security cannot be displayed.
• If the program or the option setting is changed, the cross reference information does not
correspond with the program. In order to update the cross reference information, create it again.
• Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
However, the sort cannot be performed if the structure/array/FB is displayed in the tree. To cancel
the display in the tree, clear "Display hierarchically" and "Display the last device of multiple points
device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
● Deleting data after compiling a program
When data is deleted after the program is compiled, the deleted data may be displayed as a search
result.
To display the most recent cross reference information, compile the program and create cross
reference information again.
● Searching for multiple word (such as DMOV instruction) in a ladder program
When a negative constant (example: K-1) is specified for device/label, an incorrect search result may
be displayed.
In this case, perform the search function by specifying all devices/labels, and check the search result.
● Searching for refresh device of CC-Link parameter
For refresh devices (RX/RY) set in a local station or standby station of the CC-Link parameter, the
target of search is only the first 16 points of devices.
● When the same name is used for label and device
The Auto-tracking function of cross reference gives devices a priority to be searched.
To display cross reference information of label whose name is the same as that of device, search for
"All Device/Label" in "Device/Label". Then, enter a label name in the "Device/Label" column of
filtering condition, and execute the filtering display.
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 7
13
USING LIBRARIES
Indicate the cross reference information created in past is displayed. (Only when "Fast Find" is
selected.)
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Indicate the cross reference information cannot be used. For instance, cross reference
information has not been created.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Indicate the project has been changed after the cross reference information is created.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Icon
11
PRINTING
● Display after creation of cross reference information is completed
The icon on the bottom left of the screen changes according to the status of the displayed cross
reference information.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
● Displaying cross reference information in uncompiled state
For a project with labels, cross reference information can be created based on the compilation result,
and it can be displayed even in an uncompiled state.
To display cross reference information in an uncompiled state, perform one of the following
operations.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Displaying cross reference information
16
PROTECTING
DATA
■
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
● Searching for BL devices
When BLn is specified for the device to be searched, the block start steps for n block start are also
searched.
"BLOCK" (with END check) or "BLOCK-S" (without END check) is displayed in the "Instruction"
column on the Cross Reference window.
■
Displaying/hiding columns
Columns in the screen can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking a column header of the cross
reference information and selecting the items to be displayed or hidden from the shortcut menu.
■
Displaying devices/labels that use FB instance
To create the cross reference information from the devices/labels used in the function block, select the
FB instance to create the cross reference information.
10 - 8
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
9
Setting conditions
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.1.2
Conditions are set on the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window.
Whenever the condition is changed, the cross reference information needs to be recreated.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window.
11
PRINTING
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Find Constant (K,H)
Select this to search the constant (K and H).
Find Device other than the
Head
Select this to search devices following the start device of digit-specified device/
multiple word device.
Specify find order*1
Specify the search order.
Select this to display a structure/array/FB hierarchically.
Display the last device of
multiple points device*2
Select this to display the start and last devices when a device which uses two or
more points in a instruction is specified.
Auto-Tracking Only in
Click/Key Operation
Fast Find*5
Explanation
–
Select this to create cross reference information of devices/labels selected on the
editor automatically.
Select this to update cross reference information only when the cursor is moved
by clicking the mouse or pressing the key.
When this item is selected, the Auto-tracking function does not apply to the
operations with the mouse wheel and the scroll bar.
Select this to display cross reference information more quickly.
Only "Device/Label", "Device", "Instruction", "Ladder Symbol", "Position", and
"Data Name" are displayed.
ST programs, inline structured text programs, and the second hierarchy of
function block in ladder programs are not searched.
By selecting this item, the setting of "Create cross reference information after
completion compile" under [Tool]  [Options]  [Compile]  "Basic Setting" is
disabled.
Display the explanation of the condition item.
For QCPU (Q mode) excluding Basic model QCPU and LCPU only
For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
The Auto-tracking does not function in the following cases.
When the ladder editor is in device display.
When the ladder editor is in edit line mode/delete line mode.
For projects with labels, this item can be selected when "Create cross reference information after completion
compile" is selected under [Tool]  [Options]  [Compile]  [Basic Setting], or when "Find Mode" is selected on
the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
For Simple projects (with labels) only
10.1.2 Setting conditions
10 - 9
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Display hierarchically
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Select this to display all items that can be created in the cross reference
information.
USING LIBRARIES
13
Display all items
Auto-tracking*3, *4
*5 :
–
SETTING OPTIONS
Select this to search each label setting editor.
Find Mode
*4 :
12
Find label definition
Display Condition
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
Description
–
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Item
Find Condition
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
● "Specify find order" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab
The search order of the "Specify find order" function and the display order of search result are as follows.
• When "Do not specify" is selected, data are searched in the order of data name.
The search result is displayed in the order of parameters, programs, and labels.
• When "Program Setting" is selected, data are searched in the order of program files set on the <<Program>> tab of
PLC parameter.
The search result is displayed in the order of local label and program, global labels, and parameters.
Note that when "Fast Find" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab is selected or "Create cross reference information after
completion compile" in the option setting is selected, "Do not specify" is set for "Specify find order".
Search order when
"Program Setting"
is selected.
● "Display the last device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab
The last device of the device which uses multiple device points in an instruction or refresh parameter can be displayed.
Select "Display the last device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab to display the last device.
The start and last devices are displayed in a tree format as shown below.
● "Auto-tracking" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab
For ladder program, devices/labels of second and the following arguments of the instruction are also automatically
tracked.
To display cross reference information of second and the following arguments of the instruction during the Autotracking mode, perform the following operations.
• For a project without labels, select from the "Device/Label" input column.
• To search devices in a project with labels, select from the "Device" column of filtering condition.
• To search labels, select from the "Device/Label" column of filtering condition.
● "Find Mode" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab
If "Find Mode" is selected, cross reference information is automatically created when the following operation is
performed.
• Changing a ladder or SFC (Zoom) program
• Compiling a program
• Adding/deleting program data
• Reading data from a programmable controller CPU
• Changing a programmable controller type
10 - 10
10.1.2 Setting conditions
10.1 Cross Reference
9
Filtering display
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.1.3
Filter the created cross reference information.
Elements cannot be filtered.
The following is an example of display by filtering devices/labels with the condition 'D*'.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operating procedure
1. Enter 'D*' in the filtering condition column under "Device/Label".
PRINTING
11
2. Press the  key.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
The data matching with the set filtering condition are displayed on the Cross Reference window.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.1.3 Filtering display
10 - 11
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
● Filtering condition
Clicking
enables to select a keyword from the list of previously entered keywords.
For "Data Name" and "Program File Name", search results can also be selected from the list as well as previously
entered keywords.
● Tree display of filtering condition
Only data whose components match with the filtering conditions are displayed in the tree format when filtering display is
executed for the structure data names or the instance names of the function block.
● Deleting filtering condition
Filtering display of the column can be canceled by deleting keywords entered in each filtering condition column.
● Keywords for filtering condition
The wild card characters can be used in a filtering condition shown as below.
Example) When the filtering condition is set for the device/label column.
Wild card
10 - 12
Search target
Example
Search Result
*
Specifies any character string.
*30*
ready301, K4X30, K1Y30, K4Y30
?
Specifies any one character.
K4?30
K4X30, K4Y30
[]
Specifies any one of those characters.
[XY]8
X8, Y8
[! ]
Specifies any one of characters except for the
characters in the bracket.
K4X[!3]0
K4X40, K4Y50
[-]
Specifies character strings within the range in the
bracket.
D[0-2]
D0, D1, D2
#
Specifies any one-digit number.
Local200#
Local2001, Local2003
10.1.3 Filtering display
10.2 Device List
9
Device List
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to display the usage of the specified devices.
■
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.2
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Target data
Devices used in the following data are displayed in the device list.
• Ladder
• SFC
• ST
11
• Structured Ladder/FBD
• Multiple CPU refresh setting of PLC parameter
PRINTING
• Simple PLC communication setting of PLC parameter
• Refresh parameters of network parameter
• Auto refresh setting of intelligent function module parameter
12
Displaying device list
SETTING OPTIONS
10.2.1
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace]  [Device List].
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.2.1 Displaying device list
10 - 13
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Enter a device to be searched for.
Device
Click
to select a device from the list of previously searched devices.
Select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location to search for. Two or more search
locations can be selected.
Find In
After selecting the search location, click the
location.
button to save the search
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
Display Option
Number of Find
Points
All devices
Display all devices.
Used devices
Display devices used in the program.
Selected items are searched.
Unused devices
Display devices not used in the program.
65536 Points
Select this to set device points to be searched to 65536 points.
512 Points
Select this to set device points to be searched to 512 points.
2. Click the
button.
Search result is displayed.
Display contents
Item
Find Range
Description
Display the range of the devices searched.
The display can be switched by clicking the
/
Device
Display the device name.
Contact
Display '*' when the device is used as a contact.
Coil (counts)
Display '*' and the number of uses when the device is used as a coil.
Parameter*1
Display '*' when the device is used as a parameter or an intelligent function module
parameter.
Comment
Display the device comment set for reference/reflection target in the option setting.
(Section 9.1.1 "■ Specifying device comments to be displayed in program")
Specify a program for "Find In" to enter device comments.
*1 :
Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen button
●
Prints the selected row. (Section 11.7)
Prints all lists when a row is not selected.
●
Displays a print preview of the selected row. (Section 11.9)
Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.
●
Deletes device comments which are not used in a program in device units.
10 - 14
button.
10.2.1 Displaying device list
10.2 Device List
9
Displaying/hiding columns
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Columns can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking a column header of the search result and
selecting the items to be displayed or hidden from the shortcut menu.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.2.1 Displaying device list
10 - 15
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Considerations of search in device list
The following shows the considerations of search in the device list.
● Handling of coil instructions
As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
● Searching for R devices and ZR devices
R devices and ZR devices are distinguished in the device list. Specify them separately when
searching for R devices or ZR devices.
● Saved search locations
When the name of the program specified in the search location is changed, the program is not searched. In order to
search the program with the changed name, specify the program in the search location.
Note that, however, when the program name is changed to the original name, the program is searched.
● Confirming locations of devices
The Cross Reference window can be opened from a used device displayed in the device list, and the location of the
device can be confirmed.
To open the Cross Reference window, select a desired row in the device list and follow any of the following operations.
• Press the + keys or press the  key.
• Double-click the row.
• Right-click the row and select [Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.
For the cross reference function, refer to Section 10.1.
● Displaying comments
• When searching for data with a selection of one program, device comments specified for "Reference/Reflection
Target for Device Comment" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Program Editor"  "All Editors"  "Device Comment" are
displayed. (Section 9.1.1)
• When searching for data with a selection of two or more programs, global device comments are displayed.
10 - 16
10.2.1 Displaying device list
10.3 Search/Replacement
Head
FX
FX
● Purposes of each search/replacement
The following table shows the purposes of each search/replacement.
Purpose
Used for searching for/replacing a device or label in a program.
Find Instruction/Replace
Instruction
Used for searching for/replacing an instruction in a program.
Find String/Replace String
Used for searching for/replacing a character string used in a program, label, and device
comment.
Change Open/Close
Contact
Used for switching the contact type of a specified device in a program from normal to negation,
or from negation to normal.
Device Batch Replace
Used for searching for/replacing devices or labels in a program in batch.
● Displaying the Find/Replace screen
The Find/Replace screen can also be displayed by selecting [View]  [Docking Window]  [Find/Replace].
● Replace function
• The programs are in the uncompiled status after the Replace function is executed. Compile all the programs again.
• The Replace function cannot be executed during monitoring. Execute the function after monitoring is finished.
• The Replace function cannot be executed when a program is opened with the read-only mode. Execute the function
after setting the data in editable mode by the setting such as resetting the security.
● Searching/replacing labels
One point of device can be replaced when searching/replacing labels.
● Searching/replacing data in inline structured text box
The search starts from the top of the program in the inline structured text box regardless of the cursor position.
● Replacement of items corresponding to system labels
The following items that correspond to system labels cannot be replaced.
• Relation with system label
• System label name
• Attribute
PRINTING
11
Find Device/Replace
Device
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Function
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains how to search for and replacing character strings, devices, labels, instructions,
etc. in project data.
If the All Find/All Replace function is executed, the details of the execution result are displayed.
13
USING LIBRARIES
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Search/Replacement
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
10.3
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10 - 17
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.1
Searching/replacing devices/labels
Search/replace devices/labels in the program.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace]  [Find Device]/[Replace Device] ( ).
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Find In
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
Find Device
Enter a device/label to be searched for or a replacing device/label.
Replace Device
Click
to select from the list of devices or labels entered previously.
Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from the device
entered in the "Find Device" field. When a label is entered for "Find Device" or
"Replace Device", enter 1.
Click
Device Point
Find Direction
Option
Device Comment*2
*1 :
*2 :
10 - 18
to select either hexadecimal or decimal for the value to be used.
Example) When X50 for "Find Device", X100 for "Replace Device", 3 for "Device
Point", and "DEC" for entered value are set, the devices are replaced
as shown below.
X50X100, X51X101, X52X102
From Top
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the
program.
Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Digit*1
Select this to execute a search for the entered device and digit-specified bit devices
that include the entered device.
Multiple
word*1
Select this to execute a search for the entered device and the double-word format
(double word/real number/indirect specification) word devices that include the
entered device.
Consecutive
search with
enter key
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
Move
Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Copy
Select this to copy a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Not to
Change
Select this not to move or copy a device comment of "Find Device".
For ladder programs, SFC (Zoom) programs, Structured Ladder/FBD programs, and ST programs only
For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
button.
The cursor moves to the searched device.
Screen button
●
Searches for the character string entered in "Find String".
Batch searches for the character string entered in "Find String".
The search result is also displayed. (Section 10.3.6)
●
Replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in "Replace
String".
●
Batch replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in
"Replace String".
The replace result is also displayed. (Section 10.3.6)
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
●
11
PRINTING
2. Click the
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10 - 19
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Examples of device search
The following tables show examples of specification for device search operations.
● Example of device search (Option: None)
Device specification
M0
Search result ( For ladder program )
M0, K4M0, M0Z0, K4M0Z0
K4M0
K4M0, K4M0Z0
D0
D0, D0Z0, D0.1
D0.1
D0.1
J1\B0*1
J1\B0, J1\B0Z0, J1Z0\B0, J1Z0\B0Z0, J1\K4B0, J1\K4B0Z0, J1Z0\K4B0,
J1Z0\K4B0Z0
*1 :
Not supported by FXCPU.
● Example of device search (Option: Digit)
Device specification
Search result ( For ladder program )
X0 to X3
K1X0
X0 to X0F
K4X0
X0 to X1F
K8X0
X0Z0
X0Z0, K1X0Z0, K4X0Z0, K8X0Z0
● Example of device search (Option: Multiple word)
Device specification
D0 to D1
DMOV K1 D0, EMOV E1 D0, DMOV K1 @D0
D0 to D9
BMOV D0 D100 K10
D0Z0 to D1Z0
DMOV K1 D0Z0
ZR0ZZ0 to ZR1ZZ0*1
DMOV K1 ZR0ZZ0
J1\W0 to J1\W1*1
DMOV K1 J1\W0
@D0 to @D1*1
DMOV K1 @D0
T0 to T1
DMOV K1 T0
T0Z0 to T1Z0
DMOV K1 T0Z0
*1 :
10 - 20
Search result ( For ladder program )
Not supported by FXCPU.
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10.3 Search/Replacement
Old
device/
label
Digit-specified Index setting
+
bit device
Label/
Bit-specified
+
String
Index setting word device (g_bool1)
(K4X0Z0)
(J1Z0\W0.1*2)
Device (X0, D0)





×
×

Bit-specified
word device
(D0.1*1)


×
×
×
×
×

Word device
indirect
specification*2
(@D0)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Digit-specified
bit device
(K1X1)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Index setting
(X0Z0)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Digit-specified
bit device
+
Index setting
(K4X0Z0)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Index setting
+
Bit-specified
word device
(J1Z0\W0.1*2)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

Label/String
(g_bool1)








Supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.
Not supported by FXCPU.
10
11
12
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
*2 :
Index
setting
(X0Z0)
SEARCH/REPLACE
Word device
Bit-specified
Digit-specified
indirect
Device
word device
bit device
*2
(X0, D0)
specification
(K1X1)
(D0.1*1)
(@D0)
PRINTING
: Replaceable ×: Not replaceable
New device/label
SETTING OPTIONS
The following table shows the devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced
USING LIBRARIES
■
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10 - 21
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Searching/replacing devices/labels in inline structured text program
The following explains the considerations when searching/replacing devices/labels in the inline
structured text program.
● Searching/replacing devices
Devices in the range specified for the parameter are searched. Devices out of the specified range are
not searched.
● Searching/replacing labels
Both registered and unregistered labels are searched. All unregistered labels which are used at the
label positions in the inline structured text program are searched.
The following table shows the examples of label positions.
Label position
Applicable label position
Inapplicable label position
Example
Description
label1
Labels exist independently.
MOV (label1, D0, D1);
Labels used at label positions in functions.
label1 (m1, m2)
Labels used at instruction positions.
● Comments in inline structured text program
Strings which are recognized as comments are not searched.
The following table shows the examples of comments.
String
Example
(* D1 *)
(* D1...
Strings following the comment start symbol when the comment
does not end with the end symbol.
D1 *)
Strings in front of the comment end symbol when the comment
start symbol is not used.
String recognized as comment
String not recognized as
comment
● Device/label names
Device/label names are not case-sensitive.
10 - 22
Description
Strings between the comment start symbol and the end
symbol.
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Searching/replacing instructions
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.3.2
Search/replace instructions.
Screen display
)/[Replace Instruction]/[Find Contact or Coil] (
).
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Find/Replace]  [Find Instruction] (
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Device instruction
input area
Item
Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Find In
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
Find
Instruction
Replace
With
Find
Direction
Option
Element selection area Click
Device instruction
input area
Click
Element selection area Click
Device instruction
input area
to select an element to be searched for from the list.
Enter an instruction, device, or label to be searched for.
to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered previously.
to select a replacing element from the list.
Enter a replacing instruction, device, or label.
Click
to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered previously.
From Top
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the
program.
Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Consecutive search
with enter key
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched instruction.
13
USING LIBRARIES
1. Set the items on the screen.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Element selection
area
16
Screen button
PROTECTING
DATA
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions
10 - 23
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Examples of instruction search
The following table shows the examples of instruction search.
Instruction specification
Search result
MOV
MOV, MOVP
MOVP
MOVP
MOV D0 K4Y0
MOV D0 K4Y0, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0,
MOV D0 K4Y0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0Z1
MOVP D0 J1\W0*1
MOVP D0 J1\W0, MOVP D0Z1 J1\W0,
MOVP D0 J1Z1\W0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 J1Z1\W0Z1
*1 :
Not supported by FXCPU.
■
Considerations for searching for/replacing instructions
The following explains the considerations for searching for/replacing instructions.
● Instruction search specifying a coil instruction
As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
● Instruction replacement between a 16-bit (word) instruction and a 32-bit (double word)
instruction
When a 16-bit (word) instruction is replaced with a 32-bit (double word) instruction, and if a constant
is set for the device, the constant value is not sign-extended to a value in 32 bits.
Example
[MOV H0FFFF D0]
Replace MOV to DMOV
(-1)
[MOV H0FFFF D0]
(+32767)
The value is not sign-extended
to -1(H0FFFFFFFF).
When a 32-bit instruction is replaced with a 16-bit instruction, and if a constant is set for the device,
upper 16 bits are discarded.
Example
[DMOV K150000 D0]
[DMOV H0FFFFFFFF D0]
Replace DMOV to MOV
[MOV K18928 D0]
[MOV H0FFFF D0]
● Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions
The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of SFC
programs cannot be searched.
10 - 24
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Searching/replacing character strings
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.3.3
Search/replace character strings.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Find/Replace]  [Find String]/[Replace String].
PRINTING
11
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or
more search locations can be selected.
Find In
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of
the program.
Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor
position.
14
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor
position.
Match case
Select this to execute a case-sensitive search.
Match whole word only
Select this to execute a search by matching whole word only.
For details of the whole word, refer to Point in this section.
Do not search comments in
program
Select this to exclude line statements, PI statements, notes, and comments
in programs from the search target.
Replace String
Click
to select a character string from the list of character strings entered
previously.
Option
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace
Consecutive search with enter
function.
key
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched character string.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Enter a character string to be searched for or a replacing character string.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
From Top
Find String
Find
Direction
13
USING LIBRARIES
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
16
Screen button
PROTECTING
DATA
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings
10 - 25
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
● Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions
The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of SFC
programs cannot be searched.
● Searching/replacing data by matching whole word only
The whole word means a string separated by the break characters. The search/replace by matching whole word
searches for only the character strings which are completely match with the character string entered in "Find String".
Break characters are shown as below.
• Space, tab, line feed
Example) Searching for a device comment 'abc ; def' by the following character strings.
String to be
searched for
10 - 26
Search result
Not selected
Selected
a
abc ; def
Nothing is found.
abc
abc ; def
abc ; def
bc
abc ; def
Nothing is found.
abc ; def
abc ; def
abc ; def
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Changing contacts between open contact and closed
contact
Change contact types from open contact to closed contact, and conversely, from closed contact to
open contact.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.3.4
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace]  [Change Open/Close Contact].
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Find In
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
Enter a device/label of which the contact type is to be changed between open
contact and closed contact.
Replace Device
Click
to select from the list of devices/labels entered previously.
Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from the device
entered in the "Replace Device" field. When a label is entered for "Replace
Device", enter 1.
Click
Device Point
Click to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the value to be entered.
Example) When X100 for "Replace Device", 3 for "Device Point" and "DEC" for
entered value are set, the contact type is replaced between open
contact and closed contact at X100, X101 and X102.
Option
From Top
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the
program.
Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Consecutive search
with enter key
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Find
Direction
13
USING LIBRARIES
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
1. Set the items on the screen.
WRITING/READING
DATA
Operating procedure
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact
10 - 27
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched device.
3. Click the
or
button to change the contact type.
The contact types are changed from open to closed contact and from close to open contact, and
the search for the next target devices continues.
If the
button is clicked, all contact types of searched devices are batch changed from
open to closed contact and from close to open contact.
● Change open/closed contact function
For the ladder editor, the contact type at the cursor position can also be changed by selecting [Edit]  [Easy Edit] 
[Switch Open/Close Contact] or pressing the + keys. Convert the program when this function is performed as
the program becomes unconverted status.
● Operation applicability of the change open/closed contact function
The following table shows the contacts whose contact types can be changed.
Replace Example
10 - 28
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Batch replacing devices
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.3.5
Batch replace devices with the specified device/label.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Find/Replace]  [Device Batch Replace].
PRINTING
11
Operating procedure
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.
Find Device
Enter a device/label to be replaced.
Replace Device
Enter a replacing device/label.
Points
Points:
Enter the number of points to be replaced, counted from the
device specified for "Find Device". When a label is entered for
"Find Device" or "Replace Device", enter 1.
Point format:Click
to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the value
entered for "Points".
Point Format
Example) When X0 for "Find Device", X10 for "Replace Device", 5 for
"Points", and "DEC" for "Point Format" are set, the devices are
replaced as shown below:
X0X10, X1X11, X2X12, X3X13, X4X14
Move
Device Comment*1
*1 :
Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Copy
Select this to copy a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Not to Change
Select this not to move or copy a device comment of "Find Device".
14
15
For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
2. Click the
13
button.
The devices/labels entered in "Find Device" are batch replaced with the devices/labels entered in
"Replace Device".
WRITING/READING
DATA
Find In
USING LIBRARIES
Description
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
SETTING OPTIONS
12
1. Set the items on the screen.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices
10 - 29
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen button
●
Resets all setting items to default.
● Registering devices/labels in batch
Multiple devices can also be registered at once by selecting a range and dragging and dropping it from the ladder
editor.
● Replacing devices in batch
Batch replacement between 16-bit counter devices and 32-bit counter devices is not supported by FXCPU.
● Devices that can be batch replaced
For devices that can be replaced in batch, refer to Section 10.3.1.
10 - 30
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Displaying results and error logs
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
10.3.6
After the All Find/All Replace function is executed, results and error logs are displayed.
Displaying results
10
Screen display
Click the
button in the respective Find/Replace windows  <<Result>>.
/
Status
11
PRINTING
Search/replace
results
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Sub status bar
Display contents
Item
Search/replace results
SEARCH/REPLACE
■
Description
Display the character strings, locations, and positions which have been searched for or replaced.
Display the character strings which match with the one in "Find/Replace String".
Place
Display the locations where the search/replace function is executed.
Position
Display the position information to specify the location where the search/replace function is
executed. ('● Position information' on the next page)
13
Find/Replace
Result
Display the number of character strings which have been searched for or replaced.
USING LIBRARIES
Target List
Error Logs
Display the number of error logs.
14
Find String
Display the character strings specified in "Find String".
Replace String
Display the character strings specified in "Replace String".
Find In
Display the location specified on the relevant Find/Replace window.
Display the search/replace results.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Sub status bar
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Display the details of the search/replace results.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Status
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
10 - 31
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
● Position information
The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type
Example
Step number
2 Step*1
ST editor
Number of lines
(6)
SFC editor
SFC symbol and step number
Transition No. 0
Structured Ladder/FBD editor
Ladder block number and grid position
2. (10. 2)
Device comment editor
Device name, start position
X1, 0 Column
Label Setting screen,
Structure Setting screen,
Device memory editor
Row, column
8 Row 1 Column
Ladder editor
*1 :
10 - 32
Description
For project with labels and SFC (Zoom), parentheses are appended to the step number.
(Example: (2) Step)
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
Displaying error logs
Screen display
Click the
Log>>.
/
button in the respective Find/Replace windows  <<Error
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Status
Error logs
PRINTING
11
Display contents
Description
Status
Display the number of error logs, and the search location.
Error logs
Display the errors in search/replace results.
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
● Jump function
The jump function is used to jump from any row of search/replace results or logs to the corresponding character strings.
To execute a jump, right-click on the selected row and select [Jump] from the shortcut menu, or double-click the
selected line.
SETTING OPTIONS
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
10 - 33
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
MEMO
10 - 34
PRINTING
10
This chapter explains how to print data such as sequence programs and devices created with GX
Works2.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
PRINTING
11
Print Function
11 - 2
11.2
Setting Printer
11 - 4
11.3
Batch Printing Project Data
11 - 5
11.4
Page Set Up for Batch Print
11 - 8
13
11.5
Setting Details of Batch Print
11 - 10
11.6
Displaying Batch Print Preview
11 - 38
11.7
Printing Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 39
11.8
Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 40
11.9
Previewing Print Images
11 - 43
11.10
Printing Examples
11 - 44
11.11
Considerations for Printing
11 - 52
USING LIBRARIES
11.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11 - 1
11 PRINTING
11.1
Print Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the overview of print function and printable data.
■
Batch print and print window functions
The print functions are batch print function and print window function.
● Batch print function
A function to batch print multiple data in a project.
● Print window function
A function to print data displayed on the active window.
■
Printable and non-printable data
The following table shows the printable and non-printable data.
: Printable ×: Non-printable
Batch print
Print window
Cover
Data

×
PLC parameter


Redundant parameter


Network parameter


Intelligent function module*1
×

Program setting


Ladder


SFC (MELSAP3)


SFC (MELSAP-L)*1


ST*2


Structured Ladder/FBD*2


Function/Function block program*2


Label*2


Device comment


Device memory


Device initial value*1


Change TC Setting

×
Device list


Cross reference


Statement/Note

×
Project content list

×
User library content list

×
Product information list

×
System monitor*1
×

Verification result
×

*1 :
*2 :
11 - 2
Not supported by FXCPU.
User library data can be printed.
11.1 Print Function
● Print items on the batch print screen
Data supported by the batch print function are displayed on the batch print screen in the order shown in the table on the
previous page, and changed data are saved in the project. Therefore, when a project created in the old version of GX
Works2 is opened in the new version, the listed order of the print items may be changed.
Change the order of the print items with "Set Print Order".
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11 - 3
11 PRINTING
11.2
Setting Printer
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
This section explains how to set a printer.
Print job output can be selected on the Printer Setup screen for batch print. For details, refer to
Section 11.3.1.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Printer Setup].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Name
Select the printer to be used.
Paper
Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer.
Size
Select the size of paper.
Source
Select the paper feed method.
Orientation
Set the page orientation.
Portrait
Select this to print the page in portrait mode.
Landscape
Select this to print the page in landscape mode.
2. Click the
button.
● Printer settings
Printer settings changed in GX Works2 are not saved.
Restrictions
● Printing data using equipment such as other companies' PDF printers
Some lines of a table may not be printed correctly.
11 - 4
FX
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
9
Batch Printing Project Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to batch print project data.
A print preview can be displayed before printing data. For displaying a print preview, refer to
Section 11.6.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.3
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Print].
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Print Item
Select the data to be printed.
is displayed for items without data to be printed or items whose data is readprotected by the security setting.
is displayed for print items to which read-protected is set in the security setting.
Setting by Item
Set details of print settings for each data. (Section 11.5)
2. Click the
button.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Operating procedure
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Data of items selected under "Print Item" are printed in the order from the top.
11 - 5
11 PRINTING
Screen button
●
/
Moves the selected item up/down under "Print Item".
●
Displays the Print Setup screen. (Section 11.3.1)
●
Displays the Page Setup screen. (Section 11.4)
Set a header/footer of the paper on which data is printed.
●
Displays a print preview of the item selected under "Print Item". (Section 11.6)
● Using a function to print multiple pages on a single page
When using the function to print multiple pages on a single page, data are printed in a group of print item.
When data ends in the middle of the page, the next data will not be printed on the same page but will be printed on the
new page.
The following figure shows the example of printing two pages on a single page.
First page
Second page
Ladder program MAIN 1
11 - 6
Third page
Ladder program SUB 1
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
9
Setting printer for batch print
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.3.1
For batch print, the printer can also be set on the Print screen.
Print job output can be selected in the printer setting for batch print.
For notes and restrictions on printer setting, refer to Section 11.2.
10
Select the
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
button on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
13
Description
Select the printer to be used.
Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer.
Size
Source
Orientation
Select the size of paper.
Select the paper feed method.
14
Set the page orientation.
Portrait
Select this to print the page in portrait mode.
Landscape
Select this to print the page in landscape mode.
Print Job
Output Method
2. Click the
Select a method for print job output.
Select whether to print all print items as one print job or to print each print item separately.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Paper
15
button.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Printing with a PDF output printer
For a PDF output printer which outputs print results to files, files are created for each print job. The size of the files to be
created is depending on the printer driver.
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
Name
USING LIBRARIES
1. Set the items on the screen.
11.3.1 Setting printer for batch print
11 - 7
11 PRINTING
11.4
Page Set Up for Batch Print
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to set the page setup for batch print.
Screen display
Select the Print Screen 
.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Paper
Description
–
Size
Select the paper size.
Source
Select the paper feed method.
Orientation
Set the page orientation.
Margins (Unit: mm)
Set spaces for top/bottom/right/left of the paper.
Headers/Footers
–
Page Number Format
Select "Continue from previous page" or "Include chapter number" for the page
numbers printed in header/footer.
Start at:
Set a page number for the first page to be printed when "Continue from Previous
Page" is selected.
Header
Footer
Enter character strings to be printed in header or footer.
Up to 512 characters including string patterns and line feeds can be entered in the
header/footer. Note that a line feed is handled as two characters.
Click
to display a list of string pattern.
Selected string pattern is entered at the cursor position.
2. Click the
11 - 8
button.
11.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Screen button
Restores the default setting of header/footer.
● Printing chapter numbers
By selecting "Include chapter number", page numbers are displayed with: the numbered item in "Print Item", the
numbered item in "Print", and the page number of each data. Even when there is no actual data to be printed in "Print
Item" or "Print", the numbers with the chapter number format will be assigned in order.
The following figure shows an example of page number assignment with the chapter number format.
3-2-1
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
●
11
PRINTING
Page number of each data
1
2
3
12
● When characters which exceed the maximum number of characters are entered to header/footer
When the project is opened in GX Works2 with a language different from the opened project data, characters which
exceed 512 characters may be displayed.
When characters which exceed 512 characters are entered to the header/footer, characters cannot be entered or
pasted; however, they can be deleted or cut.
● Header and footer
String patterns of header/footer may not function when a project created in GX Works2 in other language is opened, or
a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or later is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier.
When the string pattern of header and footer do not function, set the setting again.
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
<When a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or later is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier>
SETTING OPTIONS
1
2
3
Numbered item in "Print"
USING LIBRARIES
Numbered item in "Print Item"
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11 - 9
11 PRINTING
11.5
Setting Details of Batch Print
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to set items for the batch print function.
11.5.1
Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library
data)
Set items to print user library data.
Selected user library data names can be printed under the following print items.
• ST
• Structured Ladder/FBD
• FB/FUN program
• Label
Screen display
Select "Print all (Common setting)" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
User library
Print user library*1
11 - 10
–
Select this to print user library data.
Do not print
Display data names which will not be printed
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select data name display
format
–
Display format
*1 :
Description
Select a display format of data name when ST, Structured Ladder/FBD, FB/FUN
program, or label is selected.
This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
11.5.1 Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data)
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Screen button
●
Moves data selected in "Do not print" to "Print".
●
Moves all data in "Do not print" to "Print".
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
●
Moves data selected in "Print" to "Do not print".
●
Moves all data in "Print" to "Do not print".
/
Moves data selected in "Print" up/down.
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
● Printing read protected data
When printing read protected data displayed on the field of "Do not print", enable the editing status of the user library for
editing.
For details of editing user library, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
PRINTING
●
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.1 Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data)
11 - 11
11 PRINTING
11.5.2
Setting batch print for cover
Set items to print a cover.
Screen display
Select "Cover" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Print Selection
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Layout
Display print area of the item(s) selected for "Print Selection".
Text
Enter text for each item to be printed.
Text can be entered when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected
for "Print Selection".
A maximum of 200 characters can be set for each item. Note that a line feed is handled as
two characters.
The numbers of characters and lines that can be printed differ according to the size or font
setting of print paper. Check the print image with the print preview function.
Font
Set fonts for each item to be printed.
Fonts can be set when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected for
"Print Selection".
Font
Select a font.
Size
Select a font size.
Font Style
Select a font style.
Screen button
●
Prints items selected in "Print Item".
●
Displays a print preview of items selected in "Print Item".
11 - 12
11.5.2 Setting batch print for cover
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for PLC parameter
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.3
Set items to print PLC parameter.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "PLC Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
13
Item
Print What
USING LIBRARIES
• Set the item on the screen.
Description
Select the item(s) of PLC parameter to be printed.
Screen button
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
●
Selects all items.
●
Clears the selection of all items.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.3 Setting batch print for PLC parameter
11 - 13
11 PRINTING
11.5.4
Setting batch print for redundant parameters
Set items to print redundant parameters.
Screen display
Select "Redundant Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the item on the screen.
Item
Print what
Description
Select the item(s) of redundant parameters to be printed.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
11 - 14
11.5.4 Setting batch print for redundant parameters
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for network parameter
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.5
Set items to print the network parameter.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Network Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
13
Item
Print What
USING LIBRARIES
• Set the item on the screen.
Description
Select the item(s) of network parameter to be printed.
Screen button
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.5 Setting batch print for network parameter
11 - 15
11 PRINTING
11.5.6
Setting batch print for program settings
Set items to print program settings on the Navigation window.
Screen display
Select "Program setting" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Print selection
Program setting
Additional information
Task setting*1
Description
–
Select this to print the list of program setting content.
Select this to print the titles of the list of program setting content.
Select this to print tasks registered in the program setting.
Execution type
Select the execution types to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Program list
Select the programs to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select data name
Items selected for "Execution type" and "Program list" are displayed.
Do not print
Display data names which will not be printed
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Additional information
Append selected items to the task setting.
Print conditions
Set the conditions for printing.
Print title only for
Select this to print only titles even when programs are not registered to the task.
the task with no
When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one
program registered page.
*1 :
This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 16
11.5.6 Setting batch print for program settings
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for ladder programs
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.7
Set items to print ladder programs.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Ladder" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
USING LIBRARIES
Display all data names of ladder program.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Display Mode of Program*1
Select whether to print data in label display or device display.
Additional Information
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Device Comment
Select this to append device comments.
For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.
Statement/Note
Select this to append statements and notes.
14
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
Contact
To specify the print range, click the
the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range on
15
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.
To specify the print range, click the
the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
button, and set the device range on
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Coil
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Select Program
Description
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
13
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11 - 17
11 PRINTING
Item
Description
Print Conditions
Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.
Ladder Contact
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Print NOPLF*2
Select this to print the NOPLF instructions.
(Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or
without this item is selected.)
Delete blank rows of
contacts and specify the
number of column
Select this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When
this item is selected, the number of columns of contact usage destination can be selected.
Delete blank rows above
and under coil
Select this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.
Page break by ladder
block
Select this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit.
When this item is cleared, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Print ladder blocks
include hidden ones*3
Select this to print hidden ladder blocks.
Print blank rows with no
device comment
Select this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.
Print lines in bold
Select this to print programs with bold lines.
Specify Print Range
–
Set the ladder program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
Print Range
*1 :
When a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled is set, the buttons,
,
*2 :
*3 :
,
,
, cannot be used in the device display.
Unlock all block passwords to use these
,
,
,
in
the device display.
Not supported by FXCPU.
For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for "Display Mode of
Program".
Screen button
For the screen For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
●
Displays the Device Range Setting screen.
11 - 18
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Contact/coil usage destination
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Contact usage destination and coil usage destination are output as shown below.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
Indicates the number of steps of coil usage destination
PRINTING
Indicates the number of steps of
contact usage destination
The following shows an example of contact usage destination.
Example) Contact usage destination of Y0
Destination
Closed contact
12
The number of steps of
Y0 used for source
SETTING OPTIONS
Source
13
The number of steps of
Y0 used for destination
● Printing examples with a setting of "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of
column"
The following examples show the difference of printing contact usage destination according to the
setting of "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column".
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
< With the item selected (5 columns) >
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
< Without the item selected (5 columns) >
USING LIBRARIES
Open contact
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11 - 19
11 PRINTING
11.5.8
Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
Set items to print SFC (MELSAP3) programs.
Screen display
Select "MELSAP3" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select Program
Select Print Units*1
Description
Display data names of SFC (MELSAP3) program.
Select either "Program block" or "Program file".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Display Mode of Block List/
Action/Transition*2
Select whether to print data in label display or device display.
This item can be selected only when "Block List" or "Action/Transition" is selected in
"SFC Diagram Print Item".
SFC Diagram Print Item
Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.
SFC Diagram
Block List*3
Comment List
Action/Transition
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Property (SFC Program)*3,*4
Note List
11 - 20
11.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Description
–
SFC Step/Transition
Comment
Select this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.
Action Input
Select this to append operation outputs to the SFC diagram.
Transition Conditions
Select this to append transition conditions to the SFC diagram.
Block List*4
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
–
SFC Block List Comment Select this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Start Destination Block
Action/Transition
Select this to append start destination block to the block list.
–
Select this to append device comments to Action/Transition.
For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the numbers of rows and columns for comments to be printed.
Device Comment
Print Conditions
11
Set conditions for printing programs.
Number of Print Column of
SFC Diagram
Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page.
The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a
single page.
Number of Action/Transition
Contacts
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Specify Print Range
–
Set the SFC (MELSAP3) program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start block and an end
block.
Print Range*3
*1 :
*2 :
This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
When a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled is set, the buttons,
*3 :
*4 :
Unlock all block passwords to use these
,
,
,
in
the device display.
For Structured projects, this item cannot be selected when "Program block" is selected for "Select print units".
Not supported by FXCPU.
,
,
,
, cannot be used in the device display.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
PRINTING
SFC Diagram
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Additional Information
13
USING LIBRARIES
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
11 - 21
11 PRINTING
11.5.9
Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
Set items to print SFC (MELSAP-L) programs.
This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select "MELSAP-L" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
11 - 22
11.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select print units*1
Display all data names of SFC (MELSAP-L) program.
Select either "Program block" or "Program file".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
SFC Diagram Print Item
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select Program
Description
Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.
SFC Diagram
Block List
Comment List
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Property (SFC Program)
SFC Diagram
–
SFC Step/Transition
Comment
Select this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.
Program
Select this to append programs to the SFC diagram.
Block List
11
Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".
PRINTING
Additional Information
–
12
SFC Block List Comment Select this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Print Conditions
Number of Print Column of
SFC Diagram
Specify Print Range
Print Range
–
Set the SFC (MELSAP-L) program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
13
Set conditions for printing programs.
Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page.
The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a
single page.
This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
USING LIBRARIES
*1 :
Select this to append start destination block to the block list.
SETTING OPTIONS
Start Destination Block
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
11 - 23
11 PRINTING
11.5.10
Setting batch print for ST programs
Set items to print ST programs.
Screen display
Select "ST" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select Program
Description
Display all data names of ST program.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Specify Print Range
Print Range
–
Set the ST program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start line and an end line.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 24
11.5.10 Setting batch print for ST programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.11
Set items to print Structured Ladder/FBD programs.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Structured Ladder/FBD" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Select Program
Description
USING LIBRARIES
Item
13
Display all data names of Structured Ladder/FBD program.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.11 Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs
11 - 25
11 PRINTING
11.5.12
Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
Set items to print function and function block programs.
Screen display
Select "FB/FUN Program" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Print Selection
Function/FB Label
Select Program
Do Not Print
Print
Additional Information
Description
–
Select this to print function/function block labels.
Display all data names of function/function block program.
Display data names which will not be printed.
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Device comment
Select this to append device comments.
For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.
Statement/Note
Select this to append statements and notes.
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
Contact
To specify the print range, click the
the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range on
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.
Coil
11 - 26
To specify the print range, click the
the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
11.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
button, and set the device range on
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Item
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Print NOPLF*1
Select this to print the NOPLF instructions.
(Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or
without this item is selected.)
Delete blank rows of
contacts and specify the
number of column
Select this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When
this item is selected, the number of columns to be printed can be selected.
10
Delete blank rows above
and under coil
Select this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.
Page break by ladder
block
Select this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit.
When this item is cleared, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Print ladder blocks
include hidden ones*2
Select this to print hidden ladder blocks.
Print blank rows with no
device comment
Select this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.
Print lines in bold
Select this to print programs with bold lines.
–
Set the ladder program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
Not supported by FXCPU.
For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for "Display Mode of
Program".
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Print Range
SEARCH/REPLACE
Ladder Contact
Specify Print Range
*1 :
*2 :
Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Print Conditions
9
Description
● Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs
Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs are function blocks created in ladder programs and functions/function blocks
created in ST programs or Structured Ladder/FBD programs.
Display-prohibited programs are not displayed in "Select Program".
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
11 - 27
11 PRINTING
11.5.13
Setting batch print for labels
Set items to print label data.
Screen display
Select "Label" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Print Selection
Description
Display all data names of label.
Label List
Select the label type(s) to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist.
Select Data Name
Display items selected in "Label List".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 28
11.5.13 Setting batch print for labels
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for device comments
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.14
Set items to print device comment data.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Device Comment" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Select the device comment to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist, or all data are read
protected.
Select Data Name
Display items selected in "Device Comment List".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Print Conditions
14
–
Print include the device
with no comment.
*Available only when
selecting print range in
Specify Print Range
option.
Select this to print data including devices to which device comments are not registered.
Print title only for the
device comment with no
comment.
Select this to print only titles of data to which device comments are not registered.
When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one
page.
Set the device comment print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the
Specify Print Range
button.
Since direct inputs (DX) and direct outputs (DY) are device comments as same as inputs
(X) and outputs (Y), they are not printed when "Whole Range" is selected.
When printing direct inputs (DX) or direct outputs (DY), select "Specify Print Range", and
set the device range.
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
11.5.14 Setting batch print for device comments
USING LIBRARIES
Device Comment List
13
Display all data names of device comment.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Print Selection
Description
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
11 - 29
11 PRINTING
11.5.15
Setting batch print for device memory data
Set items to print device memory data.
Screen display
Select "Device Memory" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Device Memory Selection
Description
Display all data names of device memory.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Print Conditions
–
Print rows that all device
value are 0.
Select this to print rows in which device values are all 0.
Print blank rows with no
device set.
Select this to print rows in which devices are not set.
Print title only for the
device memory with no
device set.
Select this to print only titles of device memory data in which devices to be printed are not
set.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 30
11.5.15 Setting batch print for device memory data
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for device initial values
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.16
Set items to print device initial values.
This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Device Initial Value" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Device Initial Value Selection
Description
Display all data names of device initial values.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Print Selection
–
14
Device Initial Value Range Select this to print specified range of device initial values.
Select this to print device initial values (device values).
Print Type
Select a bit unit for handling device initial values for printing.
Print Form
Select a data format of device initial value for printing.
Print Conditions
–
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Device Initial Value
Print device that value is 0. Select this to print devices whose value is 0.
Print title only for the data
that is not set device initial
value and range.
Specify Print Range
Select this to print only titles of data to which the device initial value range is not set, or
data which do not contain devices to be printed.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
Set the device initial value print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the
button.
Screen button
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
USING LIBRARIES
13
16
PROTECTING
DATA
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
11.5.16 Setting batch print for device initial values
11 - 31
11 PRINTING
11.5.17
Setting batch print for TC setting values
Set items to print TC setting values.
Screen display
Select "TC Setting" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select Program
Do Not Print
Print
Print Target Device
Display all data names of ladder/MELSAP3/MELSAP-L programs.
Display data names which will not be printed.
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select the item to be printed.
Timer setting value
Select this to print timer setting values. Labels to which timer is set as a data type are also
printed.
Retentive timer setting
value*1
Select this to print retentive timer setting values. Labels to which retentive timer is set as a
data type are also printed.
Counter setting value
Select this to print counter setting values. Labels to which counter is set as a data type are
also printed.
Additional Information
Device comment
Print Conditions
Print title only for the
program with no TC
setting.
*1 :
Description
Append the selected item to the devices to be printed.
Select this to append device comments.
For labels, label comments are appended.
–
Select this to print only titles of programs which do not contain TC setting values.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 32
11.5.17 Setting batch print for TC setting values
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for device list
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.18
Set items to print the device list.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Device List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Description
Set a search location of data to be printed.
Click the
button to select a search location.
A search location cannot be entered directly.
Find What
Set a search target for devices to be printed.
All devices
Select this to search all devices.
Used devices
Select this to search devices used for contacts, coils, and parameters.
Selected items are searched with the specified condition (AND or OR condition).
Unused devices
Select this to search devices which are not used.
Additional Information
Device Comment
Print Conditions
Print title only when no
find result returns.
Specify Print Range
14
Append the selected item(s) to the device list.
Select this to append device comments.
–
Select this to print only titles even when the program does not contain any devices.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page.
Set the device comment print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range for "Conditions
for Range Specification".
–
15
Select this to include ZR devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified for
"Specify Print Range".
Include extension
device (e.g. U0\G0,
J1\X0)
Select this to include extended devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified
for "Specify Print Range".
(BLm\Sn and BLm\TRn devices are printed with or without this item is selected.)
Set a range of devices to be printed.
16
Conditions for Range
Specification
PROTECTING
DATA
Include ZR device
WRITING/READING
DATA
Conditions for Whole
Range Specification
13
USING LIBRARIES
Find In
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
11.5.18 Setting batch print for device list
11 - 33
11 PRINTING
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
11 - 34
11.5.18 Setting batch print for device list
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for cross reference information
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.19
Set items to print cross reference information created on the Cross Reference window.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Cross Reference" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
13
–
All
Select this to print all rows.
Selected Rows
Select this to print selected row(s).
Select the row(s) to be printed on the Cross Reference window in advance.
Print Conditions
Print title only when a
cross reference
information is not
created.
–
14
Select this to print only titles when the cross reference information is not created.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/table titles are printed on a single page.
Screen button
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Specify Print Range
Description
USING LIBRARIES
Item
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.19 Setting batch print for cross reference information
11 - 35
11 PRINTING
11.5.20
Setting batch print for statements/notes
Set items to print statement/note data.
Screen display
Select "Statement/Note" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select Program
Do Not Print
Print
Statement/Note Print Item
Description
Display all program names of ladder program.
Display data names which will not be printed.
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Selected items are printed.
Line Statement List
Note List
P Statement List
Select the item(s) to be printed.
I Statement List
Print Conditions
Print title only for the
program with no
Statement/Note.
–
Select this to print only titles of data in which statements/notes do not exist.
When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data
on one page.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 36
11.5.20 Setting batch print for statements/notes
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
Setting batch print for product information list
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.5.21
Set items to print the product information list created on the System Monitor screen.
This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Product Information List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
13
Item
Setting for Product Information
List
USING LIBRARIES
• Set the item on the screen.
Description
–
Set a product information list file to be printed.
Click the
button to select a product information list file.
A product information list file cannot be entered directly.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
File Name
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Printable product information list files
Only the product information list files created on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2 can be printed.
Product information list files created in GX Developer cannot be printed.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.5.21 Setting batch print for product information list
11 - 37
11 PRINTING
11.6
Displaying Batch Print Preview
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to check the print image of each data.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Project]  [Print Preview].
The Print screen is displayed. (Section 11.3)
2. Click the
button.
The Print Preview screen is displayed.
3. Select items in "Print Item" and "Data Name" to change the data and check the print
image.
4. Click the
button.
The print image of the selected data is displayed.
Screen button
●
Prints data.
●
/
Displays the previous page/next page.
●
/
Changes the display size of print image.
● Displaying previous/next page in print preview
The range in which previous/next pages can be displayed by clicking the
/
button is within one
data.
Use the "Jump Preview to" function to switch from the displayed preview data to another data.
● Page numbers displayed in footer
When "Continue form previous page" is selected in the page setting, "[Insert page number here]" is displayed at the
position where a page number is to be printed in the print preview.
11 - 38
11.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen
9
Printing Data Displayed on Screen
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Print Window].
The Print Window function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data.
Execute the Print Window function as described below for each data.
11
● Parameters
button on the PLC parameter setting screen or the network parameter setting
Click the
screen.
PRINTING
● Device initial value
Click the
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains how to print data displayed on the screen.
The print image can be checked prior to the printing. For checking print images, refer to Section 11.9.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.7
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
● Device list or cross reference
<Data other than intelligent function module>
12
button on each screen.
SETTING OPTIONS
Select rows to be printed, and click the
<Intelligent function module>
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
/
15
button.
WRITING/READING
DATA
Printing starts.
● Printer settings
Click the
or
button to make detailed settings for the printer.
● Printing ladder program screens
When printing a ladder program screen, the Print Window (Ladder) screen is displayed. For SFC (Zoom) programs, the
Print Window (Ladder) screen is not displayed.
For details, refer to Section 11.8.1.
11 - 39
16
PROTECTING
DATA
2. Click the
11 PRINTING
11.8
Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to set print details.
Print details can be set using ladder program and device initial setting.
11.8.1
Setting print details for ladder programs
Set print details such as print range and additional information of ladder program.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Print Window]/[Print Window Preview].
The following explains a setting operation for the Print Window function. Apply the same
operation for the Print Window Preview function.
<Option setting screen for Print Window>
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Additional Information
Description
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Device comment
Select this to append device comments.
Set the number of comment columns to be printed.
The number of comment rows is fixed.
Statement/Note
Select this to append statements and notes.
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
Contact
To specify the print range, click the
on the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set the print range.
Coil
Specified Print Range
Print Range
11 - 40
To specify the print range, click the
on the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
button, and set the device range
–
Set the print range of ladder program.
To specify the print range, select "Specified Range" and set a start step and an end
step.
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs
11.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
9
button.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
2. Click the
For the Print Window function, the Print Window screen is displayed. (Section 11.7)
For the Print Window Preview function, the Print Window Preview screen is displayed.
(Section 11.9)
Screen button
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.7.
●
Displays a print preview.
■
Contact/coil usage destination
11
PRINTING
For details of contact/coil usage destination, refer to Section 11.5.7.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs
11 - 41
11 PRINTING
11.8.2
Setting print details for device initial values
Set print details such as print items and print range of device initial values.
Screen display
Click the
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Print Item
Device Initial Value Range
Select this to print specified range of device initial values.
Device Initial Value
Select this to print device initial values (device values).
Device Initial Value Output Setting
Set the items to print device initial values (device values).
Print Range
–
Whole Range
Select this to print all devices registered as device values
Specified Range
Select this to specify a the print range.
The method to specify a range is the same as that of device initial value
setting. (Section 8.2)
Print Type
Select a bit unit for handling device initial values at printing.
Print Form
Select a data format of device initial value at printing.
Print Condition
–
Print device with value of
zero
2. Click
11 - 42
Description
–
Select this to print devices whose value is 0.
the button.
11.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values
11.9 Previewing Print Images
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to check print images of data displayed on the screen.
10
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Print Window Preview].
The Print Window Preview function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data.
Execute the Print Window Preview function as described below for each data.
● Parameters
Click the
screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Previewing Print Images
button on the PLC parameter setting screen or the network parameter setting
SEARCH/REPLACE
11.9
11
Click the
PRINTING
● Device initial value
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
● Device list or cross reference
Select rows to be printed, and click the
button on each screen.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
<For Structured Ladder/FBD>
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11 - 43
11 PRINTING
11.10 Printing Examples
Q CPU L CPU Remote
The following shows examples of printing.
11 - 44
■
Cover
■
PLC parameters
■
Redundant parameters
Head
FX
● Task setting
USING LIBRARIES
■
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Program setting
● Program setting
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
■
WRITING/READING
DATA
Intelligent function modules
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
PROTECTING
DATA
11.10 Printing Examples
Network parameters
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 - 45
11 PRINTING
■
Programs
● Ladder
● SFC diagram (MELSAP3)
● SFC block list
● ST
11 - 46
WRITING/READING
DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
● Local labels
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
■
PROTECTING
DATA
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
11.10 Printing Examples
● Structured Ladder/FBD
9
10
Labels
11
● Global labels
12
13
● Function/function block labels
14
15
16
11 - 47
11 PRINTING
● Structures
■
Structure devices
● Structure devices
(Devices are printed automatically after printing labels.)
11 - 48
■
Device comments
■
Device memory data
■
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Device list
USING LIBRARIES
■
WRITING/READING
DATA
TC setting values
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
● Device initial values
SEARCH/REPLACE
● Device initial value ranges
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
PROTECTING
DATA
11.10 Printing Examples
Device initial values
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 - 49
11 PRINTING
11 - 50
■
Cross reference
■
Statements/Notes
■
Project content list
■
User library content list
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
■
WRITING/READING
DATA
Verification result
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
PROTECTING
DATA
11.10 Printing Examples
Product information list
9
10
● Verify result list
11
12
● Detailed verify result
13
14
15
16
11 - 51
11 PRINTING
11.11 Considerations for Printing
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The following explains the considerations for printing.
■
Common considerations of Batch Print and Print Window functions
● Displaying print previews and printing data
Print preview display and printing cannot be executed in the following situations.
• The print target data do not exist.
• The print target screen is being monitored.
(Start printing after stopping the monitoring.)
● Considerations of printing large volume data
Large volume data may not be printed at all or printed half way due to the limitations of printer driver
or Windows® print spooler.
In this case, print data by following the instructions described below.
• Separate the data by setting a print range with "Specify Print Range".
• Set the property of the printer from Windows® Control Panel.
Example) Select "Devices and Printers" from Windows® Control Panel, open the property of the
printer being used, and select "Print directly to the printer" on the Advanced tab on the property
screen.
• Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print Setup screen (Section 11.3.1). (For
batch print only)
• Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print screen displayed by clicking the
button or the
button. (For batch print only)
● Printing SFC diagrams
When an SFC diagram is printed, the printout may be divided into multiple pages depending on the
number of the branches and couplings, and the number of steps. A number that indicates the position
is printed at top right of each page.
m
n
SFC Block
SFC Block
Data Name : 000 : Block
11 - 52
1/20/2010
Data Name : 000 : Block
SFC Block
(n,m)
1/20/2010
SFC Block
(n,m)
1/20/2010
Data Name : 000 : Block
Data Name : 000 : Block
(n,m)
1/20/2010
(n,m)
11.11 Considerations for Printing
Cross reference information is printed as shown below when "Display hierarchically" is selected on
the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
• "+" and "-" are not printed.
• Each hierarchy of device/label is displayed with indentation.
• When only the lower hierarchy of device/label is selected, the hierarchy above the selected
hierarchy is also printed.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
• Data in the collapsed rows are not printed.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
● Printing hierarchically-displayed cross reference information
<Cross reference information displayed on screen>
11
PRINTING
<Printed cross reference information>
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
• When the print result is output with the Print or Print Window function, the Save As screen may not
be displayed in the foreground.
Use + keys or + keys to bring the screen in the foreground.
• GX Works2 does not respond when the GX Works2 operation is performed while the Save As
screen is displayed.
When the following screen is displayed, select "Wait for the program to respond".
Do not select "Close the program". Unsaved data will be lost.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Considerations for using the print function with 64-bit edition Windows® operating system
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
PROTECTING
DATA
16
11 - 53
11 PRINTING
■
Considerations of Batch Print function
● Uncompiled programs
Uncompiled program are not printed or applied to the print preview.
Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
● NOPLF instruction
The NOPLF instruction is not supported by SFC (Zoom) programs.
● Changing setting of "Ladder Contact"
When the setting of "Ladder Contact", which is set for "Ladder" and "FB/FUN" selected in "Print
Item", is changed to the amount less than the one set at the program creation, the program may not
be displayed normally, the same phenomenon as when changing the setting of "Display Connection
of Ladder Diagram" in the option setting.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
● Number of printable rows
The number of printable rows is limited for the following data. The rows that exceeded the limitation
will not be printed.
• For device comments and device list, 100,000 rows can be printed per data.
• For device memory data and device initial values, 20,000 rows can be printed per data.
• For TC setting values, 20,480 rows can be printed per data.
● When character strings in header/footer overlap
Overlapped character strings in header/footer are printed on top of each other in order of priority:
right, center, left. The overlapped character string is overwritten by the character string which is given
the priority.
The following shows an example of overlapped character strings.
<Setting example of overlapped character strings in header>
<Printing example of overlapped character strings in header>
● Specifying device comment print range for FXCPU
For FXCPU, an error occurs when the Device Range Setting screen is opened in GX Works2 Version
1.64S or later with a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, in which nesting (N)/
index register (V)/index register (Z) is specified for device comment print range.
In this case, delete the device range setting for nesting (N)/index register (V)/index register (Z).
11 - 54
11.11 Considerations for Printing
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Considerations of Print Window function
● Uncompiled programs
Uncompiled program are not printed or reflected to the print preview.
Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
● NOPLF instruction
● Structured Ladder/FBD
If a bend point is created in a Structured Ladder/FBD program, it will be printed as shown below. If
the bend point is unnecessary to be printed, delete it on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
For details of bend points GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
The NOPLF instruction is not supported.
11
Bend point
● Page feed in ladder program
If a ladder block or function block does not fit in one page, the page is automatically fed and the
ladder block or function block is printed from the top of the next page.
PRINTING
■
SETTING OPTIONS
12
<Print result>
13
<Second page>
USING LIBRARIES
<First page>
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
● Printing intelligent function module data
When the print function is performed on the Print Window Preview screen while the positioning data
of intelligent function module are displayed, the font size and the display position of the header may
be different from the normal display. Perform the print function on the Print Window screen.
11 - 55
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Since the screen width is adjusted automatically to fit the page size when the structure/label setting
editor is printed, the printing may be difficult to read depending on the column width of the screen.
In order to improve the printing quality, adjust the column width of the structure/label setting editor.
The visibility of the printing is increased by adjusting the column width to narrow. However, if the
words input into the Remark/Comment column are too long, or one cell is divided into multiple pages,
the content in that cell cannot be printed completely.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
● Printing structure/label setting editor
11 PRINTING
MEMO
11 - 56
SETTING OPTIONS
10
Option settings such as screen display format setting and detailed operation settings of each function
are available.
SEARCH/REPLACE
12
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
PRINTING
11
Option Setting List
12 - 4
13
USING LIBRARIES
12.2
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
12 - 2
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Basic Operations
16
PROTECTING
DATA
12.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
12 - 1
12 SETTING OPTIONS
12.1
Basic Operations
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
This section explains how to set options.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Options].
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
When the cursor is placed on a setting item, an explanation of the item is displayed on the
"Explanation" field.
Screen button
●
Restores the initial settings.
●
Restores the user default settings.
●
Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to a new project.
12 - 2
FX
12.1 Basic Operations
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
PRINTING
● Considerations when changing option settings
All programs need to be compiled when the following option settings are changed.
• "Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
• Settings in "Compile"
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels.
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device
memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
12 - 3
12 SETTING OPTIONS
12.2
Option Setting List
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The following table shows the option setting items.
For (Simple), (FB), (Structured) and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the
following manuals respectively.
(Simple)
(FB)
(Structured)
(Intelligent)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Tree item
Item
Project
Automatic
Save
–
Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer,
GX IEC Developer (Instructions that their
Use Dedicated Instruction
name ends with '_M' and '_MD') can be
for GX Developer, GX IEC
used in the projects using the following
Developer
function. Open Other Project, Read from
PLC or PLC Type change.
Cleared
Section 4.7.1
Connect directly to PLC
on creating a new project
Select whether to connect to PLC directly
on creating a new project.
In a Ethernet built-in CPU, the connection
target is USB.
You are required to restart GX Works2 to
enable the setting change.
Cleared
–
Enable the security check
for the project
Select whether to enable the security
check when saving a project.
Cleared
–
Save project after
compiling
Select whether to save the project
automatically after completing compiling.
For simple project, this setting is valid
only when 'Use Label' is checked.
Cleared
(Simple)
(Structured)
Save project after writing
to PLC
Select whether to save the project
automatically after writing to the
programmable controller CPU.
Cleared
Section 15.1
Save project after online
change
Select whether to save the project
automatically after completing online
change to the programmable controller
CPU.
If the checkbox is checked before 'Save
project after compiling', the operation is
given to priority.
Cleared
Section 15.9.1
Save project after
changes in TC setting
values are written to PLC
Select whether to save the project
automatically after changes in TC setting
values have been written to the
programmable controller CPU.
Cleared
(Simple)
when Save Project
Selected
Cleared
Display confirmation
Select whether to display a confirmation
message showing
message of the revision registration after
whether to register history saving a project.
Cleared
Select whether to automatically set
revision titles at revision registration after
saving a project. Automatically-set titles
can be changed on the Revision List
window.
Cleared
Automatically set revision
titles
12 - 4
Reference
Selected
Revision is not Registered
when Save Project
Select whether to register the revision
after saving a project.
Revision is registered
Change
History
Default
Language setting will be automatically
changed according to system when edit
Ladder/SFC program (Statement and
Note) or device comment.
Automatically change
language according to
system*1
Common
Setting
Explanation
Section 4.2.3
12.2 Option Setting List
Specify the Reference/
Reflection
Set a reference/reflection target of device
comment of each program/program file.
Set a reference/reflection target
according to the local device range of
PLC parameter when set to "PLC
parameter setting".
Within the local device range: local
device comment
Outside the local device range: global
device comment
Default
Reference
MAIN
Global
10
The behavior of each device will be as
follows:
Device
Comment
2)
If comment does not exist, the
behavior will be:
Cleared
• specified to Global:
refer Local comment.
Section 9.1.1
• specified to Local:
refer Global comment.
Program
Editor
11
Apply the current setting of reference/
reflection target for device comment to all
programs/program files.
–
Set all reference/reflection target to
'global' for device comment of selected
program/program file name.
–
Set a all reference/reflection target to
'local' for device comment of selected
program/program file name.
–
PRINTING
All Editors
Global/Local comment will be
referred.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Reference/reflect the
other, when device
comment is not set.
1)
Set all reference/reflection targets for
device comment of target device of the
selected program/program file name to
"PLC parameter setting".
–
Target Device: Device can be specified
within the local device range in the device
setting of PLC parameter
Selected
Class
Cleared
Device
Selected
Address
Cleared
Data Type
Select display item in tool hint when
mouse cursor is placed over label/device
name.
Selected
Cleared
Constant Value
Cleared
Label Comment
Selected
Remark
Tool Hint Display Format
14
(Structured)
Cleared
Select display lines on tool hint.
Multi Line
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Device Comment
USING LIBRARIES
Monitored Value
13
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Structured
Ladder/
Tool Hint
FBD/ST
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Program/Program File
Name
Explanation
SEARCH/REPLACE
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Tree item
12 - 5
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Structured
Ladder/
FBD
FB/FUN
12 - 6
Default
Cleared
Device
Select whether to display the device
which is assigned to the label or
corresponding to address at the same
time when 'Label' is selected from View
mode.
* Users can neither edit the displayed
device nor set them to the Find/Replace
target at the same time.
Cleared
Address
Select whether to display the address
which is assigned to the label or
corresponding to device at the same time
when 'Label' is selected from View mode. Cleared
* Users can neither edit the displayed
address nor set them to the Find/Replace
target at the same time.
Label Comment
Select whether to display the label
comment which is assigned to the label at
the same time when 'Label' is selected
from View mode.
Cleared
* Users can neither edit the displayed
label comment nor set them to the Find/
Replace target at the same time.
Device Comment
Select whether to display device
comment which is assigned to device or
address when 'Label' is selected from
View mode. Cannot display device
comment which is assigned to label while
using label.
* Users can neither edit the displayed
device comment nor set them to the Find/
Replace target at the same time.
Cleared
Declare new label name
Select whether to display the label
registration/selection dialog when
entering new labels.
Selected
Wrap instance name for
function block
Select whether to wrap function block
instance name at the function block
width.
Cleared
Specify the number of
enable characters for
label name/comment
Specify the number of display characters
of function or function block label.
Cleared
Automatic input/output
labels
Select whether to add input/output label
Selected
when function block or function is pasted.
Automatic ENO labels
Select whether to add ENO output label
Cleared
when function block or function is pasted.
Add Automatic Output
Variable to VAR_IN_OUT
Select whether to add output variable in
VAR_IN_OUT when function block is
pasted.
Cleared
Pin overwrites
Select whether to overwrite I/O label with
a grid line when ruling a grid line over
function or function block.
Selected
Double clicking opens
header
Select whether a label editor is displayed
when function or function block is double
clicked.
Selected
Double clicking opens
body
Select whether a program editor is
displayed when function or function block
is double clicked.
Cleared
Label
Program
Editor
Explanation
Display label name/
comment of contact or coil Set display lines and characters per line.
in multiline
Reference
(Structured)
12.2 Option Setting List
ST
Cleared
Allow hotkey repeater
Select whether to display grid line ruling
dialog at drawing lines.
Cleared
Enter label names after
contacts and coils
Select whether to input label names or
devices after entering contacts and coils.
Selected
Auto Comment Block
Width
Set the width of comment to be added in
ladder block with grid numbers when
adding ladder block.
8
Auto Indention
Select whether to use the automatic
indent when beginning a new line after
entering ST control syntax such as IF or
FOR, and when displaying template of
inline structured text.
Selected
Instruction/label name
prediction
Select whether to display listed label
names starting with the input character
when a character is input.
Selected
Tabulator Length
Set tabulator length.
It is not available with inline structured
text.
4
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Set guided mode as default when open
Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
10
(Structured)
SEARCH/REPLACE
Open Structured Ladder/
FBD Editor in guided
mode
11
PRINTING
Program
Editor
Select whether to wrap ladder. The edited Selected
ladder shall be object after changing the
8
setting.
9
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Structured
Ladder/
Guided
FBD
Reference
13
USING LIBRARIES
Return Contacts
Default
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Ladder Wrapping
Explanation
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 7
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Enter ladder
Program
Editor
Ladder/
SFC
Cleared
Enter label comment and
device comment
Select whether to enter label comment or
device comment continuously after
entering instructions.
Cleared
Do not leave the Device/
Label Comment field
editing status
Set whether to leave the Device/Label
Comment field editing status after
opening the comment input dialog.
Able to edit comments if users uncheck
this setting.
Able to copy entire comments if users
check this setting.
Cleared
Do not display note in
Select whether to display note in ladder
ladder input window when
input window when edit coil instructions.
edit coil instructions
Cleared
Check special relay/
special register
compatible with A-PLC
When A-PLC Compatible Setting of PLC
Parameter setting has not be enabled at
the time of instruction inputting, check
whether to display a confirming message
to input special relay/special register
compatible with A-PLC. MELSAP-L is an
exception.
Cleared
Display available
instruction tool hints in
entering instruction
Select whether to automatically display
tool hint of instruction in entering
instruction.
Selected
Display available
instructions in entering
instruction
Select whether to automatically display
available instructions in entering
instruction.
Selected
Display available labels in
entering instruction
Select whether to automatically display
available defined labels in entering
instruction.
Selected
Selected
Class
Cleared
Data Type
Constant Value
Select display item in tool hint when
mouse cursor is placed over label name.
* Options for simple project (with label) or
label program of structured project.
* As for function block, devices are
excluded from display target in tool hint.
Selected
Selected
Cleared
Cleared
Label Comment
Cleared
Remark
Cleared
Tool Hint Display Format
Select the number of display lines in tool
hint.
* Will be wrapped in 64 single-byte
characters or 32 double-byte characters.
Reference
(Simple)
Monitored Value
Device Comment
12 - 8
Default
Check duplicated coil
Device
Tool Hint
Explanation
Select whether to check duplicated coils
when entering instruction. Unconverted
ladder is not the object for duplicated coil
check.
Multiple lines
12.2 Option Setting List
Cleared
Statement
Select whether to display the statement
comment at ladder editor.
Cleared
Note
Select whether to display the note
comment at ladder editor.
Cleared
Device Comment Display
Format
Set the display rows and columns for
label comment or device comment.
Row: 4
Column: 8
Copy device comment in
copying ladder
Select whether to copy device comment
in copying ladder.
* Pasting will be executed by comment
reference/reflection setting.
* Pasting will not be executed between
different PLC.
* Copy or pasting will not be executed for
protected comments.
Cleared
Display Connection of
Ladder Diagram
Set the number of contacts. ([Program
Editor]  [SFC]  [Zoom])
11 Contacts
Use the Switching Ladder
Edit Mode (Read, Write,
Monitor, Monitor (Write))
Select whether to switch Ladder Edit
Mode (Read, Write, Monitor and Monitor
(Write)). Will be the same operation as
the ladder edit mode of GX Developer.
* Unable to set when security setting is
enabled.
Selected
Display labels and
devices
Select whether to display labels, and
devices assigned to label. (Exclude
function block.)
* Devices are excluded from Find/
Replace target.
* Options for simple project (with label) or
label program of structured project.
Cleared
Display STL instruction in
contact format
* Only applies to the
FXCPU
Select whether to display STL instruction
in contact format. This is valid for simple
projects (Not using labels) only.
Contact format ladder block display for
STL instruction is not wrap displayed.
Cleared
Ladder
Diagram
10
PRINTING
11
12
(Simple)
SETTING OPTIONS
Ladder
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Select whether to display the label
comment or the device comment at
ladder editor.
9
SEARCH/REPLACE
Device Comment
Reference
13
Select whether to automatically display
Display Instruction Help at
Instruction Help when symbol errors
symbol error occurrence
occur.
Selected
Open Undefined Label
Registration dialog at
ladder entry
Select whether to open Undefined Label
Registration dialog when labels used at
ladder entry are undefined.
Selected
Set initial value to '1' for
Enter HLine/Delete HLine
dialog
Select whether to set initial value to '1'
when Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog is
opened.
Cleared
Stop at the connection
Select whether to edit line by connection
points (Instruction/Vertical
point (Instruction/Vertical Line) when
Line) when enter or delete
Enter HLine/Delete HLine is executed.
horizontal line.
Cleared
USING LIBRARIES
Program
Editor
Default
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Comment
Explanation
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 9
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Program
Editor
SFC
SFC 2
Cleared
Step/Transition
Display step/transition comment on SFC
editor.
Cleared
SFC Edit Area
Set SFC edit area when create SFC.
Please change by "SFC Row Setting"
after creating a SFC.
Col Number:
10
Line Number:
306
Tile SFC and Zoom
vertically
Select whether to tile Zoom windows at
the cursor position on SFC when creating
SFC diagram. Checking this option
changes the [Open Zoom with New
Window] option into unchecked.
Selected
Arrange
Select the type of tile for SFC and ZOOM
window.
Tile Vertically
SFC Display Window
Ratio
Select window display ratio for SFC when
Tile Vertically is selected.
30%
MELSAP-L Label/Device
Display Format
Set display lines for MELSAP-L program. 4
Jump to start destination
block
Set whether to jump to start destination
block when cursor is moved to block start
step.
Leave comment or step
No. selected
Select whether to leave comment or step
No. selected in Enter SFC Symbol screen
when changing SFC symbol in
MELSAP3.
Cleared
Block or symbol must be left selected in
Enter SFC Symbol screen when newly
entering SFC symbol.
Open Zoom with New
Window
Select whether to open a new window for
each Zoom or to change the display in
the fixed window when opening Zoom.
Checking this option changes the "Tile
SFC and Zoom vertically" option into
unchecked.
Cleared
Set the number of contacts.
Same as the
"Ladder
Diagram"
setting
Zoom
Number of Action/
Transition Contacts
12 - 10
Default
Block List
Comment
SFC 1
Explanation
Display device comment on SFC block
list.
Reference
(Simple)
Cleared
12.2 Option Setting List
Parameter
Extended setting
• When "Standard mode" is selected.
Device comment up to 32K points per
device can be registered. In total, up to
1024K points per file can be registered. Standard
mode
• When "Extended mode" is selected.
Device comment up to 192K points per
device can be registered. In total, up to
2048K points per file can be registered.
Section 9.4
Execute the operation
including the hidden bit
specification information
*Only applies to Universal
model QCPU and LCPU
Set whether to execute the Copy/Cut/
Paste operation including the hidden bit
specification information.
Section 9.2.1
Always Confirm
Display the window which sets the editor
column when opening the target device
memory editor for the first time after
reading PLC or opening other project.
Auto
Always set the column automatically
when opening the target device memory
editor for the first time after reading PLC
or opening other project. Set 8, 10 and 16
columns automatically according to
device type.
Specify the Column
Number
Always set the specified columns when
opening the target device memory editor
for the first time after reading PLC or
opening other project.
Automatic copy and
increment when inserting
a row
Select whether to copy the texts in the
upper row after incrementing it when
inserting a row.
Selected
Copy data type/comment
items
Select if the data type, comment, and
remark shall be object for auto copy.
Selected
Default Length of String
Data Type
Set the default string length for string data
32
type.
Display last blank row
Select whether to display last blank row.
This setting is valid for global label and
local label except the local label of
function block, function and structured
data type.
Cleared
Use user defined
parameter
* Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU
Display the User Defined Parameter
Setting button and able to set it. Once the
user set parameter is set, it will remain
even after checking off the selection box.
Cleared
–
Display number of
columns for CC-Link list
setting
* Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU
Select 4 columns or 2 columns to display
number of columns in CC-Link list setting
of network parameter. Please reopen the
CC-Link list setting window to reflect
changes.
4 Columns
Section 6.3
Display number of rows
for CC-Link station
information
Select 16 rows or 8 rows to display
number of rows in CC-Link station
information of network parameter. Please
reopen the CC-Link list setting window to
reflect changes.
16 Rows
Section 6.3.1
32
Cleared
Section 9.2.1
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Set the number of input and display
characters for device comment.
9
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Reference
Section 4.7.1
Section 15.1.8
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Always
Confirm
PRINTING
11
(Simple)
(Structured)
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Label Setting Editor
Default
Number of Device
Comment Edit/Display
Characters
Device Comment Editor
Device Memory Editor
Explanation
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
WRITING/READING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 11
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Explanation
Section 19.1
Start monitoring if
converted or compiled
program is opened during
monitoring
Select whether to start monitoring
automatically if other program is opened
while monitor status bar is displayed.
Unconverted or uncompiled program will
not be monitored.
Section 17.2
Display Format of
Monitoring Value
Select whether to display monitored value
Decimal
in Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Monitor buffer memory
and link direct device
* Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C)
Select whether to monitor buffer memory
and link direct device during monitoring.
Scan time of PLC will be lengthened
depending on the setting.
Cleared
Significant Characters
Set the number of displayable characters
to monitor character-string data.
16
Cleared
• When "Always Verify with PLC" is
selected.
Verify with PLC before starting
monitoring. However, do not verify if
simulator is running, selecting
uncompiled program's POU, or
unchanged POU (Last verification
status is held while editor is open).
Monitor
Structured Ladder/FBD/
ST
Verify with PLC setting
before starting monitoring
• When "Not Always Verify with PLC" is
selected.
Start monitoring without verifying with
PLC.
• When "Confirm whether to Verify with
PLC" is selected.
Show a confirmation box whether to
verify with PLC before starting
monitoring. However, the confirmation
box will not be displayed and do not
verify if simulator is running, selecting
uncompiled program's POU, or
unchanged POU (Last verification
status is held while editor is open).
12 - 12
Reference
Disable Current Value
Changing by Pressing
Shift+Enter
Common
Ladder/SFC
Default
Select whether to disable the current
value changing of bit device (bit label) of
cursor position when executing ladder
editor monitor/watch/intelligent function
module monitor/device/buffer memory
Cleared
batch monitor by pressing [Shift]+[Enter]
key. This setting will be saved when
stopping GX Works2. Please stop this GX
Works2 at last when multiple GX Works2
are running.
Set automatic registration
destination
Label and device of ladder block (Ladder)
in cursor, action/transition step (SFC) will
be registered to watch window while
monitoring watch window. (Caution 1:
Cursor move will be slow under the
setting. 2: Select FB instance for function
block.)
(Structured)
Confirm
whether to
Verify with
PLC
Not Specified Section 17.6.2
12.2 Option Setting List
Select the display format of the monitored
Decimal
value in decimal or hexadecimal.
Monitor buffer memory
and link direct device
* Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C)
Select whether to monitor buffer memory
and link direct device during Laddermonitoring. Scan time of PLC will be
lengthened depending on the setting.
Cleared
FXGP format Ladder
monitor
* Only applies to the
FXCPU
PLS/PLF instruction is displayed in
GP(DOS) and FXGP(WIN) formats. If it is
not checked, it is displayed in GX
Developer form.
Cleared
Display monitored value
by device/label name of
contact/coil instruction
In monitoring ladder, select whether to
highlight contact/coil instruction based on
the monitored value displayed by device/
label name.
Cleared
Display Lines for
Monitoring Current Value
Select whether to display rows of the
current value monitor during Laddermonitoring.
Show Always
Watch Step Not
Transferring within
Watching Time
Select whether to display a warning
dialog when detect a step that does not
transfer even if specified time passes
while monitoring.
It is excluded from the target of [Set as
User Default] function.
Cleared
Program/Program File
Name
Select watch target program/program file. (SFC
It is excluded from the target of [Set as
program
User Default] function.
name)
Target All Blocks
Specify watch target block.
It is excluded from the target of [Set as
User Default] function.
Selected
Specify watch target block.
It is excluded from the target of [Set as
User Default] function.
Cleared
Stop Transition Watch
Monitor when Detected
Select whether to detect other step that
does not transfer while displaying
warning dialog.
Selected
Monitor block start with
new window
Select whether to open a corresponding
SFC window to monitor when the active
step transfers to a block start step.
Cleared
Detail Setting
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
(Simple)
PRINTING
11
12
(Simple)
SETTING OPTIONS
Specify the Block
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Display Format of
Monitoring Value
Reference
13
USING LIBRARIES
SFC*2
Default
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Monitor
Explanation
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Ladder
Item
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 13
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
PLC Read/Write
12 - 14
Item
Explanation
Default
Reference
Keep last file selection for
PLC read/write dialog
Select whether to store file selection
status to PLC read/write dialog.
Selected
Turn PLC to STOP at time
of PLC write after
executing Rebuild All and
do not execute remote
RUN
Select whether to turn the PLC to STOP
at the time of PLC write and not execute
remote RUN because executing "Rebuild
All" from the menu or icon changes the
device assignment. PLC write cannot be
executed in RUN with this option
checked.
Cleared
Clear the device ranges
set in the Device/Label
Automatic-Assign setting
to 0 at time of PLC write
after a Rebuild All
operation
* Recommended setting:
checked*3,*4
* Unnecessary for simple
projects (Do not use label)
After executing a Rebuild All, when labels
are reassigned to new devices, values
from the previous program will remain in
the previously assigned devices. This
setting automatically clears the device
ranges in the Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting.
Selected
Section 15.1.8
(Simple)
(Structured)
Check the password in
reading/writing/verifying/
deleting PLC*2
Select whether to check password in
reading/writing/verifying/deleting PLC.
Read user default at reading new PLC
time. The label program of GX Developer
check the password that does not pertain
to this setting.
Selected
-
Check program cache
memory when writing to
PLC
Universal Model
QCPU(Except for Highspeed Universal model
QCPU), LCPU only
Select whether to execute automatically
check program cache memory when
writing to program memory. Automatic
recovery is enabled in Write to PLC,
Online program change, TC setting
change, Write title, and Password/
Keyword.
Cleared
Manual of
programmable
controller CPU
Merge device comment
with the project data at
time of PLC read.
Select whether to merge the read device
comments with the project data or
replace the project data with the read
device comments in reading from PLC.
Device comments created in the
extended mode will also be deleted if this
option is disabled.
Selected
Section 15.1.8
Show a completion
message if the PLC read/
write window is
automatically closed
Select whether to show the confirmation
message if the PLC read/write operation
is successfully finished and the window is
automatically closed.
Selected
-
Show the confirmation
message in executing
Write to PLC
Select whether to show the confirmation
message for the data to be written at the
time of PLC write.
Cleared
-
Section 15.1
12.2 Option Setting List
Execute fall instruction
* Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to execute fall instruction
(LDF, LDFI, ANDF, ANDFI, ORF, ORFI,
MEF, PLF, FCALLP, EFCALLP) at online
change.
Cleared
Transfer program cache
memory to program
memory
* Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to transfer the program
cache memory to program memory when
online change completed.
* Message will be shown to confirm
whether to transfer to or not if it is
unchecked.
Selected
Execute online change
based on relative step No.
* Ladder Only
* Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to execute online change
based on relative step No. from pointer.
Even if real step No. is different, online
change is available as long as relative
step No. from the pointer is
corresponding.
Cleared
Execute online change by
Compile
* Enabled when 'Switch
the Ladder Edit Mode' is
set
Select whether to execute Online
Program Change when ladder program or
SFC program is edited and compiled. Will
Cleared
be enabled when 'Switch Ladder Edit
Mode' is checked. ([Options]  [Program
Editor]  [Ladder]  [Ladder Diagram])
Reference
10
Section 15.9
11
Under booting, reflect
changes to boot source
during online program
Select whether to reflect the changes to
change
Cleared
boot source after online program change.
* Except for Q00UJ/Q00U/
Q01UCPU, basic model
QCPU and FXCPU
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Setting for Writing
Symbolic Information to
PLC
Set the writing format for symbolic
information. The capacity will be
optimized by high speed mode support
version but be read only by 1.45X or later. High Speed
The capacity will not be optimized by
Mode
compatible mode but be read by 1.44W
or previous.
FXCPU support only high-speed mode.
Write symbolic
information when Online
Program Change is
executed
Select whether to write symbolic
information when Online Program
Change is executed.
The system writes the symbolic
information when Online Program
Change is executed if this option is
enabled.
* The write target of the symbolic
information is grayed out if this option is
enabled.
In the Write to PLC
window, keep the
symbolic information
selected status as a write
target
Select whether to keep the symbolic
information selected status when the
Write to PLC is selected.
* Symbolic information and all programs Cleared
will be write target at time of PLC write
when the option is enabled. Only program
cannot be written.
Section 15.1.5
Setting for Save
Destination of Symbolic
Information to PLC
Set a PLC drive to store symbolic
information. This setting can be changed
when you connect to PLC. Program
Memory/Device Memory will be selected
in simulation mode if an unusable storage
is specified.
Default value will be set after changing
PLC type.
Section 5.3.2
Program
Memory/
Device
Memory
13
-
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
Section 15.1.5
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Symbolic Information
Cleared
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Default
SEARCH/REPLACE
Explanation
PRINTING
Online Change
Item
WRITING/READING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 15
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Compile
Output Result
Save Destination of
Device Comment
Set the target memory for device
comment save destination.
Able to change it later.
In simulation mode, program/device
memory will be selected if invalid
destination is specified.
* This setting will not be saved by 'Set as
User Default' setting.
Program
Memory/
Device
Memory
Enable calling function
block and using inline ST
Enable calling function block from ladder
to ST or vice versa, from ladder to
Structured Ladder/FBD or vice versa,
using inline ST in ladder, reducing steps
when using function block.
* Input label for VAR_IN_OUT remains
equal to output label.
Selected
Do not execute duplicated
coil check, ladder check
and consistency (pair)
check after Build or Online
Program Change
Check when program check is not
needed after Build or Online Program
Change. It can reduce the compile time
depending on the setting.
Selected
Do not target the SET
instruction for duplicated
coil check
Select whether to set the SET instruction
as the target for duplicated coil check.
Cleared
Use the same label name
in global label and local
label
Select whether to use the same label
name in global label and local label.
When the same label is selected, local
label will be given priority.
Cleared
Create cross reference
information after
completion compile.
Creating cross reference information after
compiling enables to reduce find time.
The information can be found in
uncompiled project. Specified find
Cleared
condition is treated as filter condition.
The setting will be canceled if find mode
is 'Fast Find'.
Stop Build
Set the number of error and warning to
stop the compile.
Error: 25
Warning: 100
Disable Warning and
Notification Message
Register warning codes to invalidate. The
registered warning codes shall not be
displayed in output window.
(No setting)
Display the Use Status
Notification of
The use status of device automaticAutomatic-Assign
assign is displayed in output window.
Device in Output
Result
12 - 16
Default
Under device comment selected status,
select whether to change the target
Cleared
memory of PLC data to the one specified
by Save Destination of Device Comment.
Save Destination of Device Comment
Basic Setting
Explanation
Set save destination of
device comment to the
target memory of PLC
data
Selected
Reference
Section 15.1.7
(Structured)
(Simple)
(Structured)
Section 10.1.1
(Simple)
(Structured)
–
12.2 Option Setting List
Cleared
Use lower-case device
names as labels*5
Select whether to use device names
typed with lower case characters as
labels.
Only the device name outside device
range is valid for Inline Structured Text.
Cleared
Function Output Setting
Select whether to connect directly from
the objective function output to other
input.
Selected
Allow VAR_OUTPUT at
FB call (ST)
Select whether to allow VAR_OUTPUT at
FB call.
Check: Able to specify VAR_OUTPUT as
FB argument. (e.g. FBInst(FBVarOUT:=
Selected
Variable);)
Uncheck: Compile error C8015 returns if
VAR_OUTPUT is specified as FB
argument.
Add temporary variables
as arguments to use
macrocode
For FB call of ST or structured ladder
from structured ladder, set whether to
add temporary variables to input, I/O, or
output argument to use macrocode.*
Unable to add them depending on the
programming language. Please refer to
the appropriate manual.
(Unable to add temporary variable in a
structure.)
(D)INT_TO_BOOL_E,
(D)WORD_TO_BOOL_E,
TIME_TO_BOOL_E
Structured
Ladder/
FBD/ST
NOT_E
LIMITAION_E,
MAXIMUM_E,
MINIMUM_E
Compile
Condition 2
Compile
Condition 3
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
12
Cleared
(Structured)
13
Selected
Check the box to generate code that
holds the output (SET). When
unchecked, the instruction word output
will be treated as a coil (OUT).
Selected
Selected
EQ_E, NE_E, GT_E,
GE_E, LT_E, LE_E
Selected
AND_E, OR_E, XOR_E
Selected
User Defined Function
with EN/ENO
Select whether to generate a code which
keeps bit type output of the target
function.
(Codes keeping bit type are generated if
output is in bit type array or in structure
array, regardless of option setting.)
User Defined Function
Block with EN/ENO
Select whether to generate a code which
keeps bit type output of the target
function block.
(Codes keeping bit type are generated if
output is in bit type array or in structure
array, regardless of option setting.)
SETTING OPTIONS
Compile
(Simple)
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Make sure that the
instruction is not used
beyond the device range
assigned by the label*2
Select whether to display warnings or not
when ladder/SFC program instruction is
using devices out of device range
assigned by the labels in instruction. Able
to detect instructions that may use
devices out of range and may overwrite
other label’s value.
Reference
USING LIBRARIES
Compile
Condition 1
Default
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Compile
Condition
Explanation
Selected
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Ladder/
SFC
Item
Cleared
Select whether to assign each system
device to output functions of EN/ENO.
Automatically assign each Only functions enabled. (Function block is
system device to output of disabled.)
Selected
functions that use EN/
Only checked functions at [Generate
ENO
Code That Holds the Output of the
Following] are enabled when the output is
bit type.
(Structured)
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Tree item
12 - 17
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Display Specification of
Positioning Data
Intelligent
Function
Module*2
QD75/LD75 Type
Positioning
Guidance
iQ Works Interaction
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
*6 :
Default
Reference
Data No.1 to
100
(Intelligent)
Select whether to check an operation
Confirm PLC operation
status of programmable controller CPU
status when writing a Data and allow to be written in the status of
STOP.
Selected
Display a confirmation
message when writing to
flash ROM
Selected
Select to display a confirmation message
when writing to flash ROM.
Section 15.1.4
Display intelligent function Select whether to automatically display
module guidance
intelligent function module guidance.
Selected
(Intelligent)
Enable an editing of
parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator
Select whether enabling or not editing
parameters set by MELSOFT Navigator.
Selected
Section 6.1
Use MELSOFT Navigator
Option Information
Checking this option enables use of the
option setting of MELSOFT Navigator.
The option setting specified in MELSOFT
Navigator at the time of opening this
project is used.
Cleared
System Label Name
Setting
Set how to name system labels. When
system labels are entered, system label
names are determined based on this
setting at the time of project save.
Use global
names
directly
Display a message to
confirm operation
contents at the start of
trace
Display a confirming message to start
trace.
Selected
Display a message to
confirm discard of the
trace result at the start of
trace
Display a message to confirm discard of
the trace result at the start of trace.
Selected
Display a caution
message in saving data
as GX LogViewer format
CSV file
Display a caution message about data
changes in saving data as GX LogViewer
format CSV file.
Selected
System Label Setting*6
Sampling Trace
Explanation
Set the range of positioning data to be
displayed.
(Simple)
Structured)
–
Supported by Japanese version of GX Works2 only.
Not supported by FXCPU.
This setting is not required when the following operations are performed, and the programmable controller CPU is switched to RUN for
writing programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling programs.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU: reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers.
• For FXCPU: perform the PLC memory clear function.
0 clear process may take a couple of minutes when a large amount of devices to be cleared exists.
Not supported by Simple project.
For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
● Options supported by communication head module and remote I/O module
The following option items are supported by projects for communication head module and remote I/O module.
• Project
• Parameter
• PLC Read/Write
• Intelligent Function Module
• iQ Works Interaction*1
*1 :
12 - 18
For CC IE Field head module only
USING LIBRARIES
Libraries
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
13.1
WRITING/READING
DATA
13 - 2
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
This chapter explains the overview of library function in GX Works2.
SEARCH/REPLACE
13
PROTECTING
DATA
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13 - 1
13 USING LIBRARIES
13.1
Libraries
FB library and user library are the libraries of GX Works2.
Work hours for creating programs can be reduced by using functions of library.
This section explains the overview of libraries.
The following table shows the applicability of libraries according to the project type.
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Project type
13 - 2
Library
FB library
User library
Simple project (without labels)
×
×
Simple project (with labels)

Section 13.1.1
×
Structured project

Section 13.1.1

Section 13.1.2
13.1 Libraries
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
FB libraries are the collection of function blocks prepared as MELSOFT Library and they can be used in
projects with labels.
Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative to obtain MELSOFT Library.
To use the FB library in a Structured project, import the library to a Simple project (with labels), and
change the project type to a Structured project by selecting [Project]  [Change Project Type].
Programs can be created efficiently by using the FB libraries.
The following shows an example of using the FB library of QD70 positioning module (QD70P4).
10
11
< With FB libraries >
PRINTING
< Without FB libraries >
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
FB libraries
SEARCH/REPLACE
13.1.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
For details of using the FB libraries, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
13.1.1 FB libraries
13 - 3
13 USING LIBRARIES
13.1.2
User libraries
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
User libraries are components which can be shared between multiple projects and they can be used in
a Structured project only.
User libraries are created by a user.
Frequently-used components are stored and reused for programming efficiency.
< Project 1 >
< Project 2 >
Edit
Library
Program
Global label
Store
Program
Global label
Utilize
Library
Library file
Reuse
Program
Global label
FB/FUN
FB/FUN
FB/FUN
Structure
Structure
Structure
Global label
Global label
Program setting
Program setting
Task
Task
POU
POU
Program block
Program block
FB/FUN
FB/FUN
Structure
Structure
The following data can be registered to user libraries.
• Global labels
• Structures
• POUs (program blocks, functions, function blocks)
For details of using user libraries, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
13 - 4
13.1.2 User libraries
Library components
can be used.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
11
PRINTING
This chapter explains how to set a connection destination for accessing a programmable controller
CPU from GX Works2.
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
14 - 8
14.3
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via
Networks
14 - 15
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple
CPU System
14 - 22
14.5
Accessing Redundant CPUs
14 - 25
14.6
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via
Ethernet Board
14 - 33
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4
Module
14 - 35
14.8
Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
14 - 36
14.9
Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent
Function)
14 - 40
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone
Line
14 - 50
Considerations of Communication with
Programmable Controller CPU
14 - 72
14.4
14.7
14.10
14.11
13
USING LIBRARIES
14.2
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14 - 2
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Setting Connection Destinations
16
PROTECTING
DATA
14.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
14 - 1
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1
Setting Connection Destinations
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to set communication routes, including the interfaces both on the personal
computer and programmable controller CPU and the routing networks, for accessing a programmable
controller CPU.
Multiple connection destinations can be set in GX Works2. To set multiple connection destinations,
create data for each connection destination on the New Data screen. (Section 14.1.2)
The programmable controller type of the project should be the same as that of the programmable
controller CPU to be accessed.
Screen display
Select Navigation window  Connection Destination view  "(connection destination data
name)".
14 - 2
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
9
Transfer setup screen
Interfaces are displayed on the Transfer Setup screen as shown below and detailed settings of each
interface can be configured.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
PLC side I/F
PC side I/F
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
14.1.1
MELSECNET/10(H)
Network route
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Detailed setting display fields
● PC side I/F
Set the interface of the personal computer.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Detailed settings can be set for underlined items on the screen. Double-click these items to set the
details. The items whose icons are displayed in yellow are items that have been already set.
USING LIBRARIES
13
● PLC side I/F
Set the interface of the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14 - 3
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Other Station Setting
Select whether routing network exists or not. In addition, set the "Check at communication time" and
"Retry times" as necessary.
Item
Description
No Specification
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU directly connected to a
personal computer.
Other Station (Single
Network)*1
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via only
one kind of network (including a multi-tier system) such as CC-Link only,
MELSECNET/10(H) only, CC-Link IE only, C24 module only and Ethernet only.
Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H),
specify "Single Network" for a mixed system in which Ethernet, CC-Link IE, and
MELSECNET/10(H) are configured.
Other Station (Co-existence
Network)*1,*2
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via two
kinds of network.
This means the system that is configured with two different networks, such that from
MELSECNET/10(H) to CC-Link master/local module or from Q series C24 module to
MELSECNET/10(H).
*1 :
*2 :
When the host station is specified, select "No Specification".
Not supported by FXCPU.
● Network Communication Route
Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network that is
routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting items differ
according to the selected network type.
● Co-existence Network Route*1
Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network to
access. The setting items differ according to the selected network type.
● Target system*1,*2
Specify the access target in the multiple CPU system or the redundant system.
*1 :
*2 :
14 - 4
Not supported by FXCPU.
Not supported by LCPU.
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
Displays the Connection Channel List screen.
The connection destination can be set while checking network routes on the Connection Channel List
screen.
Since the route selected in the Connection Channel List screen is set automatically on the Transfer
Setup screen, the setting is easy even for a complex system.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operation
1. Select a route on the Connection Channel
List screen.
11
2. Click the
PRINTING
/
button.
The selected route is displayed on the Transfer
Setup screen. Set the network number, station
number, and other settings depending on the
access target.
• "List mode"
12
Display all routes supported by GX
Works2.
Display Selected
Routes
Specify the interfaces for "PC side I/F"
and "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer
Setup screen and select "Display
Selected Routes" to display only
accessible routes for "Other Station
Setting" and "Network Communication
Route" setting.
13
●
Changes the connection destination setting for the setting that connects a personal computer directly
to the programmable controller CPU to be accessed.
This function is useful to change the station specification from another station to host station.
●
Tests if the target programmable controller CPU set on the Transfer Setup screen can be accessed
normally.
If accessed normally, the model of the target programmable controller CPU module is displayed on
the "PLC Type" field, one of the detailed setting display fields. In addition, for the multiple CPU
system, the CPU number of the connection destination is displayed on the "Detail" field.
Shows the set connection channel in an illustration.
15
/
Displays the Line Connection screen.
The screen is used to set the communication using a phone line.
For details of the Line Connection screen setting, refer to Section 14.10.2.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
●
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
●
USING LIBRARIES
Display All Routes
SETTING OPTIONS
Description
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
List mode
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
●
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Screen button
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14 - 5
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1.2
Creating connections
Create a new connection.
Select Navigation window  Connection Destination view, and perform the following operation.
Screen display
Select [Project]  [Object]  [New] (
).
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Data Name
Enter the name of the connection to be created.
Set as Default
Connection
Select this to specify the connection destination to be created for regular use.
2. Click the
button.
The created connection destination is added to "All Connections" on the Connection Destination
view.
14 - 6
14.1.2 Creating connections
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Specifying connection destination for regular use
Specify a connection destination for regular use when multiple connection destinations are set.
Operating procedure
1. Select the connection destination data to be specified as for regular use from "All
Connections" on the Connection Destination view.
2. Select [Project]  [Object]  [Set as Default Connection].
The name of the selected connection destination data is set as the connection destination for
regular use, and displayed on "Current Connection".
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14.1.3
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
is appended to the icon of data
specified as the connection destination
for regular use.
13
USING LIBRARIES
● Connection destination setting
The connection destination data can also be specified for regular use by dragging and dropping it from "All
Connections" to "Current Connection".
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.1.3 Specifying connection destination for regular use
14 - 7
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.2
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU directly
connected to a personal computer.
14.2.1
Connecting with serial/USB cable
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
The following explains the setting for accessing the host programmable controller CPU from GX
Works2 with serial/USB cable.
Host programmable controller CPU
When connecting
directly to the
programmable
controller CPU.
14 - 8
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
FX
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
9
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
The following explains the setting for accessing the QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU on the host station.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
10
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
11
SEARCH/REPLACE
Section 14.1.1
PRINTING
Select the series of the programmable controller CPU to
be connected.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".
Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry times" as
necessary.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14 - 9
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
■
Connecting to FXCPU
The following explains the setting for accessing the FXCPU on the host station.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 14.1.1
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
This setting is not required for the series other than
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".
Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry times" as
necessary.
14 - 10
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
Description
Select this item when connecting using the RS-232 of a personal computer
RS-232 C
or when connecting to the USB of a personal computer with FX-USB-AW/
(Including FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD)
FX3U-USB-BD.
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FXU
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
9.6kbps










19.2kbps
–
–
–
–
–





38.4kbps
–
–
–
–
–
–
–



57.6kbps
–
–
–
–
–
–
–



115.2kbps
–
–
–
–
–
–
–



For connecting to FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC and communicating at 38.4kbps/57.6kbps/115.2kbps, the
following adapter is required.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC: FX-232AWC-H
FX3U, FX3UC: FX-232AWC-H or FX-USB-AW
14 - 11
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Communication
speed
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Communication speed with FXCPU
The following table shows communication speed that FXCPU support.
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
13
14
Select this item when connecting the GOT2000 series and GOT1000
series USB to the USB of a personal computer directly using the
transparent function or when connecting to the USB of a personal
computer directly.
USB
12
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Item
11
SETTING OPTIONS
When a communication error occurs in the functions listed below, an error message will be displayed at '0' time retry,
regardless of the number of retries being set.
• Intelligent function module monitor
• Read from PLC
• Write to PLC
• Verify with PLC
• Online program change
• Delete PLC data
• Read PLC user data
• Write PLC user data
• Delete PLC user data
• Monitor
• Device/buffer memory batch monitoring
• Program list monitoring
• Interrupt program monitoring
• Entry Ladder Monitor
• Watch
• SFC block list monitoring
• SFC all block batch monitoring
• SFC active steps monitoring
● "PC side I/F" of FXCPU
For FXCPU, select the RS-232/USB with considering the description indicated in the table below.
10
USING LIBRARIES
● Lead time to display communication error
When powering OFF the programmable controller CPU or resetting hardware during a program monitoring, displaying
communication error will take time.
Until the error is displayed, the "Connection Status" is displayed as "in execution" on the monitoring status bar.
The lead time to display communication error can be calculated with the following formula.
(Specified time of communication time check) × 3 × (Specified time of number of retries +1)
Example) When communication time check is specified as 30 seconds, and number of retries is specified to '0'
(30 seconds) × 3 × (0 +1) equals 90 seconds, and the maximum of 90 seconds later, an error will be
displayed.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.2.2
Accessing by Ethernet
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
*2
Head
FX
*1: Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only
*2: FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only
Access the Ethernet Built-in CPU or the FXCPU with Ethernet adapter from GX Works2 by Ethernet.
*1
Ethernet Built-in CPU
(192.168.0.2)
*1 :
For details of the system consists of FXCPU and an Ethernet adapter, refer to the following manual.
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
Item
PC side I/F
Select an adapter*1 and a protocol.
If there are multiple adapters, make sure that the adapter that is used for communication is
selected. When there is only one adapter, it does not need to be specified.
Since network number and station number are not used, the settings of network number and
station number are not required.
PLC side I/F
Select the access method. (■ Detailed settings of PLC side I/F)
*1 :
14 - 12
Description
When an adapter name is not displayed on the pull-down list of "Adapter", check the following:
• Is the Ethernet adapter enabled?
• Is the Ethernet cable connected to an Ethernet adapter properly?
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
The following is a setting example when searching for an Ethernet Built-in CPU or an FXCPU with
Ethernet adapter on the same network connected via hub and utilizing the IP address.
The following is a screen of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Detailed settings of PLC side I/F
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
PRINTING
Connection destination
CPU information list
1. Select a programmable controller type connected to a personal computer in "PLC Mode".
For FXCPU, the programmable controller type is fixed to FXCPU.
2. Select "Connection via HUB".
3. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, click the
, and for FXCPU, click
the
button.
The IP addresses, CPU types, labels, and comments of the Ethernet Built-in CPU or the
FXCPUs with Ethernet adapter on the same network are displayed in the 'connection destination
CPU information list'.
4. Select an Ethernet Built-in CPU or an FXCPU with Ethernet adapter to be connected in the
button.
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
'connection destination CPU information list', and click the
The selected IP address is displayed in "IP Address".
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operation
USING LIBRARIES
■
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14 - 13
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● When a warning message is displayed
When clicking the
button, a warning message may be displayed, which indicates
that a function of GX Works2 is blocked by Windows firewall. Click the
button, and continue the
operation.
● When the same IP addresses are displayed
If the same IP address is displayed in the 'connection destination CPU information list' when the
button is clicked, multiple IP addresses may be set in the Windows® Network
Connections setting.
In such case, select the Ethernet adapter that is used for communication for "PC side I/F". (Section 14.2.2)
14 - 14
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU on another station from a
personal computer via networks.
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
14.3
MELSECNET/10(H)
11
PRINTING
When accessing other
stations via a single
network.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
When accessing other
stations via co-existence
networks.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 14.1.1
Section 14.1.1
3. Set "Other Station Setting"
Section 14.1.1
4. Set "Network Communication Route" / "Co-existence Network Route".
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network
that is routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting
items differ according to the selected network type.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
14 - 15
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Setting connection target with checking the communication route
Click the
button to display the Connection Channel List screen.
On the Connection Channel List screen, the images of the communication route selected from the list on the screen
can be checked. Since the selected route is reflected on the Transfer Setup Connection screen automatically, the
communication route can easily be set. (Section 14.1.1)
● Connection via Ethernet
The setting of "Station No.IP Information" of the Ethernet parameter may be required. For details, refer to the
following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 16
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
9
Setting example of "Other Station (Single Network)"
The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via single network.
● Screen settings for CC-Link system with QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU (single network)
Master station
Station number 1
Station number 2
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the CC-Link system
configuration.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Request target
(Station number 3)
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Start I/O number of route
source CC-Link master/local
module ( )
Station number of route
target CC-Link master/local
module ( )
● Accessible station numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CC-Link
When the programmable controller CPU is connected directly or via a serial communication module, accessible station
numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CC-Link are 0 (master) to 63.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14 - 17
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Screen settings for CC-Link system with FXCPU (single network)
• When FXCPU is a master station
The following shows the example of connection destination detail setting screen for the CC-Link
system configuration.
For details of CC-Link system with FXCPU, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link user's manuals for FXCPU
Master station
*1
FXCPU
*3
Station number 1
*2
FXCPU
CC-Link
Request target
Station number 2 (Station number 3)
*4
*2 *4
FXCPU
*2 *4
FXCPU
*1: FX3G/FX3GC version 2.00 or later
FX3U/FX3UC version 3.10 or later
*2: FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
For FX3UC, supported by version 2.20 or later
*3: CC-Link master station
*4: CC-Link intelligent device station
Special block number of route
source CC-Link master station ( )
Station number of request target
CC-Link intelligent device station
( )
● Considerations when accessing other stations via CC-Link
• When accessing other stations via CC-Link, FXCPUs other than the master station can be accessed only when an
FXCPU master station (2 in above figure) is relayed. Accessing other FXCPUs via FXCPU other than master station
cannot be performed.
• Specify the special block number (0 to 7) of CC-Link master station which is connected to the master station for "Start
I/O No." in the Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of CC-Link screen.
• The following are the accessible station numbers according to the FXCPU model of the master station.
FX3U, FX3UC: 1 to 16
FX3G, FX3GC: 1 to 12
14 - 18
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
*1
QCPU
(Q mode)
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
• When QCPU (Q mode) is a master station
The following shows the example of connection destination detail setting screen for accessing
FXCPU via QCPU (Q mode).
For details of CC-Link system with FXCPU, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link user's manuals for FXCPU
CC-Link
FXCPU
*2 *3
11
PRINTING
Request target
(Station number 3)
*1: Master station
*2: FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
For FX3UC, supported by version 2.20 or later
*3: CC-Link intelligent device station
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Start I/O number of route source
CC-Link master/local module ( )
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Station number of request target
CC-Link intelligent device station ( )
● Accessible station numbers when accessing other stations via CC-Link
Accessible station numbers are 1 to 63.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14 - 19
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet
are configured (single network)
For the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet are configured, specify
"Single Network" when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. (Since
Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H), specify "Single Network".)
The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system
configuration (Q series only).
Request target (Station number 1)
Ethernet
Network number 3
MELSECNET/10(H)
Network number 1
Ethernet
Network number 2
● Accessing programmable controller CPUs on another station
Routing parameters need to be set when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station with a different
network number, or when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station via network system mixed with
MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE and Ethernet.
Accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station is possible within the network system specifications by
setting routing parameters.
For details of routing parameters, refer to the manual of each network module.
● Mixed system consisting of MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet
Ethernet parameter "Station No.  IP Information" must be set. For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 20
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
● Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H) and Q series C24 modules
are configured (co-existence network)
The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system
configuration (Q series only).
11
MNET/
10(H)
CPU
MNET/
10(H)
C24
MNET/
10(H)
CPU
Set the routing parameters.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via co-existence
network.
This setting is not supported by LCPU and FXCPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Setting example of "Other Station (Co-existence Network)"
Multi-drop connection
Station number 22
12
C24
CPU
C24
Request target (Station number 2)
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
Start I/O number of
route source C24 module ( )
16
Station number of
route target C24 module ( )
PROTECTING
DATA
CPU
MELSECNET/10 (H)
Network number 2
MNET/
10(H)
MELSECNET/10 (H)
Network number 1
PRINTING
Station No.0
SETTING OPTIONS
■
14 - 21
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.4
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ and Redundant CPU.
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU (host CPU)
directly connected to the personal computer or other programmable controller CPUs (other CPUs) in
the multiple CPU system. The setting method for accessing the multiple CPU system on another
station via a network is also explained.
■
Accessing host CPU
The setting for accessing the host CPU is the same as that for accessing the programmable controller
CPU on the host station. (Section 14.2)
■
Accessing other CPUs
In the multiple CPU system, specify the CPU number of the access target at "Multiple CPU Setting"
when accessing a programmable controller CPU that is not directly connected to the personal
computer.
For Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU (Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), the CPU No. 1 to 3 can be
specified.
For High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Universal model QCPU (except for Q00U/
Q01U/Q02U), the CPU No. 1 to 4 can be specified.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No. 4 by connecting the personal
computer to the CPU No. 1.
CPU No. 1 (connected to the personal computer)
CPU No. 2
CPU No. 3
CPU No. 4 (access target)
Operation
1. Set the settings from "PC side I/F" to
"Co-existence Network Route"
Section 14.1.1
2. Set the access target CPU number with
"Multiple CPU Setting" for "Target
System".
Specify the
CPU No. 4.
14 - 22
14.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
● Relay station
Set the parameters so that the network module mounted on the relay station is controlled by the
same programmable controller CPU. (In the figure below, CPU No. 2 is the control CPU.)
● Access target station
Set the CPU number in "Multiple CPU Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen if the access target
station has the multiple CPU system.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No. 4 in the multiple CPU system on
the access target station via a network.
Personal computer
Host station
1
QCPU No. 1
QCPU No. 2
QCPU No. 3
QCPU No. 4
1 Module controlled by the QCPU No. 1
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2 Module controlled by the QCPU No. 2
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2' Module controlled by the QCPU No. 2
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
1
2
3
4
Network number 1
2
3
4
1
The CPU No. 4 ( 4 ) on the access target station is
accessed via the network module 1 by connecting a
cable to the CPU No. 1 ( 1 ). Note that the cable shall
be connected to the programmable controller CPU that
controls the routed network module.
MELSECNET/H
Relay station
1
2
3
4
2
Set the network modules of the relay station to be
controlled by the same control CPU. ( 2 2' )
2'
3
4
2
12
USING LIBRARIES
2
11
13
Network number 2 MELSECNET/H
Access target station
1
10
PRINTING
Set the connection destination setting.
When accessing one of the CPUs No. 1 to 4
on the access target station, change the CPU
number to be accessed in "Multiple CPU
Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
The following explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU in a multiple
CPU system on another station via a network.
9
SEARCH/REPLACE
Accessing the programmable controller CPU via network in multiple CPU
system
SETTING OPTIONS
■
Use modules with function version B or later for all modules on
the host station, relay station, and access target station.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
*1
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
Specify the CPU number.
Section 14.1.1
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
14 - 23
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Access range by network module function versions
To access programmable controller CPUs which are not controlling the network module of the access target station,
use the network module with function version B or later.
14 - 24
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
9
Accessing Redundant CPUs
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Redundant CPU only
This section explains how to access Redundant CPUs.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Connective system
(Access target)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
14.5
Target system
11
PRINTING
Tracking cable
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Specify the system.
Operation
1. Set the settings from "PC side I/F" to "Co-existence Network Route". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Specify the system with "Target System".
Item
Description
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
• When connecting a CPU directly
A programmable controller CPU directly connected to a personal computer
Not Specified
• When routing a module mounted on a main base unit
A programmable controller CPU of the station on which a network module
whose station number is specified for the network communication route is
mounted
• When routing a module mounted on an extension base unit
A programmable controller CPU whose system is set as a control system
A programmable controller CPU whose system is a control system
Standby System
A programmable controller CPU whose system is a standby system
System A
A programmable controller CPU with an A side connector of tracking cable
System B
A programmable controller CPU with a B side connector of tracking cable
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Control System
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
14 - 25
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● "Target System" setting when performing the monitoring function
When performing the monitoring function on a Redundant CPU, set "Not Specified", "System A", or "System B" for
"Target System".
14 - 26
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
The following table shows the applicability of functions according to the "Target System" setting when
accessing a Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module on the extension base unit.
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions ×: Not applicable
Restrictions
Change TC setting
×
×
Online program change
×
×
Read from PLC

×
Write to PLC
×
×
Verify with PLC

×
Redundant Operation


New

×
Delete

×
Disable

×


Arrange PLC memory
×
×
Delete PLC data

×
Read PLC user data

×
Write PLC user data
×
×
Delete PLC user data

×
Export to ROM format
×
×
Monitor mode


Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Monitor (write mode)


Monitoring and verifying SFC programs are
not applicable.
Start monitoring (all windows)


Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Stop monitoring (all windows)


Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Start monitoring


Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Stop monitoring


Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Local device monitoring

×
Monitoring program list

×
Interrupt program list

×
Monitoring condition setting
×
×
SFC all block batch monitoring

×
SFC auto scroll

×
Sampling trace
×
×
Scan time measurement

×
MELSECNET diagnostics

×
Online module change

×
Confirm memory size


12
Clear all file registers function is not
applicable.
13
14
15
Network test, loop test, setting verification test,
station order check test, and communication
test are not applicable.
16
Online mode is not applicable.
PROTECTING
DATA
Clear PLC memory
System switching and change operation mode
functions are not applicable.
SETTING OPTIONS
Password
11
PRINTING
Not specified/
Control system/
Standby system
USING LIBRARIES
System A/
System B
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Function
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Target System
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Considerations for routing intelligent function module on
extension base unit
WRITING/READING
DATA
14.5.1
14.5.1 Considerations for routing intelligent function module on extension base unit
14 - 27
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.5.2
Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant
CPU
When a system switching occurs while accessing a Redundant CPU, the access is continued as
described below.
This function is valid when "Control System" or "Standby System" is set for "Target System" on the
Transfer Setup screen.
When "Control System" is set for "Target System".
CPU1
CPU2
Control system
Standby system
The system is switched.
Connect to control
system via standby
system.
CPU1
CPU2
Standby system
14 - 28
14.5.2 Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU
Control system
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
If a communication error occurs on the route of communication with Redundant CPU, the
communication route is automatically switched to continue the monitoring of the system specified on
the Transfer Setup screen.
When the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the access to the Redundant CPU is continued by
route switching.
1)
Monitoring functions of route switch target
• Ladder program monitoring (including Entry Ladder Monitor function, and monitoring programs
of Zoom editor and inline structured text)*1
• ST program monitoring
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operation when communication error occurs during
monitoring
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14.5.3
11
• Structured Ladder/FBD monitoring
• Local device monitoring*2
PRINTING
• Device/buffer memory batch monitoring*3
• Watch
• Monitoring condition setting*4
• Monitoring stop condition setting*4
• PLC diagnostics
• Monitoring of intelligent function module
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
Operation modes and connection targets in which a route switch can be performed
Connection target
Control system, standby system, system A, system B
14
Communication routes in which a route switch can be performed
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
3)
Operation mode/connection target in which a monitoring can be continued
Backup mode, separate mode
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
–
Operation mode
13
16
PROTECTING
DATA
2)
Not supported by SFC diagram.
When a communication error occurs and the local device monitoring target program is switched, the monitoring
stops.
When a communication error occurs at a timing of display format change, or when a communication error occurs
during scrolling, the monitoring stops.
When a communication error occurs, conditions cannot be registered/canceled.
USING LIBRARIES
• Redundant operation
SETTING OPTIONS
12
• Remote operation
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14 - 29
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
PC side I/F
PLC side I/F
Other Station Setting
Other Station
(Single Network)
Network
Communication Route
Co-existence Network
Route
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
CC IE Field
–
Ethernet
PLC Module
C24
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC-Link
Serial/USB
Other Station
(Single Network)
GOT
Ethernet
CC IE Field
–
Ethernet
–
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Field
C24
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC-Link
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
Head Module
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
C24
Other Station
(Single Network)
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
CC IE Field
–
Ethernet
C24
C24
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
Serial/USB
CC-Link
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC-Link
–
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
CC-Link
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
CC IE Field Master/
Local Module
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC IE Field
–
Head Module
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC IE Field
–
CC IE Field Ethernet Other Station
Adapter
(Single Network)
CC IE Field
–
CC IE Cont NET/ CC IE Cont NET/
10(H) Board
10(H) Module
14 - 30
Ethernet
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
G4 Module
CC-Link Board
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC IE Field
Board
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
C24
NET/10(H) Remote
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
CC-Link Module
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC-Link
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
Other Station
(Single Network)
Network
Communication Route
Co-existence Network
Route
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
–
CC IE Field
–
Ethernet
CPU module
C24
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC-Link
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Other Station
(Single Network)
Ethernet Board
GOT
CC IE Field
–
Ethernet
–
C24
Other Station
(Co-existence Network)
CC-Link
Ethernet Module
Other Station
(Single Network)
CC IE Field Ethernet Other Station
Adapter
(Single Network)
–
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Other Station Setting
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
PLC side I/F
11
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
Ethernet
Ethernet
–
CC IE Field
–
PRINTING
PC side I/F
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14 - 31
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Operation of monitoring functions when a route switch occurs
When the target monitoring functions for route switch and other monitoring functions are mixed in an operation, the
target monitoring functions for route switch continues operation and other monitoring functions stop operation.
● Situations when a route cannot be switched
A route switch which is triggered by a communication error cannot be performed when any of the following situations
occurs at a monitoring start.
• An error occurs on the first communication to the connective system.
• One of the Redundant CPUs is powered OFF or reset.
• A tracking error occurs and a communication cannot be established between the redundant CPUs.
● Messages indicating a system switch request from network module and a tracking cable communication error
detection
If a message indicating a system switch request from network module or a tracking cable communication error
detection is displayed during monitoring, the system may have been switched.
Check the corresponding location by following the instruction described on the message, and remove the error factor of
route switch.
In order to display the above message(s) when communicating via Ethernet, select the following item(s) in the
redundant setting of the Ethernet parameter.
If the item is not selected, the message will not be displayed even when a route switch is performed.
• Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout
• Issue system switch in communication error
14 - 32
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via an
Ethernet board of a personal computer.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU from GX
Works2 via Q series-compatible E71 modules.
For the setting to access FXCPU, refer to the manual of the Ethernet module or the manual of the
setting software.
Network number 1
(192.168.1.2)
Station number 2
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14.6
11
PRINTING
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.2.2)
Station number 2
12
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.1.1)
Station number 1
SETTING OPTIONS
CPU 1
CPU 2
13
USING LIBRARIES
Network number 2
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.2.3)
Station number 3
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14 - 33
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
Item
Description
Set the adapter*1, network number, station number*2, and protocol.
PC side I/F
If there are multiple adapters, make sure that the adapter that is used for communication is
selected. When there is only one adapter, it does not need to be specified.
PLC side I/F
Set the model, station number, IP address and other items for the module to be connected to
the personal computer.
For "Station No.  IP Information", set the method corresponding to the setting for "Station
No.  IP Information" of Ethernet parameter.
Network Communication
Route
Set the network number and station number of the access target station.
*1 :
When an adapter name is not displayed on the pull-down list of "Adapter", check the following:
• Is the Ethernet adapter enabled?
• Is the Ethernet cable connected to an Ethernet adapter properly?
*2 :
Set the station number avoiding the same station number already assigned to the existing system or another
Ethernet module.
● Connecting MELSOFT products (such as GX Works2)
When connecting a MELSOFT product (such as GX Works2) using TCP/IP connection, select "MELSOFT Connection"
for "Open System" on the network parameter. In case connecting to multiple MELSOFT products, set the number of
connections to be connected.
For UDP/IP connection, the connection for MELSOFT products is not necessary to be added.
For details of settings, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
'MELSOFT Connection' is supported by Q series-compatible E71 function version B modules with a serial number
whose first five digits are '02122' or higher.
● Multiple network systems
For a multiple network system, routing parameters must be set.
MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 34
14.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a G4
module.
For details of AJ65BT-R2N, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU via
AJ65BT-G4-S3 module from GX Works2.
Data link must be correctly established by setting the switch settings and parameters for the AJ65BTG4-S3 module and the CC-Link master module.
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14.7
11
QJ61BT11N
Station number 0
PRINTING
AJ65BT-G4-S3
Station number 1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Description
PC side I/F
Set the COM port and transmission speed.
PLC side I/F
Set the model of the G4 module to be connected.
Other Station Setting
Set "Other Station (Single Network)".
Network Communication
Route
Set the station number of the access target station.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Item
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
14 - 35
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.8
Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU on host
station or on another station via a C24 module.
14.8.1
Connection on a 1:1 basis
The following shows a setting example when accessing a programmable controller CPU by connecting
a personal computer and a Q series C24 module.
Q series C24 module
For connection on a 1:1 basis, the accessing or monitoring can be performed without setting the switch
setting.
For details of the switch settings, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example on a screen when accessing a programmable controller
CPU from GX Works2 via a C24 module.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
14 - 36
14.8.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
9
PC side I/F
Set the COM port and transmission speed.
PLC side I/F*1
Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be
connected.
Other Station Setting
Set "No Specification".
14.8.2
If a number other than '0' is set in the station number setting of the C24 module, set the same
number for its station number.
The station number setting can be set in "Switch 5" (station number setting) in the switch setting of
the PLC parameter.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
*1 :
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Description
Connection on a 1:n basis
Access the programmable controller CPU in another station from GX Works2 in a system composed of
multiple programmable controller CPU stations.
■
Access via a serial communication module
Station number 0
12
SETTING OPTIONS
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another
station via Q series C24 modules.
11
PRINTING
Item
Station number 1
USING LIBRARIES
13
The following table shows an example of switch settings of the I/O assignment setting.
For details of the switch settings, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
● Station number 0
14
Setting
CH1 transmission setting
Switch 2
-
CH1 communications protocol
0008H
Switch 3
CH2 communication speed
CH2 transmission setting
07E7H
Switch 4
-
CH2 communications protocol
0000H
Switch 5
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Description
CH1 communication speed
07E6H
Module station number
0000H
Description
Setting
15
● Station number 1
Item
Switch 1
CH1 communication speed
CH1 transmission setting
Switch 2
-
CH1 communications protocol
Set according to the
application on CH1 side.
Switch 3
CH2 communication speed
CH2 transmission setting
07E6H
Switch 4
-
CH2 communications protocol
0005H
Module station number
16
0001H
PROTECTING
DATA
Switch 5
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
Switch 1
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14 - 37
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Detailed description of settings
Item
Operation Setting
Description
Station number 0
Linked operation
Station number 1
Independent operation
Data bit setting
8
Parity bit yes/no setting
Yes
Odd/even parity bit
Odd
Stop bit setting
1
Sum check yes/no setting
Yes
Online change enable/disable setting
Enable
Setting change enable/disable setting
Disable
Transmission speed setting
Communications protocol
19200bps
Station number 0
GX Developer connection
Station number 1
CH1: Set to meet the application
CH2: MC protocol format 5
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing C24 modules from GX Works2.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
Item
14 - 38
Description
PC side I/F
Set the COM port and transmission speed.
PLC side I/F
Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be connected.
Other Station Setting
Set "Other Station (Single Network)".
Network Communication Route
Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX Works2 and the
station number of access target.
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
Station number 0
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another
station via Q series C24 modules by directly connecting the personal computer to the programmable
controller CPU.
A programmable controller CPU on another station can be accessed only with CH2 of a Q series C24
module.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Direct connection of a programmable controller CPU
Station number 1
11
Operation
• Set the connection destination setting.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing a programmable controller
CPU from GX Works2 via C24 modules.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
PRINTING
■
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Item
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
Description
Set the interface of the personal computer. (Section 14.1.1)
PLC side I/F
Select the series of the programmable controller CPU to be connected.
Other Station Setting
Set "Other Station (Single Network)".
Network Communication Route
Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX Works2 and the
station number of access target.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
PC side I/F
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14 - 39
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9
Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2 via GOT
using the GOT transparent function.
● Considerations on executing online operations from GX Works2
Do not execute online operations from GT Designer2 to GOT (such as downloading project data) when online
operations are being executed from GX Works2 to the programmable controller CPU using the GOT transparent
function.
● When GOT does not monitor normally
The GOT transparent function cannot be used in the following cases.
• When GOT does not monitor normally due to programmable controller CPU errors or communication errors between
the programmable controller CPU and GOT
• During the period of time between turning ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU or GOT and the start of
GOT monitoring
Check the following items if GOT does not monitor normally.
Item
14 - 40
Description
Does the programmable controller CPU
operates normally?
Refer to the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU used.
Is the programmable controller CPU
connected to GOT normally?
Refer to the connection manual of the GOT mentioned in each section.
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Access the programmable controller CPU via GOT.
Personal computer (GX Works2)
10
Programmable controller CPU
SEARCH/REPLACE
GOT
The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
11
GOT*1
GOT1000 series
GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series




USB connection


–
–
Ethernet connection


–
–
PRINTING
GOT2000 series
RS-232 connection
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the
manual of the GOT connected.
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
• GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Connection System
Manual)
• GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
• GOT-F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE Manual [Connection]
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
SETTING OPTIONS
14.9.1
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14 - 41
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
■
Connecting personal computer and GOT with RS-232 or USB
The following shows the settings for connecting a personal computer and a GOT with RS-232 or USB.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. For QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, double-click "GOT" on
"PLC side I/F".
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >
< FXCPU >
For CPUs other than FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F". The
screen will not be displayed in this situation.
3. For QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, set the following setting
on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
Item
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Description
Select "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"
Select "QCPU (Q mode)", "LCPU", or "FXCPU" for "PLC Mode".
Setup
Setting method
Description
Bus connection
Select "via GOT (Bus) transparent mode". (For QCPU (Q mode)
only)
Direct
connection
Select "via GOT (direct connection) transparent mode".
Ethernet
connection
GOT-F900
Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode", and set the GOT
(Ethernet) transparent setting from the
button.
Select "via GOT-F900 transparent mode". Note that if the detailed
setting for PC side I/F is USB, this item cannot be selected.
(FXCPU only)
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
● Connecting modules via Ethernet adapter module (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Modules can be connected via Ethernet adapter module using an Ethernet adapter module with the GOT (Ethernet)
transparent function.
• Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode" in the detailed setting and select "NZ2GF-ETB" in the field next to the
button.
14 - 42
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
The following shows the settings for connecting a personal computer and a GOT with Ethernet.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Connecting personal computer and GOT with Ethernet
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet
connection between personal computer and GOT>
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Item
Description
Ethernet Detail setting for PC
and GOT connection
Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet
connection between a personal computer and a GOT.
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Select "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"
Setup
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Set the following setting according to the setting method between a GOT and a
programmable controller CPU.
For details, refer to "■ Connecting personal computer and GOT with RS-232 or
USB".
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
For FXCPU, only "No Specification" can be set. (Section 14.1.1)
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
■
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14 - 43
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.2
Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial
communication module
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU
via a GOT and a serial communication module.
Programmable controller CPU Serial communication module
Personal computer (GX Works2)
GOT
*1
*1 :
*2
The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Applicable, -: Not connectable
Connection
*2 :
GOT
GOT2000 series
GOT1000 series
GOT-A900 series
RS-232 connection
–

–
–
USB connection


–
–
Ethernet connection


–
–
For details of cables connecting GOT with the serial communication module, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the
manual of the GOT to be connected.
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 series Connection Manual
14 - 44
GOT-F900 series
14.9.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
9
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using
the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Description
Ethernet Detail setting for PC
and GOT connection
Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet
connection between a personal computer and a GOT.
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Select "C24".
15
Select "QJ71C24", "QJ71CMO", or "LJ71C24" for "Module Name".
WRITING/READING
DATA
Setup
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.9.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module
14 - 45
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.3
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE
Controller Network
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU
via a GOT and a CC-Link IE Controller Network module.
CC-Link IE Controller
Network module
Programmable controller CPU
Personal computer (GX Works2)
GOT
*2
*1
*1 :
The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT
GOT2000 series
GOT1000 series
GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
–

–
–
RS-232 connection
*2 :
USB connection


–
–
Ethernet connection


–
–
For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual
of the GOT connected.
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
14 - 46
14.9.3 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode).
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using
the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Description
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Select "CC IE Cont".
CPU Mode
Select the programmable controller CPU to be connected.
Relay Network
No.
Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module to be relayed.
Relay Station No.
Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module to be relayed.
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
■
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.9.3 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network
14 - 47
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.4
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE
Field Network
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU
via a GOT and a CC-Link IE Field Network module.
Programmable controller CPU
Personal computer (GX Works2)
CC-Link IE Field
Network module
GOT
*2
*1
*1 :
The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT2000 series
GOT1000 series
GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
–
–
–
–
USB connection

–
–
–
Ethernet connection

–
–
–
RS-232 connection
*2 :
GOT
For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual
of the GOT connected.
• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
14 - 48
14.9.4 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
9
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode).
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using
the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Item
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Description
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Select "CC IE Field".
Select the programmable controller CPU to be connected.
Relay Network
No.
Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Field Network module to be relayed.
Relay Station No.
Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Field Network module to be relayed.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
CPU Mode
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.9.4 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network
14 - 49
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains how to set functions to access a programmable controller CPU via phone line,
and how to connect/disconnect the line.
Modems described in the system configuration below include an external type, built-in PC modem, PC
card modem (PIMCIA), and TA (terminal adapter).
■
When accessing a serial communication module from a personal computer
QCPU (Q mode)
/LCPU
Modem
Serial communication
module * 1
Modem
Public line
*1 :
Only modules with RS-232C interface can be used.
Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Line Connection] to access the serial
communication module from the personal computer.
For details of setting items on the Line Connection screen, refer to the following section.
Section 14.10.2 "■ Connecting a line automatically"
The setting of the modem function of serial communication module can be set with the parameter
setting of intelligent function module.
For details of the modem function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
1)
Switch settings of serial communication module
Transmission
setting
Item
Description
Operation setting
Independent
Data bit
8
Parity bit
None
Even/odd parity
Odd
Stop bit
1
Sum check code
Exist
Online change
Enable
Setting modifications
Communication rate (transmission speed) setting
Communication protocol (mode setting)
14 - 50
Disable/Enable
According to modem specification
5
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Setting
2EH (46)
Modem connection channel
specification
0: None
1: CH1
2: CH2
34H (52)*1
Data number for initialization
specification
0H: Specified initialization data send in user
registration frame area for transmission
From 7D0H: Data number for initialization
36H (54)
MELSOFT connection
specification
0: Not connected
1: Connected
*1 :
The following initialization data are registered as a factory setting for serial communication module.
Q/L series C24: 7D0H (2000) to 7DDH (2013)
If a modem to be used is registered to the initialization data, specify the registration number.
When using an unregistered modem, a user can register initialization data to the following registration numbers.
· 9C4H (2500) to 9E1H (2529)
· 8001H (-32767) to 801FH (-32737)
When accessing an FXCPU from a personal computer
*1
FXCPU
Modem
Modem
12
13
Public line
For the combinations of an FXCPU and a function expansion board (special adapter), refer to the Section 2.1.10.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
11
SETTING OPTIONS
Access an FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC through a modem
with a phone line, and remotely-operate the functions such as monitoring, testing, and writing/reading
programs.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Name
PRINTING
Buffer memory address
■
9
Initial settings for buffer memories
The initial settings are required for the following buffer memories.
USING LIBRARIES
2)
14 - 51
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
1)
Operation flow
Operating procedure on programmable
controller CPU side
Operating procedure on GX Works2 side
Start
Start
Open the sequence program to be written
to the programmable controller CPU which
is accessed remotely.
Set the PLC parameter settings and the
type of the modem to be connected to the
programmable controller CPU.
Write the set parameters and the program
to the FXCPU.
Turn OFF the power of the programmable
controller CPU.
Connect the programmable controller CPU
and the modem, and connect the modem
and the phone line.
Turn ON the power of the programmable
controller CPU.
(A modem initialization command is
automatically sent.)
The programmable controller CPU (modem)
becomes in a standby status as it waits for
data transmission.
*1 :
Section 14.10.2
*2 :
Section 14.10.1
Start GX Works2.
Set the type of the modem to be connected
to the personal computer.
*1
Register the data to the telephone directory.
*2
Set the modem on the personal computer
side.
*1
Connect the phone line.
*1
Perform the operation such as monitoring
in GX Works2.
Disconnect the phone line.
*1
End
● Power supply procedure
Power should be supplied to the modem first, then to the programmable controller CPU.
If the programmable controller CPU is turned ON before the modem, the initialization command which is sent to the
modem at the power ON of programmable controller CPU is invalidated, and a communication error occurs when
operating the system remotely.
Furthermore, if only the modem is turned OFF after the power supply, the initialization command is cleared and the
same communication error occurs.
14 - 52
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
9
Setting PLC parameters
Set the PLC parameters which are required to access an FXCPU through the phone line.
< <<PLC System (1) >> tab >
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
2)
< <<PLC System (2) >> tab >
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Channel selection
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON
(ME3314B)".
The following are the communication specifications for this mode.
SETTING OPTIONS
• Data length: 7 bits
• Parity: EVEN
• Stop bit: 1 bit
AIWA (PV-AF288)
Select this when using "AIWA (PV-AF288)".
OMRON (ME3314B)*1
Select this when using "OMRON (ME3314B)".
PP Modem Mode (CH1)
Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON
(ME3314B)", or when using a modem which cannot set the communication
specification for the user registration mode.
For details, refer to Point in this section.
This item can be set for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Note that only PP Modem Mode (CH1) is supported by FX3S.
The following are the communication specifications for this mode.
PP Modem Mode (CH2)
• Start bit: 1 bit
• Data length: 8 bits
• Stop bit: 1 bit
-
Channel selection
Specify the channel of programmable controller side to communicate with a
personal computer.
This item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Note that only CH1 is supported by FX3S.
Operate Communication Setting
Clear this item when setting the programmable controller CPU which is operated
remotely.
When selecting OMRON (ME3314B) for FX2N, use the module with the version 2.01 or later (manufacturing number
78**** or later).
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
13
14
• Parity: None
<<PLC System (2)>>
12
USING LIBRARIES
User Register Mode
• Start bit: 1 bit
PRINTING
Set the initialization command of the modem on the programmable controller side,
which is used for the remote access of the programmable controller CPU.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
MODEM Initialized
Description
WRITING/READING
DATA
<<PLC System (1)>>
11
14 - 53
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Setting PP modem mode (CH1) and PP modem mode (CH2)
• <FX3U/FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) series>
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify "PP
Modem Mode (CH1)".
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, specify "PP Modem Mode
(CH2)".
• <FX3UC (D, DS, DSS)/FX3GC series>
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) or FX3GC series, specify
"PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
When using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)".
• <FX3G series (14-/24-point type)>
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
• <FX3G series (40-/60-point type)>
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode
(CH1)" for FX3U-232ADP, and specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" for FX3G-232-BD.
● Considerations for creating sequence programs
To perform a remote access, the special data register D8120 (communication format) of the programmable controller
CPU needs to be "0".
D8120 can be cleared to 0 by clearing "Operate Communication Setting" on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab.
Note that if a value other than "0" is specified for D8120 in the sequence program, the remote access cannot be
performed.
Create a sequence program without specifying a specific value for D8120.
14 - 54
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
• D1000 to D1059 (For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC)
• D200 to D255 (For FX1S, FX3S)
Write a user-registered modem initialization command to above data register in advance using
the Modify Value function or a sequence program.
ASCII
Hexadecimal
D1000
A
41
D1013
&
26
D1001
T
54
D1014
M
4D
D1002
E
45
D1015
4
34
D1003
0
30
D1016
\
5C
D1004
S
53
D1017
Q
51
D1005
0
30
D1018
0
30
D1006
=
3D
D1019
\
5C
D1007
2
32
D1020
J
4A
D1008
Q
51
D1021
0
30
D1009
1
31
D1022
&
26
D1010
&
26
D1023
W
57
D1011
D
44
D1024
CR
0D
D1012
0
30
D1025
LF
0A
PRINTING
Register No.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Hexadecimal
13
A user-registered initialization command ends the transmission at the point when "0" is read.
As a precaution, create a sequence program in which the input area of initialization command for
modem and the data register area used by the general sequence program do not overlap.
USING LIBRARIES
ASCII
10
11
Example) When the initialization command is "ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M4\Q0\J0&W"
Register No.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
• Register AT commands to programmable controller CPU
Send the following data register data to the modem as a modem initialization command following
the "AT&F" (initialization to the factory setting) command when the programmable controller
CPU is turned ON.
9
SEARCH/REPLACE
Setting AT commands
When "User Register Mode", "PP Modem Mode (CH1)", or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected
for "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab, set AT commands according to the
following operations.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
3)
14 - 55
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
• Setting content of registered modem
The following table shows the setting items of AT command for the modem registered to the
programmable controller CPU in advance.
The setting items differ according to the modem to be used. For details of the actual setting
items, refer to the manual of the modem.
AIWA (PV-AF288)
ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M5\Q0\JO&W
OMRON (ME3314B)
ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&H0&R1S15=8&W
Command echo setting
E0 (None)
E0 (None)
Number of automatic
incoming calls
S0=2 (Twice)
S0=2 (Twice)
Result code display
Q1 (None)
Q1 (None)
Setting item
DTR control
■
&D0 (Always ON)
&D0 (Always ON)
Communication mode
&M5 (V.42bis)
S15=8 (V.42bis)
Terminal flow control
\Q0 (None)
&R1 (None)
Transmission data flow
control
–
&H0 (None)
Terminal speed fixed mode
\JO (Fixed)
–
Write to non-volatile memory
&W
&W
Modem specifications
Select a modem which satisfies the following specifications.
Communication data can be transferred from a built-in modem personal computer or a PC card modem
(PCMCIA) used by connecting it to a personal computer.
1)
When using a subscriber/in-plant phone line
• AT commands are supported. (Initialization command)
• DR terminal can be turned ON (High) independently.
(Example: A modem, whose CD terminal turns ON as the DR terminal turns ON, cannot be
used.)
• Communication standard
• ITU-T V.90/V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21/V.FC
• Bell 212A/103
2)
Manual line connection (when connecting a line through an operator)
• Addition to the above specification 1), "ANS mode" and "ORG mode" can be switched.
(The above mode switches are available on the specific AIWA modem.)
The communication may not be established with the above specification depending on a line
condition.
● Performing communication using a PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA)
The COM port setting is required on the Transfer Setup screen to perform communication using a PC internal modem
or PC card (PCMCIA). For the COM port number for the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA), refer to the manual
of the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA).
● Performing communication via a modem
When performing communication from GX Works2 via a modem, the standard AT commands cannot be used for some
specific modems. If a line cannot be connected by selecting standard AT commands, a user needs to specify the AT
commands.
For details of specifying AT commands, refer to the following section.
Section 14.10.2 "■ Connecting a line automatically"
14 - 56
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Use an RS-232 cable included in a modem package, or a specified cable to connect a personal
computer and a modem.
Since the connectors may differ depending on a personal computer, check the specification of the
connector when purchasing a modem.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Connection cables
Restrictions on phone line
1)
Do not use a line with the call-waiting feature enabled.
Data may be corrupted or the line is disconnected by the incoming call when the line is enabled
with the call-waiting feature.
2)
Do not use an extension phone.
The phone line may be disconnected when the receiver is picked up during the phone line
connection.
3)
An analog two-wire circuit can be used for the phone line.
For a digital line, the line can be connected by using a TA (terminal adapter).
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
■
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
● Phone line with a four-wire circuit
A phone line with a four-wire circuit may not be used depending on the modular connector type.
For a phone line with a four-wire circuit, perform a connection test in advance.
Modems for wireless communication using a cellular phone
Select a model according to the cellular phone to be used.
For details, contact the company of the cellular phone to be used.
5)
Coexistence with other applications when performing modem communication
When performing modem communication, applications such as GX Works2 and MX Component
cannot perform modem communication simultaneously.
When performing modem communication in GX Works2, set the other applications not to perform
modem communication.
If modem communication is performed simultaneously with GX Works2 and other applications, a
phenomenon such as a communication error and a line disconnection occurs.
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
4)
USING LIBRARIES
■
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14 - 57
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10.1
Setting TEL data
A personal computer can be connected with a programmable controller CPU using a phone line.
Use a serial communication module for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and use a function expansion board
(special adapter) for FXCPU, to perform communication using a phone line.
● Managing telephone directory and AT commands
The registered telephone directory and AT commands are managed under each user of Windows® operating system.
The telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user cannot be used even when the same personal
computer is used.
To use the telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user, use the import/export function.
■
Creating a telephone directory
Register phone numbers.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Phone Book].
List of registered
phone numbers
Display contents
Item
14 - 58
Description
List of registered phone numbers
Display group names and user names of phone numbers.
Details
Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered phone
numbers.
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
1. Select a group for which the phone number to be registered on the list of registered
phone numbers.
2. Click the
button.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed.
PRINTING
11
12
Description
Group Name
Display the group name to which the information is registered.
Destination Name
Enter the name of the phone number to be set.
The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
Phone Number
Enter the phone number.
The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
Outside Line Number
Set the outside line number.
The maximum number of characters that can be set is 10.
For only Line Connection
When a password is set for Q/L series-compatible C24, this setting
enables to process the password authorization automatically to
connect the line.
USING LIBRARIES
Item
SETTING OPTIONS
3. Set the items on the screen.
Comments
Enter notes on the registered information.
The maximum number of characters that can be set is 60.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
4. Click the
13
button.
The phone number is registered.
Screen button
Creates a new group.
The Group Setting screen is displayed by clicking the
The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
button. Enter a group name.
●
Opens the screen to edit the registered data.
Select a registered data to be edited on the list of registered phone numbers.
16
button. Edit the data.
PROTECTING
DATA
The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed by clicking the
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
●
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 59
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
●
Copies a registered phone number to another group.
Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group to which data is copied, and click the
button.
button.
●
Moves a registered phone number to another group.
Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group to which data is moved, and click the
button.
button.
●
Deletes a registered group and phone number.
Data cannot be batch deleted in group unit.
●
Deletes all registered groups and phone numbers.
●
Searches for a registered phone number. The search condition is a partial match.
Target data is searched from all registered data.
When entering search conditions to both "Destination Name" and "Phone Number", the data which
satisfies the both search conditions is searched.
●
Performs a selection processing of phone number setting when referring from the Line Connection
screen.
●
Imports phone number data from the specified file and adds it to the directory.
Execute the file import after deleting all groups and phone numbers to replace the data with the
imported phone number data.
●
Writes the data set on the Phone Book screen to the specified file.
14 - 60
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
9
Registering AT commands
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
Register AT commands.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [AT Command Registration].
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
PRINTING
List of registered
AT commands
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Display contents
Description
Display titles of AT commands.
Details
Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered AT
commands.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Item
List of registered AT commands
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 61
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
1. Select "MELSOFT Application Side Connection Modem" or "TEL Side Connection
Modem" on the list of registered AT commands.
2. Click the
button.
The AT Command Registration screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Group Name
Display the group name of data to which AT command is registered.
Title
Enter a title for the AT command to be registered.
AT Command
Set the command for modem initialization.
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII
code.
4. Click the
button.
The AT command is registered.
14 - 62
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Screen button
●
Opens the screen to edit the registered data.
Select the registered data to be edited on the list of registered AT commands.
The AT Command Registration screen is displayed by clicking the
Edit the data.
button.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
●
Copies a registered AT command to another group.
Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered AT commands.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group (to which data is copied), and click the
button.
button.
PRINTING
11
●
12
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group (to which data is moved), and click the
SETTING OPTIONS
Moves a registered AT command to another group.
Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered AT commands.
button.
button.
●
Deletes a registered AT command.
●
Performs a selection processing of AT command when referring from the Line Connection screen.
●
Imports AT command from the specified file and adds it to the directory.
Execute the file import after deleting all AT commands to replace the commands with the imported
commands.
●
Writes data set on the AT Command Registration screen to the specified file.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Deletes all registered AT commands.
USING LIBRARIES
13
●
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 63
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10.2
Connecting/disconnecting line
Connect/disconnect a line.
■
Connecting a line automatically
Connect a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU (with the following method: automatic/
callback/manual) for remote access.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Line Connection].
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >
< FXCPU >
Display contents
Item
Connect
14 - 64
Description
Display a line connection status.
The device which is being accessed is displayed flashing.
Devices will be displayed after the connection is established successfully.
When an error occurs during the connection attempt, the failed location is displayed with
displayed in gray.
Check the failed location with a displayed message regarding the cause of the failure.
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
, and devices are
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Item
Description
Connection Method
Select a method: Automatic, Callback, or Manual (connecting a line through an operator).
The phone number is set when specifying a phone number of the callback target.
For a connection using the callback function, refer to "■ Connecting a line using the
callback function".
For a manual connection, refer to "■ Connecting a line through an operator (manual
connection)".
Line
–
Line Type
Select a line type: Tone, Pulse, or ISDN.
Outside Line Number
Set the number as necessary when calling through the outside line.
Port
Select the COM port number which is connected to the modem.
Connection Destination
Set the phone number of the target.
The previously-registered phone numbers in the telephone directory can be specified by
AT Command
–
button.
Record the logging data
Line connected time, line disconnected time, connection duration, destination, target phone
number, callback, error status, or normal connection can be checked in log files.
The log file at the line connection is saved in the following log file.
<Save location>
User folder\AppData\Roaming\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log
<Log file name>
year, month, day.dat (Example: 110615.dat)
User mode (8bits NP)
This item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Select this when "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected in the
PLC parameter.
Do not select this item when the setting other than "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP
Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected.
2. Click the
button.
When the line was not connected, perform the modem initialization.
For the considerations for connecting a line using the callback function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
Screen button
●
Stops the line connection.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
AT Command Setting
When a difficulty of line connection arises using the standard AT command, create an AT
command with reference to the manual of the modem and the content displayed by clicking
13
USING LIBRARIES
Use the AT command set on the modem.
PRINTING
button.
Modem standard
the
11
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
clicking the
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
1. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
●
Displays the Options screen. (Section 14.10.3)
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 65
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
●
Performs a modem initialization when the modem did not respond at the line connection.
The following confirmation message is displayed by clicking the
button.
A modem initialization starts by clicking the
button. "AT&F" is set as a default command
for the modem initialization.
The command for the modem initialization can be changed by "Modem Initialization AT Command"
under [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Options].
Change the initialization command according to the modem used.
When a failure occurs to the modem initialization, the Options screen is displayed.
Only the settings of items which may become a problem at the line connection can be changed.
For details of the Options screen, refer to Section 14.10.3.
● Phone line connection
The phone line connection can also be performed on the Transfer Setup screen.
● When the line is disconnected by disturbance
If the line is disconnected by disturbance during the line connection, a confirmation message will be displayed to select
whether to reconnect or disconnect the line.
● Connection duration
The connection duration is displayed on the status bar when the line is connected.
● When the connection destination is changed during the phone line connection
Even when the connection destination is changed to another COM port or a communication board (such as
MELSECNET/10) on the Transfer Setup screen during the phone line connection, the communication can be
performed using the communication routes while the phone line is being connected.
● When two or more error messages are displayed
Two or more communication error messages are displayed when the modem is turned OFF during the phone line
connection. In this case, set a longer time check period for "Other Station Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen.
● Using a serial communication module to communicate through a phone line
The following table shows the items to be set on a programmable controller CPU and GX Works2 when performing
communication using a serial communication module (for Q/L series) through a phone line.
Setting target
Setting item
Reference
• Switch setting
Programmable controller
CPU
Set the following items in the sequence program.
• Write the initialization command (ATS0=1).
Section 14.10
• Set the initialization request.
GX Works2
14 - 66
• AT command registration
• Phone number registration
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
Section 14.10.1
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
The callback function is a function which enables access from GX Works2 to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
with the line re-connection (callback) operation performed on the Q/L series C24 module side, after the
line connection operation is performed in GX Works2.
The callback function is not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Connecting a line using the callback function
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
For 1 to 3, and 9, telephone usage is charged on a personal computer side.
For 4 to 8, telephone usage is charged on a Q/L series C24 module side.
For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
2)
Automatic (Callback Fixation)
Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series
C24 module.
A connection operation can be performed on a personal computer whose phone number is
registered to the buffer memory (2101H).
3)
Automatic (Callback Number Specification)
Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series
C24 module.
A connection operation can be performed on a specific personal computer.
11
PRINTING
Automatic
Select "Automatic" when the callback function is not set on a Q/L series C24 module.
12
4)
Callback Connect (Fixation)
A callback operation is performed on a personal computer whose phone number is registered to
the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L series C24 module.
5)
Callback Connect (Number Specification)
A callback operation is performed on a specified personal computer.
6)
Callback Request (Fixation)
Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a callback operation on
a personal computer whose phone number is registered to the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L
series C24 module. (A callback operation is not performed on the personal computer which is
connected first.)
USING LIBRARIES
1)
SETTING OPTIONS
■
7)
Callback Request (Number Specification)
Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a call back operation on
a specified personal computer. (A callback operation is not performed on GX Works2 which is
connected first.)
14
8)
Callback Reception Waiting
When connecting a line with Callback Request (Fixation or Number Specification), select "Callback
Reception Waiting" for the personal computer on which a callback is to be performed.
9)
Manual
This setting is not for the callback function.
Select this item when connecting a line through an operator.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
13
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 67
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
A line connection with the GX Works2 connection method described in the following table can be
performed when "Callback function specification" is set for the modem function of the intelligent
function module parameter of a Q/L series C24 module.
The following table shows the setting items of "Callback function specification" of the modem function
and corresponding setting items of GX Works2 connection method.
: Connectable
Connection method on GX Works2 side
Q/L series C24 side
callback function specification
1)
Auto
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)


Setting 1: Auto/Callback Connection (at Fixation)

Setting 2: Auto/Callback Connection (at Number Specified)

Setting 3: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)
9)







Setting 4: Callback Connection (at Fixation)

Setting 5: Callback Connection (at Number Specified)

Setting 6: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)















The following is an example of line connection with "Callback Request (Number Specification)".
:
:
Connect from the personal computer with phone number .
Connect to the personal computer with phone number .
Public line
Set one of the following: Setting 2,
Setting 3, Setting 5, or Setting 6, for
the callback function specification.
Modem
Phone number
Set "Callback Request
(Number Specification)" on
the Line Connection screen.
Modem
Set "Callback Reception Waiting"
on the Line Connection screen. Phone number
Set "ATS0=1" for the modem
initialization command.
14 - 68
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
■
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Connecting a line through an operator (manual connection)
Connect to the in-plant phone line through an operator.
A manual line connection cannot be performed on modems without the ANS/ORG/TEL switch.
● System configuration
Phone 1
Phone 3
10
Programmable controller
SEARCH/REPLACE
Phone 2
(Operator)
Phone line
Peripheral device
Modem 1
C24
Modem 2
11
1. Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Line Connection].
(Select "Manual" for the line connection method on the Line Connection screen. For details of
operating procedure, refer to "■ Connecting a line automatically".)
2. Set the mode on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side to the ORG mode, and Modem 2 on Phone 3
Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected through Phone 2 (operator).
While Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected, connect C24.
Turn ON the DATA switch on Modem 2 on Phone 3 side.
After the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is confirmed, turn the DATA switch
ON.
8. When the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is faded, click the
button in GX Works2.
When the line is connected normally, the message "Line connected" is displayed.
● Considerations
• If the connection cannot be established in step 6 and step 7, repeat the operations and adjust the
timing.
• The ANS - ORG switch is required on the modem to connect a line manually.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Call Phone 2 (operator) from Phone 1.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
side to the ANS mode.
PRINTING
Operation
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 69
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
■
Disconnecting a line
Disconnect a phone line being connected.
Operating procedure
• Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Line Disconnection].
14 - 70
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
9
Setting options
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
14.10.3
Set options for a line connection.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Tool]  [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem]  [Options].
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Line Connection CD Signal Wait Time
Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn ON within the
set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be
connected.
Line Connection Modem Report Wait
Time
Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.
Line Disconnection CD Signal Wait
Time
Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn OFF within the
set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be
connected.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Description
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Line Disconnection Delay Time
Data Transmission Delay Time
Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.
AT Command Response Wait Time
Password Cancellation Response Wait
Extend the set period when the quality of line connection is poor.
Time
Line Callback Cancel Wait Time
Extend the set period when the line of the target (Q/L series C24) is not
disconnected within the set period depending on the area (example:
overseas) to be connected.
Callback Delay Time
Extend the set period when a specific period is required for the device
which relays a connection (example: modem) between the line
disconnection and the reconnection.
Modem Initialization AT Command
Set a command at the modem initialization.
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII
code.
Communication Initialization Time-out
period
Set the timeout period at the communication initialization.
14.10.3 Setting options
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Increase the number of settings.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
AT Command/Password Cancellation
Retry Times
14 - 71
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains the considerations of communication with the programmable controller CPU.
Refer to POINT and Restrictions described in each section as well as the descriptions in this section.
■
Considerations of communication via multiple network systems
When accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU via multiple network systems, connected station*1 and relay
stations*2 must be QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU or RCPU.
*1 :
*2 :
Station directly connected from GX Works2
Stations to be routed on network system
When accessing a programmable controller CPU to which remote password is set via RCPU, the
remote password cannot be cleared from GX Works2. Delete the password using the MELSOFT
product supported by RCPU.
■
Considerations of communication with the programmable controller CPU
using a USB cable
1)
Connecting and disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU,
and turning the power ON/OFF
A communication error may occur and operation may not be recovered if connecting and
disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU, or turning the power ON/
OFF is performed frequently during communication with the programmable controller CPU.
Be sure to set GX Works2 to offline*1 as much as possible during these operations.
When operation is not recovered from an error, remove the USB cable. Then, connect it again after
five or more seconds. (Even after this operation, an error may occur at initial communication.
However, communication will be successful after that.)
*1 :
2)
14 - 72
The offline indicates the status other than indicated below.
• Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Monitor, and PLC diagnostics
Combination of personal computers and USB cables
A communication error may occur depending on the combination of personal computers and USB
cables.
If an error occurs, take appropriate actions according to the message displayed on the screen.
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
High-speed communication using an RS-232 cable
Communication may fail depending on the performance of the personal computer when highspeed communication is attempted by changing the transmission speed at the serial port of the
personal computer (personal computer side interface). Communication speed may also slow down
due to communication retries. Decrease the transmission speed if high-speed communication is
not performed normally.
Resume function, suspend setting, power saving function, and standby mode of the
personal computer
A communication error may occur during communication with the programmable controller CPU
when the resume function, suspend function, power saving function, or standby mode is set to the
personal computer. Disable these settings for communication with the programmable controller
CPU.
3)
Switching the connection to GX Works2 during communication through the serial
communication function
When using Q00, Q01, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, or QnUD(H)CPU, the connection can be
switched to GX Works2 during communication to a personal computer, indicator, etc. through the
serial communication function.
If unable to connect to GX Works2, adjust the transmission speed to that specified on the <<Serial
Communication>> tab of PLC parameter.
<PC side I/F Serial Setting screen>
13
Select the same transmission speed.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Disconnecting Ethernet cable while communicate with Ethernet board
If disconnecting the Ethernet cable and connecting it to other personal computer, a communication
error occurs. This communication error may not be recovered without resetting the programmable
controller CPU.
Disconnect/connect an Ethernet cable after stopping the online functions such as monitoring, or
end GX Works2 once.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
4)
12
USING LIBRARIES
<PLC parameter setting screen>
11
SETTING OPTIONS
2)
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
1)
PRINTING
Other considerations
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
■
14 - 73
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
MEMO
14 - 74
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
WRITING/READING DATA 10
This chapter explains operations to write or read data to/from the programmable controller CPU or a
memory card.
SEARCH/REPLACE
15
PRINTING
11
15 - 2
Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU
against Data on Personal Computer
15 - 29
15.3
Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
15 - 34
13
15.4
Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
15 - 35
15.5
Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
15 - 36
15.6
Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
15 - 38
15.7
Latch Data Backup
15 - 40
15.8
Backing up/Restoring Data
15 - 42
15.9
Online Program Change
15 - 45
15.10
Calculating Memory Size
15 - 66
15.11
Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15 - 73
15.12
Reading Data of Local Devices
15 - 79
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
15.2
16
PROTECTING
DATA
15.1
USING LIBRARIES
Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable
Controller CPU
SETTING OPTIONS
12
15 - 1
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1
Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
This function writes project data to the programmable controller CPU or a memory card, or reads data
from the programmable controller CPU or a memory card to the project.
Data for intelligent function module also can be written/read. (Section 15.1.4)
For reading data from a programmable controller CPU without a project being opened, refer to '■
Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or intelligent function
module (New project creation with data read from programmable controller CPU)'.
For FXCPU projects with labels, created project data can be read from FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or
later only.
To boot QCPU (Q mode) using a standard ROM or Flash card, it is recommended to firstly write
necessary data to the program memory using the Write to PLC function and then write the data to the
standard ROM or Flash card using the Export to ROM Format function. (Section 15.4)
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] (
)/[Read from PLC] (
).
The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU. Settings
for reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same manner.
<Write to PLC screen for the projects without labels.>
Target module tab
File list
Memory capacity
15 - 2
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
<Write to PLC screen for the projects with labels>
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later), the symbolic information
is displayed in the file list.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Target module tab
File list
11
PRINTING
Memory capacity
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Connection Channel List
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Target module tab
Switch the setting target module.
Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be written/read exist.
PLC Module
Set the settings to write data to the programmable controller CPU.
Intelligent Function
Module*1
Set the settings to write intelligent function module data to the buffer memory or flash ROM of
the intelligent function module.
Section 15.1.4
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the
Option*2
Display Size
File list
Target
button.
–
Select this to display the "Size" column in the file list and the memory capacity.
–
Select the data to be written/read.
Select "Target Memory" on the row of "Symbolic Information" or "PLC Data" displayed in light
Target Memory*1
Memory capacity*3
–
Display the total size of written data selected in "Target".
Free Volume
Display the free space volume of the target memory.
Use Volume
Display the used space volume of the target memory.
15
16
Not supported by FXCPU.
Displayed only when a project with labels is written to the programmable controller CPU.
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
*2 :
blue, and select the target memory to be read/written from ( ).
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
Writing Size
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Title*1
USING LIBRARIES
13
Description
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
15 - 3
15 WRITING/READING DATA
*3 :
For FXCPU, the program size and the symbolic information size are displayed when the project is written to the
programmable controller CPU. Symbolic information size is displayed on the screen for projects with labels of FX3U/
FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
When program (program file), device comment file, device memory file, file register file, or symbolic
information file is selected, the range can be set by clicking the
/
button.
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, and the device memory is selected,
the detailed settings are required.
For details, refer to the following sections.
Section 15.1.1 "Setting write/read range of program (program file)"
Section 15.1.2 "Setting write/read range of device data"
Section 15.1.3 "Setting range of device comment to be written/read"
Section 15.1.6 "Reading the remaining steps for Online program change"
2. Click the
button.
When the Write to PLC function is executed, the specified data are written to the target memory.
When the Read from PLC function is executed, the specified data are read from the target
memory.
Screen button
●
Displays the illustration of the connection channel.
●
Selects the parameters and all the programs displayed in the list.
●
Selects all data displayed in the list.
●
Cancels the selection status of all data selected in the list.
●
/
Switches display/hide of the Related functions button.
For details of the related functions, refer to the following sections.
• Remote Operation Section 20.1 "Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU"
• Set Clock Section 20.6 "Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU"
• PLC User Data Section 15.5 "Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data"
• Write Title: Sets a title to the target memory.
• Format PLC Memory Section 20.3 "Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory"
• Clear PLC Memory Section 20.4 "Clearing Programmable Controller Memory"
• Arrange PLC Memory Section 20.5 "Arranging Programmable Controller Memory"
●
(Read from PLC and Delete PLC Data only)
Displays the project name of the symbolic information in the Title/Project Name column.
It is not displayed for projects without labels or by FXCPU.
●
Updates the file list on the Online Data Operation screen.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the writing size, free volume, and used volume are also updated.
When multiple personal computers are connected to the programmable controller CPU, update the
target memory before reading data from the programmable controller CPU.
15 - 4
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
When the number of permissible incorrect remote password entries or the cumulative number of
permissible incorrect password entries has been set and the number of incorrect entries exceeds the
set number, the programmable controller CPU will be in the status as shown in the following table. For
corrective action, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application).
Item
Status
When the number of permissible entries is exceeded
The line is disconnected automatically.
When the cumulative number of permissible entries is exceeded
Turn ON the ERR. LED on the module.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The confirmation message for unlocking the remote password is displayed when the programmable
controller CPU for which the remote password is set is accessed via C24 modules or Q seriescompatible E71 modules. Unlock the password by following the message.
(Setting a remote password Section 6.4)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Unlocking a remote password
11
When accessing a programmable controller CPU to which remote password is set via RCPU, the
remote password cannot be cleared from GX Works2. Delete the password using the MELSOFT
product supported by RCPU.
PRINTING
■
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 5
15 WRITING/READING DATA
● Target memory
The following table shows the relations between the target memory on the Online Data Operation screen and the drive
of the programmable controller CPU.
Drive No.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
0
Program memory/Device memory
Program memory (Drive 0)
1
Memory card (SRAM)
Memory card (RAM) (Drive 1)
2
QCPU (Q mode)*2/LCPU
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
PLC parameter
Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-2MBF
QCPU (Q mode)*1
*1 :
*2 :
Target memory on the Online Data
Operation screen
PLC type
Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-4MBF
Memory card (ROM) (Drive 2)
Memory card (ATA)
Memory card (SD)
Memory card (SD) (Drive 2)
3
Standard RAM
Standard RAM (Drive 3)
4
Standard ROM
Standard ROM (Drive 4)
Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and High-speed Universal model QCPU.
High-speed Universal model QCPU only.
● Memory capacity
• When a project is written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be displayed smaller
than the actual file size.
• If the target memory settings differ between "Symbolic Information" and "PLC Data", the memory capacity of the
target selected in PLC data is displayed.
● Writing multiple programs to programmable controller CPU
When more than one program is written to the programmable controller CPU, programs categorized as "No Execution
Type" will never be executed on the programmable controller CPU.
For saving the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU, it is recommended to remove them from the
target data of the Write to PLC function.
● Reading device memory data from programmable controller CPU
Device memory data are read in the condition in which "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto" on the device memory
editor.
● Saving the selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function
The selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function can be saved.
To save the file selection status, select [Tool]  [Options]  "PLC Read/Write" and set "Operational Setting".
However, the file selection status is canceled by any of the following operations.
• Changing the connection destination setting
• Changing the target memory
• Changing the PLC type
<Option setting>
• Ending the project
15 - 6
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
9
Setting write/read range of program (program file)
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Set the range of a program (program file) to be written/read when the program (program file) is selected
on the Online Data Operation screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
15.1.1
10
Select the program (program file) and click the
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
button.
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
13
Selected Program (Program File)
Display the program name selected in the 'File list'.
Range
Display write/read range of each program.
Allocate Memory for 'Online Change' (Write to
PLC only)
Enter the number of steps secured for Online program change.
Option
–
USING LIBRARIES
Description
Select this to specify the equal number of secured steps for Online
program change to all files.
Reading Left Capacity at the Same Time
(Read from PLC only)
Select this to read the remaining secured steps for Online program
change of the files written on the programmable controller CPU.
Merge Peripheral Statement/Note (Read
from PLC only)
Select this to use an Peripheral statement/note.
If a program is read without selecting this item, the Peripheral statement/
note is lost.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Screen button
15
(Read from PLC only)
Displays the remaining steps for Online program change.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
●
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
Specify Same Step Count for Online
Change to All Files
(Write to PLC only)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
15.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file)
15 - 7
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.2
Setting write/read range of device data
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Set the type and range of device memory and the range of file register to be written/read when any or
both of them are selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
■
Setting type and range of device memory to be written/read
Set the type and range of device memory to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU.
The following tables show devices that can be written/read.
● QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Writing
Reading
M, L, B, F, SB, V, S*1, T*2, ST*2, C*2, D, W, SW, FX, FY, FD, Z
Device


X, Y, SM, SD, intelligent function module device, link direct device
×

*1 :
*2 :
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
Three types of data (contact, coil, and current value) can be written/read.
● FXCPU
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Writing
Reading
M, S, T, C, D, R*1, ER*1
Device


X, Y, D (Special register), M (Special relay)
×

*1 :
Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Screen display
Select the device data and click the
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
Device range
list
15 - 8
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
/
button.
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
• Set the items on the screen.
Description
Device Data Name (Read from PLC only)
Enter the data name for data created when the device memory data are
read.
Device Selection
–
Select this to write/read device data.
For FXCPU, this setting is fixed as selected status.
Input Column
Set the method for specifying the device range to be written/read.
10
Points + Start
Select this to specify the range with the number of device points and the
start device number.
Start + End
Select this to specify the range with the start and end device numbers.
Device range list
Set the device to be written/read and the device range.
The default device range is a range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC
parameter. Devices to which 0 point is set cannot be set without selecting
the check box.
Select this to read the link device of the data link module or the network
module to the link direct device.*2, *3
Setting range: Slots 1 to 4
Buffer Memory Head I/O No.*1
(last 1 digit is not required)
(Read from PLC only)
Select this to read the intelligent function module buffer memory to the
intelligent function module device.*3
Setting range: 0 to 1FF
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Link Direct Device*1
(Read from PLC only)
SEARCH/REPLACE
Internal Device
Memory
PRINTING
Item
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
Not supported by FXCPU.
For the method to number the module to be set, refer to Point in Section 20.1.
For specifying devices, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions).
Screen button
13
●
USING LIBRARIES
Changes the device range to the default.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
15 - 9
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Setting range of file register to be written/read
Set the range of file register to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU.
For Q00JCPU/Q00UJCPU/FXCPU, the range of file register to be written/read cannot be set.
Screen display
Select a file register and click the
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
/
button.
Operating procedure
• Set the item on the screen.
Item
Specified Range
Description
Specify the range of file register to be written/read.
If multiple file registers are selected, each file register value is written/read in the same
range.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to ■ Setting type and range of device memory to be written/
read.
● Specifying file registers
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, "Whole Range" cannot be selected.
• For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, specify the range of file register assigned on the <<Device>> tab of PLC
parameter when using extended data registers or extended link registers.
15 - 10
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Set the device and range of global device comment/local device comment to be written or read when
the global device comment/local device comment is selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
Set this setting to limit the writing range of device comments in cases such as when the programmable
controller CPU has small free capacity. When the range of device comments is not set, all device
comments are written/read.
For FXCPU, this function only supports global device comments being written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Screen display
10
11
button.
PRINTING
Select a global device comment/local device comment and click the
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Setting range of device comment to be written/read
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.1.3
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Description
Device Comment Name
Display the selected device comment name.
Device Range
–
Device Name
Set the device name whose write/read range is to be specified.
Start
Set the start device number.
End
Bit Specification Information
Bit specification information
included*1
Comment Format (PLC Format)
Number of characters per 1
comment*2
Set the end device number.
–
Select this to specify whether bit-specified word device comments are
included as write target.
–
16
Set the number of characters for a comment to be written to a
programmable controller CPU.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU only
Not supported by FXCPU.
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
*2 :
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Item
15 - 11
15 WRITING/READING DATA
2. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Online Data Operation screen.
● Message displayed when setting range to be written with FXCPU
By clicking the
written are displayed.
button, the number of device comments and the maximum number of comments to be
<When the "Parameter" checkbox is not selected on the Online Data Operation screen.>
<When the "Parameter" checkbox is selected on the Online data Operation screen.>
● When the setting of "Number of characters per 1 comment" is changed
When the number of characters set for "Number of characters per 1 comment" is less than the number of characters of
device comment set for the project, the device comment with less number of characters is written to a programmable
controller CPU. Therefore, mismatched data may be detected when verifying project data.
Restrictions
● Specifying bit-specified word device comments as write target
Device comments cannot be read in GX Developer.
When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of LCPU is read in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, the
bit-specified comment is deleted.
When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of Universal model QCPU is read in GX Works2 Version
1.31H or earlier, the bit-specified comment is deleted.
15 - 12
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
Data to be written differ depending on the setting range of the device comments to be written as shown
below.
Range
Data to be written
When range is not set
Data of device comment unset devices are not written.
When range is set
Blank data is written to device comment unset devices within the range to be written.
<Device comments in the project>
M0 : Emergency stop
M1 :
M2 : Operating
Write to PLC
(With no range set)
M0 : Emergency stop
M2 : Operating
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Device comment unset devices
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
■
PRINTING
11
Write to PLC
(With range set)
M0 : Emergency stop
M1 : (Blank)
M2 : Operating
SETTING OPTIONS
12
● If the device comments read with the Read from PLC function are empty
If the read device comments with the following option is set are empty, the device comments of the devices will be
unset status.
• [Tool]  [Option]  "PLC Read/Write"  "Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read"
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
15 - 13
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.4
Writing/reading intelligent function module data
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
Write the intelligent function module data to a programmable controller CPU or intelligent function
module buffer memory/flash ROM.
Intelligent function module data includes intelligent function module parameters to be written to a
programmable controller CPU as a parameter file, and data whose values are written directly to
intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
For details of data to be written as intelligent function module parameters and data to be written to
intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
User’s Manual to be used
■
Writing/reading intelligent function module parameters to/from
programmable controller CPU
Write intelligent function module parameters to a programmable controller CPU, and read the data from
the programmable controller CPU to a project.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( )  <<PLC Module>>.
The settings for writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU are explained
together as they are similar operations.
<Write to PLC screen>
File list
Memory capacity
Operating procedure
1. Select "Intelligent Function Module (Initial Setting/Auto Refresh)" from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 14
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
2. Click the
In the Write to PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters are written to the target
memory.
In the Read from PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters on the programmable
controller CPU are read from the target memory.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Writing/reading data to/from intelligent function module buffer memory/
flash ROM
10
Write the set intelligent function module data to the buffer memory/flash ROM of the intelligent function
module via a programmable controller CPU, and read the intelligent function module data to a project.
Use the operation for changing the data temporarily during debugging.
If a module does not have initial settings for intelligent function module parameters, this function can
directly write data such as initial values to the intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
SEARCH/REPLACE
■
9
button.
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( )  <<Intelligent Function Module>>.
The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU.
Settings for reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same
manner.
<Write to PLC screen>
PRINTING
Screen display
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
may differ depending on the module.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
The items in
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15 - 15
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Operating procedure
1. Select "Valid" for write/read target module and "Target" for each item.
Set details such as a write/read range and write target by clicking the
2. Click the
button of each item.
button.
In the Write to PLC operation, the set data are written to the intelligent function module buffer
memory/flash ROM, and in the Read from PLC operation, the data are read from the intelligent
function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 16
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
• The following screen is displayed when the actual mounting status is different from the configuration on the module*1
or a specific Intelligent function module*2 is used at reading data from the programmable controller CPU.
When the cell under "Model Name" of intelligent function module parameter is indicated with red, select the module
model. And as for blue, change the module model as necessary. Select the module model by double-clicking the cell
under "Model Name".
10
PRINTING
● Writing data to programmable controller CPU
When writing the intelligent function module parameters, match the configuration of the intelligent function module on
the project with the configuration in the intelligent function module parameters stored on the programmable controller
CPU.
Data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU unless the start XY address and the module name for the
write target match.
● Reading data from programmable controller CPU
• When the intelligent function module parameter does not exist on the programmable controller CPU, read the data
from the programmable controller CPU after adding the intelligent function module according to the actual module
configuration to the Navigation window.
For the method for adding the intelligent function module, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
• The configuration of Intelligent function module on the project side is recreated according to the Intelligent function
module parameter. After that, the setting of the Intelligent function module parameter setting is reflected to the
parameter and automatic refresh settings.
Default values are set to the Intelligent function module parameter in which parameters are not set. In this case, after
reading data from a programmable controller CPU, read data from the buffer memory/flash ROM of the mounted
module.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Double-click to select
the module model.
USING LIBRARIES
13
● Writing data when the QD75 ready signal (X0) is ON (positioning data only)
Data cannot be written when the QD75 ready signal (X0) of the target intelligent function module is ON.
When the QD75 ready signal (X0) is OFF, the availability of operation differs according to the option setting*1.
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
"Confirm PC operation status when writing a data"
Programmable controller
CPU operating status
Cleared
STOP


Other than STOP
×

16
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Intelligent Function Module"  "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning".
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
Selected
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
*2 :
For modules without the initial setting in intelligent function module parameters, the actual module configuration is judged by setting or
unsetting the auto refresh. When an actual module exists and the auto refresh is not set for the current project, the cell is highlighted
in yellow.
The specific intelligent modules are listed below.
Analog module: Q62DAN, Q64DAN, Q68DAVN, Q68DAIN, Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI
Temperature control module: Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW, Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN,
Q64TCRTBWN
QD75 positioning module: QD75P1/P2/P4, QD75P1N/P2N/P4N, QD75D1/D2/D4, QD75D1N/D2N/D4N
Serial communication/modem interface module: QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
For QD75 positioning modules and serial communication/modem interface modules, the screen to select a module is displayed when
the auto refresh is set.
WRITING/READING
DATA
*1 :
15 - 17
15 WRITING/READING DATA
● Displaying the confirmation message when writing data to a flash ROM (positioning data only)
The confirmation message can be displayed when data are written to a flash ROM by the following setting.
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Intelligent Function Module"  "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning" and select "Display a
confirmation message when writing to flash ROM".
Restrictions
● Writing data to a flash ROM of serial communication/modem interface module when using Redundant CPU
Before writing data, change the operation mode of the Redundant CPU to the separate mode, and set "Not Specified"
for "Target System".
15 - 18
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
*1
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1 : FX3U/FX3UC (version 3.00 or later) only
Symbolic information is data that store the program configuration such as structures and labels.
To restore these data included in the symbolic information when reading a program from the
programmable controller CPU, write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller
CPU.
Data such as structures and labels included in the symbolic information cannot be restored if only
sequence programs are read. (In case of a Structured project, the programming language is treated as
Ladder Diagram.)
The following table shows the program data included in the symbolic information.
Project type
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Symbolic information
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.1.5
11
Data included in symbolic information
Structures
Global labels
Local labels
PRINTING
Simple project
Programs
Function blocks
12
User libraries
SETTING OPTIONS
Structures
Global labels
Program Setting
Tasks
POU
Local labels
13
Programs
USING LIBRARIES
Function blocks
Functions
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Structured project
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15 - 19
15 WRITING/READING DATA
● Write target of symbolic information
Symbolic information can also be written to drives other than the program memory (drive 0).
For details of writable drives, refer to the following manual.
User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
● Compile status when the symbolic information is read
• When the symbolic information and parameters are read simultaneously, and the data in the symbolic information
match with parameters and programs (program files) on the programmable controller CPU, the read data are in
compiled status.
• When only the symbolic information is read, the read data are in uncompiled status.
• When the symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read, the read data are in uncompiled
status. Compile the program again after executing the Read from PLC function.
● Considerations for reading symbolic information
For the considerations for reading label programs (symbolic information) of the existing application using GX Works2,
or reading label programs (symbolic information) of GX Works2 using the existing application, refer to the following
section. (Appendix 6.2 "Data compatibility")
● FXCPU
When a memory cassette to which the symbolic information has been written is used on an FXCPU other than FX3U/
FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the memory cassette can be used, however, the symbolic information cannot be read from
the memory cassette.
When the symbolic information is written to a memory cassette on an FXCPU other than FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or
later, the symbolic information may be corrupted.
● When always writing the symbolic information
By setting the option, the symbolic information is always set to be written when the Write to PLC window is displayed.
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Symbolic Information" and select "In the Write to PLC window, keep the symbolic
information selected status as a write target".
● Automatic project save after writing to programmable controller CPU
By setting the option, the project can be saved automatically after writing to the programmable controller CPU.
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Project"  "Automatic Save" and select "Save project after writing to PLC".
15 - 20
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' are added as modes to write symbolic information to a
programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.48A.
Use 'High speed mode' when using GX Works2 for the first time.
For FXCPU, only 'High speed mode' is supported.
'High speed mode' or 'Compatible mode' can be selected by "Setting for Writing Symbolic Information
to PLC" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Symbolic Information". 'High speed mode' is set as a default
setting.
● High speed mode
• Higher speed of writing/reading symbolic information compare to 'Compatible mode'.
• Smaller symbolic information data size increases a free space on a programmable controller CPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
High speed mode and Compatible mode
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
■
11
• Larger symbolic information data size decreases a free space on a programmable controller CPU.
● 'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode'
'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' can be changed any time.
Symbolic information on a programmable controller CPU is always the one written most recently. Thus, the
management of symbolic information is not complicated.
● Symbolic information on programmable controller CPU
Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot be displayed on the
screen for Read from PLC in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
● Write to PLC function when symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.
When symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, performing the Write to PLC function with
changing the mode between 'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' may cause an improper boot operation.
When the mode is changed, write symbolic information to a programmable controller CPU after performing the
following operation.
• Check if symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, click the
button and
update the boot file setting.
• Select symbolic information and parameters on the screen for Write to PLC and write symbolic information to a
programmable controller CPU. Confirm the target memory of symbolic information is the same as that of the transfer
destination set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.
SETTING OPTIONS
• Symbolic information which does not support 'High speed mode', and it is the same as the one in
GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
● Compatible mode
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
• Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot be
read in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
<Considerations>
PRINTING
• The number of files for the symbolic information is counted as two files. Check the number of files
that can be stored on a programmable controller CPU.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15 - 21
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.6
Reading the remaining steps for Online program change
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
When reading data of a project with labels from programmable controller, this option can be selected
whether to read the remaining steps for Online program change from the file written to the
programmable controller CPU.
For a project without labels, refer to the following section.
Section 15.1.1 "Setting write/read range of program (program file)"
Screen display
Select symbolic information and click the
button.
Operating procedure
• Select the checkbox of "Read the remaining capacity for Allocate Memory for Online Change".
15 - 22
15.1.6 Reading the remaining steps for Online program change
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Specify a target memory to write device comments to a programmable controller CPU.
In order to store device comments to the storage destination which is different from the target memory
of the current programmable controller data, select "Set save destination of device comment to the
target memory of PLC data" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Save Destination of Device Comment", and
set a target for "Save Destination of Device Comment" in advance.
Screen display
10
11
PRINTING
Select device comments (global device comments, local device comments) on the Online Data
Operation screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Specifying target to write device comments to
programmable controller CPU
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.1.7
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
Operating procedure
1. The following message is displayed.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
15
button.
The target set for "Target Memory" is changed to the target specified for "Save Destination of
Device Comment" in the option setting.
WRITING/READING
DATA
2. Click the
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.1.7 Specifying target to write device comments to programmable controller CPU
15 - 23
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.8
Considerations for writing/reading data to/from
programmable controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The following explains the considerations for writing/reading data to/from the programmable controller
CPU.
1)
Writing or reading programs with a Peripheral statement/note to or from the programmable
controller CPU
The information of the lines with Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable
controller CPU, but the content of the statement/note are not written to the programmable
controller CPU.
If a program with the same name as that of the program set with a Peripheral statement/note is
read from the programmable controller CPU, the former overwrites the latter (the one in GX
Works2), so the Peripheral statements/notes of the latter is discarded. To keep the Peripheral
statement/note in GX Works2 when reading data from the programmable controller CPU, merge
the Peripheral statement/note.
(Merging statements/notes GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project))
2)
An uncompiled program exists when writing data to the programmable controller CPU
If the following message is displayed when writing data to the programmable controller CPU, click
the
button and stop writing data. Then, execute [Compile]  [Build] again on the
uncompiled program.
3)
Writing programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set
before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels.
By setting the following option, device values in the range set with the "Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting" function can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the
programmable controller CPU.
• [Tool]  [Options]  "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges
set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure when the above option setting is not
set.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU,
clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable
controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC
memory clear function, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
15 - 24
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
6)
Writing data after the device range in PLC parameter is changed
When the device range of PLC parameter has been changed, write the parameter to the
programmable controller CPU.
Programs cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU unless the parameter is written to
the programmable controller CPU.
7)
When the date on the personal computer is February 29
When the date on the personal computer is February 29, the following message is displayed if the
Write to PLC, Online program change, or Change TC setting function is performed on a Basic
model QCPU function version A.
The file will be written with the date 'February 28' by clicking
Basic model QCPU function version A
Basic model QCPU function version A does not support SFC programs, device initial values, and
remote passwords.
For the Write to PLC function, these files cannot be written even though their names are displayed.
For the Read from PLC function, files of SFC programs and device initial values are not displayed
in the file list. Files of remote passwords cannot be read out even though their file names are
displayed.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
13
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
8)
button.
10
USING LIBRARIES
Performing the Write to PLC function when symbolic information is not written to the
programmable controller CPU
Program data are not displayed on the screen for Read from PLC in a project with labels.
When reading programs in a project with labels, select symbolic information.
When symbolic information is not written to the programmable controller CPU, create a new project
without labels, and read the programs.
When reading programs in a project without labels, the read programs are displayed as a ladder
program. However, as there are cases where programs cannot be displayed correctly as a ladder
program, be sure to check the program after the symbolic information has been read from the
programmable controller CPU.
The background color of the ladder block in which the program cannot be displayed correctly in a
program is displayed in yellow.
The program can be edited by deleting the ladder block or adding new ladder block before or after
it, even when the background color is displayed in yellow.
Be sure to write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller CPU in order to
restore the program to its original state.
9
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
5)
Editing programs after writing symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU
Edit programs in the same project type as the symbolic information if editing them after writing
symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.
In addition, be sure to write the latest symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU if
writing only execution programs to it using such as Online program change.
If execution programs are read out and edited in GX Works2 projects without labels or GX
Developer and rewritten to the programmable controller CPU, the programs being edited may be
inconsistent with the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU when symbolic
information is read out using GX Works2.
If inconsistency occurs by the operation mentioned above, check the mismatch parts using the
Verify with PLC function and correct them.
WRITING/READING
DATA
4)
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15 - 25
15 WRITING/READING DATA
9)
Writing data to a Redundant CPU in the backup mode
When a Redundant CPU is operating in the backup mode, the write to PLC function is performed
on both systems (control system and standby system).
However, in any of the following states, the write to PLC function is performed on the connective
system only.
• The target system power is OFF.
• The target system is reset.
• The tracking cable failed.
10) Writing data to a Redundant CPU in the separate mode/debug mode
When a Redundant CPU is operating in the separate mode or debug mode, the write to PLC
function is only performed on the Redundant CPU which is specified for "Target System" on the
Transfer Setup screen.
11) FXCPU
• For projects with labels, data can be read from a programmable controller CPU, and symbolic
information can be read from/write to a programmable controller CPU in a project of FX3U/FX3UC
version 3.00 or later only. Since these functions cannot be performed on the other FXCPU
projects with labels, store the projects in a safe place.
• When a project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting
was enabled is written, the execution program cannot be read. To restore the program, write the
symbolic information.
• When a program with an Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable controller
CPU, the Peripheral statement/note cannot be written to it. (The information of the lines with
Peripheral statement/note also cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU.)
12) Writing data to FXCPU in batch
Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.
When it is in RUN status, the message shown below is displayed. Select the
button.
13) When the program memory of FXCPU is the EPROM cassette
Write programs with the ROM writer. For the EEPROM or flash memory cassette, turn the
PROTECT switch OFF first and write programs.
14) Writing/reading ER device with FX3U/FX3UC
Writing/reading data cannot be executed with FX3U/FX3UC unless the memory cassette is installed
to the programmable controller main unit.
15) Writing data to FX1S version earlier than 2.00
Data of project with labels cannot be written.
Use data of project without labels.
15 - 26
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
18) Reading data from SD memory card
The following are the considerations when reading data from the SD memory card.
• Program files/intelligent function module parameters created on the programmable controller
CPU whose series is different from the connected programmable controller CPU cannot be read.
• Parameters/symbolic information on the programmable controller CPU whose type is different
from the connected programmable controller CPU cannot be read.
Example) When the program file created on the LCPU is stored on the SD memory card
The program file created on the LCPU cannot be read from the SD memory card on
the High-speed Universal model QCPU.
19) Changing the number of columns of device memory editor
The number of columns of device memory editor can be changed when opening GX Developer
format project by selecting the following option.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
PRINTING
17) Reading projects created in English version of GX Works2 from programmable controller
CPU
When reading projects created in the English version of GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier from
the programmable controller CPU, select "Japanese" for the language selection.
9
12
SETTING OPTIONS
16) Reading the symbolic information, which has been written to the programmable controller
CPU using the Japanese version of GX Works2, using the English version of GX Works2
The symbolic information, which has been created and written to the programmable controller CPU
using the Japanese version of GX Works2, cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU
using the English version of GX Works2.
In this case, save again the project created with the Japanese version of GX Works2 using the
English version of GX Works2, and write the symbolic information to the programmable controller
CPU.
By following the operation described above, the symbolic information can be read from the
programmable controller CPU using the English version of GX Works2.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
When selecting "Always Confirm", the number of device memory editor can be changed at opening
the Device Memory screen at the first time on the following screen.
When setting "Auto" as a default, or always specify the same number of columns by selecting
"Specify the number of column", set with option or select "Set the selected content in option" in
advance.
If reading device memory whose number of device memory editor has been changed without
changing the number of columns, do not perform PLC read but select [Tool]  [Read Device
Memory from PLC] (Section 7.4.1)
USING LIBRARIES
13
• [Tool]  [Options]  "Device Memory Editor"  "Initial Value of Column Number"
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15 - 27
15 WRITING/READING DATA
20) Reading device comments
By setting the following option, whether to merge the device comments in the project with giving
priority to the read device comments can be set.
• [Tool]  [Option]  "PLC Read/Write"  "Merge device comment with the project data at time
of PLC read"
If the option is not set, the device comment file in the project is deleted and replaced with the read
device comment when reading data.
21) Reading a program with a block password to which the execution program protection
setting was enabled
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU or FXCPU, reading an execution program only is
not available if the project written to the CPU includes a block password to which the execution
program protection setting was enabled. To read an execution program, the symbolic information
needs to read simultaneously.
15 - 28
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
10
• Parameters
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains how to verify the open project against the data on the programmable controller
CPU.
The verification function is used to compare the content of two projects or to locate program
changes.
To verify data between two projects, use the Verify function. (Section 4.2.7)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the Verify with PLC function.
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
15.2
• Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
11
• Programs
• Device comments
• Device memory data
PRINTING
• File registers
• QD75/LD75 positioning module*1
Not supported by FXCPU.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Verify with PLC].
<CPU module>
USING LIBRARIES
13
File list
Comment
verify type
Memory capacity
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
15 - 29
15 WRITING/READING DATA
<Intelligent function module>
File list
Operating procedure
1. Select data to verify from the file list.
Item
Description
Connection Channel List
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Target module tab
Switch the setting target module.
Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be verified exist.
PLC Module
Set the settings to verify data with data on the programmable controller CPU.
Intelligent Function Module*1
Set the settings to verify data with data on the intelligent function module.
Section 15.1.4
Title*1
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the
File list
–
Target
button.
Select the data to be verified.
Select "Target Memory" on the row of "PLC Data" displayed in light blue, and
Target Memory*1
select a target memory to be verified from ( ).
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance
and Inspection)
Comment Verify Type
Set a basis either; data being edited or module data, when verifying device
comments. ("■ Comment verify type")
Memory capacity*1
–
*1 :
Writing Size
Display the total size of written data selected in "Target".
Free Volume
Display the free space volume of the target memory.
Use Volume
Display the used space volume of the target memory.
Not supported by FXCPU.
2. Click the
button.
The verification results are displayed on the Verify Result screen.
Section 4.2.7 "■ Checking verification result details"
15 - 30
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
●
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Opens the screen to select the SFC block to be verified.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
● Verifying automatically assigned devices
Devices are verified based on the range of device/label automatic-assign setting of the project. When changing the
range of device/label automatic-assign setting after writing to PLC, and then automatically assigned devices of the
module are outside the range, the verification result mismatches.
● Verification result when CC-Link Configuration window is created
When the same profile is not registered to the verify destination and the verify source, the verification result may be a
mismatch.
(Section 4.13)
● Project security status
Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.
● Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Among modules without initial setting such as QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem interface
modules, and AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
● Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.
The following data can be selected as verification targets.
• Parameter
• Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)
• Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
• Block start data
● Verifying device memory data for FXCPU
Special registers (M) and special data registers (D) cannot be selected as verification targets.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 31
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Parameter verification
Verification levels can be selected for verifying parameters.
This function is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select the parameter and click the
button.
The following table shows the setting items for parameter verification.
Item
Description
User Setting Area Only
Verify only the parameter area set by the user.
All Areas
Verify all area including the parameter area set by the system.
● Mismatched point in system area
If a mismatched point is detected in the system area by the "All Areas" verification, either of the
following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action according to the message.
Message
The header information of the
parameter block is inconsistent.
Corrective action
A mismatch exists in area other than the user setting area.*1
Rewrite the parameters having been written to the programmable controller CPU.
Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the
project differ between the programmable controller CPU and GX Works2.
The operation of the programmable controller CPU is not affected.
This parameter block can't analyze.
To match the "All Areas" verification, install the latest version of GX Works2, read the
parameters from the programmable controller CPU, and write them again to the
programmable controller CPU.
*1 :
15 - 32
Data in areas other than the user setting area may be erroneous due to such as noise.
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
9
Comment verify type
A basis of the range, either 'data being edited' or 'module data', can be set in the Verify with PLC
function of device comment.
The comment verify type can be set when global device comments or local device comments of both
'data being edited' and 'module data' are selected.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
■
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Description
Comment Verify Type
–
GX Works2 Data
Verify data with the range of device comments in the project as a basis.
When this item is selected, detail setting of the selected device comments can
be set by clicking the
button. (Section 15.1.3)
PLC Data
Verify data with the range of device comments written to the programmable
controller CPU as a basis.
● Verification result differences of comment verification method
The following shows an example of the Verify with PLC function performed on the following device
comments.
Device
Device comments in project
Device comments on programmable controller CPU
M0
Global device comment 1
Global device comment 1
M1
Global device comment 2
Global device comment 2
M2
Device comment of M2
M3
M4
Global device comment 3
Programmable controller CPU only
12
13
Project only
USING LIBRARIES
M5
Programmable controller CPU only
< When "GX Works2 Data" is selected for verification >
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
< When "PLC Data" is selected for verification >
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
M6
11
PRINTING
Item
SETTING OPTIONS
The following table shows the items of the comment verify type and their descriptions.
15 - 33
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.3
Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to delete data on the programmable controller CPU such as programs and
parameters.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Delete PLC Data].
File list
Memory capacity
Operating procedure
1. Select the data to delete from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
2. Click the
button.
The specified data are deleted.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
● Deleting symbolic information
If the symbolic information is deleted, information such as labels cannot be restored.
● Deleting programs (program files) only
The content of the symbolic information are not updated, even if a program (program file) is deleted. When the symbolic
information is read, the deleted program is restored.
15 - 34
15.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to copy the program memory data on the programmable controller CPU to
a standard ROM on the programmable controller CPU or a Flash card in batch.
This function is used to boot up using a standard ROM or a Flash card, or save program memory data
in a standard ROM or a Flash card without a battery backup.
Since the program memory of Universal model QCPU and LCPU is a flash ROM, program memory
data can be saved without a battery backup for those CPUs.
Screen display
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.4
11
PRINTING
Select [Online]  [Export to ROM Format].
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
2. Click the
13
Description
Select the memory in which the program memory data are to be written.
USING LIBRARIES
Target
button.
The message is displayed.
3. Click the
button.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
The program memory data are exported in
ROM format and the data are written to the memory set in "Target".
● Considerations for writing
All the write target data are deleted.
● Reading data written in ROM format
Use the Read from PLC function to read the data written in ROM format.
● Exporting device memory in ROM format
The device memory cannot be written using the Export to ROM format function.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 35
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.5
Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U.
This section explains how to write/read/delete PLC user data (CSV format file/binary format file) to/
from an ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM.
PLC user data written to an ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM can be used in sequence
programs.
For the method for handling the PLC user data in sequence programs, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
● Formatting ATA cards
Format the ATA card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online]  [PLC Memory Operation]
 [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2.
If a card is formatted using the function such as Windows® format functions, it may not be used on the programmable
controller CPU.
● Project file attributes
The file attributes (read only, hidden file) set by the application such as Windows® Explorer are ignored.
● Memory capacity
When PLC user data are written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be displayed
smaller than it really is.
● Folders in memory card
When reading/deleting PLC user data, data such as logging data contained in folders are not displayed in "PLC Side
File".
● Writing data to an SD memory card
When PLC user data is written to an SD memory card, the characters of the file names become upper-case characters.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [PLC User Data]  [Write]/[Read]/[Delete].
The following explains the settings for writing PLC user data. The settings for reading/deleting
PLC user data can be made in the same manner.
<Writing PLC User Data>
15 - 36
15.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
button to set the storage source for the PLC user data to be
written.
When reading PLC user data, set the save destination for the PLC user data to be read.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
10
Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Target Memory
Select the memory to which the PLC user data are to be written.
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance
and Inspection)
Title
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the
button.
Local File
(Write only)
Select the PLC user data to be written.
The maximum file size is 32MB per file.
PLC Side File
(Read/Delete only)
Select the PLC user data to be read.
Select the PLC user data to be deleted.
12
button.
SETTING OPTIONS
3. Click the
11
PRINTING
Connection Channel List
SEARCH/REPLACE
1. Use the
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
When writing PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are written.
When reading PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are read.
When deleting PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are deleted.
Screen button
13
USING LIBRARIES
For the explanation of the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 37
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.6
Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to transfer the content of program cache memory to program memory in
batch.
Use this function to transfer data at desired timing, for example, when option setting is made so that a
program is not transferred to the program memory at Online program change.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online]  [Program Memory Batch Download].
Either of the following screens is displayed according to the programmable controller CPU and its
version.
<Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10012' or higher, LCPU>
<Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10011' or lower>
2. Click the
button.
The content in the program cache memory is transferred to program memory in batch.
15 - 38
15.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
● Considerations of program memory batch transfer
The following functions cannot be executed during program memory batch transfer.
Execute these functions only after completing program memory batch transfer.
• Online program change (ladder program, Structured Ladder/FBD program, ST program, function block)*1
• Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is selected)*1
*1 :
For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '12012' or higher, the following message is displayed and the
process of the program memory batch transfer can be canceled. To cancel the transfer, click the
button.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
• Write to PLC function (when program memory is the target memory)*1
• Program memory batch transfer (this function)
• Set as default connection
• Change PLC Type function
• Check Parameter
PRINTING
11
● When the program cache memory and the program memory match
The batch transfer of the program memory data is not executed.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 39
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.7
Latch Data Backup
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to back up data such as device memory, file register, and error history to
the standard ROM.
The backup content stored using this function is automatically restored to the program memory or
other area when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or when it is reset.
This function allows the system to create backups of the data such as device data and error history
data for those times when the system needs to be shut down for a prolonged time without use of
battery.
For details of backup target data, refer to the User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
15.7.1
Backing up latch data
Back up device memory/file register/error history data.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online]  [Latch Data Backup]  [Backup].
2. Click the
button.
Device memory/file register/error history data are backed up.
● Devices
The latch data backup function is available for the following devices.
M, L, B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, W, Z, ZR, R
To back up ZR and R, select "Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation" on the <<PLC File>> tab of
PLC parameter.
15 - 40
15.7.1 Backing up latch data
15.7 Latch Data Backup
9
Deleting backup data
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
15.7.2
Delete the backup data on programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
1. Select [Online]  [Latch Data Backup]  [Delete Backup Data].
2. Click the
PRINTING
11
button.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Backup data are deleted.
● Considerations for deleting backup data
Backup data cannot be deleted when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status.
To delete the backup data, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.7.2 Deleting backup data
15 - 41
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.8
Backing up/Restoring Data
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1: Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U) only
*2: Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
This section explains how to back up data on the programmable controller CPU to a memory card,
and restoring it to another programmable controller CPU.
15.8.1
Backing up data to memory card
Back up data on the programmable controller CPU to a memory card.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [PLC Module Change]  [Create Backup Data].
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Connection Channel List
15 - 42
Description
Display information of the connection channel being set.
Status
Display the execution status of backup.
Setting
Select data to be backed up from "Backup Target Data".
"Default Backup Data" settings are fixed as selected status. They cannot be
changed.
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card
15.8 Backing up/Restoring Data
9
button.
Data backup starts.
When data backup is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
2. Click the
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
11
3. Remove the memory card.
PRINTING
Turn the programmable controller CPU from OFF to ON, or reset it.
●
Refreshes and displays the execution status of backup when the power is turned OFF or reset.
●
Displays a total size of data selected in "Backup Target Data".
●
Opens the screen to set options for creating backup data.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen button
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
● Deleting backup data
Backup data can be deleted by selecting [Online]  [Delete PLC Data]. However, backup data in a Flash card cannot
be deleted.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card
15 - 43
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.8.2
Restoring backup data
Restore the registration from backup data for the programmable controller CPU replacement.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [PLC Module Change]  [Restore].
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
• Click the
button.
Data restoration starts.
When data restoration is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".
15 - 44
15.8.2 Restoring backup data
15.9 Online Program Change
WARNING
11
PRINTING
● When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable
controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates
safely.
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a
system.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains the operations for changing programs or data while the programmable
controller CPU is in RUN (Online program change).
The Online program change operations include Online program change performed during conversion/
compilation and performed from the Write to PLC screen in units of files.
Be sure to fully understand the descriptions below and in Section 15.9.4 to Section 15.9.6 for
operating with care.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Online Program Change
CAUTION
● The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program change
when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status change such as RUN-STOP switching, and remote control
operation) have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in this section.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
15.9
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 45
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.1
Performing Online program change during conversion/
compile
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
Perform Online program change during conversion/compilation after program change.
Before changing a program, check that the program matches the one on the programmable controller
CPU using the Verify with PLC function. Online program change cannot be performed if the programs
do not match.
RUN
Writes data to programmable
controller CPU in units of
changed ladder blocks.
■
Projects without labels
Operating procedure
1. Verify a program against a program on the programmable controller CPU to ensure
that they match.
2. Change or modify the program.
3. Select [Compile]  [Online Program Change] to perform Online program change.
The message is displayed.
Fully understand the message before performing Online program change.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
4. Click the
15 - 46
<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>
button.
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
● When target memory to write data is booting up
When updating the changes to the boot source while "Under booting, reflect changes to boot source during online
program change" is selected under [Tool]  [Options]  "Online Change", and the target memory is booting up, click
button on the message shown below.*1
For Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01UCPU) and LCPU only
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
*1 :
16
PROTECTING
DATA
the
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 47
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Projects with labels
Operating procedure
1. Verify a program against a program on the programmable controller CPU to ensure
that they match.
2. Change or modify the program.
3. Select [Compile]  [Online Program Change].
The Confirm Build Method for Online Program Change screen is displayed.
4. Select "Execute compile and online change after conversion" and click the
button.
The program is converted and compiled simultaneously, and Online program change is performed.
The following message is displayed.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
15 - 48
<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
5. Click the
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
button.
The following message is displayed.
Be sure to read and fully understand the message, and click the
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
button.
<When writing SFC blocks>
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
<When deleting SFC blocks>
PRINTING
11
Item
Description
Write Symbolic Information to PLC*1
Select this to write the symbolic information to the programmable controller
CPU.
Select "Target Memory".
Reflect Changes to Boot Source*2,*3
Select this to apply the change to the boot source while the target memory is
booting.
Online Change
For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
Not supported by FXCPU.
This item can be selected when "Under booting, reflect changes to boot source during online program change" is
selected under [Tool]  [Options]  "Online Change", and the target memory is booting up. (For Universal model
QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01UCPU) and LCPU only)
7. Click the
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
13
USING LIBRARIES
6. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
button.
Online program change is completed.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 49
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Writing range for Online program change
Perform Online program change with the following writing range which depends on the editing mode.
When a new ladder block is inserted, the inserted program is written together with two steps (one
before and the other after the program) to the programmable controller CPU.
Therefore, the Online program change may not be completed at a time depending on the number of
program steps added and the two steps before and after the program. In this case, reduce the number
of steps written at a time and perform Online program change in several times.
The following table shows the number of steps that can be written at once.
CPU type
Number of steps that
can be written at once
QCPU (Q mode), LCPU
512
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC (earlier than
V2.00)
256
FX0N, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3UC (V2.00 or later)
127
Example)
Range of the program
Newly inserted written at Online
program
program change
(including previous
and next steps)
● Editing separate ladder blocks
For QCPU (Q mode), when the programmable controller CPU has "Online change area of multiple
blocks" in its memory, multiple blocks can be written in units of blocks.
For High Performance model QCPU, "Online change area of multiple blocks" can be created using
the memory format function. (Section 20.3)
15 - 50
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs are compiled in program block unit.
Even with a partial program change, the whole program block becomes a write target of Online
program change. For this reason, the number of steps that can be written is exceeded and an error
may occur in Online program change.
When an error occurs, update the program with the Write to PLC function.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, Online program change can be performed in file unit.
(Section 15.9.2)
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Modified program
Compilation target
Sequence program
Program block
Program block
Program block
11
PRINTING
Online program
change
The number of steps
that can be written is
exceeded and an error
may occur in the online
program change function
because the whole program
block becomes a compilation
target even with a partial
program change.
Example) Online program change target after compiling a program with a line change
As shown in the following figures, delete the line in the ladder block 1 and change the
labels to M_TEST, and compile the program.
Since the temporary variable (1) used for the line in the ladder block 1 is released and
reused as a temporary variable of the line in the ladder block 2, a change is also applied
to the ladder block 2 to which any changes has not been applied by a user, and the
ladder block 2 becomes the Online program change target.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Temporary variable (1)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Program block
Program block
Temporary variable (2)
14
Delete the line and change
the labels to M_TEST.
Target of online
program change
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Temporary variable (1)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Task
Program block
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
● Editing Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 51
15 WRITING/READING DATA
● When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU for the first time, or an error
occurs during Online program change
Make sure that the program before writing matches the program on the programmable controller CPU with the Verify
with PLC function.
● When the program part to be written does not match
If the program part to be written does not match with the program on the programmable controller CPU, Online program
change cannot be performed.
Perform Online program change in units of files. (Section 15.9.2)
● When Online program change of multiple blocks cannot be performed
The message is displayed in the following cases when Online program change is performed. Select whether to perform
Online program change in units of files.
• There are no "Online change area of multiple blocks".
• The number of blocks exceeds the limit of Online program change of multiple blocks.
• The programmable controller CPU does not support the Online program change of multiple blocks.
● When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic
information has been written
Symbolic information, which contain the program configuration data such as structures and labels, are the data
necessary only for restoring the data such as structures and labels after reading a program from the programmable
controller CPU. (Section 15.1.1) Therefore, the write of symbolic information does not affect the operation of the
programmable controller CPU, however, when performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU
in which the symbolic information has been written, be sure to write the execution program together with the symbolic
information.
Note that since programs (program files) are written in batch along with source information, writing only source
information is not applicable.
However, it may take a few or more minutes to write symbolic information, therefore, the following action is
recommended.
When performing Online program change repeatedly, do not write symbolic information every Online program change
but perform Online program change in units of files, and perform the Write to PLC operation to write symbolic
information after all processes of Online program change are completed. (Section 15.9.2)
● Online program change after compiling all programs
All programs need to be compiled when the following operations are performed. Therefore the [Online Program
Change] function cannot be performed.
Write programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs. (Section 15.1, Section 15.9.2)
• Changing the following PLC parameters (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
• "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
• "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
• Settings on the <<Device>> tab
• Changing the following option settings
• "Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
• Settings in "Compile"
• Changing automatically assigned devices
• Updating instructions and application functions when opening Structured project.
• Changing PLC type
• Changing project type
• Executing the Write to PLC function when a new project is not created, or a project is not opened
● Automatic project save after Online program change
By setting the option, the project can be saved automatically after Online program change. Select [Tool]  [Options] 
"Project"  "Automatic Save" and select "Save project after online change".
● Editing separate ladder blocks with FXCPU
For FXCPU, ladder blocks between the edited ladder blocks are also written to the programmable controller CPU.
● Performing Online program change with FXCPU
• Symbolic information can be written to a programmable controller CPU with the Online program change function for
projects of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
• The Online program change function does not support SFC programs.
• When selecting [Compile]  [Online Program Change], Online program change may not be able to be performed if a
restriction of the programmable controller CPU is applied to the compilation result. (Section 15.9.6)
15 - 52
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
9
Performing Online program change in units of files
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
Write programs or data in units of files while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
15.9.2
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
RUN
Writes data to
programmable
controller CPU in
units of files.
PRINTING
11
Operating procedure
• Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] for
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Online program change.
The message is displayed.
Fully understand the message before
performing Online program change.
(Writing to programmable controller CPU
Section 15.1)
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files
15 - 53
15 WRITING/READING DATA
● Data that can be written in units of files with Online program change
Data such as sequence programs and device comments can be written with Online program change.
The data that can be written with Online program change differs depending on the write target memory.
For details, refer to the following manual.
• User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
● Online program change after compiling all programs
The Online program change cannot be performed after compiling all programs. When the Online program change
function is executed after compiling all programs, the programmable controller CPU is remotely stopped and programs
are written to the programmable controller CPU.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels.
By setting the following option, device values in the range set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function
can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU.
• [Tool]  [Options]  "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/
Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
For not configuring the above setting, as a precautionary measure, after writing programs to the programmable
controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file
registers, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN. (Section 20.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
• GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
● Memory shortage of the programmable controller CPU
Increase the free space of the programmable controller CPU with the Memory arrangement function.
(Section 20.5)
If the capacity is still insufficient after the operation, switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP and delete
unnecessary programs in it. Then, write the programs using the Write to PLC function.
(Delete PLC Data Section 15.3, Write to PLC Section 15.1)
● When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic
information has been written
Symbolic information, which contains the program configuration data such as structures and labels, is data necessary
for restoring the data such as structures and labels after reading a program from the programmable controller CPU.
(Section 15.1.1)
Therefore, the symbolic information does not affect the operation of the programmable controller CPU, however, write
the symbolic information when performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU to which the
symbolic information has been written.
However, note that since it may take a few minutes to write symbolic information, it is recommended not to write
symbolic information every Online program change but to write symbolic information after all Online program changes
are completed.
● When performing Online program change to Universal model QCPU
The following Online program change cannot be performed.
• Online program change performed on a program which does not exist on a programmable controller CPU.
• Online program change performed on a program which is not registered on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter.
• Online program change on an SFC program in unit of file.
15 - 54
15.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files
15.9 Online Program Change
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU function version A.
Write data to one file with two or more GX Works2s while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN,
using relative step numbers starting from a pointer.
A pointer for Online program change needs to be set in advance.
Example)
A program added with
another GX Works2
GX Works2 side
CPU side
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Online program change starting from pointer
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.9.3
Add a program
Based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer P2,
program mismatching does not occur even if there is
misalignment of step numbers, and Online program change
can be performed successfully.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Options]  "Online Change".
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Online program
change
PRINTING
11
USING LIBRARIES
13
• Select "Execute online change based on relative step No.".
When Online program change is performed, data are written with relative step numbers starting
from the pointer.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Ladder blocks including a pointer
When performing Online program change based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer, do not add any line
statements to a ladder block including the pointer.
If Online program change of a program with line statements is performed, program mismatching may occur. In this
case, perform Read from PLC, and executes normal Online program change.
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
Operating procedure
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
15.9.3 Online program change starting from pointer
15 - 55
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.4
Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or
SCJ instruction
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains the considerations for Online program change of programs containing the rise,
fall, or SCJ instruction.
■
QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU
● Fall instruction
The fall instruction may be executed even if the executing condition (ONOFF) in the onlinechanged ladder programs is not satisfied.
For the types and functions of the fall instructions, refer to the Programming Manual for each CPU.
<Fall instruction examples> PLF, LDF, ANDF, ORF, MEF, FCALLP, EFCALLP, and STMR
*1 :
ON/OFF status of a contact
(conduction state at Online program change)
Fall instruction
OFFOFF
Executed*1
OFFON
Not executed
ONOFF
Executed*1
ONON
Not executed
For details of disabling the fall instruction execution, refer to the following section.
(■ Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
● Rise instruction
The rise instruction is not executed even if the executing condition (OFFON) in the online-changed
ladder programs is satisfied.
The rise instruction is executed when the executing condition turns OFFON again.
For the types and functions of the rise instructions, refer to the programming manual of each CPU.
<Rise instruction examples> PLS, LDP, ANDP, ORP, MEP, and STMR
ON/OFF status of a contact
(conduction state at Online program change)
Rise instruction
OFFOFF
Not executed
OFFON
Not executed
ONOFF
Not executed
ONON
Not executed
● SCJ instruction
When the executing condition for the SCJ instruction is ON after writing, the instruction jumps to the
specified pointer without waiting for one scan.
15 - 56
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15.9 Online Program Change
The following explains methods for avoiding the fall instruction execution when the executing condition
(ONOFF) of the fall instruction for the online-changed program is not satisfied.
● Using the option setting (not supported by Basic model QCPU)
The fall instruction execution can be disabled by selecting [Tool]  [Options]  "Online Change" and
setting "Execute fall instruction". However, the fall instruction is not executed even if the executing
condition (ON OFF) is satisfied in the online-changed ladder programs. The fall instruction is
executed when the execution condition turns ON OFF again.
For information on the QCPU versions that support this function, refer to the User's Manual (Function
Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
■
11
PRINTING
Example) The following example shows the difference in the executing status depending on the
option setting.
<Program example>
12
INC D0 is not executed immediately
after Online program change.
Online program
change execution
Contact
Contact
input M0
input M0
Falling pulse
Falling pulse
instruction
instruction
output LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution output No LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution
(LDF M0)
(LDF M0)
1 scan
1 scan
"Execute fall instruction" is selected in the [Options]. "Execute fall instruction" is not selected in the [Options].
SETTING OPTIONS
INC D0 is executed immediately
after Online program change.
Online program
change execution
[INC D0]
13
USING LIBRARIES
M0
● Replacing the instruction with the EGF instruction
The fall instruction execution can be disabled with the EGF instruction, which converts the operation
result into a pulse.
For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
● Universal model QCPU/LCPU
In option setting for Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the item is not selected at default.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15 - 57
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
FXCPU
● Fall instruction
When Online program change of ladder programs which include fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF) is
completed, the fall instructions are not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their target
devices.
Fall instructions (PLF) are also not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their operating
condition devices.
To execute a fall instruction, turn the status of its target device/operating condition device ON  OFF
again.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF)
Target devices are ON
Target devices are OFF
Contacts of the LDF/ANDF/ORF instructions in the ladder block remain OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLF instruction
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
Target devices of the PLF instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*1
*1 :
Operate if the operating condition changes ON  OFF before/after Online program change.
● Rise instruction
When Online program change of ladder programs which include rise instructions is completed, the
rise instructions are executed if their target devices/operating condition devices are ON.
• Target rise instructions: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and Pulse operation type application instructions (such
as MOVP)
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including rise instructions (LDP/ANDP/ORP)
Target devices are ON
Target devices are OFF
Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in the ladder
block turn ON for one scan.
Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in the ladder
block remain OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including pulse operation type
application instructions (such as MOVP)
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
The relevant pulse operation type application instruction in
the ladder block operates for one scan.
The relevant pulse operation type application instruction in
the ladder block does not operate.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLS instruction
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
Target devices of the PLS instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*1
*1 :
15 - 58
Operate if the operating condition changes OFF  ON before/after Online program change.
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15.9 Online Program Change
Executing condition is not satisfied
The operation result of the MEF instruction is OFF.
● Operation result rising pulse instruction
When Online program change of ladder programs which include operation result rising pulse
instructions (MEP) is completed, the operation result of the operation result rising pulse instruction is
ON if the operation result up to it is ON.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEF instruction
Executing condition is satisfied
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
● Operation result falling pulse instruction
When Online program change of ladder programs which include operation result falling pulse
instructions (MEF) is completed, the operation result falling pulse instructions are not executed
regardless of the satisfied/not satisfied status of their executing condition.
To execute an operation result falling pulse instruction, turn the operation result up to it once ON, and
then OFF.
11
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains the considerations of Online program change of SFC programs.
● Online program change for operation outputs/transition conditions
Online program change cannot be performed after changing programs of multiple operation outputs/
transition conditions.
After correcting the program, perform Online program change for each unit of operation output or
transition condition.
● Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which do not support Online
program change of SFC blocks)
When a SFC diagram is edited, perform Online program change in unit of file by selecting [Online] 
[Write to PLC] (Section 15.9.2).
● Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which support Online program
change of SFC blocks)
When a SFC diagram is edited, Online program change can be performed in unit of SFC block by
selecting [Compile]  [Online Program Change].
Restrictions
13
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Online program change of SFC blocks
For details of CPU modules which support Online program change of SFC blocks, and restrictions regarding Online
program change of SFC blocks, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs
USING LIBRARIES
The operation result of the MEP instruction is OFF.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operation result up to the MEP instruction is OFF
The operation result of the MEP instruction is ON.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15.9.5
Operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON
PRINTING
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEP instruction
15.9.5 Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs
15 - 59
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.6
Considerations of each programmable controller series
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains the considerations of Online program change for each programmable controller
series.
■
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Item
Description
Online program change to another
station
Online program change to another station can be performed within the accessible range
set in the connection destination setting.
Take extra caution when performing Online program change to another station.
During boot operation
• When the online program change function is performed during a boot operation in the
backup mode, the function is performed on the program memory and transfer source
drive of both systems (connective system and target system).
Online program change on
Redundant CPU
• When the online program change function is performed during a boot operation in the
separate/debug mode, the function is performed on the program memory and transfer
source drive of connective system.
• When a memory card (ROM) or standard ROM is used, all files on the transfer source
drive are deleted and changed to files on the program memory.
Set the setting on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter to transfer all files on the
transfer source drive to the program memory.
Deleting a corresponding device
from a program
When an instruction is deleted during the OUT instruction execution, or when the device
number has been changed and the corresponding device cannot be found in the
program, the output status is retained. Perform Online program change after ensuring
that sequence programs containing unnecessary coil outputs are OFF.
While a low-speed execution type program is executed, Online program change starts
after the program execution. The program execution is suspended during Online program
change.
Online program change while a lowHowever, if "PRG TIME OVER(5010)" keeps occurring while a low-speed execution type
speed execution type program is
program is executed, Online program change cannot be performed.
executed
In this case, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP, and increase the constant
scan time and low-speed program execution time in PLC parameter, then execute Online
program change again.
15 - 60
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15.9 Online Program Change
Item
9
Description
• The number of secured steps newly set on the following message screen is not
displayed on the Program Detail Setting screen of the Write to PLC function.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
• If '0' is set for the number of secured steps on the following message screen, the area
for the exceeding amount from the secured steps is reserved and a sequence program
is written.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
• When the number of secured steps exceeds the currently set number during Online
program change, the following message is displayed. In this case, set a new number of
secured steps.
Allocating memory for Online
program change
• When re-securing the secured steps for Online program change in the backup mode of
Redundant CPU, the steps are secured on the basis of the smaller remaining program
memory capacity of either control system or standby system.
Example) When the remaining capacity (step) of the control system is 100 steps
and that of the standby system is 50 steps
The maximum number of re-secured steps for Online program change is
50.
The following message may be displayed during Online program change. Take corrective
action by following the message.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
• The message above is not displayed with Basic model QCPU function version A.
PRINTING
11
When system is configured with Redundant CPU
• Online program change is performed on both systems (connective system and target
system).
However, if the target system fails (communication cannot be established with the
target system), Online program change is not performed on both systems.
Backup mode
Separate mode/debug
mode
• Online program change cannot be performed in units of files to the program file which
does not exist on the programmable controller CPU.
Perform Online program change in units of files after changing the operation mode of
the programmable controller CPU to the separate mode or write data to the
programmable controller CPU after switching the programmable controller CPU to
STOP.
Online program change is only performed on the programmable controller CPU specified
for "Target System" on the Transfer Setup screen.
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 61
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
When Online program change is performed to a sequence program for which a password
Online program change of a
is set, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Unlock the password to perform Online
program for which a password is set program change.
Online program change is not possible if a password cannot be unlocked.
14
15
WRITING/READING
DATA
If the above error message is displayed, the program in GX Works2 changes back to the
uncompiled status. However, the program on the programmable controller CPU may
have been changed.
In this case, compile the GX Works2 program and verify it against the program on the
programmable controller CPU to confirm that these programs match. If the programs do
not match, write the program to the programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC
function to match them.
16
PROTECTING
DATA
Error during Online program change
USING LIBRARIES
13
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Item
Description
• Universal model QCPU has option setting of "Transfer program cache memory to
program memory" that allows selection whether to transfer the data of program cache
memory to program memory after Online program change.
(For option setting,Section 12.2)
• For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the
programmable controller CPU is running, the program memory batch transfer is
executed. (Section 15.6)
Online program change to Universal
model QCPU
• While program memory is being transferred in Universal model QCPU after Online
program change, the following functions cannot be executed.
• Online program change (ladder program, SFC program, Structured Ladder/FBD
program, ST program, function block)*1
• Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is selected)*1
• Write to PLC (when the target memory is program memory)*1
• Program memory batch transfer
• Set as default connection
• Change PLC Type
• Check Parameter
Online program change can be performed when the protection status (enable or disable)
for "Execution program protection setting" of a block password is set as follows;
: Performed, –: Not performed
GX Works2
When using LCPU
Programmable
controller CPU
*1 :
15 - 62
enabled
disabled
enabled


disabled
–

For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '12012' or higher, the process of the program
memory batch transfer can be canceled. (Section 15.6)
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15.9 Online Program Change
9
Description
Programmable controller CPUs that support Online program change
FX2C/FXU series (Version No. V2.1 or later)
FX3G series
Built-in EEPROM or optional EEPROM memory cassette
(PROTECT switch OFF)
FX3GC series
Built-in EEPROM
FX3S series
Built-in EEPROM or optional EEPROM memory cassette
(PROTECT switch OFF)
FX2N series
Built-in RAM, optional RAM cassette or optional EEPROM
cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
FX2NC series
Built-in RAM or optional memory board
(PROTECT switch OFF)
FX1NC series
Built-in EEPROM
FX1S/FX1N series
Built-in EEPROM or optional memory cassette
(PROTECT switch OFF)
FXU/FX2C series
Built-in RAM or optional RAM cassette
FX0N series
Built-in EEPROM
12
• A modified ladder program must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels.
• A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels
• If a ladder program before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed
counter output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (MNET,
ANRD, ANWR, RMST, RMWR, BLK, and MCDE), the ladder program cannot be
changed.
• When using FX0N, FX1S, FX1N,
FXU, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2C or
FX2NC
• A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.
• If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, application
instructions, etc., the number of NOPs equivalent to the number of steps removed are
added.
• For the application instruction (EXTR) for FX2N and FX2NC, do not perform Online
program change during communication (while the instruction is being activated).
Communication may stop if Online program change is performed during
communication.
If the communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to
RUN.
Do not perform Online program change on a function block which contains pulse output
instructions (PLSY, PLSR, PWM) or positioning instructions (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA)
after performing any of the following operations.
• Changing a program of a ladder block which contains instructions described above.
• Changing a program of a ladder block in front or back of a ladder block which contains
instructions described above.
• Deleting a ladder block in front/back of a ladder block, or adding a ladder block to front/
back of a ladder block, which contains instructions described above.
13
14
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
• When using FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N or FX2NC
11
PRINTING
Built-in RAM or optional FLASH cassette
(PROTECT switch OFF)
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
FX3U/FX3UC series
SETTING OPTIONS
Memory type
FX0Nseries (Version No.V1.10 or later) and
FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX1NC/FX2NC/FX3UC series
USING LIBRARIES
Model name
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
FXCPU
WRITING/READING
DATA
■
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 63
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Item
Description
• A modified ladder program must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels.
• A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels.
• If a ladder program before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed
counter output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (SORT2,
TBL, RBFM, WBFM), the ladder program cannot be changed.
• A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.
• If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, application
instructions, etc., the number of NOPs equivalent to the number of steps removed are
added.
• When using FX3S, FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC, or FX3UC
• Do not perform Online program change for positioning instructions (DSZR, DVIT, ZRN,
PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) while the pulse output instruction is being executed. The pulse
output stops if the ladder program is online-changed during the pulse output instruction
execution.
PLSV instruction [without acceleration or deceleration] stops immediately.
DSZR, DVIT, ZRN, PLSV [with acceleration and deceleration] DRVI and DRVA
instructions stop after decreasing the speed.
When these instructions are stopped as a result of Online program change, deactivate
the instructions (OFF) and activate them again (ON).
• For the IVMC, IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, and IVBWR inverter communication
instructions, do not perform Online program change during communication (while the
instruction is being activated). Communication may stop if Online program change is
performed during inverter communication.
If communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN.
• Do not perform Online program change on a function block which contains pulse output
instructions (PLSY, PWM, and PLSR).
• The error cannot be detected when performing Online program change even if the
ladder program contains the ladder error.
After switching the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN, the error will be
detected.
• A substitute instruction for a new instruction cannot be inserted or replaced in the
program.
• Even a substitute instruction is already written in a program, the function is disabled
due to Online program change.
• When using FXU (V3.07 or later)
or FX2C*1
• The operations of the CMP, ZCP, MOV, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, and DEC
instructions can be processed at a high speed when word devices specified by digit or
index modification are not set to the data.
However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change
or insertion is performed.
• The OFF execution time of the application instructions for FXU (V3.07 or later) and
FX2C can be processed at a high speed.
However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change
or insertion is performed. The processing time is approximately 60% of that for FXU
(V2.30 or earlier).
• When using FXU
(V2.1 to V2.30)
15 - 64
• The application instructions and element numbers added to FXU (V3.07 or later) are
written to the programmable controller CPU program memory. The programmable
controller CPU assumes that these instructions are non-processing instructions and
continues its operation.
However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from
STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the 'PROG-E LED' indicator
flashes. If this happens, correct application instructions and element numbers not
supported and batch-transfer the correct program.
• If an element number specified as an operand of application instructions is not
supported by FXU (V2.1 to V2.30), the instruction is written to the programmable
controller CPU program memory as it is. In this case, an element number range over
operation error occurs. The programmable controller CPU assumes that these
instructions are non-processing instructions and continues its operation.
However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from
STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the "PROG-E LED" indicator
flashes. If this happens, batch-transfer the program with the correct operand set to
application instructions.
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15.9 Online Program Change
• The pulse executing type application instruction is not available for FX0N. If this
instruction is written, the message "Write failure" is displayed, and the program change
is stopped.
• When using FX0N, FX1S, FX1N,
FXU, FX2N, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C,
or FX2NC
• When using FX3UC (earlier than
V2.00)
• When using FX3S, FX3G, FX3U,
or FX3GC
• When using FX3UC (V2.00 or
later)
• When using FX3U/FX3UC (V3.00
or later)
• Ladder program change of multiple ladder blocks at a time is possible and the changes
can be written with Online program change. However, the number of the program steps
from the start ladder block to the end circuit after editing must be within 256 steps
(including unchanged ladder programs). To change programs with more than 256
steps, use the Batch-transfer function.
• Online program change can be performed when the protection status (enable or
disable) for the execution program protection setting of a block password is set same
as that for the target programmable controller CPU.
Each deteriorated function can be recovered by switching the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN after
Online program change.
10
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
*1 :
• Ladder program change is possible for one ladder block at a time and the number of
program steps after editing (adding/deleting) must be within 127 (including an NOP
immediately after the ladder block and excluding the end circuit).
To change programs with more than 127 steps, use the Batch-transfer function.
SEARCH/REPLACE
• If a written element number is not supported by FX0N, the message "The changed
program contains an instruction or device not supported for Online program change.
Online program change operation is disabled for this program" is displayed, and the
program change is stopped.
• When using FX0N (V1.10 or later)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Description
PRINTING
Item
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 65
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to calculate a memory size required when data in a user-created project is
written to the programmable controller CPU.
15.10.1
Offline calculation and Online calculation
There are two ways to calculate the memory size: the offline calculation and the online calculation.
(Section 15.10.3)
For FXCPU, only the offline calculation is supported.
(Section 15.10.4)
● Offline calculation
Displays the size of available memory if data are written to the programmable controller CPU after its
memory is initialized by such as the PLC memory format function.
In the system file memory size entry field, enter the system file size acquired by the online
calculation.
● Online calculation
Displays the size of available memory if selected files are actually written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Regarding data written on the programmable controller CPU, the exact size of available memory can
be confirmed.
This function is available when GX Works2 is capable of communicating with the programmable
controller CPU.
15.10.2
Setting target data for memory size calculation
(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Set the target data for memory size calculation.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Confirm Memory Size].
File list
15 - 66
15.10.1 Offline calculation and Online calculation
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
Item
Description
Target Memory/Memory Card Type*1
Set the memory of which the size is to be calculated, and memory card
type.
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following
manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection)
File list
–
Target
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, when the standard RAM is selected for "Target Memory", "Extended
SRAM Cassette Type" is displayed.
2. Click the
11
button.
PRINTING
The result of memory size calculation is displayed. (Section 15.10.3)
Screen button
12
15.10.3
SETTING OPTIONS
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
Confirming result of memory size calculation
(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Display the result of memory size calculation. Additionally, the offline calculation and online calculation
can be switched each other.
Screen display
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Calculation
result section
.
Target section
15
Sum total section
Memory status
graph section
WRITING/READING
DATA
Select [Tool]  [Confirm Memory Size] 
<Offline calculation>
13
USING LIBRARIES
*1 :
Select data of which the size is to be calculated.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
1. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Operating procedure
System file memory
size entry field
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15 - 67
15 WRITING/READING DATA
<Online calculation>
Target section
Calculation
result section
Sum total section
Memory status
graph section
Display contents
Item
Description
Target Memory
Display the target memory and IC card type selected on the Confirm
Memory Size screen.
Display Option
Select the unit (Byte/Step/%) used for displaying the file size and memory
size.
<<Offline>>/<<Online>>
Switch the result display between the offline calculation and online
calculation.
The result of the offline calculation is displayed just after the execution of
the memory size calculation.
Calculation result section
–
Target section
System file memory size
entry field (Offline
calculation only)
Display the size of the data selected on the Confirm Memory Size screen in
units of files.
Enter the memory size of system files.
The default value is "0" at the offline calculation.
Enter the memory size when using system files.
When the exact memory size is required, it can be confirmed by the online
calculation.
The memory size of system files may differ depending on target memory.
Sum total section
Display the calculation result according to conditions of the target memory,
IC card type, and files specified in the Confirm Memory Size screen.
Memory status graph section
Display the calculation result in a circle graph.
It is displayed in red when there is no available memory.
Detail
Display the detailed information of the result of the memory size calculation.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 68
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
PLC parameter, network parameter, and redundant parameter
Boot file
Created when the boot file setting is configured.
Remote password
Created when the remote password setting is configured.
Local devices
Local device
Error history file
System files
For details of each file, refer to the following manuals.
User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the
CPU module to be used
User setting system
area
An area specified when the programmable controller CPU memory is
formatted.
(For formatting programmable controller CPU memory, Section 20.3)
PLC user data
User-optional data
Graphic data for PX
Developer
User-created graphic data
● Used capacity
The total size of file which is not selected as a target of memory size calculation among the data written in a
programmable controller CPU is displayed as "Use Volume".
The used capacity is displayed at the online calculation.
Example) When only Program SUB1 (2500 byte) is selected as the memory size calculation target when Program
MAIN (4000 byte) and SUB1 have been written to the programmable controller CPU.
<Result of memory size calculation (Online calculation)>
PRINTING
Parameter file
Sampling trace files Sampling trace file
11
Parameter
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Parameters
File
13
USING LIBRARIES
Target
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
● File size of symbolic information
The symbolic information in a project (with labels) is compressed every compilation. Since date information is added
every time, the memory size may vary even though the symbolic information itself is not changed.
● File size units for programmable controller CPUs
Memory of a programmable controller CPU is occupied by file size units. Therefore, the required memory size may be
larger than the actual file size.
For details of file size units, refer to the following manuals.
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
● Memory size required for parameters and system files
Parameters/system files consist of multiple files.
The memory size required to store parameters/system files is the total of memory areas occupied by each files.
The following table shows files included in parameters and system files.
However, a sampling trace file and local device are displayed separately.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
● Memory capacity
The memory capacity may be displayed smaller than it really is.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15 - 69
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10.4
Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
Display sizes and capacities of program and symbolic information calculated offline.
Displayed values are values when the program and parameters are written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [Confirm Memory Size].
Display contents
Item
Status
Display compilation status.
"---" is displayed for Simple projects (without labels).
Program Size
Display the number of current program steps.
"---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.
Program Capacity
Display the value set for "Program Capacity" on the <<Memory Capacity>> tab
of PLC parameter of the project.
Error Information
Display error information regarding the program size and capacity.
Confirm Symbolic Information*1
Select this to calculate the symbolic information size and capacity.
Memory Type
Select a memory type used on the programmable controller CPU.
The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the
memory type.
Symbolic Information Size
Display the current symbolic information size in byte unit.
"---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.
Symbolic Information
Capacity
Display the symbolic information capacity in byte unit.
The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the
memory type used on the programmable controller CPU or the memory
capacity set in the PLC parameter.
Error Information
Display error information regarding the symbolic information size and capacity.
Device Comment Points*2
Display the number of global device comments to be written.
MaximumComment Points*2
Display the number of comments set to Comments Capacity in <<Memory
Capacity>> of PLC parameter.
(Global Device Comment Registered
Points)
Display the total number of global device comments being set.
*1 :
*2 :
15 - 70
Description
This item is displayed only for FX3U and FX3UC projects with labels.
For the FX0S or FX0 project, the items are disabled.
15.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
● File size of symbolic information
For projects with labels, the symbolic information is compressed each time the memory capacity is calculated or data is
written to the programmable controller CPU. Since date information is included when the symbolic information is
compressed, its memory capacity may change even though the symbolic information has not been changed.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
15 - 71
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10.5
Considerations of calculating memory size
The following explains the considerations of calculating memory size.
15 - 72
1)
Memory size calculation using the offline calculation
A memory size of system files may differ depending on the target memory.
Confirm a memory size of system files using the online calculation and enter the value in the
system file memory size entry field.
Without using the value calculated by the online calculation, an accurate result may not be
ensured.
2)
Limit of the number of files
The number of files that can be stored on the programmable controller CPU is limited, however,
the memory size calculation ignores the limit.
Set target data so that the number of files including those stored on the programmable controller
CPU is less or equal to the limit.
For the number of files which can be stored on a programmable controller CPU, refer to the
following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
3)
Specifying a range of file registers
At the online calculation, when a range smaller than that of file registers written on the
programmable controller CPU is specified for the target data of the memory size calculation, the
difference from the written file registers is displayed as "Use Volume".
4)
Calculating a memory size of a Flash card/standard ROM
For High Performance model QCPU, a memory size of a Flash card/standard ROM can be
confirmed only using the offline calculation.
For Universal model QCPU, a memory size of a Flash card can be confirmed only using the offline
calculation. A memory size of a standard ROM can also be confirmed using the online calculation.
To confirm a memory size required when writing data using the export to ROM function, select
'Program Memory' for "Target Memory".
5)
When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU
When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU despite enough available
memory, perform Arrange PLC Memory to secure consecutive free memory areas. (Arrange PLC
Memory Section 20.5)
6)
Calculating a memory size of an ATA card
For Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA, confirm an accurate drive capacity using the online calculation.
Depending on the versions of the Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA and CPU module, the offline calculation
may be based on a drive capacity smaller than it really is.
7)
Calculating a memory size of an SD memory card
The calculation of the memory size of an SD memory card is different between the online
calculation and the offline calculation.
For the offline calculation, the memory size is calculated based on the size of the SD memory card
selected for "Memory Card Type".
For the online calculation, the memory size is calculated based on the size of the SD memory card
inserted on the programmable controller CPU.
15.10.5 Considerations of calculating memory size
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
For the system configuration and other information to use a memory card on a personal computer,
refer to Section 2.4.
For writing/reading data when the memory card is installed to a programmable controller CPU, refer to
Section 15.1.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains the functions for writing/reading data to/from a memory card installed on a
personal computer.
If a memory card cannot be installed to a programmable controller CPU, the data can be written to/
read from the memory card on a personal computer by using this function.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
SETTING OPTIONS
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
● Formatting memory cards
Format the memory card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online]  [PLC Memory
Operation]  [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2.
If a memory card is formatted using the function such as Windows® format function it may not be used on the
programmable controller CPU.
● PLC user data
The PLC user data in the memory card installed on a personal computer cannot write/read to/from GX Works2 directly.
Write/read the data using the application such as Windows® Explorer.
For writing/reading the PLC user data in the memory card installed to a programmable controller CPU, refer to
Section 15.5.
● Reading intelligent function module data
To read intelligent function module data, create the intelligent function module data in the project in advance.
If the intelligent function module data that match the data in the memory card or the image data do not exist, the data
are read as data of an unsupported module.
PRINTING
11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 73
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.11.1
Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1: Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U) only
*2: Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Write/read data in a memory card (ATA card, SRAM card or SD memory card) installed on a personal
computer to/from GX Works2.
GX Works2
Write/Read IC Memory Card
Insert to card reader or card slot
MITSUBISHI
MELSEC
Writing/reading data
Screen display
Select [Tool]  [IC Memory Card]  [Write IC Memory Card]/[Read IC Memory Card].
<Screen for writing IC memory card>
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
15 - 74
Description
Drive/Path
Click the
button and select a drive on the Browse for Folder screen.
If a folder is selected, it cannot be used on a programmable controller CPU.
Title
Enter title of the target memory when writing data to the IC memory card.
Display the title of the target memory when reading data from the IC memory card.
Edit Data
(Write IC Memory Card only)
Select data to be written from the data list.
Display the data list of the open project.
(Section 15.1)
IC Memory Data
(Read IC Memory Card only)
Select data to be read from the data list.
Display the data list of the project in the memory card.
(Section 15.1)
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
button.
For the Write IC Memory Card function, the specified data are written to the memory card.
For the Read IC Memory Card function, the specified data are read from the memory card.
Screen button
●
Opens the screen to set a password to a specified data when writing data to an IC memory card.
The set password is validated after data are written to the IC memory card.
For details of setting a password, refer to the following sections.
For QCPU (Q mode) (except for High-speed Universal model QCPU) Section 16.2.1
For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU Section 16.3.1
< Create/Change Password (Target Project Data) screen (For QCPU (Q mode)) >
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
2. Click the
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
●
Opens the screen to cancel a set password when writing data to an IC memory card.
The set password is canceled after data are written to the IC memory card.
For details of canceling a password, refer to the following sections.
For QCPU (Q mode) (except for High-speed Universal model QCPU) Section 16.2.2
For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU Section 16.3.2
USING LIBRARIES
13
< Delete Password (Target Project Data) screen (For QCPU (Q mode)) >
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Canceling a password
The password cancellation on the Delete Password screen can only be performed while the project is opened after the
password is set.
To cancel the password after the project is reopened, overwrite the data by writing data to the IC memory card without
setting a password.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15 - 75
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Considerations when reading program files with the Read IC Memory Card
function
Perform the following operations when reading program files with the Read IC Memory Card function.
● When parameters are written to the IC memory card along with the program files
Read parameters along with the program files.
● When parameters are not written to the IC memory card along with the program files
Before reading the program files, open the project at the time of writing data to the IC memory card.
Import the parameters used to write data to the IC memory card from the programmable controller
CPU.
15 - 76
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Read project data saved on an SD memory card with the batch save function of programmable
controller CPU, or copy all data to a personal computer.
Write project data to an SD memory card in the format which can be used for the batch load function of
programmable controller CPU.
For the batch save/batch load function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Insert to card reader
or card slot
10
11
PRINTING
Insert to card slot
GX Works2
Write to/Read from IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy)
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/
batch load function)
SEARCH/REPLACE
15.11.2
12
Writing/reading
data
Screen display
13
USING LIBRARIES
Select [Tool]  [IC Memory Card]  [Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)]/[Read from
IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)].
<For writing IC memory card (edit and data copy)>
SETTING OPTIONS
Batch save/load
function of programmable
controller CPU
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function)
15 - 77
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Drive
Select a drive to write/read data.
Folder name
A folder in the "SaveLoad" folder on the specified drive is displayed.
Select a folder to write/read data.
Title
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, enter a title of the folder
selected for "Folder name".
For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the title of the folder
selected for "Folder name" is displayed.
Edit Data
(for Write to IC Memory Card (Edit
and Data copy))
Display the data list of the open project.
Select data to be written from the data list.
IC Memory Data
(for Read from IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy))
Display the data list of the project in the memory card.
Select data to be read from the data list.
PLC user data save destination
–
Save PLC user data
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, select this to write PLC
user data.
For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, select this to copy PLC
user data to a personal computer.]
Source drive/path to write
(for Write to IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy))
Click the
button and select a drive/path on which PLC user data to be
written on the IC memory card are saved.
Source drive/path to read
(for Read from IC Memory
Card (Edit and Data Copy))
Click the
Target memory
(for Write to IC Memory Card
(Edit and Data Copy))
Specify a save destination for PLC user data selected for "Source drive/path to write".
2. Click the
button and select a drive/path to save user data.
button.
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the specified data are written to the
memory card.
For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the specified data are read from
the memory card.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1 and Section 15.11.1.
●
Copies all data saved with the batch save function of programmable controller CPU on the IC
memory card to the copy destination specified for "Source drive/path to".
● Considerations for writing data to SD memory card
Data are written after all files in the target folder are deleted.
15 - 78
15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function)
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
Head
FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ) with a serial number whose first five digits are "12012" or higher only
This section explains how to read local device data from the programmable controller CPU and save
the data on a personal computer in CSV format.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online]  [Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV].
The Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV screen is displayed.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
2. Enter a name of the file to be saved.
3. Click the
button.
The data of local devices are saved on the personal computer.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
15 - 79
15 WRITING/READING DATA
■
Formatting CSV files
Saved CSV files are displayed as shown below when they are opened by Excel.
Example) The following tables show the settings of this example.
• Setting for programs and file usability
Program name
File usability setting
MAIN
Based on PLC file settings
SUB
Not used
SUB2
Based on PLC file settings
• Setting for local devices
Device name
Device range
M
0 to 49
T
0 to 29
D
100 to 149
<CSV file>
Program name
File usability setting
Local devices of
program MAIN
For T, ST, and C, contacts,
coils, and current values
are read respectively.
Device names and
local device values
Program name
File usability setting
Program name
File usability setting
Device names and
local device values
15 - 80
Local devices of
program SUB
Local devices of
program SUB2
PROTECTING DATA
10
This chapter explains the function for protecting the project data and the programmable controller
CPU data against such as falsification and leak.
SEARCH/REPLACE
16
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
PRINTING
11
Functions to Protect Data
16 - 2
16.2
Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16 - 3
16.3
Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
16 - 8
16.4
Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
16 - 14
13
16.5
Locking with Security Key
16 - 18
USING LIBRARIES
16.1
SETTING OPTIONS
12
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16 - 1
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.1
Functions to Protect Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
The function to protect data differs according to the target data or target CPU.
The following table shows the list of functions for protecting data.
For "(Structured)" indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manual.
 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
: Supported
×: Not supported
Target CPU
Target data
QCPU
(Q mode)
LCPU
Remote
I/O
module
Function
Communication
FXCPU
head module
Reference





Security
Section 4.10
*1
×
×
×
×
Soft Security Key Management
Section 4.11
POU


×
×

Block Password
Section 4.12
User library


×
×

Change Password
(Structured)



*2
×
Remote Password
Section 6.4
Project data
Programmable
controller CPU data
*3
×
×
×
×
*1

×
×
×
×
×
×
×

*1
×
×
×
*4
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
*6 :
*5
×
×
Section 16.2
Password
Section 16.3
Keyword
Section 16.4
×
Soft Security Key Management
Section 16.5
*6
Execution program protection
(Block Password)
Section 4.12
For High-speed Universal model QCPU only
Supported by CC IE Field head module only.
Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU.
For a module with the serial number whose first 5 digits are "19012" or higher.
For a module with the serial number whose first 5 digits are "18112" or higher.
For FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only
■
Differences of functions
The following table shows the differences of functions for protecting data.
: Applicable
×: Not applicable
Function
Security
Soft Security
Key
Management
Block
Password
Change
Password
Remote
Password
Password/
Keyword
Protect project data



×
×
×
Protect programmable
controller CPU
×

×
×


Protect library data
×
×
×

×
×
Limit users who can disable
the protection function



×


Limit personal computers that
can disable the protection
function
×

×
×
×
×
Transfer the security setting to
another personal computer
×

×
×
×
×
Item
16 - 2
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU.
This section explains how to register a password to protect data in QCPU (Q mode).
For registering/changing passwords on High-speed Universal model QCPU, refer to Section 16.3.
To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect
the project data. (Section 4.10)
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9
Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
16.2
SETTING OPTIONS
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
● Password management
Keep passwords in a secure place.
If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function
(Section 20.3) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
● Registering a password
• Set a password with 4 characters. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of Registration Conditions" on the
Input Password screen.
• A password can be set for the following items.
• Program
• Device comment
• Device initial value
● Registering/changing/canceling passwords when writing data to an IC memory card
When the Create/Change Password screen or the Delete Password screen is opened from the IC Memory Card
Operation screen, passwords of data in the project are registered/changed/canceled. Therefore, "Target Memory" is
not displayed.
● Unlocking password
When files with the same name exist on the different drives (such as program memory and standard RAM), the
password which is unlocked first is applied to the other file.
• With the same password
When one file is unlocked, the other file with the same name is also unlocked.
• With the different password
Enter the password to unlock the file with the same name.
PRINTING
11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16 - 3
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.2.1
Registering/changing password
Register a password to project data on a programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [New].
16 - 4
16.2.1 Registering/changing password
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Operating procedure
1. Select the target memory.
2. Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.
3. Click the
10
button.
SEARCH/REPLACE
The Input Password screen is displayed.
PRINTING
11
4. Set the items on the screen.
12
Description
Select a condition for password check.
Read/Write Protection
Select this to check a password when data are read in addition to "Write Protection".
Write Protection
Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable controller
CPU.
New Password
Enter a new password or a password after change.
Re-enter Password
Enter the new password again for confirmation.
13
button.
USING LIBRARIES
5. Click the
The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.
Symbol
SETTING OPTIONS
Item
Registration Condition
is appended to the data for which a password is registered.
6. Click the
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
button.
The password is registered or changed for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
● Universal model QCPU
For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the programmable controller CPU is
running, the program memory batch transfer is executed. (Section 15.6)
● Changing a password
If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old
password to unlock the password.
16.2.1 Registering/changing password
16 - 5
16
PROTECTING
DATA
● Registering a password
• A password can be set to multiple data by holding down the  or  key and selecting the data in the data list.
• A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination
memory.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.2.2
Canceling password
Cancel the password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Delete].
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.
2. Click the
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
This screen is not displayed when the password has
already been canceled.
3. Enter the password set to the data.
4. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable
controller CPU is canceled.
16 - 6
16.2.2 Canceling password
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
9
Unlocking password temporarily
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the password set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
16.2.3
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Disable].
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.
13
button.
USING LIBRARIES
2. Click the
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
3. Enter the password set to the data.
4. Click the
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
button.
The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.
15
button.
WRITING/READING
DATA
5. Click the
The password set to the data on the programmable
controller CPU is temporarily unlocked.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16 - 7
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.3
Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only.
This section explains how to register a password to protect data in High-speed Universal model
QCPU/LCPU.
To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect
the project data. (Section 4.10)
● Password management
Keep passwords in a secure place.
If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function
(Section 20.3) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
● Registering a password
• Set a password with the number of characters between 4 and 32. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of
Registration Conditions" on the Input Password screen.
• A password can be set for the following items.
• Symbolic information
• Program
• PLC parameter, network parameter
• Device comment
• Device initial value
● Registering/changing/canceling passwords when writing data to an IC memory card
When the Create/Change Password screen or the Delete Password screen is opened from the IC Memory Card
Operation screen, passwords of data in the project are registered/changed/canceled. Therefore, "Target Memory" is
not displayed.
● Unlocking password
When files with the same name exist on the different drives (such as program memory and standard RAM), the
password which is unlocked first is applied to the other file.
• With the same password
When one file is unlocked, the other file with the same name is also unlocked.
• With the different password
Enter the password to unlock the file with the same name.
16 - 8
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
9
Registering/changing password
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
16.3.1
Register a password to project data on a programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [New].
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Select the target memory.
2. Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.
button.
USING LIBRARIES
3. Click the
13
The Input Password screen is displayed.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16.3.1 Registering/changing password
16 - 9
16 PROTECTING DATA
4. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Registration Condition
Select a condition for password check.
Read protection
Select this to check a password when data are read from the programmable controller
CPU.
Write protection
Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable controller
CPU.
Read protection/Write
protection
Select this to check a password when data are written in addition to "Read protection".
Use the same password for read
protection/write protection
Select this to use the same password for the read protection and write protection when
‘Read protection/Write protection’ is selected in "Registration Condition".
New Password
(Read Protection)
Enter a new password or a password after change.
The password enables the read protection.
Re-enter Password
(Read Protection)
Enter the new password again for confirmation.
New Password
(Write Protection)
Enter a new password or a password after change.
The password enables the write protection.
This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write
protection" is selected.
Re-enter Password
(Write Protection)
Enter the new password again for confirmation.
This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write
protection" is selected.
5. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.
Symbol
6. Click the
is appended to the data for which a password is registered.
button.
The password is registered or changed for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
● Registering a password
• A password can be set to multiple data by holding down the  or  key and selecting the data in the data list.
• A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination
memory.
● Changing a password
If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old
password to unlock the password.
16 - 10
16.3.1 Registering/changing password
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
9
Canceling password
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
16.3.2
Cancel the password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Delete].
PRINTING
11
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.
SETTING OPTIONS
2. Click the
12
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
This screen is not displayed when the password has already been
canceled.
USING LIBRARIES
13
Item
Disable Password
(Read Protection)
Disable Password
(Write Protection)
4. Click the
Select the condition for password cancellation when the password registration
condition of the data selected is "Read Protection/Write Protection".
Enter the password set to the data.
15
button.
The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.
5. Click the
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
Delete Condition
Description
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
3. Set the items on the screen.
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller
CPU is canceled.
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16.3.2 Canceling password
16 - 11
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.3.3
Unlocking password temporarily
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the password set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Disable].
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.
2. Click the
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Disable Condition
Disable Password
(Read Protection)
Disable Password
(Write Protection)
16 - 12
Description
Select the condition for password unlock when the password registration condition of
the data selected is "Read Protection/Write Protection".
Enter the password set to the data.
16.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
9
button.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
4. Click the
The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller
CPU is temporarily unlocked.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
PRINTING
11
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16 - 13
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.4
Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to register a keyword to protect data in FX series programmable controller
CPU.
To register a keyword, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected using this function. Use the project security function to protect the
project data. (Section 4.10)
For the FX series versions which support this function, refer to the user's manual of the
programmable controller CPU to be used.
● Keyword management
Do not lose the keywords.
If a registered keyword is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory clear function
(Section 20.4) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
16.4.1
Registering/changing keyword
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [New].
16 - 14
16.4.1 Registering/changing keyword
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Operating procedure
1. Select the function. (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only)
Select either the terminable limitation or permanent limitation.
Item
Description
Keyword Protection
Set the keyword for the limitation.
Limitation can be canceled.
Permanent PLC Lock
Setting the keyword is unnecessary.
Limitation cannot be canceled.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10
Item
Description
Keyword (8 digits)
Set 8 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.
This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '8 digits' is selected.
The Read/Write Protection is available.
Keyword (16 digits)
Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.
This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '16 digits' is selected.
This item is supported only by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
The protection level can be selected from "Read/Write Protection", "Write Protection", and
"All Online Operation Protection".
Customer
Keyword*1
Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.
This item can be set when "Keyword (16 digits)" is set and "Customer keyword is used (16
digits)" is selected.
This item is supported only by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
The protection level is the same as that for "Keyword (16 digits)".
*1 :
Set this item combining with "Keyword (16 digits)" as necessary. The customer keyword can be disabled temporarily
but it cannot be changed or canceled.
USING LIBRARIES
For the programmable controller CPU other than FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC,
"Protection Level" is fixed to 'Read/Write Protection'.
Item
Description
Limit the read, write, and verify operations.
Limit the write operation.
All Online Operation Protection
Limit the read, write, verify, and device monitor operations.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
Write Protection
button.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
16
PROTECTING
DATA
4. Click the
12
13
3. Select the protection level.
Read/Write Protection
11
PRINTING
For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC, select '16 digits' or '8 digits'.
SETTING OPTIONS
2. For "Keyword Protection", set "Keyword Input".
16.4.1 Registering/changing keyword
16 - 15
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.4.2
Canceling keyword
Cancel the keyword set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Delete].
Operating procedure
1. Enter the keyword being registered.
Enter only the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered. The customer
keyword cannot be canceled.
2. Click the
button.
The keyword registered on the programmable controller CPU is canceled.
16 - 16
16.4.2 Canceling keyword
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
9
Unlocking keyword temporarily
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the keyword is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the keyword set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
16.4.3
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Password/Keyword]  [Disable].
PRINTING
11
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
Item
Description
Keyword Disable
Select this to unlock the keyword temporarily.
Enter the keyword registered to the programmable controller CPU. Enter only
the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered.
When the customer keyword is registered, the keyword can be disabled by
entering the customer keyword.*1
Keyword
Keyword Protect*1
*1 :
Select this to get the keyword unlocked status to the locked status.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only
2. Click the
button.
13
USING LIBRARIES
1. Set the items on the screen.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
The selected operation (Keyword Disable/Keyword Protect) is executed.
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16.4.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily
16 - 17
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.5
Locking with Security Key
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to lock the programmable controller CPU with a security key and limit the
access.
For creating, importing/exporting, or deleting security keys, refer to Section 4.11.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Soft Security Key Management]
Display contents
Item
Key Information Registered in the
Personal Computer
Display the information of selected security key. (Section 4.11.1)
<<CPU>>
Display the screen to lock/unlock the programmable controller CPU.
Connection Destination Channel
List
–
Connection Interface
Display the interface on the personal computer and the interface on the programmable
controller CPU connected to the personal computer.
Network No.
Display the network number of the connection destination.
Station No.
Display the station number of the connection destination.
PLC Type
Display the programmable controller type of the connection destination.
Security Key Information
–
Name
Display the name of the security key which is used to lock the programmable controller
CPU.
Creation Date
Display the date of creation of the security key which is used to lock the programmable
controller CPU.
Explanation
16 - 18
Description
Display the information when the cursor is placed on the button on the screen.
16.5 Locking with Security Key
9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
Operating procedure
1. Select the security key to lock the programmable controller CPU from "Key
Information Registered in the Personal Computer".
2. Click the
button.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The programmable controller CPU is locked with the selected security key.
Screen button
●
Acquires the security key information of the programmable controller CPU in the connection
destination and displays it.
11
●
PRINTING
Unlocks the locked programmable controller CPU.
● Considerations when locking programmable controller CPU
The programmable controller CPU cannot be locked with the security key when it is in RUN status. Set the
programmable controller CPU to STOP status to lock it with the security key.
SETTING OPTIONS
12
USING LIBRARIES
13
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
WRITING/READING
DATA
15
PROTECTING
DATA
16
16 - 19
16 PROTECTING DATA
MEMO
16 - 20
17
MONITORING
17
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
This chapter explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU
connected to the personal computer.
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
Monitoring Programs
17 - 7
17.3
Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17 - 8
17.4
Monitoring Program List
17 - 12
17.5
Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17 - 15
17.6
Registering and Monitoring Devices
17 - 16
17.7
Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules
17 - 26
17.8
Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows
17 - 26
17.9
Using Realtime Monitor Function
17 - 27
21
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
17.2
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
17 - 2
A
APPENDIX
Monitoring Function
I
INDEX
17.1
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
17 - 1
17 MONITORING
17.1
Monitoring Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to monitor programs.
The monitoring function is a function used to check operating status of a programmable controller
CPU by connecting a personal computer and a programmable controller CPU.
17.1.1
Starting/stopping monitoring
The monitoring function can be started/stopped by any of the following menus.
• [Online]  [Monitor]  [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring (All Windows)]
• [Online]  [Monitor]  [Start Monitoring]/[Stop Monitoring]
• [Online]  [Watch]  [Start Watching]/[Stop Watching]
The menu to start/stop monitoring differs according to the monitoring type.
The following table shows the monitoring type to which the execution is applied by each menu.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
(Simple)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent)
… GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Menu
Start/Stop
monitoring (All
windows)
Start/stop
monitoring*1
Start/stop watching*1
Program monitoring


×
Section 17.2
(Simple)
(Structured)
Device/buffer memory batch
monitoring


×
Section 17.3
Program list monitoring

×*2
×
Section 17.4
Interrupt program monitoring

×*2
×
Section 17.5
SFC all block batch monitoring


×
(Simple)
Monitoring type
Watch

×

Section 17.6
Intelligent function module monitoring

×

(Intelligent)
*1 :
*2 :
17 - 2
Reference
Applied to active windows.
The monitoring can be started/stopped by the buttons on the screen.
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
17.1 Monitoring Function
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
19
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
● Monitor values
The values at execution of END instruction are displayed.
To display the monitor values of ladder program or SFC program in process, use the Monitor Condition Setting function.
● When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer
• When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer, and if an communication error occurs in one of
the projects, the monitoring speed of the other projects may become slow.
The operation will be back to normal when the error message displayed in the project in which the communication
error occurred is closed.
• When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer, the following functions may not be performed
normally.
• Program list monitoring
• Interrupt program list monitoring
• Monitoring condition setting
• Monitoring stop condition setting
• Scan time measurement
● Monitoring devices that cannot be monitored
When devices that cannot be monitored are specified in a program monitoring, watch, or device/buffer memory batch
monitoring execution, the monitoring result is displayed as "FFFFH(-1)".
MONITORING
17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
17 - 3
17 MONITORING
17.1.2
Monitoring status
Monitoring status is displayed on the tool bar during monitoring on the work window.
Monitoring status bar is hidden when monitoring all items is stopped.
Screen display
At the start of monitoring
● When connected to a programmable controller CPU
Items displayed on the screen differ according to the programmable controller type. The following are
the examples of the Monitor Status screen for High Performance model QCPU and Redundant CPU.
<High Performance model QCPU>
Scan time status
Local device monitoring target selection field
USER status
ERR. status
RUN/STOP status
Connection status
<Redundant CPU>
Scan time status
Connection status
Local device monitoring target
selection field
System A/system B status
Control system/standby system status
USER status
ERR. status
RUN/STOP status
● During simulation
Items displayed on the screen differ according to the programmable controller type. The following is
the example of the Monitor Status screen for High Performance model QCPU.
<High Performance model QCPU>
Scan time status
USER status
ERR. status
RUN/STOP status
Connection status
17 - 4
17.1.2 Monitoring status
Local device monitoring target selection field
Unsupported instructions
17.1 Monitoring Function
17
Display contents
Description
MONITORING
Item
Display the connection status between a programmable controller CPU and
personal computer in which the simulation function is started.
Connection status

When connected to a programmable controller CPU During simulation
Display the programmable controller CPU status operated by the key switch on the
programmable controller CPU or the remote operation from GX Works2.
RUN/STOP status
18
RUN
*1
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
STOP
STEP-RUN
Display the ERR. LED status of the programmable controller CPU.
The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked.
PLC diagnostics screen (Section 21.1)
ERR. status
19
ERR. is OFF.
ERR. is flashing.
Display the USER LED status of the programmable controller CPU.
The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked.
PLC diagnostics screen (Section 21.1)
20
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
USER is OFF.
USER is ON.

Control system/standby system status
USER is flashing.
Display the control system/standby system status of Redundant CPU.
Control system
21
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
Standby system
Unknown
System A/system B status
Display the system A/system B status of Redundant CPU.
System A
System B
22
Unknown
Status of device test with execution
condition*1
Display the status of the device test with execution condition.
Flash when data on the programmable controller CPU and one being edited are not
identical. The registered information on the programmable controller CPU is read
out when the monitor is restarted.
Return to ON when the both data are identical.
Execution program status*3
RAM, EPROM, EEPROM (FX3UC : FLROM)
Scan time status
Display the maximum scan time of the monitor target programmable controller CPU.
For QCPU (Q mode), the display is given in units of 0.1ms.
Local device monitoring target selection
field*1,*2
Select the name of the program for which local device monitoring is performed.
If "Auto setting" is selected, the local devices in the program on the active screen
are automatically monitored.
Not displayed by Q00UJ.
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
USER status*1,*2
A
APPENDIX

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
ERR. is ON.
INDEX
I
17.1.2 Monitoring status
17 - 5
17 MONITORING
Item
Unsupported instructions
Description
Display whether an unsupported instruction exists or not when the simulation
function is executed.
The Instructions Unsupported by Simulation screen is displayed when the icon is
clicked.
Checking unsupported instruction/device (Section 18.3)
Unsupported instruction exists.
Unsupported instruction does not exist.
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
Not supported by FXCPU.
Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module.
Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
● Operation of the PLC Memory Clear function during the monitoring of local devices
When the "Clear Device's whole Memory" operation is executed during the monitoring of local devices, local devices
are cleared in the programs selected in the 'local device monitoring target selection field' on the monitoring status bar.
17 - 6
17.1.2 Monitoring status
17.2 Monitoring Programs
17
Monitoring Programs
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU.
The monitored items differ according to the programming language used.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
Screen display
).
19
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Start Monitoring] (
MONITORING
17.2
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
A
APPENDIX
● Monitor other programs during monitoring
By selecting the following option, the monitor can be started automatically when opening the other program editors
while displaying the monitoring status. However, unconverted or uncompiled programs cannot be started monitoring.
[Tool]  [Option]  "Monitor"  "Common"  "Start monitoring if converted or compiled program is opened during
monitoring"
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
INDEX
I
17 - 7
17 MONITORING
17.3
Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to monitor devices/buffer memory in batch.
For device batch monitoring, specify the target devices.
For buffer memory batch monitoring, specify the address of the intelligent function module.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] (
).
Decimal/Hexadecimal selection
Device comment display
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Device
Description
Select this to monitor devices in batch.
Device Name
Select this to enter the name of a device to be monitored in batch.
T/C Set Value
Reference Program*1
Specify the program whose setting value is to be displayed when monitoring timer
(T) or counter (C) in batch.
Buffer Memory
Select this to monitor buffer memory in batch.
Enter the start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal
number.
Module Start
• For FXCPU
Enter the block number of the special extension device. (0 to 7)
FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA cannot be the target of the buffer memory
monitor.
• For Multiple CPU system configuration
Specify the programmable controller CPU to be monitored.
CPU No. 1: 3E00, CPU No. 2: 3E10, CPU No. 3: 3E20, CPU No. 4: 3E30
Enter the address of buffer memory to be monitored in decimal or hexadecimal.
Decimal/Hexadecimal
selection
Select the address input format (decimal or hexadecimal).
Display format
Switch the display format of the monitoring values.
Save and read batch monitor display format files.
Device comment display
Select whether to display device comments.
When displaying device comments, device comments referred in the selected
program are displayed.
*1 :
17 - 8
Address
Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module.
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17
Screen button
(Not supported by remote I/O module)
Displays the T/C Set Value Reference Program screen.
MONITORING
●
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
Operation
• Set the items on the screen.
Set the reference of POU.
In Simple project, selection is fixed at "Project".
Project
Select this to reference a program in the project.
User Library
Select this to reference a POU in the user library by clicking
.
Select the POU to be referenced.
Projects selected by "POU Reference Selection" or POU in "User Library" is
displayed.
Items to be displayed are as shown below.
Simple project
Structured project
: Program file
: POU
●
Displays the Modify Value screen. (Section 19.1)
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
Program Reference Selection/POU
Reference Selection
Program/POU_Pool
20
Description
21
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
Item
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17 - 9
17 MONITORING
●
Displays the Display Format screen.
Set the monitor display format.
The screen displays the settings as an example. Setting is possible while confirming the display.
Operation
• Set the items on the screen.
Item
Monitor Format
Select this to monitor bits in unit of one point.
Bit and Word
Select this to monitor both bits and words in unit of one point.
Bit Multi-point
Select this to monitor bits in unit of multiple points.
Word Multi-point
Select this to monitor words in unit of multiple points.
Select the data type of the value stored in word device/buffer memory when "Bit
and Word" or "Word Multi-point" is selected for "Monitor Format".
16bit Integer
Select this to monitor in 16-bit integer.
32bit Integer
Select this to monitor in 32-bit double word (signed) integer.
Real Number (32Bit)
Select this to monitor in 32-bit (single-precision real number).
Real Number (64Bit)
Select this to monitor in 64-bit (double-precision real number).
ASCII
Select this to monitor in character string.
Value
Select either decimal or hexadecimal display format for 16-bit or 32-bit integer.
DEC
Select this to monitor in decimal number.
HEX
Select this to monitor in hexadecimal number.
Bit Order
Select the alignment sequence of bits to be monitored when "Bit and Word" or "Bit
Multi-point" is selected for "Bit".
0-F
Select this to monitor bit information from the left to the right on the screen.
This method is appropriate for monitoring bit devices.
F-0
Select this to monitor bit information from the right to the left on the screen.
This method is appropriate for monitoring word devices or buffer memory.
Switch No. of Points*1
17 - 10
Select the monitor format.
Bit
Display
*1 :
Description
Select the number of points to be monitored per row.
16 Points (8 Points)
Select this to monitor 8 points of word device or 16 points of bit device per row.
10 Points (10 Points)
Select this to monitor 10 points per row.
For FXCPU, the display can be switched between 8 points and 16 points when an X/Y device is selected.
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17
●
MONITORING
Utilizes the saved display formats.
Saves the current display format in the file.
● Opening multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens
The maximum number of Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens that can be opened is 64. A screen number is
appended at the end of the screen title.
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
●
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
● Monitoring time when multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened
When the multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened, lead time to start monitoring and
monitoring intervals may become longer.
● Accessing multiple CPU shared memory
Multiple CPU shared memory of multiple CPU system can be monitored only by the Device/Buffer Memory Batch
Monitor function.
Restrictions
● FXCPU that support the buffer memory batch monitor function
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC support the buffer memory batch monitor function.
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17 - 11
17 MONITORING
17.4
Monitoring Program List
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to monitor the processing time of programs being executed.
Screen display
Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Program List].
Display contents
Item
Entire Scan Time
Description
Display the time set in the WDT setting of PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter.
Monitoring Time
Display each monitoring time of the scan program, initial program, and low-speed program.
When the scan time exceeds these time, a programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Total Scan Time
Display the total time of each item of "Detail of Scan Time for Scan Execution".
Detail of Scan Time for Scan
Execution
Display the processing time of each item. "Constant Wait" displays the waiting time of the
constant scan when the constant scan is set. When the low-speed program execution time
is also set, however, it displays '0.000' ms.
Execution Status of Programs
Display the execution status of programs specified in the program setting of PLC
parameter.
Program
Display the program names in the input order in PLC parameter.
Execution
Display the execution type of the programs specified in PLC parameter.
Scan Time
Display the actual scan time (current value). Display '0.000' ms in the program stop
(standby) status.
Execution Count
Display the number of executions, counted from 0 at the point of turning the programmable
controller CPU to the RUN status. After reaching 65536, it returns to 0. It is stored even
after the program stops.
Screen button
●
Displays the Start Program screen. (■ Starting programs)
●
Displays the Stop Program screen. (■ Stopping programs)
17 - 12
17.4 Monitoring Program List
17
■
MONITORING
● Program list monitor
In a simulation, only "Execution Count" in "Execution Status of Programs" is monitored.
Starting programs
18
Screen display
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Select Program List screen 
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
20
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Description
Select the name of a program to be started from
Start Mode
Select the execution type.
.
21
Scan execution
Set the execution type to the scan execution.
Low speed execution
Set the execution type to the low-speed execution.
Fixed scan execution
Set the execution type to the fixed scan execution. The time input area in "Fixed scan
execution" displays the value set in "Fixed Scan Interval" on the <<Program>> tab of PLC
parameter. Change it as necessary.
2. Click the
button.
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
The selected program is started.
● Starting programs
A program can be started when using one of the following programmable controller CPUs.
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU*1
A
APPENDIX
A CPU module whose function version is B and first 5 digits of the serial No. are "18112" or higher.
I
INDEX
*1 :
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
Item
Program Name
17 - 13
17 MONITORING
■
Stopping programs
Screen display
Select Program List screen 
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Program Name
Select the name of a program to be stopped from
Stop Mode
Select the stop mode.
Stop output after stop
.
• For the scan execution type program, turn outputs OFF (Non-execution processing) at
the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan. (The
same behavior as the POFF instruction)
• For the low-speed execution type program, stop its execution, and turn outputs OFF at
the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan.
Hold output after stop
2. Click the
Place the scan execution type program in the standby status, and store the output of the
OUT instruction.
button.
The selected program turns in the stopped status.
● Stopping programs
• A program can be started when using one of the following programmable controller CPUs.
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU*1
*1 :
A CPU module whose function version is B and first 5 digits of the serial No. are "18112" or higher.
• When "Stop output after stop" is selected, outputs may not turn OFF depending on instructions. For details, refer to
the section explains the POFF instruction in the following manuals.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
17 - 14
17.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17
Monitoring Interrupt Program List
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to display the number of executions of interrupt programs used in a
program.
MONITORING
17.5
18
Screen display
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Interrupt Program List].
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
Interrupt pointer
monitor list
Operating procedure
• Input the interrupt pointer number whose execution counts are to be displayed in
"Interrupt Pointer".
Item
Description
–
Display the interrupt pointer entered in "Interrupt Pointer" on the top.
Execution Count
Start counting when the programmable controller CPU turns to the RUN status and display
the execution counts. When reaching 65536, returns to 0.
Comment
Display the device comment.
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Interrupt Pointer
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
Display contents
Interrupt pointer monitor list
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17 - 15
17 MONITORING
17.6
Registering and Monitoring Devices
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to monitor devices.
17.6.1
Registering and monitoring devices
Register multiple devices/labels in single screen and monitor them simultaneously.
Screen display
Select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Watch 1] to [Watch 4].
Display contents
Item
Display the device/label name.
Current Value
Display the current value of the device/label.
The display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current value can be switched.
(Section 17.6.3)
The display format (number display (1/0)/ ON/OFF display/ symbol display (/)) of the
current value of bit device can be switched.
Binary Value
Display the current value of the device/label in binary.
Octal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in octal.
Decimal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in decimal.
Hexadecimal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in hexadecimal.
Float Value
Display the current value of the device/label in real number.
String Value
Display the current value of the device/label in character string.
Time Value
Display the current value of the device/label in time.
Data Type
Display the data type of the device/label.
Class
Display the class of the label.
Nothing is displayed for the devices.
Device
Display the device, or device assigned to the label.
For the labels with the class of VAR_CONSTANT or VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT, the
initial value set on the label editor is displayed.
Address*1
Display the address of the device/label.
Comment
Display the comments of the device/label.
For devices, global device comments are displayed.*2
Forced I/O Status
Display the forced ON/OFF status of the X/Y devices registered on the Forced Input Output
Registration/Cancellation screen.
For the X/Y devices which are not registered to the Forced Input Output Registration
screen or other than X/Y devices, "--" is displayed
*1 :
*2 :
17 - 16
Description
Device/Label
For Structured projects only
Not displayed for Basic model QCPU because global device comment is not supported.
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17
Operating procedure
MONITORING
1. Select a row to be edited, and then click its "Device/Label" column.
The cell becomes the editing status.
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
2. Enter a device/label to be registered.
For local labels, enter as 'program (program block) name/label name'.
19
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
Example) POU_01/counter
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
3. Press the  key.
The entered device/label is registered.
When the device/label is registered, its relevant information such as data type and class is
registered automatically.
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
4. Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Start Watching].
● Registered devices/labels on Watch windows
Once devices/labels are registered and the project is saved, registered devices/labels are displayed in registered status
when the project is opened again.
● Deleting registered devices/labels
A device/label can be deleted by right-clicking the specified cell and selecting [Delete] from the shortcut menu or
pressing the  key.
● Sorting items on Watch window
Items in the columns can be sorted in the ascending/descending order by clicking each column header.
To sort the items by the "Current Value" column, display all registered devices. When the items are sorted without
displaying the registered devices, scroll the screen.
A
APPENDIX
The current value of the registered device/label is displayed.
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
INDEX
I
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17 - 17
17 MONITORING
■
Changing order of columns
Change the order of the columns by dragging and dropping a header except for "Device/Label" column.
■
Displaying/hiding columns
Display/hide the columns by right-clicking a header on the Watch window and select/clear the items to
be displayed/hidden.
The column of the selected item is inserted where the mouse is right-clicked.
When the column header of "Device/Label" is right-clicked, the column of the selected item is inserted
on the right side.
17 - 18
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17
Registering devices
Register devices to the Watch window.
■
Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor using shortcut
menu
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor using a shortcut menu.
Multiple devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
MONITORING
17.6.2
Operation
1. Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window.
2. Right-click and select [Register to Watch] from the shortcut menu.
19
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
The devices/labels are registered to the Watch window.
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
● Registering devices/labels from the label editor
When registering devices/labels to the Watch window from the label editor, right-click a target row and select [Register
to Watch] from the shortcut menu.
● Registering device/labels with shortcut menu
With the shortcut menu, devices/labels are registered to the foreground Watch window.
When two or more Watch windows are displayed in the foreground, devices/labels are registered to the Watch window
with the younger Watch window number.
When the Watch window is not displayed, the Watch window 1 is opened and devices/labels are registered to it.
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17.6.2 Registering devices
17 - 19
17 MONITORING
■
Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor with drag-anddrop operation
Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor with the drag-and-drop operation.
Multiple devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
Operation
• Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window, and drag and drop them on to
the Watch window.
Drag and drop
● Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to Watch window
The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to the Watch window can be performed only from the program editor or
the label editor.
● Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels from ladder editor
The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels can be performed when the cursor is changed to
the border of the selected range.
17 - 20
17.6.2 Registering devices
as it is moved to
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
Operation
1. Specify the automatic registration destination for "Setting for Automatic Registration to
Watch Window" under [Tool]  [Options]  "Monitor"  "Ladder/SFC".
2. Open the Watch window which is specified as an automatic registration destination.
3. Select [Online]  [Watch]  [Start Watching].
4. Move the cursor to the ladder block which is to be registered to the Watch window.
Devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position are displayed on the Watch window
which is specified as an automatic registration destination. The displayed devices/labels are
overwritten with the devices/labels in the ladder block to which the cursor is moved.
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Register devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position to the Watch window automatically by
setting the option.
When this option is set, "(Ladder/SFC Automatic Registration)" is displayed on the title bar of Watch
window.
The automatic registration to the Watch window can be executed when the program is written in Ladder
Diagram or Sequential Function Chart.
MONITORING
17
Registering devices/labels at cursor position automatically
19
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
■
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17.6.2 Registering devices
17 - 21
17 MONITORING
■
Inserting next devices/labels
Insert a row of the next device/label right after the row of the selected device/label.
When a device is selected, the device whose device number is incremented is inserted.
When a label is selected, the label registered in the next row on the label editor is inserted.
Operating procedure
1. Select a device/label on the Watch window.
2. Right-click and select [Insert Next Object] from the shortcut menu.
Or press the  +  keys.
The next device/label is inserted.
17 - 22
17.6.2 Registering devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current
values
17
MONITORING
17.6.3
Change the display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current values.
Operating procedure
18
• Right-click on the Watch window, and select [Change Value Format (Decimal)]/
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
[Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)] from the shortcut menu.
Switch to the hexadecimal display
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
Switch to the decimal display
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values
17 - 23
17 MONITORING
● Changing current values
The current value can be changed by entering a value directly in the "Current Value" column during monitoring. For bit
devices, select a row and press the  and  keys or press the  key and double-click the row to change the
current value.
To prevent from pressing the + keys by mistake, changing the current value using the shortcut key can be
invalid on the Option screen.
Select "Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter" in [Tool]  [Option]  "Monitor"  "Common".
● Displaying Watch window
If a registered device/label is a structure/function block/array label, the detail of the device/label is displayed in tree
format.
When the project is opened next time, the tree will be displayed folded.
17 - 24
17.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17
Writing/reading data to/from CSV file
MONITORING
17.6.4
Write/read devices/labels registered to the Watch window to/from the CSV file.
Screen display
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Right-click and select [Write to CSV File]/[Read from CSV File] from the shortcut menu.
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
Operating procedure
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to be opened.
button, or the
button.
The devices/labels are saved to the specified save destination, or the devices/labels are read from
the specified location to the Watch window.
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
2. Click the
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17.6.4 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file
17 - 25
17 MONITORING
17.7
Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
For the method how to monitor input/output signals and buffer memory of intelligent function
modules, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
17.8
Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
This section explains how to start/stop monitoring all open windows.
Operating procedure
• Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring
(All Windows)].
17 - 26
17.9 Using Realtime Monitor Function
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
*1 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
This section explains how to start the Realtime Monitor function of GX LogViewer from GX Works2.
To use this function, install GX LogViewer in advance.
For the operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX LogViewer Version 1 Operating Manual
Screen display
[Tool]  [Real-time Monitor Function]
MONITORING
17
Using Realtime Monitor Function
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
17.9
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
● Supported version of GX LogViewer
To use this function, GX LogViewer Version 1.40S or later is required.
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
17 - 27
17 MONITORING
MEMO
17 - 28
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
MONITORING
17
This chapter explains how to debug programs offline using the simulation function.
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
Starting/Stopping Simulation
18 - 4
18.3
Checking unsupported instructions/devices
18 - 9
21
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
18.2
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
18 - 2
A
APPENDIX
Simulation Function
I
INDEX
18.1
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
18 - 1
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.1
Simulation Function
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to debug a sequence program offline using the virtual programmable
controller, without connecting to the programmable controller CPU.
This function is useful to test programs before operating them actually on the programmable
controller CPU.
For the considerations and restrictions on the simulation function, refer to Appendix 2.
18.1.1
Safety and handling considerations of the simulation
function
The following explains the considerations of safety and handling of the simulation function.
1)
The simulation function simulates the actual programmable controller CPU to debug a
sequence program. However, this function does not guarantee the operation of the
debugged sequence program.
2)
The simulation function uses the memory for simulation to input and output data to/from
the I/O module and intelligent function module. Some instructions/functions and device
memory are not supported. Therefore, the operation results obtained with the virtual
programmable controller may differ from those obtained using the actual programmable
controller CPU.
After debugging programs using the simulation function, those programs must be debugged online before operating them
actually on the programmable controller CPU.
18.1.2
Functions available for simulation function
The following table shows the GX Works2 functions that are available for the simulation function.
Function
Write to PLC
18 - 2
Description
Write parameter files and program files to the virtual programmable
controller.
Reference
Section 15.1
Online program change*1,*2
Write programs to a virtual programmable controller in RUN status.
Section 15.9
Verify with PLC
Verify data in the virtual programmable controller against project data.
Section 15.2
Delete PLC Data
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, delete data in the virtual programmable
controller.
Section 15.3
Monitor
Monitor the status of operation processing.
Section 17.2
Monitor status
Display the monitoring status of the virtual programmable controller.
Section 17.1.2
Device memory/Buffer memory
batch monitor
Batch-monitor the device memory/buffer memory of the virtual
programmable controller.
Section 17.3
Program list monitor
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, monitor the processing time of programs being
executed on the virtual programmable controller.
Section 17.4
Entry Ladder Monitor
Register ladder blocks on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen, and monitor
them.
Watch
Register and monitors data such as virtual programmable controller devices.
18.1.1 Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function
(Simple)
Section 17.6
18.1 Simulation Function
Local Device Batch Read +
Save CSV
Read local device data and save them on a personal computer.
Section 15.12
Device memory backup in
simulation
Save and read device memory/buffer memory of the virtual programmable
controller.
Section 18.2.1
Section 18.2.2
Modify value
Modify the current value of the virtual programmable controller.
Section 19.1
Forced input output registration/ For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register/cancel the forced input/output of X/Y
cancellation
devices of the virtual programmable controller.
Section 19.2
Device Test with Execution
Condition
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register devices of the virtual programmable
controller to the device test with execution condition.
Section 19.3
Sampling trace
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, trace the device value of the virtual
programmable controller.
Section 19.4
Step Execution*3
Debug the program by executing it partially.
Section 19.6
Remote Operation
Switch the execution status of the virtual programmable controller, such as
STOP and PAUSE.
Section 20.1
PLC Memory Operation
Perform memory format, memory clear, memory arrangement for the virtual
programmable controller.
Section 20.3
Section 20.4
Section 20.5
PLC Diagnostics
Check the virtual programmable controller status and errors.
Section 21.1
I/O System Setting
Simulate operations of external devices using the virtual programmable
controller.
Chapter 22
The simulation function is not supported by FXCPU.
Online program change of SFC blocks is not supported.
Not supported by FXCPU.
18
19
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
APPENDIX
A
I
INDEX
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
17
MONITORING
Reference
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Description
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
Function
18.1.2 Functions available for simulation function
18 - 3
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.2
Starting/Stopping Simulation
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
This section explains how to start/stop simulation.
Operating procedure
• Select [Debug]  [Start/Stop Simulation] (
).
The GX Simulator2 screen is displayed, and the simulation starts.
To end the simulation function, select [Debug]  [Start/Stop Simulation] again.
<Simulating a single project>
QCPU(Q mode)/LCPU
FXCPU
<Simulating multiple projects>
Display contents
Item
Switch
Description
Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.
RESET*1
STOP
Select this to switch the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.
RUN
Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.
For details of the LED, refer to the following manuals.
LED
*1 :
18 - 4
● For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) of each CPU module
● For FXCPU
User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each FXCPU
HARDWARE MANUAL of each FXCPU
For the operating status error, the icon on the upper left corner of the screen is displayed in red.
Not supported by FXCPU.
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
17
Screen button
/
Switches between display/hide of the project name during the simulation.
MONITORING
●
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
18
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
21
22
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
● Simulations of multiple projects
The maximum of 4 projects can be simulated simultaneously by starting the simulation of other project during the
simulation.
● Simulation of FXCPU
For FXCPU, more than one project cannot be simulated simultaneously.
● Considerations when changing project names
If a project name is changed during the simulation, the project name on the GX Simulator2 screen is not changed. To
display the changed project name on the GX Simulator2 screen, exit the simulation, and then start the simulation again.
● Minimized display at start up of simulation
By setting the option, the GX Simulator2 screen can be started up in minimized mode when the simulation is activated.
To start up the GX Simulator2 screen in minimized mode, select "Start in minimized status" from [Options] on the GX
Simulator2 screen. From the next start up, the GX Simulator2 screen is not displayed but becomes in taskbar icon
mode.
● Stopping the simulation
The simulation function may not be stopped by the GX Works2 simulation stop operation when another application
such as MX Component is being connected to GX Simulator2. (GX Works2 is disconnected from GX Simulator2.)
The simulation function stops when another application is disconnected.
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
18 - 5
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.2.1
Saving device memory/buffer memory
Save device memory/buffer memory of the virtual programmable controller temporarily.
Operating procedure
1. Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP.
2. Select [Tool]  [Backup Device Memory in Simulation]  [Save] on the GX
Simulator2 screen.
● Saving device memory/buffer memory when stopping simulation
By setting the option, device memory/buffer memory in the virtual programmable controller can be saved when the
simulation is stopped.
To save device memory/buffer memory when the virtual programmable controller is stopped, select "Save device
memory at stop" from [Options] on the GX Simulator2 screen.
18.2.2
Reading device memory/buffer memory
Read out the temporarily saved device memory/buffer memory to the virtual programmable controller.
Operating procedure
1. Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP.
2. Select [Tool]  [Backup Device Memory in Simulation]  [Read] on the GX
Simulator2 screen.
18 - 6
18.2.1 Saving device memory/buffer memory
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read
This section explains device memory/buffer memory that can be saved and read with the virtual
programmable controller.
■
17
MONITORING
18.2.3
Device memory that can be saved/read
18
The following table shows the list of device memory that can be saved/read.
Category
Type
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
● QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Device
X (DX)
19
Y (DY)
M
L
Bit
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
F
V
S
B
20
SB
Internal user device
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
T (contact)
ST (contact)
C (contact)
T (current value)
ST (current value)
C (current value)
21
D (including Extended D)
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS
Word
W (including Extended W)
SW
FX
Bit
SM
Word
Index register
Word
File register
Word
22
FD
SD
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Internal system device
FY
Z (including ZZ)
R
ZR
APPENDIX
A
INDEX
I
18.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read
18 - 7
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
● FXCPU
Category
Type
Device
X
Y
Bit
M
S
T (contact)
Device
C (contact)*1
T (current value)
Word
C (current value)*1
Bit
M (special M)
Word
D (special D)
D
Special device
Index register
Word
Extended register
Word
*1 :
*2 :
High-speed counters (C235 and later) are not supported.
Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
■
Buffer memory that can be saved/read
V
Z
R*2
Buffer memory that can be saved and read is an memory area of modules to which the I/O assignment
settings are configured in the PLC parameter.
For QCPU (Q mode), the buffer memory [U3E0 to U3E3\G0 to 4095] and the multiple CPU high-speed
transfer area [U3E0 to U3E3\G10000 to 65535] on the programmable controller CPU cannot be saved/
read.
For LCPU/FXCPU, all buffer memory can be saved/read.
18 - 8
18.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read
18.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices
17
Checking unsupported instructions/devices
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote
Head
FX
FX
The following explains how to display a list of instructions and devices used in a program and not
supported by the simulation function.
MONITORING
18.3
18
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [Debug]  [Instructions Unsupported by Simulation].
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS
19
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
20
● Display of unsupported instructions
Unsupported instructions are not">